(1)
Ļ¯ೇಷ ªಾಜÍ ಪĦÎೆ
MANGALURU CITY CORPORATION
NOTIFICATION
(No: NaAE 54 MMC 2023(E) Bengaluru date: 05-02-2025)
In exercise of powers conferred under section 295 and 423 of The Karnataka Municipal Corporation
Act 1976, The Mangaluru City Corporation makes the draft Building bye-laws and same was sent to
government for approval. The Government of Karnataka in exercise of powers conferred under a
section 425 of KMC act 1976 has approved the Mangaluru City Corporation Building bye-laws 2025
(Draft) vide Notification No: NaAE 54 MMC 2023(E) Bengaluru date: 05-02-2025
Further, the draft building bye-laws have been published in the state gazette and local
newspapers and a copy of the same is kept at the Corporation Office for public inspection for a
period of 30 days under section 426 of KMC act 1976 and all persons are permitted to peruse the
same during the office hours free of charge. And printed copies of the draft building bye-laws are
available on payment of 600/- rupees to Corporation Office. The draft Building bye-laws is also
available in website www.mangalurucity.mrc.gov.in .
( Ravichandra Naik, K.A.S )
Commissioner
Mangaluru City Corporation
¨sÁUÀ – 6 J
Part –VI A
14
2025
23
1946)
MYSURU, FRIDAY, 14, MARCH, 2025
PHALGUNA , 23, SHAKAVARSHA, 1946)
. 01
No. 01
2
DRAFT MANGALURU CITY CORPORATION BUILDING BYE-LAWS 2025
CHAPTER-1
1.
Title, commencement and application-
(1) These Byelaws may be called the Mangaluru City Corporation Building Bye-laws 2025
(2) They shall come into force three months after final publication in the official Gazette.
(3) All mandatory Master Plan or Zonal Regulations regarding use, land use, coverage, FAR, setback or
open space, height, number of stories, number of dwelling units, parking standards etc. for various
categories of buildings including modification therein made from time to time shall be applicable mutatis
mutandis in these Byelaws under this clause. All amendments or modifications made in the aforesaid
regulations shall automatically stand deemed to have been included as part of these Byelaws.
CHAPTER-2
2.
Definitions
1)
‘Access’ – means a clear approach to a plot or a building.
2)
‘Act’- means the Karnataka Municipal Corporations Act, 1976.
3)
‘Addition and/or Alteration’- means a structural change including an addition to the area or change
in height or the removal of part of building, or any change to the structure, such as the construction
or removal or cutting of any wall or part of a wall, partition, column, beam, joist, floor including a
mezzanine floor or other support, or a change to or closing of any required means of access ingress or
egress or a change to fixtures or equipment as provided in these Byelaws.
4)
‘Agriculture’ includes horticulture, farming, growing of crops, fruits, vegetables, flowers, grass, fodder,
trees of any kind or any kind of cultivation of soil, breeding and keeping of livestock including cattle,
horses, donkeys, mules, pigs, fish, poultry and bees, the use of land which is ancillary to the farming
of land or any purpose aforesaid but shall not include the use of any land attached to a building for
the purpose of garden to be used along with such building; and ‘agriculture’ shall be construed
accordingly.
5)
‘Air-conditioning’- The process of treating air so as to control simultaneously its temperature,
humidity, purity, distribution and air movement and pressure to meet the requirements of the
conditioned space.
6)
Amalgamation’ means clubbing of two or more building sites into one.
7)
‘Amenity’ as defined in the KUDA Act.
3
8)
‘Annexure’ means the Annexure appended to these Byelaws;
9)
‘‘Apartment’ Whether called block, chamber, dwelling unit, flat, suit, tenement, unit or by any other
name, means a separate and self-contained part of any immovable property, including one or more
rooms or enclosed spaces, located on one or more floors or any part thereof, in a building or on a plot
of land, used or intended to be used for residential purpose.
10)
Group Housing means one or more buildings, each containing more than Eight Apartments
11)
‘Appendix’ means Appendix appended to these Byelaws.
12)
‘Application’ means an application made in such form as may be prescribed herein or as notified by
the Government from time to time
13)
‘Applicant’ means any person who applies to the Local Authority with an intention to develop building
as per these Byelaws. The Applicant shall be the owner of the property or his authorised representative
or a promoter authorised by the owner.
14)
‘Approved’ means as approved/sanctioned by the Authority under applicable Byelaws
15)
‘Architect’- means a person registered as an architect under the provisions of the Architects Act, 1972
(20 of 1972)
16)
‘Auditorium’ means Premises having an enclosed space to seat audience and stage for various
performances such as concerts, plays, music etc.
17)
‘Authority’- means Mangaluru City Corporation and which, for the purpose of administering /
undertaking the various functions specified in these Byelaws, may authorize the Commissioner or any
other designated officer of Local Body to act on its behalf; hereinafter called the ‘Authority’.
18)
‘Balcony’ means a horizontal projection with a handrail or balustrade, to serve as passage or sit out
place.
19)
‘Basement storey or cellar’ means any storey, which is partly / wholly below the average ground level
contiguous to the building, with one or more than one level. The basement height should not project
more than 1.2m above the average ground level.
20)
‘Bifurcation’ means sub-division of a building site into two.
21)
‘Building’- means a structure constructed with any materials whatsoever for any purpose, whether
used for human habitation or not, and includes: -
i. a house, out-house, stable, privy, shed, hut, wall, verandah, fixed platform, plinth, doorstep and any
other such structure, whether of masonry, bricks, wood, mud, metal or any other material whatsoever;
ii. a structure on wheels simply resting in the ground without foundation;
iii. a ship, vessel, boat, tent and any other structure used for human habitation or used for keeping or storing
any article or goods
iv. Foundation, plinth, walls, floors, roofs, chimneys, plumbing and building services, fixed platforms etc.
v. Verandahs, balconies, cornices, projections etc.
vi. Parts of a building or anything affixed thereto
4
vii. Any wall enclosing or intended to enclose any land or space, sign and outdoor display structures; etc.,
viii. Tanks constructed or fixed for storage of chemicals or chemicals in liquid form and for storage of water,
effluent, swimming pool, ponds etc.,
ix. All types of buildings as defined in (a) to (k) below, except tents, shamianas and tarpaulin shelters erected
temporarily for temporary purposes and ceremonial occasions, shall be considered to be ‘building’.
Types of Buildings based on use of premises or activity:
a)
‘Residential Building’- includes a building in which sleeping and living accommodation is provided for
normal residential purposes, with cooking facilities and includes one or more family dwellings,
apartments/flats, and private garages of such buildings.
b)
Educational Building’- Includes a building exclusively used for a school or college, recognized by the
appropriate Board or University, or any other Competent Authority involving assembly for instruction,
education or recreation incidental to educational use, and including a building for such other uses as
research institution. It shall also include quarters for essential staff required to reside in the premises,
and building used as a hostel captive to an educational institution whether situated in its campus or
outside.
c)
‘Institutional Building’- Includes a building constructed by Government, Semi Government
Organizations or Registered Trusts and used for medical or other treatment, or for an auditorium or
complex for cultural and allied activities or for an hospice, care of persons suffering from physical or
mental illness, handicap, disease or infirmity, care of orphans, abandoned women, children and infants,
convalescents, destitute or aged persons and for penal or correctional detention with restricted liberty of
the inmates ordinarily providing sleeping accommodation and includes Dharamshalas, hospitals,
sanatoria, custodial and penal institutions such as jails, prisons, mental hospitals, houses of correction,
detention and reformatories etc.
d)
Assembly Building’- means a building or part thereof, where groups of people (not <50) congregate or
gather for amusement, recreation, social, religious, patriotic, civil, travel and similar purposes and this
includes buildings of drama and cinemas theatres, drive-in theatres, assembly halls, city halls, town
halls, auditoria, exhibition halls, museums, kalyana mantapas, ‘mangal karyalayas’, skating rinks,
gymnasia, restaurants, eating or boarding houses, places of worship, dance halls, clubs, gymkhanas and
road, railways, air, sea or other public transportation stations and recreation piers.
e)
‘Business Building’- Includes any building or part thereof used principally for transaction of business
and/or keeping of accounts and records including offices, banks, professional establishments, court
houses etc., if their principal function is transaction of business and/or keeping of books and records.
f)
Commercial/Mercantile Building’- Includes a building or part thereof used as shops, stores or markets
for display and sale of wholesale and or retail goods or merchandise, including office, storage and service
facilities incidental thereto and located in the same building
g)
‘Industrial Building’- Includes a building or part thereof wherein products or material are fabricated,
assembled or processed, such as assembly plants, laboratories, power plants, refineries, gas plants, mills,
dairies and factories etc.
h) ‘Storage Building’- means a building or part thereof used primarily for storage or shelter of goods, wares,
merchandise and includes a building used as a warehouse, cold storage, freight depot, transit shed, store
house, public garage, hanger, truck terminal, grain elevator, barn and stables.
i)
‘Hazardous Building’- Includes a building or part thereof used for storage, handling, and manufacture
of processing of radioactive substances or highly combustible or explosive materials or of products which
5
are liable to burn with extreme rapidity and/or producing poisonous fumes or explosive emanations. And
storage, handling, manufacture or processing of which involves highly corrosive, toxic or noxious alkalis,
acids, or other liquids, gases or chemicals producing flame, fumes and explosive mixtures etc. or which
result in division of matter into fine particles capable of spontaneous ignition.
j)
‘Mixed Land Use Building’- means a building partly used for non-residential activities and partly for
residential purpose.
k)
‘Wholesale Establishment’- means an establishment wholly or partly engaged in wholesale trade and
manufacture, wholesale outlets, including related storage facilities, warehouses and establishments
engaged in truck transport, including truck transport booking agencies.
Types of building based on design:
a)
‘Detached Building’- means a building with walls and roofs independent of any other building and with
open spaces on all sides within the same plot
b)
‘Semi-detached Building’- means two buildings, together having not more than 4 dwelling units with a
maximum of G+1 floor, attached to each other with a common wall and each building having setbacks
only on three sides.
c)
‘Row Housing’ – means two or more dwelling units with a maximum of G+1 floor, in a row attached to
each other, where the intermediate dwelling units have only front and rear setbacks and the dwelling
units on the extreme ends have setbacks on three sides.
Types of building based on height:
a)
B1- means residential buildings of G+1 floors up to 4 dwelling units
b)
B2- means all buildings up to G+2 floors other than B1 buildings and Industrial buildings
c)
B3- means all low-rise buildings other than B1 & B2 buildings and Industrial buildings.
d)
B4- means all high-rise buildings (multi storey buildings) other than Industrial buildings.
e)
B5- means all Industrial buildings
Types of building based on other features:
a)
‘Multi-Level Car parking’- means a building partly below ground level having two or more basements
or above ground level with two or more floors, primarily to be used for parking of cars, scooters or
any other type of light motorized vehicle.
b)
. ‘Unsafe Building’- Includes a building which:
i.
Is structurally unsafe, or
ii.
Is insanitary, or
iii.
Is not provided with adequate means of ingress or egress or
iv.
Constitutes a fire hazard or
v.
Is dangerous to human life or
6
vi.
In relation to its existing use, constitutes a hazard to safety or health or public welfare by
maintenance, dilapidation or abandonment.
Note: All unsafe buildings /structure will require be restoring by repairs, demolition or dealing with as
directed by the Local Authority. The relevant provisions of the Act shall apply for procedure to be
followed by the Local Authority in taking action against such buildings
22) ‘Building line’ means the line upto which the plinth of building may lawfully extend within the plot on a
street or an extension of a street and includes the line prescribed, if any in the Master Plan or Town
Planning scheme. No portion of the building may extend beyond this line. (Except as specified in ZR)
23) ‘Building Site’ means a site held for building purposes, approved as per Section 17 of KTCP Act.
24) ‘Bus Depot’ means a premise used by public transport agency or any other agency for parking,
maintenance and repair of buses. These may include the workshop.
25) ‘Bus Terminal’ means a premise used by public transport agency to park the buses for short duration
to serve the public. It may include the related facilities for passengers.
26) ‘Canopy’- shall mean a cantilevered projection from the face of the wall over an entry to the building at
the lintel or slab level provided that:
i.
It shall not project beyond the plot line.
ii.
It shall not be lower than 2.3 m. or 7’- 6’ when measured from the ground.
iii.
There shall be no structure on it and the top shall remain open to sky
27) ‘Carpet Area’ means the net usable floor area of an apartment or commercial premises, excluding the
area covered by the external walls, areas under services shafts, exclusive balcony or verandah area and
exclusive open terrace area, but includes the area covered by the internal partition walls of the
apartment/ commercial premises.
28) ‘Chajja’ means a continuous sloping or horizontal cantilever projection provided over an opening or
external wall to provide protection from sun and rain.
29) ‘Chimney’ means a structure usually vertical containing a passage or flue by which the smoke, gas, etc.
of a fire or furnace are carried off by means of which a draught is created.
30) ‘Common Wall’ means a wall built on land belonging to adjoining owners, the wall being the joint
property of both owners.
a)
If two adjoining owners build a dividing wall on their property, they are not common walls
and no part of the footings of either wall shall project on to the land of the adjoining owner,
except by legal agreement between the owners. And
b)
Any such ‘common’ or ‘dividing’ wall shall be considered for the purpose of these Byelaws,
as being equivalent to an external wall as far as the thickness and height are concerned.
31) ‘Community Hall’ means congregational place to be developed by government or local bodies, trust,
society, having a hall without separate kitchen and dining.
32) ‘Competent Authority’ means any state of central government authority which has jurisdiction /
authority over the areas / activities specified in the Building Byelaws, whose Rules, Regulations, Terms
and Conditions shall prevail over the Building Byelaws, wherever applicable
7
33) ‘Construction’ means; Any erection of a structure or a building, including any addition or extension
thereto either vertically or horizontally, but does not include any repair and renovation of an existing
structure or building, or, construction, maintenance and cleansing of drains and drainage works and of
public latrines, urinals and similar conveniences, or, the construction and maintenance of works meant
for providing supply of water for public, or, the construction or maintenance, extension, management for
supply and distribution of electricity to the public; or provision for similar facilities for publicity.
34) Contractor’ means the agency executing the works of any of the components of the building or land, on
behalf of the owner / Promoter, who is required to be registered under these Byelaws.
35) ‘Conversion of Occupancy’- means the change from one occupancy to other occupancy or any change
in building structure or part thereof resulting in a change of space and use requiring additional occupancy
certificate should comply with the provisions of section 14 and 14-A of the KTCP Act and after obtaining
permission under section 301 of KMC Act,1976”
36) ‘Corner Plot’ means a Building site facing two or more intersecting streets/roads.
37) ‘Corridor’ means a common passage or circulation space connecting separate rooms or different parts of
the same building including a common entrance hall.
38) ‘Cornice’- means a sloping or horizontal structural overhang usually provided over openings or external
walls to provide protection from sun and rain.
39) ‘Courtyard’ means a space permanently open to sky, enclosed fully or partially by buildings and maybe
at ground level or any other level either in the interior or exterior of a building within the site.
40) ‘Cultural buildings’ means a building built by a Trust, Society, Government or Local body for cultural
activities.
41) ‘Damp Proof Course’- means a course consisting of some appropriate water proofing material provided
to prevent penetration of dampness or moisture.
42) ‘Density of Households’ means number of dwelling units per hectare
43) ‘Density of Population’ means concentration of population expressed in terms of number of persons per
hectare in a particular area.
44) ‘Development’ with its grammatical variations means the carrying out of building, engineering, mining
or other operations in, or over or under land or water, or the making of any material change in any
building or land (including compound wall) or in the use of any building or land and includes sub-division
of any land.
45) DR/T.D.R.’ – means Development Rights or Transfer of Development Rights available for plots as
prescribed under Section 14B of KTCP Act and the Rules framed thereof.
46) ‘Drains’ as defined in KMC Act,1976.
47) ‘Drainage system’ – means a system or a line of pipes, with their fittings and accessories, such as
manholes, inspection chambers, traps, gullies, floor traps used for drainage of building or yards
appurtenant to the buildings within the same cartilage for conveying surface water or a system for the
removal of any waste water.
48) ‘Duplex’ means a dwelling unit in two levels connected with an internal staircase.
8
49) ‘Dwelling’- means a building or a portion thereof which is designed or used wholly or principally for
residential purposes for one family.
50) ‘Encroachment’- means an act to enter into the possession or rights either of permanent or temporary
nature on a land or built-up area of a private property or local body or state/central Government.
51) ‘Existing development’ means all developments (including buildings) which existed before coming into
force of the Karnataka Municipal Corporations Act 1976, and all approved developments thereafter
(including building) and which are completed or under development at the time of commencement of
these Byelaws.
52) ‘Existing development’ means all developments (including buildings) which existed before coming into
force of the Karnataka Municipal Corporations Act 1976, and all approved developments thereafter
(including building) and which are completed or under development at the time of commencement of
these Byelaws.
53) ‘Existing Use’- means use of a building or structure existing before the commencement of these Byelaws.
54) ‘Exit’ means a passage channel or means of egress from the building, its storey or floor to a street or,
other open space of safety; whether horizontal, outside and vertical exits meaning as under: -
i.
Horizontal exit means an exit, which is a protected opening through or around afire well or bridge
connecting two or more buildings.
ii.
Outside exit mean an exit from building to a public way to an open area leading to a public way or
to an enclosed fire-resistant passage leading to a public way, and
iii.
Vertical exit means an exit used for ascending or descending between two or more levels including
stairway, fire towers, ramps and fire escapes.
55) External Wall’ means the outer wall of the building not being a partition wall, even though an adjoining
wall of another building and also a wall abutting on an interior open space of any building.
External wall of an apartment or commercial premises means the outer wall of the apartment or
commercial premises, even though an adjoining wall of another apartment or commercial premises.
56) ‘First floor’ means the floor immediately above the ground floor or stilt, on which second and other floors
follow subsequently
57) ‘Flatted factory’ ‘means premises having Green and White industrial units, as specified by KSPCB and
these units may be located in multi-storeyed industrial buildings.
58) ‘Floor’ means the lower surface in a storey on which one normally walks in a building
59) ‘Floor Area’ means the area in each floor considered for calculating the FAR utilised in the building.
60) ‘Floor Area Ratio (FAR)’ means the quotient of the ratio of the combined gross floor area of all the floors,
excepting areas specifically, exempted under the Zonal Regulations, to the total area of the plot. Viz.
Floor
Area
Ratio =
Total floor area of all
the floors.
Plot Area
9
61)
‘Fire and/or Emergency Alarm System’- means Fire alarm system comprises of components for
manually or automatically detecting a fire, initiating an alarm of fire and initiating other actions as
appropriate.
62) ‘Fire Hazard Industries’-
i. ‘Low Fire Hazard Industries’ includes engineering industries using/processing or assembling non-
combustible materials i.e. lathe machines, steel works, steel components etc.
ii. Moderate Fire Hazard Industries includes industries using / processing combustible materials but not
flammable liquid etc., plastic industries, rubber, and PVC industries, textile, paper, furniture, flour
mills etc.
iii. ‘High Fire Hazard Industries’ includes industries using/processing flammable liquids, gases, chemicals
petroleum products, plastic or thermo setting group etc.
63) ‘Fire Lift’- Means a special lift designed for the use of fire service personnel in the event of fire or any
other emergency.
64) ‘Fire Proof Door’- Means a door or shutter fitted to a wall opening, and constructed and erected with the
requirement to check the transmission of heat and fire for a period.
65) ‘Fire Pump’- Means a machine, driven by external power for transmitting energy to fluids by coupling
the pump to a suitable engine or motor, which may have varying outputs/capacity but shall be capable
of having a pressure of 3.2 kg/ cm2 at the topmost level of multi-storey or high-rise building.
66) ‘Fire Pump-Booster Fire Pump’- Means a mechanical/electrical device that boots up the water pressure
at the top level of a multi-storey / high-rise building and which is capable of a pressure of 3.2 kg/cm2 at
the nearest point.
67) ‘Fire Resistance’-Fire resistance is a property of an element of building construction and is the measure
of its ability to satisfy for a stated period, some or all of the following criteria:
a) Load bearing capacity (Stability) The ability of a load bearing element to withstand fire exposure without
any loss of structural stability.
b) Integrity Resistance to penetration of flame and hot gases.
c) Insulation Resistance to temperature rise on the unexposed face up to a maximum of 180°C at any
single point and average temperature of 140°C.
68) ‘Fire Resistance Rating- The time that a material or construction will withstand the standard fire
exposure as determined by fire test done in accordance with the standard methods of fire tests of
materials/ structures as per the accepted standard as specified in Part IV of NBC.
69) ‘Fire Separation’- Means the distance in meters measured from any other building on the site or from
another site, or from the opposite side of a street or other public space to the building.
70) ‘Fire Brigade Inlet’- Means a connection provided at the base of a building for pumping up water through
in-built fire-fighting arrangements by fire service pumps in accordance; with the recommendation of the
Chief Fire Officer.
71) ‘Fire Tower’- Means an enclosed staircase that can only be approached from the various floors through
landings or lobbies separated from both the floor area and the staircase by fire resistant doors and open
to the outer air.
10
72) ‘Fire Resisting Building’- means a building in which material, which has, appropriate degree of fire
resistance is used.
73) Footing’- means a foundation unit constructed in stone masonry or concrete under the base of a wall or
column for the purpose of distributing the load over a larger area.
74) 'Form' means a Form appended these Byelaws.
75) ‘Foundation’ means that part of structure which is below the lowest floor and which provides support for
the superstructure and which transmits the load of the superstructure to the bearing strata.
76) ‘Frontage’ means the width of the site/land abutting the access/public road.
77) Gal1ery’- means an intermediate floor or platform projecting from a wall of an auditorium or a hall
providing extra floor area, and or additional seating accommodation and includes the structures provided
for seating in stadia.
78) ‘Garage-Private’- means a building or a portion thereof designed and used for the parking of vehicle.
79) ‘Garage-Public’ – means a building or portion thereof, designed other than as a private garage, operated
for gain, designed and/or used for repairing, servicing, using, selling or storing or parking motor driven
or other vehicles.
80) ‘Gas Go down’ means premises where LPG cylinders are stored.
81) Government’ means the Government of Karnataka.
82) ‘Ground Floor’ As defined in the Zonal Regulations.
83) ‘Ground Coverage’ means area covered by the building immediately above the ground level contiguous
to the building. Covered area does not include the space covered by ramps around the building, roof of
basement floor beyond the plinth of the building projecting above the ground level, structures for services
permitted in the setback area, garden, rocky area, well and well structures, plant, nursery, water pool,
swimming pool (if uncovered) platform around a tree, tank, fountain, bench with open top and unenclosed
sides by walls cut outs and ducts which are open to sky and the like drainage, culvert, conduit, catch-
pit, gully-pit, chamber gutter and the like, within the site, compound or boundary wall, gate, unstoreyed
porch and portico, Chejja, slide, swing, uncovered staircase, watchman booth, pump house and the like
within the site.
84) ‘Habitable Room’ means a room occupied or designed for occupancy by one or more persons for study,
living, sleeping, Eating, cooking but does not include bathrooms water closet compartments, laundries
serving and storage pantries, corridors, cellars, and spaces that are not used frequently or during
extended periods.
85) ‘Head room’ means the clear space between the finished floor level and ceiling/ beam bottom. Minimum
headroom shall be 2.4m.
86) ‘Heritage building’ Heritage Building" means a building possessing architectural, aesthetic, historic or
cultural values which is declared as heritage building by the Planning Authority or any other competent
authority within whose jurisdiction such building is situated
87) ‘Heritage Precinct’ means an area comprising heritage building or buildings and precincts thereof or
related places declared as such by the Planning Authority or any other Competent Authority within whose
jurisdiction such area is situated.
11
88) ‘High-rise Building’ means a building defined as High Rise Building in the Zonal Regulations of the
Master Plan of Mangaluru.
89) ‘Height of Building’ Building, Height of — The vertical distance measured, in the case of flat roofs from
the average level of the ground around and contiguous to the building or as decided by the Authority to
the terrace of last livable floor of the building adjacent to the external walls; and in the case of pitched
roofs, up to the point where the external surface of the outer wall intersects the finished surface of the
sloping roof, and in the case of gables facing the road, the midpoint between the eaves level and the ridge.
Architectural features serving no other function except that of decoration shall be excluded for the
purpose of measuring heights.
90) Hospital: means a premise providing medical facilities of general or specialized nature for treatment of
in-patient and out-patients.
91) Hotel: means Premises used for lodging with payment, with or without boarding facilities.
92) ‘Illuminated Exit Signs’- means a device for indicating the means of escape during normal
circumstances and power failure.
93) ‘Land use’ includes the purpose to which the site or part of the site or the building or part of the building
is in use or permitted to be used by the Authority. Land use includes Zoning of land use as stipulated in
the Master Plan and the Zonal Regulations.
94) ‘Licence’ means a valid permission or authorization in writing by the LocalAuthority to carryout
development of building or a work regulated by these Byelaws.
95) ‘Licensed Professional’’ means Qualified professionals who have been registered with the Local
Authority as per the Qualification and Competence as notified by the government.
96) ‘Lift’ means an appliance designed to transport persons or materials between two or more levels in a
vertical or substantially vertical direction by means of a guided car platform. The word ‘elevator’ is also
synonymously used for ‘lift’.
97) ‘Lobby’- means a covered space in which all the adjoining rooms open.
98) ‘Lodging House’ means a premise used for lodging on payment. This is synonymous to hotel
99) ‘Loft’ means a residual space above normal floor level which may be constructed or adopted for storage
purposes.
100)
‘Market value’ means the guideline value of the land notified under section 45B of the Karnataka
Stamp Act, 1957
101)
‘Master Plan’ means Master Plan prepared for the local planning area approved by the government
under the Karnataka Town and Country Planning Act, 1961. which is in force.
102) ‘Means of Escape’- means an escape route provided in a building for safe evacuation of occupants.
103) ‘Mezzanine Floor’ As specified in Zonal Regulations.
104) ‘Multilevel Car Parking (MLCP)’ means multilevel structure used for car parking connected to all
floors by means of ramps / mechanical elevators. MLCP can be an independent structure or part of a
building with other land uses. However, in the portion used for parking, no other land uses shall be
permitted.
12
105) ‘Multiplex complex’ means a building accommodating more than one auditorium and an
entertainment and cultural centre including food courts, restaurant, shops;
Explanation. - In case of Multiplex Complex, the portion of the permanent building used for the
purpose of Cinema theatres, auditorium including the areas for all ancillary uses such as projector
room, toilets, entrance/exit lobbies/corridors, food kiosks/cafes/ canteens attached to the theatre,
ticket counters shall only be considered;
106) ‘MCB/ELCB’ means Devices for tripping of electrical circuits in event of any fault in the circuit or
installation.
107) ‘Non-Combustible Material’- means a material which is not liable to burn or add heat to a fire when
tested for combustibility in accordance with the latest code of Bureau of Indian Standards Method of
Test for combustibility of Building Materials.
108) Nursing home means A premises having medical facility for in-patients and out patients, having up to
30 beds, it shall be managed by a doctor or a group of doctors.
109) ‘Occupancy or use’-means the principal occupancy or use for which a building or a part of a building
is intended to be used. For the purposes of classification of a building according to occupancy,
occupancy shall be deemed to include the subsidiary occupancies which are contingent upon it.
‘Mixed occupancy’ buildings being those in which more than one occupancy is present in different
portions of the buildings.
110) ‘Open space in a plot’ means an area forming an integral part of the plot, left open to sky.
111) ‘Owner’ A person, a group of persons or a body having a legal interest in land and/or building thereon.
112) ‘Parapet’ means a low wall or railing built along the edge of a roof or a balcony.
113) ‘Parking space’ means an area enclosed or unenclosed, covered or open sufficient in size to park
vehicles together with a drive-way connecting the parking space with a public street or any public area
and permitting the ingress and egress of the vehicles.
114) ‘Partition’ means an interior non-load bearing barrier, one storey or part-storey in height.
115) ‘Partition Wall’ includes (i)A wall forming part of a building and being used or constructed to be used
in any part of the height or length of such wall for separation of adjoining buildings belonging to
different owners or constructed or adopted to be occupied by different persons; or ii) A wall forming
part of a building and standing in any part of the length of such wall, to a greater extent than the
projection of the footing on one side or ground of different owners.
116) ‘Plinth’ means the portion of a structure between the surface of the surrounding ground and surface
of the floor immediately above the ground.
117) ‘Plinth Area’ means the built-up covered area of the building/ buildings immediately above plinth
level.
118) ‘Plinth Level’ means the level of the floor of a building immediately above the surrounding ground.
119) ‘Plot’ means as defined under section 17 of KTCP Act.
120) ‘Porch or Portico’ means a roof cover supported on pillars or cantilevered projection for the purpose
of pedestrian or vehicular approach to a building without any structure above.
13
121) ‘Premium F.A.R. shall be as defined in the Karnataka Town and Country Planning Act 1961 or the
notified Rules.
122) ‘Premises’ in a building means any portion of the building used for specific use other than the common
areas of the building and includes dwelling units.
123) ‘Professional on record’- means an Architect/Competent Professional who is brought on record to
represent his/her client for a construction project, to act on their behalf regarding Building Licences
and process of construction.
124) ‘Prohibited area’ means any area specified or declared to be a prohibited area under section 20A of
the Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains Act, 1958 (Central Act 24 of 1958).
125)
‘Promoter’ means –
a)
A person who constructs or causes to be constructed an independent building or a building consisting
of Apartments, or converts an existing building or a part thereof into Apartments, for the purpose of
selling all or some of the Apartments to other persons and includes his assignees; or
b)
A person who develops land into a project, whether or not the person also constructs structures on
any of the plots, for the purpose of selling to other persons all or some of the plots in the said project,
whether with or without structures thereon; or
c)
Any development Authority or any other public body in respect of Allottees of –
i.
Buildings or Apartments, as the case may be, constructed by such Authority or body on lands
owned by them or placed at their disposal by the Government; or
ii.
plots owned by such Authority or body or placed at their disposal by the Government; for the
purpose of selling all or some of the Apartments or plots, or
d)
An Apex State level co-operative housing finance society and a primary co-operative housing society
which constructs Apartments or buildings for its members or in respect of the Allottees of such
Apartments or buildings; or
e)
Any other persons who acts himself as a builder, coloniser, contractor, developer, estate developer or
by any other name or claims to be acting as the holder of a power of attorney from the owner of the
land on which the building or apartment is constructed or plot is developed for sale; or
f)
such other person who constructs any building or apartment for sale to the general public
Explanation – For the purpose of this clause, where the person who constructs or converts a building into
apartments or develops a plot for sale and the persons who sells apartments or plots are different persons, both
of them shall be deemed to be the promoters and shall be jointly liable as such for the functions and
responsibilities specified, under RERA Act or the rules and regulations made there under;
For the purpose of this clause, Apartment, whether called block, chamber, dwelling unit, flat, office, showroom,
shop, go down, premises, suit, tenement, unit or by any other name, means a separate and self-contained part
or an immovable property, including one or more rooms or enclosed spaces, located on one or more floors or any
part thereof, in a building or on a plot of land, used or intended to be used for any residential or commercial
use such as residence, office, shop, showroom or go down or for carrying on any business, occupation,
profession or trade or for any other type of use ancillary to the purpose specified;
This is synonymous to Developer.
14
126) ‘Protected monument’ means an ancient monument which is declared to be of national importance
by or under the Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains Act, 1958 (Central Act 24
of 1958).
127) ‘Public and semi-public building’ means a building which is for Public and Semi-Public uses specified
as per the Zonal Regulations.
128) ‘Pump room’ means the room provided below ground level adjacent to the sump tank to house various
types of pumps with self-priming mechanism. However, the entrance shaft of the pump room of
maximum 2 m x 2 m may be permitted above the ground level.
129) Recreational Club’ means a premise used for assembly of a group of persons for social and recreational
purposes with all related facilities.
130) ‘Regulated area’ means any area specified or declared under section 20B under the Ancient
Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains Act, 1958 (Central Act 24 of 1958).
131) ‘Repair Shop’ means a premise similar to retail shop for carrying out repair of house hold goods,
electronic gadgets, automobiles, cycles etc.,
132) ‘Restaurant’ means a premise used for serving food items on commercial basis including cooking
facilities, with covered or open space or both having seating facilities.
133) ‘Retail Shop’ means a premise for sale of commodities directly to the consumer with necessary storage.
134) ‘Retention Activity’ means an activity or use which is allowed to continue, notwithstanding its non-
conforming nature in relation to the use permitted in the adjoining or surrounding area.
135) ‘Road/Street’ shall be as defined in KMC Act 1976.
a)
The roadway over any public bridge or causeway;
b)
The footway attached to any such street, public bridge or causeway; and
c)
The drains attached to any such street, public bridge or causeway and the land, whether covered or
not by any pavement verandah or other structure which lies on either side of the roadway up to the
boundaries of the adjacent property, whether that property is private property or property belonging
to the Government or the Corporation.
136)
‘Road/Street Level or Grade’ shall be as defined in the Zonal regulations.
137) ‘Road/Street Line’ means the line defining the side limits of a road/street, where existing road width
is considered and the road widening line where proposed road width is considered.
138) ‘Road Width or Width of Road/Street’ means the right of way/distance between the boundaries of
the property on either side of the road including, carriageway, footways, service road at same level or
at different level and storm water drains as laid down in the city survey or Master Plan or the prescribed
road lines by any act of law and measured at right angles to the course or intended course of direction
of such road. In case of sides facing a T-junction or at the intersection of multiple roads, the width of
the road parallel to the side of the plot shall be considered.
139) ‘Room Height’ means the vertical distance measured from the finished floor surface to the finished
ceiling surface. Where a finished ceiling is not provided, the underside of the joists or beams or tie
beams shall determine the upper point of measurement.
15
140) ‘Service Apartments’ means fully furnished room or suite or rooms with kitchen, which is intended
to be used on rental basis.
141) ‘Service Road’ means a road / lane provided adjacent to a plot for access or service purposes as the
case may be and shall be parallel to the main road and may or may not be at grade with the main road
and shall be partly or fully falling within the proposed road width of the main road.
142) ‘Setback’ means the distance prescribed under the Zonal Regulations of the Master Plan of Mangaluru,
between the plot boundary and the plinth of the building or the covered Cantilever projection of the
building in any floor. If cantilever projection of the building is proposed, the prescribed setback shall
be provided between the plot boundary and such covered cantilever projection.
143) ‘Set-back Line’ means a line drawn at the setback distance, parallel to the plot boundaries or road
widening line as prescribed in the Master Plan / Zonal Regulations beyond which nothing can be
constructed towards the plot boundaries in any floor except as prescribed in the Zonal Regulations.
144) ‘Site Plan’ means a detailed Plan showing the proposed placement of structures, parking areas, open
space, landscaping, and other development features, on the plot as required by specific sections of
these Byelaws.
145) ‘Solar Assisted Water Heating System’ means a device to heat water using solar energy as heat
source.
146) ‘Spiral Staircase’ means a staircase forming continuous winding curve round a central point or axis
provided in an open space having tread without risers.
147) ‘Staircase room’ means a room accommodating the stair and for purpose of providing protection from
weather and not used for human habitation.
148)
‘Stair Cover’ means a structure with a covering roof over a staircase and its landing built to enclose
only the stairs for the purpose of providing protection from weather and not used for human habitation.
149) ‘Stilt floor’ As specified in Zonal Regulations.
150) ‘Storey’ means the space between the surface of one floor and the surface of the other floor vertically
above or below. The minimum floor to floor height shall not be less than 2.9m.
151)
‘To Erect’- in relation to a building means:
a)
To erect a new building on any plot whether previously built upon or not;
b)
To re-erect any building of which portions above the plinth level have been pulled down, burnt or
dismantled.
152) ‘TPO’ means an officer on deputation from the Department of Town and Country Planning.
153) ‘Un-authorised Development’- means the erection or re-erection, addition or alternations which is
not approved or sanctioned by the Competent Authority or as prescribed by the Government.
154) ‘Underground/Overhead Tank’ means an installation constructed or placed for storage of water.
155) ‘Utility Area’ means a covered area with at least one side open to the outside with the exception of 1m
high parapet on the upper floors to be provided on the open side.
156) ‘Ventilation’- means Supply of outside air into, or the removal of inside air from an enclosed space.
16
a) Natural Ventilation – means Supply of outside air into a building through window or other openings
due to wind outside and convection effects arising from temperature or vapor pressure differences (or
both) between inside and outside of the building.
b) Positive Ventilation – means the supply of outside air by means of a mechanical device, such as a fan,
c) Mechanical Ventilation – means supply of outside air either by positive ventilation or by infiltration by
reduction of pressure inside due to exhaust of air, or by a combination of positive ventilation and exhaust
of air.
157) ‘Water Closet (W.C)’- means water flushed plumbing fixture designed to receive human excrement
directly from the user of the fixture. The term is used sometimes to designate the room or compartment
in which the fixture is placed.
158) ‘Window’- means an opening to the outside other than a door, which provides all or part of the required
natural light or ventilation or both to an interior space and not used as a means of egress/ingress.
159)
‘Zonal Regulations’ means the regulations of the Master Plan governing land use and developments.
Words and expressions used in these bye laws but not defined shall have the same meaning as defined
in KTCP Act & KMC Act
CHAPTER -3
3.
JURISDICTION, APPLICABILITY AND PROCEDURAL REQUIREMENTS FOR OBTAINING BUILDING
LICENCE
3.1 Jurisdiction of Building Byelaws
These Building Byelaws shall apply to the building activity within Mangaluru City Corporation
3.2 Applicability of Building Byelaws
These building byelaws shall be applicable to all building activities under taken by private or Government
agencies and read in conjunction with the Master plan /Metropolitan development plan or any other statutory
plan in force, if any, and notifications, if any, with regard to the same and as amended from time to time and
these building bye-laws may be reviewed after five years. Till such time the reviewed building bye laws are
notified, these building bye laws will continue to be in force.
Notwithstanding any of the terms and conditions specified in the Building Byelaws, if any requirements /
conditions specified / imposed by the Competent Authority is applicable or if any approval from the
Competent Authority has to be obtained, for the development of buildings, as per the requirements of the
Competent Authority, such requirements / conditions shall be followed or such approvals shall be obtained,
as the case may be, for the development of the buildings
3.3 Applicability of Byelaws for all types of building developments
Except hereinafter or otherwise provided, these Byelaws shall apply to all development, redevelopment,
erection and/or re-erection of a building whether temporary or permanent as well as to the design,
construction of, or reconstruction and additions and alterations to a building.
17
3.4 Applicability of Byelaws for Part construction
Where the whole or part of a building is demolished or altered or reconstructed, except where otherwise
specifically stipulated, these Building Byelaws shall apply only to the extent of the work involved.
3.5 Change of use or occupancy
3.5.1
Where use of a building is changed, except where otherwise specifically stipulated, these Building
Byelaws shall apply to all parts of the building affected by the change.
3.5.2
If such change of use or occupancy is proposed during the course of construction which is in
accordance with the zonal regulations the procedure prescribed for revised licence shall be followed
and revised license should be obtained.
3.5.3
Any change of use or occupancy shall be permitted in a building after obtaining Occupation
Certificate, in case the changes proposed in the use or occupancy of the building satisfies all
requirements of these Byelaws, the Master Plan &Zonal Regulations subject to compliance of Section
14 & 14-A of KTCP Act, 1961, wherever applicable.
In such cases, the Owner shall submit revised drawings of the proposed change in use or occupancy and
submit the same to the Local Authority for revised licence. Such revised licence shall be issued only
after following the procedure prescribed for obtaining new Building Licence. The fees as specified in
Appendix VII shall be collected before issuing revised licence.”
3.6 Requirement in respect of building sites
3.6.1
Damp Site
Wherever the dampness of a site or the nature of the soil renders such precautions necessary, the ground
surface of the site between the walls of any building erected thereon shall be rendered damp-proof to the
satisfaction of the Local Authority
3.6.2
Minimum Size of Site
The minimum size of sites for the construction of different types of building or different use groups shall be
in accordance with provisions of the Master Plan, Zonal Regulations and Section 17 of KTCP Act 1961
3.6.3
Sanction for Building Sites
The building sites shall have sanction under Section 17 of KTCP Act 1961from the Planning Authority before
sanction is accorded under these Byelaws.
3.6.4
Restrictions on use of land for construction of buildings
No piece of land shall be used as a site for the construction of buildings under the following circumstances
a)
if the site is not drained properly or is incapable of being well drained;
b)
if the Local Authority considers that the site is insanitary or it is dangerous to construct a building
on it;
c)
if the building is proposed on any area filled up with filthy and offensive matter without a certificate
from the Health Officer and Corporation Engineer to the effect that it is fit to be built upon from
health and sanitary point of view;
18
d)
if the owner of the land has not shown to the satisfaction of the Local Authority that all the measures
required to safeguard the construction from constantly getting damp are being taken;
e)
if it violates any provisions of Section 17 of KTCP Act 1961 or any
provisions
of
Zonal
Regulations
Note: If the proposed use of the building on the plot does not conform to the land use proposals of the Master
plan or Zonal Regulations, permission from the Planning Authority for the change of land use has to be furnished.
3.7 Renovation / Retrofit / Demolition
3.7.1
Permission under these Byelaws shall not be given for renovation / retrofit in whole or part of a
building which has ceased to operate due to fire, natural collapse or demolition having been declared
unsafe, or which is likely to be demolished by or under an order of the Local Authority as the case
may be and for which the necessary certificate has been given by the Local Authority. However, in
case of buildings that are damaged partially due to fire and which can be restored may be permitted
for renovation/ retrofit after verification that the building or portion of the building is not declared as
unsafe building.
3.7.2 DEMOLITION OF BUILDING
Before a building is demolished, the owner shall notify all agencies having service connections within
the building, such as water, electric, gas, sewer and other connections. A permit to demolish a
building shall not be issued until a release is obtained from the agencies stating that their respective
service connections and appurtenant equipment, such as meters and regulators have been removed
or sealed and plugged in a safe manner. The owner shall, until notice thereof is given to the
Commissioner, that the building is demolished is liable for the payment of the property tax for which
he would have been liable had the building not been demolished or destroyed.
3.8 Existing Buildings
3.8.1
Existing approved Buildings
Nothing in these Byelaws shall require the removal, alteration or abandonment nor prevent continuance of
the lawfully established use or occupancy of an existing approved building unless, in the opinion of the Local
Authority such a building is unsafe or constitutes a hazard to the safety of adjacent property or to the
occupants of the building itself.
3.9 Development of Buildings
3.9.1
Building Licence
No person shall erect, re-erect or make addition/ alterations in any building or cause the same to be done
without, first obtaining a separate building license for each such building from the Local Authority
3.9.2
Building Licence obtained before these Byelaws:
Where any building licence which has been issued by the Local Authority before the commencement of these
Building Byelaws and where construction is in progress and has not been completed within the specified
period from the date of such licence, the said permission shall be deemed to be sanctioned under these
Byelaws and shall only be eligible for payment of validation extension fee there under. Accordingly, where the
19
validity of sanction has expired, and construction has not commenced, construction shall be governed by the
provisions of these Building Byelaws and building licence has to be obtained as per these Building Byelaws.
Provided that, if the building construction could not commence due to the orders of any competent court of
law, the construction may be permitted to commence as per the licensed plan, within three months of
clearance obtained from the court.
3.10
Procedure for obtaining building licence
3.10.1 Registration of Stake Holders
The following Stake Holders involved in the development activities in the ULB shall register themselves with
the Local Authority, as per the procedure prescribed in Appendix-I
a)
Promoters/ Developers who intend to undertake developments within the jurisdiction of the Local
Authority.
b)
Land owners who intend to undertake any building activity as per these Byelaws
c)
Professionals for preparing plans and details for obtaining sanction from the Local Authority (as
detailed in Appendix-II) and NOCs from different departments (as detailed in Appendix-IV), referred
as professionals for drawings.
d)
Professionals who intend to supervise the implementation of various components specified in the
plans sanctioned by the Local Authority, referred as professionals for supervision.
e)
Professionals who are licensed by the Local Authority (as detailed in Appendix-I) to inspect the
constructions / implementations as per the provisions of the approved plans.
f)
Contractors or Agencies implementing major components of the developments.
3.10.2 Application for building plan approval:
Every person (Owner or his authorised representative, including Promoter / Developer) who intends to
erect, re-erect or make alteration in any place in a building or demolish any building, shall apply in Form-I
along with the required documents (as detailed in Appendix-VI) and payment of necessary fees (as detailed
in Appendix-VII) along with all the drawings and details for obtaining building licence prepared by the
professionals on record for drawings (as detailed in Appendix- II). The Applicant shall submit Common
application containing details of Form-I or Form-II, as applicable, for obtaining the required NOCs, along
with the drawings and details for obtaining NOCs from other departments as applicable (as detailed in
Appendix-IV) and payment of necessary fees (as detailed in Appendix-VII).
3.10.3 Verification of documents submitted:
The Commissioner of the Local Authority shall verify the documents submitted along with the application
and if found in order, will accept the application. In case of any discrepancy, an endorsement shall be issued
in Form-III to the applicant stating the discrepancy and the applicant may rectify the same and resubmit to
the Local Authority.
3.10.4 Evaluation of Technical details submitted:
(1) If the application is accepted after finding that the documents submitted along with the application
are in order, the TPO of the Local Authority as specified in these Byelaws shall evaluate the Technical
drawing and details submitted by the Applicant, for compliance with the provisions of the Master
plan, ZR and Byelaws and compliance of the conditions incorporated for obtaining NOCs from
20
different departments and submit the evaluation report to the Commissioner of the Local Authority,
with noting of discrepancy, if any. The Commissioner shall approve the evaluation report with or
without accepting the noting of discrepancy.
(2) In case the noting of discrepancy is accepted by the Commissioner, an endorsement shall be issued
in Form-IV to the applicant stating the discrepancy and the concerned Licensed Professional may
rectify the same and resubmit to the Local Authority
3.10.5 Forwarding details to obtain NOCs and issuing NOCs:
(1) If the Technical drawing and details submitted are complying with the provisions of the Master Plan,
ZR and Byelaws and the requirements for obtaining NOCs from different departments, the
Commissioner of the Local Authority shall forward the application, technical drawings and details
submitted for NOCs to the concerned departments stating the timelines within which the NOCs have
to be issued, (as detailed in Appendix-IV), failing which the NOCs would be deemed to have been
issued.
(2) All the respective departments shall verify the drawing and details submitted along with the
application of the NOC and if found in order shall issue NOC within the timelines as notified by
government, with or without site inspection, as required and forward the NOC to the Local Authority.
(3) In case of any discrepancy, the concerned department shall issue endorsement to the applicant stating
the discrepancy and the applicant through the concerned Licensed Professional may rectify the same
and resubmit to the concerned Department.
3.10.6 Submission of Site Inspection Report
(1) If the Technical drawings and details submitted are accepted by the Commissioner, Commissioner shall
select the licensed professional (based on the qualification and competence and the procedure specified in
Appendix-V) and inform the licensed professional in Form-V to inspect the site and submit Site Inspection
Report for approval of site plan.
(2) On receipt of intimation from the Local Authority, the selected licensed professional shall inspect the site
and submit site inspection report (as detailed in Appendix-IX) in Form-VI to the Local Authority, with noting
of discrepancy, if any. The Commissioner shall approve the site inspection report
3.10.7 Action in case of discrepancy in site inspection report.
If any discrepancies are noted in the site inspection report and endorsement in Form-VII to the applicant
stating the discrepancy shall be issued and the applicant shall through the licensed professional rectify the
same and resubmit to the local authority.
3.10.8 Sanctioning of Building Licence
(1) On receipt of all the required NOCs from the concerned departments, or deemed NOCs issued by the Local
Authority (in case NOCs are not issued by the concerned departments within the timelines as notified by
government) and all the technical drawings and details accepted by the Local Authority and the Site Inspection
Report being consistent with the details submitted by the applicant, the Commissioner shall sanction the
Building Licence within the timelines as notified by government
(2) The Local Authority shall intimate the Applicant to pay the required fees (as specified in Appendix-VII for
the various NOCs as well as the Building Licence.
21
(3) The Commissioner of the Local Authority shall hand over the various NOCs received from the concerned
departments and sanction building licence after receiving the required fees from the Applicant.
3.10.8.1 Sanctioning of permission for demolition of buildings
The Applicant shall submit application for demolition of building along with the following details;
1. Key Plan
2. Site Plan
3. Building floor plans showing the area of existing building to be demolished
4. Estimated quantity of C&D Waste expected in the various categories of waste
5. Details of process of reuse, recycle and disposal of C&D Waste generated
6. release order obtained from the agencies stating that the respective service connections and
appurtenant equipment, such as meters and regulators have been removed or sealed and plugged in
a safe manner.
7. Latest tax paid certificate
3.11
Plans for Sanction
1)
All Building plans submitted to the Local authority shall be prepared as per the Jurisdictional Master
Plan, Zonal Regulations, Section 17 of KTCP Act 1961, Building Byelaws and the conditions of the
various NOCs required for the building.
2)
The drawings and details have to be submitted for the different types of buildings (B1, B2, B3, B4
and B5 Buildings) as follows;
3.11.1 Key Plan (For all types of Buildings):
The key plan to be submitted along with the application shall be the related portion of the approved road map
of the Local Authority on which the plot (on which Building sanction is applied for) is located (As detailed in
Appendix-IIA).
3.11.2 Site Plan (For all types of Buildings): (As detailed in Appendix-IIB)
3.11.3 Floor Plan of parking areas (For all types of Buildings) (As detailed in Appendix-II C)
3.11.4 Floor Plan of other uses (For all types of Buildings) (As detailed in Appendix-II D)
3.11.5 Sections of buildings (For all types of Buildings) (As detailed in Appendix-II E)
3.11.6 Elevations of buildings (For all types of Buildings) (As detailed in Appendix-II F)
3.11.7 Drawings for all services provided
a) Electrical system including energy saving measures and use of renewable energy (For B3, B4 & B5
Buildings) (As detailed in Appendix II-Ga)
b) Water supply system including water conservation measures (For B3, B4 & B5 Buildings) (As detailed
in Appendix II-Gb)
22
c) Rain water harvesting and ground water recharging systems (For all types of Buildings) (As detailed
in Appendix II-Gc)
d) Sewerage system including STP and usage of treated water (For all types of Buildings specified in
Table11.1) (As detailed in Appendix II-Gd)
e) HVAC System (For B2, B3, B4 & B5 Buildings wherever centralised HVAC system are proposed) (As
detailed in Appendix II-Ge)
3.11.8 Landscape plan (Buildings for which Table 15.1, 15.2 & 15.3 are applicable) (As detailed in
Appendix-II-H)
3.11.9 Circulation Plan indicating vehicular and pedestrian movement and parking facilities including
traffic impact study and report (Buildings for which Table 15.2 & 15.3 are applicable) (As
detailed in Appendix-II-I)
3.11.10 Structural Drawings and details (For B2, B3, B4 & B5 Buildings) (As detailed in Appendix-II-J)
3.11.11 Green Building drawings and details (Buildings for which Table 11.1 is applicable) (As detailed
in Appendix-II-K)
3.12
Signing of plans
3.12.1 Signing the Building Plans:
All plans for submission to the Local Authority shall be signed by the owner(s) and by the Competent
professionals on record (to prepare the required plans for sanction) for the building
3.12.2 Signing of plans for NOC:
All plans for submission to different departments for NOC shall be signed by the owner(s) and by the
competent professionals on record (to prepare the required plans for NOCs) for the construction project.
3.13
Alteration / Modification / Addition in Plans
The concerned professional on record for preparing the particular plan which has to be altered, modified or
added, shall make the necessary changes and submit to the Local Authority as detailed in Clause 3.15.5
with joint validation of applicant along with an application in Form-I and payment of required fees.
3.13.1 Alterations exempted from obtaining building licence
No building licence is necessary for the following alterations, which do not otherwise violate any provisions
regarding general building requirements, structural stability and fire safety requirements of these Byelaws;
a)
Plastering and patch repairs;
b)
Re-roofing or renewals of roof including roof of intermediate floors at the same specifications and
height;
c)
Flooring and re-flooring;
d)
Opening and closing of windows, ventilators and doors not opening into other properties and / or
public road/property;
e)
Replacing fallen bricks, stones, pillars, beams etc.
23
f)
Construction or re-construction of sunshade not more than 75cm in width within one’s land and not
overhanging over a public street;
g)
Construction or re-construction of parapet not more than 1.5 m. in height and also construction or
re-construction of boundary wall as permissible under these Byelaws;
h) White-washing, painting, etc. including erection of false ceiling in any floor at the permissible clear
height provided the false ceiling in no way can be put to use as a loft etc.;
i)
Reconstruction of portions of buildings damaged by storm, rains, fire, earthquake or any other
natural calamity to the same extent and specification as existed prior to the damage provided the use
conforms to provisions of Master Plan/Zonal Regulations;
j)
Erection or re-erection of internal partitions (within the specific premise) provided the same are within
the purview of the Byelaws.
Note: Any of the above activities in a building, shall not be permitted in the portion falling within the
proposed road widening line.
3.14
Fees for sanction of Building licence
Every person intending to construct or reconstruct or alter any building shall pay to the Local Authority, the
various fees prescribed in Appendix-VII. The Local Authority or the Government shall prescribe the rate of
fees, time to time.
Provided wherever the fee is fixed by the Local Authority the approval of the Government for the same is to
be sought by the Local Authority.
3.15
Sanction
3.15.1 Sanction by the Authority
3.15.2 The Local Authority shall issue the commencement certificate in Form-III of the Karnataka Planning
Authorities Rules, 1965 and sanction the building plan by signing the Building Licence and the
drawings.
3.15.3 Grant of Licence or Refusal
(1) The Local Authority shall either sanction or refuse sanction to the plans and specifications or may sanction
them with such modification or directions as he may deem necessary as per these Byelaws.
(2) In case where the building scheme requires the clearance of an Urban Art Commission, whenever
constituted for the city, the Local Authority shall issue the building license only after getting the clearance
from the Urban Art Commission.
(3) The licence shall be issued by the Local Authority for the different types of buildings within the timelines
as notified by government, failing which the sanction shall be deemed to have been accorded, provided that
the failure to sanction the licence by the Local Authority within the timelines is immediately brought to the
notice of the Local Authority in writing by the person who has applied for licence. On receiving such intimation
from the applicant, if the Commissioner fails to issue the licence within seven days, the licence shall be
deemed to have been sanctioned and issued by the Local Authority. In such an event, the applicant shall
submit an affidavit & undertaking to the Local Authority stating that drawings and details submitted by him
24
for obtaining licence are prepared as per the provisions of the jurisdictional Master plan, Zonal Regulations
and these Building Byelaws and all other applicable laws, including those related to NOCs issued for the
project and he would execute the works as per such drawings and details submitted and the applicable laws
and he shall be responsible for any violations or deviations. Nothing shall be construed to authorize any
person to do anything in contravention or against the terms of the lease or title of the land or against any
regulations, Byelaws or ordinance operating at the time of execution of the work at site.
(4) It is further clarified that:
a) The above provision of deemed sanction shall be applicable only in those cases where the building plan are
in conformity with the Master Plan/Zonal Regulations/Byelaws/ Section 17 of KTCP Act 1961.
b) No application under Clause3.10.2 shall be valid unless the information required by the Local Authority
under these Byelaws or any further information which may be required has been furnished to the satisfaction
of the Local Authority and
3.15.4 Duration of Sanction, Revalidation and revised Sanction
(1) Once a building licence is sanctioned, the duration of Sanction, revalidation and revised sanction shall be
as prescribed in Appendix-X;
Provided that, if the construction is not completed within the timelines prescribed in Appendix-X, the
applicant shall pay the required fee as prescribed in Appendix-VII for extension of validation of licence.
(2) The project shall be completed within the timelines prescribed in Appendix-X. The validity period of
sanction shall be extended as specified in Appendix-X in case of additions / alterations proposed in the
project or for any other reason specifically mentioned. If multiple blocks / buildings are proposed in the
sanctioned plan, a schedule of executing the blocks in sequence has to be specified and the timelines for
completing each of the multiple blocks shall be permitted accordingly as specified in Appendix-X.
(3) If the Applicant intends to avail extension for the validity period of the sanction, he shall make an
application stating the reason for not completing the project within the validity period and the validity of
sanction shall be extended for one year after paying the fees for extension of validation as prescribed in
Appendix-VII.
(4) If the building is not completed within the period of revalidation, he may avail further extension of the
validity period after repeating the procedure specified in clause 3.15.4(3).
(5) Revalidation shall not be permitted if the construction has not commenced within the validation period of
two years from the date of sanction. In such cases the Applicant has to apply for revised sanction as per the
Master Plan / Zonal Regulation and Building Byelaws as in force at the time of application of revised sanction
3.15.5 Revised Licence during the course of construction:
a)
The Applicant has to apply for revised building licence if the Applicant intents to make changes from
the sanctioned plans in any or all of the following, but within the provisions of the Zonal Regulations,
Section 17 of KTCP Act 1961, and these Byelaws;
i.
Setbacks
ii.
Coverage
iii.
FAR
iv.
Car parking
25
b)
The Local Authority shall issue revised licence after collecting the fees as prescribed in Appendix VII
before issuing the Occupancy Certificate.
c)
If the revised licence is applied during the execution of work of the building for which revised licence
is applied, then construction of the portion of the building for which revised licence is sought for,
shall not be commenced unless the revised licence is issued by the Local Authority.
3.15.6 Revocation of Licence:
a)
The Local Authority shall revoke any building licence issued under the provisions of these Byelaws,
wherever there has been any false statement, misrepresentation of material facts in the application
on which the building licence was based or if during construction it is found that the Owner has
violated any of the provisions of these Building Byelaws or sanctioned plan or compoundable limits.
Revised sanction of building plans and occupancy certificate shall be taken from the Local Authority
after bringing the building within the framework of Master Plan/ Zonal Regulations/Building
Byelaws.
b)
Any construction made in violation of Master Plan / Zonal Regulations / Building Byelaws / Section
17 of KTCP Act / Conditions of various NOCs issued, etc. based on the licence issued by providing
false information / documents / details / drawings by the Applicant shall be considered as
unauthorised and revised licence shall be issued only after such unauthorised portion of the
constructions are demolished or regularised as per law. The Applicant shall not seek protection under
the pretext that such unauthorised construction was made as per the licence issued.
3.15.7 Withdrawal of Building Licence:
If the Owner / Applicant decides not to construct the building for which Building Licence is obtained from
the Local Authority, he may apply to the Local Authority to withdraw the Building Licence issued (if the
construction of the building has not commenced and Licence is within the validation period). On receipt of
such application for withdrawal of Building Licence, the Local Authority shall withdraw the Building Licence
issued.
3.15.8 Qualification and Competence:
Qualification and competence of all professionals registered shall be as specified in Government Notification
No. UDD 14TTP 2017 dated 30.10.2017.
3.16 Execution of works at site
3.16.1 Construction to be in Conformity with Byelaws
Owners’ liability: Neither the granting of the permission nor the approval of the drawing and specification,
nor inspection by the Local Authority or the licensed professional during erection of the building shall in any
way relieve the Owner of the building or the promoter on behalf of the owner, from full responsibility for
carrying out work in accordance with these Byelaws.
3.16.2 Commencement of work:
The owner, within the validity period of the building plan sanction given, shall start the construction work at
the site for which building license has been granted, under the supervision of the licensed professional. The
owner and the licensed professional with the required qualification/Competences specified in the Government
Notification No. UDD 14TTP 2017 dated 30.10.2017 and subsequent modifications notified by the
Government shall be required to follow the procedure during construction work as prescribed in these
Byelaws.
26
3.16.3 Appointment of professionals on record for supervision
The owner, to whom a licence is issued, shall engage the services of the licensed professional to supervise the
construction of the various components of the building, before the commencement of works at site and the
licensed professional shall submit the Completion Report.
3.16.4 Intimation of commencement of work at site and issuing commencement certificate
(1) The applicant and the Licensed professional shall intimate the Local Authority within the 5th day of every
three month from the date of sanctioning the building licence, that the construction work has not commenced
at site, along with the letter of undertaking that the work has not commenced at site.
(2) The Applicant and the Licensed professional shall intimate the Local Authority at least one day before the
commencement of works at site.
(3) The Commissioner shall issue Plinth Commencement Certificate in Form-VIII-A within seven days of
receiving satisfactory inspection report from the designated officer regarding the commencement of foundation
work at site.
3.16.5 Documents at Site:
(1) The person to whom a licence is issued shall, during construction, display in a conspicuous place on the
exterior wall / fence near the entrance gate to the site, in Form-IX.
(2) The details specified in Appendix-XI shall be maintained in the site office throughout the period of
construction, until Occupation Certificate is issued by the Local Authority and shall be available for
verification of the Local Authority or the licensed professional appointed by the Local Authority for certification
of works.
3.16.6 Procedure during construction
(1) The Applicant and the Licensed professional shall intimate the Local Authority, on the completion of
various stages of construction
(2) On receiving the intimation from the Applicant, the designated officer of the Local Authority shall
certify the stage of completion of work intimated.
(3) The designated officer of the Local Authority shall inspect the site and after checking the work
completed as indicated, certify the same in Form-X
(4) During inspection, according to the designated officer of the Local Authority, if the work executed by
the Applicant is not as per the approved plans, specifications and other provisions of these Byelaws, he
shall intimate the Local Authority in Form-X, stating the defects in the works executed, along with the
photos of such defective works.
(5) Local Authority shall issue endorsement to the Applicant in Form-XI, to rectify the defects.
(6) On receiving the endorsement from the Local Authority, the Applicant shall rectify the defects and
intimate the Local Authority.
(7) According to the Applicant or the Licenced Professional if the defects mentioned in the endorsement
is incorrect, the Applicant may file objection, to the Local Authority, stating the correctness of the works
executed, along with the photos to prove the correctness, if required.
27
(8) If objection is received from the Applicant, the Commissioner shall conduct joint inspection along with
the Applicant, the concerned Licenced Professional and the designated officer by giving notice to all, to
conduct joint inspection within seven days of receiving objection.
(9) During the joint inspection, the Commissioner, after hearing the views of both the parties, shall either
accept or reject the objection raised by the Applicant and instruct the Applicant accordingly after making
his inspection report in Form-XII and the Applicant shall abide by the decision of the Local Authority
and rectify the defects mentioned in Form-XII, if any, and intimate the same to the Local Authority.
(10) On receiving the intimation of defect rectification by the Applicant, the designated officer of Local
Authority shall inspect and certify the rectified work.
12) The applicant/owner/developer and Licenced Professional shall take necessary precaution to
control the epidemic/ communicative diseases like Malaria, Dengue etc.
3.16.7 Action against works executed without intimation and works not rectified
(1) Any works executed in the building without the certification of the preceding works specified in Appendix-
XII and the works not rectified as intimated in Form-X, shall be liable for penalty as per the Provisions of
KMC Act.
(2) In such cases, the owner or the promoter, as the case may be, and the Licenced professional shall also be
liable for action as per the provisions of the KMC Act.
3.17 Safety measures to be taken during construction
The safety measures specified in Part VII of NBC 2016 and as per best practice of the construction industry
shall be adopted by the applicant in the construction site during the construction period.
3.18 Completion of project and submitting Completion Certificate
3.18.1 Submitting Completion Certificate
(1) On completion of all works at site that have been certified by the designated officer as specified in
Appendix-XII, as per the specifications and other provisions of these Byelaws, the Licensed professional,
shall submit Completion Certificate in Form-XIII, along with the certification of Structural design and safety
in Form-XV.
(2) In case of independent Residential Houses and Industrial buildings, the Licensed professional shall submit
work Completion Certificate only if all the works within the building and the yard are completed.
(3) In case of other Residential and Non-Residential buildings, the Licensed professional shall submit work
Completion certificate only if all the works are completed in the common areas of the building, the exterior of
the building and services to be provided in the Apartments, Commercial and other Premises of the building
are also completed.
3.18.2 Submitting Partial Completion Certificate.
(1) In case of partial completion of the building, partial work Completion Certificate may be submitted by the
Licensed professional for the number of floors (starting from the lowermost floor moving upwards) upto
28
which all works of the common areas and exterior of the building are completed and services to be provided
in the Apartments, Commercial and other Premises of those floors of the building are also completed.
In such cases, necessary Clearance Certificate or any other form of approval shall be obtained from the
concerned Departments from which NOCs are obtained for issuing Building Licence (wherever there is a
condition in the NOC to obtain Clearance Certificate or any other form of approval that has to be obtained
from them before issuing Occupation Certificate to the Building or allowing occupation in the building),
for such partial occupation of the building, before the Local Authority issues partial Occupation Certificate
3.18.3 Approval of works from other Departments
(1) The Licensed professional with the required qualification notified by the Government shall submit the
required applications in Form-II (any or all of a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i and j, as applicable),for approvals from
other departments for the construction done at site as per the NOCs issued (only in cases where the condition
for obtaining clearance certificate / certificate for the approval of works done, is mentioned in the NOC).
(2) On receiving the Work Completion Certificate and the application to various departments for approving
the works executed at sites as per the NOCs issued, the Local Authority shall intimate all the concerned
Departments which have issued NOCs.
(3) On receiving the intimation from the Local Authority, the concerned Departments which had issued NOCs,
shall issue the required Certificates of Approval for the construction done at site, wherever applicable, with
or without site inspection.
(4) During the site inspection, according to the Designated Officer of the concerned Department, if any of the
works executed at site is not as per the conditions/specifications of the NOC issued, he shall issue
endorsement through the Authority, to the Applicant, along with the photographs of the defective works, to
rectify the defects.
(5) On receiving the endorsement from such Departments through the Local Authority, the Applicant shall
rectify the defects and intimate the concerned Department.
(6) According to the Applicant or the concerned licensed professional if the defects mentioned in the
endorsement is incorrect, the Applicant may file objection, to the concerned Department and the Local
Authority, stating the correctness of the works executed, along with the photos to prove the correctness, if
required.
(7) If objection is received from the Applicant, the Commissioner shall conduct joint inspection along with the
Applicant, the concerned licensed professional, the designated officer of the local authority and the Designated
Officer of the concerned Department who has issued the endorsement for defective work, by giving notice to
all, to conduct joint inspection within seven days of receiving objection.
(8) During the joint inspection, the Commissioner, after hearing the views of both the parties, shall either
accept or reject the objection raised by the Applicant and instruct the Applicant accordingly after making his
Inspection Report in Form-XII (copy of the same to be sent to the Designated Officer of the concerned
Department) and the decision of the Commissioner shall be final. The Applicant shall abide by the decision
of the Local Authority and rectify the defects mentioned in Form-XII, if any and intimate the Local Authority.
(9) On receiving the intimation of defect rectification by the Applicant, the designated officer of the local
authority shall inspect the site and after checking the work rectified as indicated in Form- XII, certify the
same in Form- X.
29
(10) The Local Authority shall forward the certification issued in Form-X by the designated officer of the
concerned Department and the concerned Department shall issue the required Certificate of Approval for the
construction done at site, with or without site inspection
3.19 Occupancy Certificate
On receiving the Completion Certificates from the applicant through the Licenced Professional and the
necessary Approvals from the concerned Departments, wherever applicable, the Local Authority shall issue
Occupancy Certificate in Form-XIV to the building constructed as per these Byelaws.
3.19.1 Occupancy or letting of the new buildings–
No person shall occupy or allow any other person to occupy any new building or part of a new building for
any purpose whatsoever until Occupancy Certificate to such buildings or part thereof has been granted
3.19.2 Occupancy/ Part Occupancy Certificate for Phased Project-
In such cases where a project has not been completed at one stretch but constructed in different stages, part
Occupancy Certificate for the building otherwise complete in all respects, may be issued subject to the
condition that;
(a) part work Completion certificate is submitted by the licensed professionals.
(b) The remaining construction of the building is completed within the validity period or the extended validity
period.
Connection to the Municipal Sewer / Water Mains and Power Supply system of MESCOM
1)
Temporary connection for water, electricity or sewer, permitted for the purpose of facilitating the
construction, shall not be allowed to continue in the premises without obtaining occupancy
certificate.
2)
No new connection to the Municipal Water Mains or to the Municipal Sewer line with a building shall
be made without obtaining occupancy certificate and any existing connection provided for
construction shall be disconnected if the building is occupied without Occupancy Certificate.
3)
Permanent power supply to the building shall also not be provided to any new building unless the
building has received Occupancy Certificate / Part Occupancy Certificate
4)
In case the use is changed, or unauthorized construction is made, the Local Authority is authorized
to discontinue such services or cause discontinuance of such services.
3.20 Changes to be made in the approved plans after the completion of the project:
1)
If the owner/s who intend/s to make any changes / deviations in the building from the sanctioned
plan, after the completion of the project, the owner/s through the Licenced Professional shall make
the necessary changes and submit to the Local Authority with joint validation of Applicant along with
an Application in Form-I and payment of required fees.
.
2)
Any such proposed changes from the sanctioned plans shall be as per the provisions of the Master
Plan and its Zonal Regulations, these Byelaws or any other relevant laws.
3) The proposed changes shall be executed at site only after obtaining the approval for
such modifications/changes from the Local Authority.
30
Note: The applicant for revised licence may be the Owner/s of the premises of the completed building
or the Promoter who has developed the building.
3.21 Action in case of certain violations in the construction of Buildings
Till the time of demolition of additional area built violating the provisions of Zonal regulations, Local
Authority may disconnect utilities such as water supply and Sewerage to the entire building and also
order MESCOM to disconnect power supply to the entire building.
CHAPTER-4
4. DEVELOPMENT REGULATIONS
The provisions contained in Master Plan/Zonal Regulations shall apply and where these are silent on
such issues or which require interpretation, the norms as decided by the Authority, shall apply. The
provisions include but are not limited to the use/activity of premises, ground coverage, FAR,
setbacks, open space, height and parking standards for Residential premises on plotted development,
Group housing, Resettlement colonies, Slums, In-situ up gradation, Non-residential premises. The
permission of uses/use activities in use premises shall be permitted in accordance with provisions of
Master Plan and Zonal Regulations. The object of these regulations is to provide control for
building/buildings within use premises excluding the internal arrangement, which is covered and
controlled by Building Byelaws.
CHAPTER – 5
5. GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS AND SERVICES
5.1 Requirements for Parts of Buildings
5.1.1
Plinth
5.1.1.1 The plinth or any part of a building or outhouse shall be so located with respect to the
surrounding ground level that adequate drainage of the site is assured. The height of the plinth
shall be not less than 450 mm from the surrounding ground level, in case of independent houses
and not less than 300mm in case of other buildings
5.1.1.2 Interior Courtyards and Covered Parking: Every interior courtyard shall be raised at least 150
mm above the determining ground level and shall be satisfactorily drained.
5.1.2
Habitable Rooms
5.1.2.1 Height
The clear height of all rooms for human habitation shall not be less than 2.75 m measured from the
surface of the floor to the lowest point of the ceiling (bottom of slab) provided that the minimum clear
headway under any beam shall not be less than 2.4 m. In the case of pitched roof, the average height of
rooms shall not be less than 2.75 m. The minimum clear head room under a beam, folded plates or eaves
shall be 2.4 m. In the case of air-conditioned rooms, a height of not less than 2.4mmeasured from the
surface of the floor to the lowest point of air-conditioning duct or the false ceiling shall be provided.
31
5.1.2.2 The requirements of clause 5.1.2.1 shall apply to residential, business and mercantile
buildings. For educational and industrial buildings, the following minimum requirements apply:
Table 5.1Minimum height requirement for educational and industrial buildings
Sl. No
Type of Occupancy
Ceiling height
1
Educational Buildings
Ceiling height 3.6m for all regions
2
Industrial Buildings
Ceiling height 3.6m, except when air-conditioned, 3m
(Factory Act 1948 and Rules therein shall govern such heights,
where applicable)
5.1.2.3 Size
The area of habitable room shall not be less than 9.5 Sqm, where there is only one room with a minimum
width of 2.4 m. Where there are two rooms, one of these shall not be less than 9.5Sqm and the other not
less than 7.5Sqm, with a minimum width of 2.1 m.
5.1.3
Kitchen
5.1.3.1 Height
The height of a kitchen measured from the surface of the floor to the lowest point in the ceiling (bottom of
slab) shall not be less than 2.75 m, except for the portion to accommodate floor trap of the upper floor.
5.1.3.2 Size
The area of a kitchen where separate dining area is provided shall be not less than 5.0 Sq. m with a
minimum width of 1.8 m. Where there is a separate store, the area of the kitchen may be reduced to 4.5
Sq. m. A kitchen, which is intended for use as a dining area also, shall have a floor area of not less than
7.5 Sq. m with a minimum width of 2.1 m.
5.1.3.3 Other Requirements
Every room to be used as kitchen shall have:
a) Unless separately provided in a pantry, means for the washing of kitchen utensils which shall lead
directly or through a sink to a grated and trapped connection to the waste pipe
b) An impermeable floor
c) A flue, if found necessary
5.1.4
Bathrooms and Water-Closets
5.1.4.1 Height
The height of a bathroom or water-closet measured from the surface of the floor to the lowest point in the
ceiling (bottom of slab) shall not be less than 2.1 m.
32
5.1.4.2 Size
The area of a bathroom shall not be less than 1.8 Sqm with a minimum width of 1.2m. The floor area of
water-closet shall be 1.1 Sqm with a minimum width of 0.9 m. If bath and water-closet are combined, its
floor area shall not be less than 2.8 Sqm with a minimum width of 1.2 m.
5.1.4.3 Other Requirements
Every bathroom or water-closet shall:
a)
Be so situated that at least one of its walls shall face a shaft or open space
b)
Not be directly over or under any room other than another water-closet, washing place, bath or
terrace, unless it has a water-tight floor;
c)
Have the platform or seat made of water-tight non-absorbent material;
d)
be enclosed by walls or partitions and the surface of every such wall or partition shall be finished
with a smooth impervious material to a height of not less than 1 m above the floor of such a
room;
e)
Be provided with an impervious floor covering, sloping towards the drain with a suitable grade
and not towards VERANDAH or any other room; and
f)
Have a window or ventilator, opening to a shaft or open space, of area not less than 0.3 Sqm
with side not less than 0.3 m.
5.1.4.4 No room containing water closets shall be used for any purpose except as a lavatory and no such
room shall open directly into any kitchen or cooking space by a door, window or other opening.
Every room containing water-closet shall have a door completely closing the entrance to it.
5.1.5
Loft
5.1.5.1 Height
The minimum head-room of loft shall be 2.2 m. The maximum height of loft shall be 1.5 m.
5.1.5.2 Size
A loft in a habitable room shall not cover more than 25 percent of the area of the floor on which it is
constructed and shall not interfere with the ventilation of the room under any circumstances.
5.1.6
Mezzanine Floor
5.1.6.1 Height
It shall have a minimum height of 2.2 m.
5.1.6.2 Size
The minimum size of the mezzanine floor, if it is to be used as a living room, shall not be less than 9.5
Sqm. The aggregate area of such mezzanine floor in a building shall in no case exceed one third the plinth
area of the building.
33
5.1.6.3 Other Requirements
A mezzanine floor may be permitted over a room or a compartment provided:
a)
it conforms to the standard of living rooms as regards lighting and ventilation in case the size of
mezzanine floor is 9.5 Sqm or more
b)
It is so constructed as not to interfere under any circumstances with the ventilation of the space over
and under it;
c)
Such mezzanine floor is not sub-divided into smaller compartments;
d)
) Such mezzanine floor or any part of it shall not be used as a kitchen; and
e)
In no case shall a mezzanine floor be closed so as to make it liable to be converted into unventilated
compartments.
5.1.7
Store Room
5.1.7.1 Height
The height of a store room shall be not less than 2.1m.
5.1.7.2 Size
The size of a store room, where provided in a residential building, shall be not less than 3 Sqm
5.1.8
Garage
5.1.8.1 Height The height of a garage shall be not less than 2.4 m.
5.1.8.2 Size
The size of garages shall be as per Zonal regulations.
5.1.9
Basement
5.1.9.1 The Local Authority in accordance with the land use and other provisions specified under the
Zonal Regulations shall allow the construction and usage of the basement
5.1.9.2 The basement shall have the following requirements:
a) Every basement shall be in every part at least 2.4 m in height from the floor to the underside of the roof
slab or ceiling;
b) Adequate ventilation shall be provided for the basement. The ventilation requirements shall be the same
as required by the particular occupancy according to byelaws. Any deficiency may be met by providing
adequate mechanical ventilation in the form of blowers, exhaust fans, air conditioning systems, etc;
c) The height of the ceiling of any basement shall be minimum 0.9 m and the maximum, 1.2 m above the
average surrounding ground level. However, in case of parking, mercantile or business occupancy at
ground floor, minimum height of the ceiling of the basement maybe 0.3 m above the average surrounding
ground level subject to mechanical ventilation being provided (see Fig. 11);
d) Adequate arrangements shall be made such that surface drainage does not enter the basement;
34
e) The walls and floors of the basement shall be watertight and be so designed that the effects of the
surrounding soil and moisture, if any, are taken into account in design and adequate damp proofing
treatment is given;
f) The access to the basement shall be separate from the main and alternative staircase providing access
and exit from higher floors. Where the staircase is continuous in the case of buildings served by more than
one staircase, the same shall be of enclosed type serving as a fire separation from the basement floor and
higher floors. Open ramps shall be permitted if they are constructed within the building line subject to the
provision of (d);
g) Access to basements through ramps shall be permitted subject to provision of (d).
h) For all public buildings and uses including group housing, having basement going up to more than
one level, access to all levels shall also be provided through lift. The exit requirements in basements shall
comply with the provisions of Part 4 ‘Fire and Life Safety’ of the Code.
5.1.10 Chimneys
The chimneys shall be built at least 0.9 m above flat roofs, provided the top of the chimneys is not below
the top of the adjacent parapet wall. In the case of sloping roofs, the chimney top shall not be less than
0.6 m above the ridge of the roof in which the chimney penetrates.
5.1.11 Parapet
Parapet walls and handrails provided on the edges of roof terraces, balcony, verandah, etc. shall not be
less than 1.0 m and not more than 1.5m in height from the finished floor level. The railings / parapet
wall shall be designed by keeping in mind the safety of children.
Note:
i. The above shall not apply where roof terrace is not accessible by a staircase.
ii. However on terrace floor in the portion where installations like DG Set, Water Tank and other, screening
parapet of a suitable height may be constructed to hide such equipment’s etc. and there is no need to have
uniform increase in the height of the parapet.
5.1.12 Boundary Wall
The requirements of the boundary wall shall be as follows:
a) Except with the special permission of the Local Authority, the maximum height of the compound wall
shall be 1.5 m above the average level of the front street measured at the center line of the road.
Compound wall up to 2.4 m height may be permitted if the top 0.9 m is of open type construction of a
design to be approved by the Local Authority.
b) In the case of a corner plot, the height of the boundary wall shall be restricted to 0.75 m for a length
of 6 m on the front and side of the intersections and the balance height of 0.75 m, if required in accordance
with (a) may be made up of open type construction (through railings) and of design to be approved by the
Local Authority.
c)
However, the provisions of (a) and (b) are not applicable to boundary walls of jails. In electric sub-
stations, transformer stations, institutional buildings like sanatoria, hospitals, industrial buildings like
workshops, factories and educational buildings like schools, colleges, including hostels and other uses of
35
public utility undertakings and strategically sensitive buildings, a height up to 2.4 m may be permitted
by the Local Authority.
5.1.13 Septic Tanks
Where a septic tank is used for sewage disposal, the location, design and construction of septic tank shall
conform to requirements as specified in Annexure-XVA of Appendix-XV.
5.1.14 Office-cum-Letter Box Room
In the case of multi-storeyed multifamily dwelling apartments constructed by existing and proposed
Cooperative Housing Societies or Apartment Owners Associations, limited companies and proposed
societies, an office-cum-letter box room of dimension 3.6 m × 3 m shall be provided on the ground floor.
In case the number of flats is more than 20, the maximum size of the office-cum-letter box room shall
be 20 m²
Business Buildings Provision shall be made for letter boxes on the entrance floor as per the requirements
of the postal department.
5.1.15 Meter Rooms
For all buildings above 15 m in height and in special occupancies, like educational, assembly,
institutional, industrial, storage, hazardous and mixed occupancies with any of the aforesaid occupancies
having area more than 500 m2 on each floor, provision shall be made for an independent and ventilated
meter (service) room, as per requirements of electric (service) supply undertakings on the ground floor
with direct access from outside for the purpose of termination of electric supply from the licensee’s service
and alternative supply cables. The door/doors provided for the service room shall have fire resistance of
not less than two hours.
5.1.16 Roofs
5.1.16.1
The roof of a building shall be so designed and constructed as to effectively drain water by
means of sufficient rain-water pipes of adequate size, wherever required, so arranged, jointed
and fixed as to ensure that the rainwater is carried away from the building without causing
dampness in any part of the walls, roof or foundations of the building or an adjacent building.
(1) The Local Authority may require rain-water pipes to be connected to a drain or sewer to a covered
channel formed beneath the public footpath to connect the rainwater pipe to the road gutter or in any
other approved manner.
(2) Rain-water pipes shall be affixed to the outside of the external walls of the building or in recesses or
chases cut or formed in such external walls or in such other manner as may be approved by the Local
Authority.
(3) It is desirable to conserve rainwater using suitable rain water harvesting techniques including by roof
water collection. In this context, reference may be made to Part 9 ‘Plumbing Services, Section 1 Water
Supply, Drainage and Sanitation (Including Solid Waste Management)’ of NBC, 2016.
5.2 Other general requirements
5.2.1
Swimming Pool
36
1) Definition: A constructed pool or a tank indoor or outdoor, used for the purpose of swimming, bathing,
aquatic sports or games, training, treatment (Therapy) or recreation, meant exclusively for human being,
having a depth of water not less than that 60 cm. and the surface area exceeding 23.25 Sq.m both for
the use of public or the institution concerned.
a. ‘Capacity of Pools in Relation to Bathers’: The maximum number of persons in bathing attire within the
pool enclosures of the bathing area shall not exceed one person per 20 Sft. (1.86 Sqm.) of pool i.e. the
area of the water surface.
2) ‘Hand Rail’: A side handrail extending up above and returning to the horizontal surface of the pool deck
curb or coping shall be provided at each side of each ladder.
3) ‘Depth Markers’: Depth of water shall be clearly marked at or above the water surface on the vertical
pool wall and on the edge of the deck or walk-way next to the pool, at maximum points and at the points
of break between the deep and shallow portions and at intermediate increments of depth, spaced at not
more than 2.5’ (7.62cm) intervals. Depth markers, contrasting with background shall be on both sides of
the pool.
4) ‘Lighting and wiring’: Where submarine lightning is used, not less than 0.5 watts shall be employed
per sq. ft. of pool area.
5) ‘Area Lightning’: Where submarine lightning is employed, area lightning shall be provided for the deck
areas and directed towards the deck areas and away from the pool surface so far as practicable, in a total
capacity of not less than 0.6 watt per Sft of deck area.
Where submarine lighting is not provided and night swimming is not permitted combined pool lightning
shall be provided in an amount of not less than 2 watts per Sft. of total area. All submarine lightning
shall be individually earthed and must be water tight and damp proof.
6) ‘Over Head wiring’: No electrical wiring for electrical or power shall be permitted to pass over within 20
feet of the pool enclosure.
7) ‘Shallow Minimum Depth’: Every swimming pool shall have a minimum depth in the shallow area of the
main swimming area of not less than 0.9 m (3 feet), but not more than 1.07m. (3’-6’) from the overflow
level to the floor.
8) ‘Shallow Areas’: In a swimming pool with a diving area, the shallow area of the pool shall be defined as
the portion between the shallow end and the break point between the shallow area and the diving area.
The slope of the floor shall be uniform from the break point between the diving area and the shallow
portion to the outside edge of the shallow portion and shall not be greater than 1 in 2 m.
9) ‘Vertical Wall Depth’: The pool walls shall be vertical at all points for a depth of not less than 0. 76 m.
5.2.2
Means of access
5.2.2.1 No Building shall be erected as to deprive any other building of its means of access.
5.2.2.2 Every person who erects a building shall not at any time erect or cause or permit to erect or re-
erect any building, which in any way encroaches upon or diminishes the area set apart as means
of access.
5.2.2.3 The Means of Access prescribed in the Zonal Regulations shall be considered while sanctioning
Building Licence. The portion of the building site required for widening the road to the proposed
width shall be relinquished free of cost without claiming any compensation (including DR), before
sanctioning Building Licence.
37
5.2.3
Staircase Requirements
5.2.3.1 The minimum clear width, minimum tread width and maximum riser of staircases for buildings
shall be as given as below (see also Part 4 ‘Fire and Life Safety of NBC 2016).
5.2.3.2 Minimum width
Table 5.2 The minimum width of staircase
5.2.3.3 Minimum tread
The minimum width of tread without nosing shall be 250 mm for residential buildings. The minimum
width of tread for other buildings shall be 300 mm.
5.2.3.4 Maximum riser
5.3.2.4.1
The maximum height of riser shall be 190 mm for residential buildings and 150 mm for other
buildings and these shall be limited to 12 per flight. The maximum height of riser shall be
190 mm for residential buildings and 150 mm for other buildings and these shall be limited
to 12 per flight.
5.3.2.4.2
The minimum head-room in a passage under the landing of a staircase shall be 2.1m. The
minimum clear head-room in any staircase shall be 2.1 m.
5.2.4
Exit Requirements
Exit Requirements All aspects of exit requirements for corridors, doors, staircases, ramps, etc, in respect
of widths, travel distance shall be as per Part 4 ‘Fire and Life Safety’ of the NBC Code-2016.
5.2.4.1 Occupant Load
The following occupant load shall be considered for calculating the exit requirement of the building
Table 5.3 Occupant Load
Sl. No.
Type of Occupancy
Occupant Load per
100 Sqm of Carpet
Area (in persons)
1
Residential
8.0
2
Educational
25.0
3
Institutional
6.60
4
Assembly
With fixed or loose seats and
dance floor without seating
facilities
including
dining
rooms
166.6
66.6
5
Mercantile
33.3
16.6
A
i) Residential buildings (dwellings)
ii) Apartment buildings
1.0m
1.25m
B
Hotel buildings/Lodging House
1.5m
C
Assembly buildings like auditoria, theatres
and cinemas
2.0m
D
Educational building
1.5m
E
Institutional buildings
2.0m
F
All other buildings
1.5m
38
Street
floor
and
sales
basement
Upper sale floor
6
Business and industrial
10.0
7
Storage
3.3
8
Hazardous
10.0
Note: 1. The occupant load in dormitory potions of homes for the aged, orphanages or mental hospitals etc.
where sleeping accommodation is provided shall be calculated at not less than 13.3 persons per 100 Sqm
2. In case of assembly occupancy, all rooms, toilets common areas connected to the assembly occupancy
shall be included in the carpet area for calculating the occupancy load.
5.2.4.2 Number and size of Exits
The requisite number and size of various exits shall be provided, based on the occupants in each room and
floor based on the occupant load, capacity of exits, travel distance and height of buildings as prescribed in
these Byelaws.
At least one primary entrance to each building shall be usable by individuals in wheelchairs and shall be
indicated by a sign. At least one entrance usable by individuals in wheelchairs shall be on a level that would
make the elevators accessible.
5.2.4.3 Arrangement of Exits
(1) Exits shall be so located so that the travel distance on the floor shall not exceed 30 m for residential,
educational, institutional assembly, business, mercantile and storage occupancies, 45.0m. for industrial
occupancy and 22.5m for hazardous building. For fully sprinklered building, the travel distance may be
increased by 50 percent of the above values. Whenever more than one exit is required for a floor of a building
they shall be placed as remote from each other as possible. All the exits shall be accessible from the entire
floor area at all floor levels, where separate fire separation walls are not provided.
(2) The travel distance to an exit from the dead end of the corridor, if applicable, shall not exceed half the
distance as stated above except in the case of institutional occupancy in which case it shall not exceed 6.0
m.
5.2.4.4 Capacity of Exits
The capacity of exits (staircase, ramps and doorways) indicating the number of persons that could be safely
evacuated through a unit exit width of 50 cm shall be as given below:
Table 5.4 Occupants per unit Exit width
Sl. No.
Group of Occupancy
Number of Occupants
Stairways
Ramps
Doors
1
Residential
25
50
75
2
Educational
25
50
75
3
Institutional
25
50
75
4
Assembly
40
50
60
39
5
Business
50
60
75
6
Mercantile
50
60
75
7
Industrial
50
60
75
8
Storage
50
60
75
9
Hazardous
25
30
40
5.2.4.5 Minimum Width Provisions for Passageway/Corridors
The following minimum width provisions shall be made for each passage way/corridor.
a)
Residential buildings, upto 4 dwelling units
1.00 m.
b)
Apartment buildings, hostels, etc.
1.25 m.
c)
Assembly buildings like auditorium theatres and cinemas
2.00 m.
d)
All other buildings including hotels
1.50 m.
e)
Hospital, Nursing Homes, etc.
2.40 m.
5.2.5
Ramps
(1) The ramp to basement and parking floors shall be as prescribed in the Zonal Regulations.
(2) Ramps may also be provided in the setbacks to function as fire drive cum ramp for basements, which can
be sloped considering unhindered movement of fire engine and in no case the gradient shall be steeper than
1 in 10 for Plains and steeper than 1 in 8 for Hilly areas.
(3) All structural design/safety aspects as per latest BIS Codes & NBC 2016 shall be complied along with
consideration of weight of Fire Engine & its manoeuvrings.
(4) The minimum width of the ramps in hospitals shall be 2.4 m for stretcher and not for vehicular movement.
(5) In this case Handrails shall be provided on both sides of the ramp.
(6) Ramps shall lead directly to outside open space at ground level or courtyards or safe place.
(7) No Portion of the Ramp shall project in to the road or drain outside the property.
(8) No Portion of gate shall open towards the roadside.
5.2.6
Doorways
(1) Every doorway shall open into an enclosed stairway, a horizontal exit, on a corridor or passageway
providing continuous and protected means of egress
(2) No exit doorways shall be less than 1m in width except assembly and institutional buildings where
Doorway shall not be less than 2 m.
40
(3) Exit doorways shall open outwards, that is away from the room but shall not obstruct the travel along
any exit. No door when opened shall reduce the required width of stairway or landing to less than 0.90 m
Overhead or sliding door shall not be installed.
Note: In the case of buildings where there is a central corridor, the doors of rooms shall open inwards to
permit smooth flow of traffic in the corridor
(4) Exit door shall not open immediately upon a flight of stairs. A landing equal to at least, the width of the
door shall be provided in the stairway at each doorway. Level of landings shall be the same as that of the
floor, which it serves.
(5) Exit doorways shall be open-able from the side, which they serve without the use of a key.
(6) Revolving doors shall not to be provided as means of fire exit.
(7) Mirrors shall not be placed in exit ways or exit doors to avoid confusion regarding the direction of exit.
5.2.7
Provision of exterior open spaces and height limitation around the building
5.2.7.1 The open spaces/setbacks, coverage, FAR, parking requirements shall be as per Zonal
regulations of the Master Plan
5.2.7.2 Every room that is intended for human habitation shall abut on an interior or exterior open
space or on to a verandah open to such interior or exterior open space. In case of High rise, the
driveway in exterior open spaces around a building shall be of or hard surface capable of taking
load of fire engine weighing up to 45 ton
5.2.7.3 In case, kitchen and toilets do not about either interior or exterior open spaces, mechanical
ventilation would be accepted.
5.2.8
Interior Open Space for Light and Ventilation
5.2.8.1 The whole or part of one side of one or more rooms intended for human habitation and not
abutting on either the front, rear or side open spaces shall abut on an interior open space whose
minimum width in all directions shall be 3m in case of buildings not more than 15m in height,
and in case of high-rise buildings it shall have mandatory mechanical ventilation in addition
5.2.8.2 Sunken Courtyard:
Sunken courtyard up to 3m in depth from the ground level as ‘light well’ within building envelop shall be
permitted for light and ventilation for basement area.
5.2.8.3 Skylight: Skylight in interior open space (courtyard) shall be permitted
5.2.9
Lighting and ventilation of rooms
5.2.9.1 IS Codes for lighting & ventilation requirements
Rooms shall have, for the admission of light and air, one or more openings, such as windows and
ventilators, opening directly to the external air or into an open VERANDAH.
41
Windows for all residential buildings shall be compulsorily provided with protective grills / railings (atleast
upto a height of 1.1 from the floor level) which shall be designed by keeping in mind the safety of children.
Lighting and ventilation requirements of all types of buildings shall be designed and approved in
accordance with the provisions of the following two IS Codes –
a. SP 32 (1986): Handbook on Functional Requirements of Industrial Buildings (Lighting and Ventilation)
[CED 12: Functional Requirements in Buildings] and
b. SP 41 (1987): Handbook on Functional Requirements of Buildings (Other than Industrial Buildings)
[CED 12: Functional Requirements in Buildings]
Lighting loads of various spaces of –
a. Industrial buildings shall be determined as per Clause 1, Section 1 of SP 32(1986)
b. Non-Industrial buildings shall be determined as per Clause 2, Part 4 of SP 41(1987)
Thermal comfort levels and design requirement of various spaces of –
a. Industrial buildings shall be determined as per Section 2 of SP 32 (1986)
b. Non-Industrial buildings shall be determined as per Part 2 of SP 41 (1987)
Minimum Fresh Air requirement for –
a. Industrial buildings shall be determined as per Clause 13 of Section 2 of SP 32(1986)
b. Non-Industrial buildings shall be determined as per Clause 4 of Part 3 of SP 41(1987)
5.2.9.2 The minimum aggregate area of openings
(1) The minimum aggregate area of such openings, excluding doors inclusive of frames, shall be not less than
one-sixth of the floor area. Openable part of French window shall be considered as openings for applying this
clause.
Notes:
i.
If a window is partly fixed, the openable area shall be counted
ii.
No portion of a room shall be assumed to be lighted, if it is more than 7.5 m away from the opening
assumed for lighting that portion.
iii. The area of openings as given above shall be increased by 25 percent in the case of a kitchen.
(2) All habitable rooms shall have for the admission of light and air, one or more apertures, such as window,
glazed door, opening directly to the external air or into an open verandah not more than 2.40 m. in width. In
case light and ventilation to habitable space area are through an internal courtyard, the minimum dimensions
of such courtyard shall not be less than 3.0 m. x 3.0 m. for buildings up to 12.50 m. in height. For buildings
with higher heights, the minimum dimensions of the internal courtyard shall be as given in these Byelaws.
(3) Where the lighting and ventilation requirements are not met through day lighting and natural ventilation,
the same shall be ensured through artificial lighting and mechanical ventilation as given in part-VII building
services Section-1 lighting and Ventilation of National Building Code of India published by the Bureau of
Indian Standards. The latest version of the National Building Code of India shall be taken into account at the
time of enforcement of the Building Byelaws.
42
5.2.9.3 Ventilation Shaft
For ventilating the spaces for water closets and bathrooms, if not opening on the front side, rear and
interior open spaces, shall open on the ventilation shaft, the size, of which shall not be less than the values
given below:
Table 5.5 Size of Ventilation Shaft
Height of Building
(m)
Size
of
ventilation
shaft (Sqm)
Minimum size of shaft
(m)
Up to 10.0
1.2
0.9
Up to 12.0
2.8
1.2
Up to 18.0
4.0
1.5
Up to 24.0
5.4
1.8
Up to 30.0
8.0
2.4
Above 30.0
9.0
3.0
Notes:
i. If mechanical ventilation system works in an uninterrupted manner is proposed to be installed in the building,
then ventilation shaft need not be insisted upon.
ii. For fully air-conditioned buildings the ventilation shaft need not be insisted upon, provided the air-conditioning
system works in an uninterrupted manner, also, provided there is an alternative source of power supply.
However, it is not mandatory in case of buildings where ventilation is mechanized
5.3
Building Services
5.3.1
Electrical, Air conditioning, Lift & Escalator installations
5.3.1.1 Planning, design and installations of electrical, air-conditioning and lift installations
The Planning design and installation of electrical installations, air conditioning installation of lifts and
escalators can be carried out in accordance with Part-VII Building Services, section–2 electrical installation,
section–3 air conditioning and heating, section-5 installation of lifts and escalators of National Building Code
of India. However, deviations from National Building Code may be done as per good Engineering practices.
Details to be considered for evaluating the Power Consumption for a Project is provided as Appendix-XIII
5.3.1.2 Number and types of lifts
(1) Lift shall have to be provided for buildings with more than ground plus three floors.
(2) The number and type of lifts to be provided in different buildings shall be as given in Appendix-XIVA.
5.3.1.3 Requirements of Electrical substation
The requirements of electric sub-station are given in Appendix-XIVB. The provision of electric sub-station
shall also require approval from Electricity Board concerned.
5.3.2
Plumbing and Sanitary Services
5.3.2.1 Planning, design, construction and installation of Water supply, drainage and sanitation and
gas supply system
43
The planning, design, construction and installation of water supply, drainage and sanitation and gas supply
system shall be in accordance with Part-9: Plumbing Services, Section-l Water supply, Drainage and
sanitation (including Solid Waste Management) and Section-2 Gas supply of NBC, 2016.
5.3.2.2 Norms for differently-abled within segregated toilets
i. One special W.C. in a set of toilets shall be provided for the use of differently abled persons, with
essential provision of wash basin near the entrance.
ii. Minimum clear opening of the door shall be 900 mm. and the door shall swing out.
ii. Minimum clear opening of the door shall be 900 mm. and the door shall swing out.
iii. Suitable arrangement of vertical/horizontal handrails with 50 mm. clearance from wall shall be made
in the toilet.
iv. The W.C. seat shall be 500 mm. from the floor.
5.3.2.3 Water requirement and facilities:
Water requirement for the facility may be worked out and enough storage for ½ day operation is to be kept in
storage. If municipal water supply is reliable, the toilet blocks may have underground sump that can store
half a day requirement and overhead tanks for another half. If municipal water supply is not available, toilet
block may have its own water source and pump with or without underground sump
Alternatively, a hand tube well can be used for storing water in an elevated (not overhead) tank. To minimize
the wastage of water, self-closing water taps should be used. The pans must be of Pour Flush (PF) design i.e.
with a steep slope. Traps should be of a 20-mm water seal. (Use of 50 mm water seal traps will require more
water for flushing.) If toilet is to be linked to city sewer, a master trap has to be provided at the sewer
connection for waste water line (excluding soil line).
Details to be considered for calculating Water Demand for buildings and Water Balance Chart is provided as
Appendix-XV
Table 5.6 Water Requirements for Various Occupancies / Uses (Ref. NBC 2016 Part 9, Section 1, Clause
4.1.1, 4.1.2 & Table 1)
Sl.
No.
Type of Building
Domestic
Per day
litre
Flushing
Per Day
litre
Total Consumption Per
Day litre
i)
Residences
a)
For communities with population up to
20,000
1)
Water supply through stand post
2)
Water
supply
through
house
service
connection (70 to 100 lphd)
40 lphd (Min)
100 lphd
b)
For communities with Population 20 000 to
100 000 (100 to 135 lphd)
95 lphd
45 lphd
135 lphd
c)
For communities with Population above 100
000 (150 to 200 lphd)
155 lphd
45 lphd
200 lphd
NOTE: The value of water supply given as 150 to 200
litre per head per day may be reduced to 135 lphd for
houses for Medium Income Group (MIG) and Lower
Income Groups (LIG) and Economically Weaker
Section (EWS), depending upon prevailing conditions
and availability of water.
44
ii)
Factories including canteen where bath rooms are
required to be provided
30
per
head
15 per
head
45 per head
iii)
Factories including canteen where no bath rooms are
required to be provided
20 per
head
10 per
head
30 per head
iv)
Hospital (excluding laundry and kitchen (see Note 2):
a) Number of beds not exceeding 100
230 per
head
110 per
head
340 per head
b) Number of beds exceeding 100
300 per
head
150 per
head
450 per head
c) Outpatient department (ODP)
10 per
head
5 per head
15 per head
v)
Nurses homes and medical quarters
90 per
head
45 per
head
135 per head
vi)
Hostels
90 per
head
45 per
head
135 per head
vii)
Hotel (up to 3 start) excluding laundry, kitchen, staff
and water bodies
120 per
head
60 per
head
180 per head
viii)
Hotel (4 star and above) excluding laundry, kitchen,
staff and water bodies.
260 per
head
60 per
head
320 per head
ix)
Offices (including canteen)
25 per
head
20 per
head
45 per head
x)
Restaurants
and
food
court
including
water
requirement for kitchen:
a) Restaurants
55 per
head
15 per
head
70 per head
b) Food court
25 per
head
10 per
head
35 per head
xi)
Clubhouse
25 per
head
20 Per
head
45 per head
xii)
Stadiums
4 per
head
6per head
10 per head
xiii)
Cinemas, Concert halls and theatres and multiplex
5 per
head
10 per
head
15 per head
xiv)
Schools/Educational institutions:
a) Without boarding facilities
25 per
head
20 per
head
45 per head
b) With boarding facilities
90 per
head
45 per
head
135 per head
xv)
Shopping and retail (mall)
a) Staff
25 per
head
20 per
head
45 per head
b) Visitors
5 per
head
10 per
head
15 per head
xvi)
Traffic terminal stations (see Notes 3 and 4)
a) Airports
40 per
head
30 Per
head
70 per head
b) Railway stations (Junctions) with bathing facility
40 per
head
30 per
head
70 per head
c) Railway stations (Junctions) without bathing facility
30 per
head
15 per
head
45 per head
d) Railway stations (Intermediate) with bathing facility
25per
head
20 per
head
45 per head
e) Railway stations (Intermediate) without bathing
facility
15 per
head
10 per
head
25 per head
f) Interstate bus terminals
25 per
head
20 per
head
45 per head
g) Interstate Bus Terminals/ Metro Stations
10 per
head
5 per head
15 per head
NOTES:
45
1. For Calculating water demand for visitors, consumption of 15 litre per head per day may be taken.
2. The Water demand includes requirement of patients, attendants, visitors and staff. Additional water
demand for kitchen, laundry and clinical water shall be computed as per actual requirements.
3. The number of persons shall be determined by average number of passengers handled by stations, with
due considerations given to the staff and vendors who are using these facilities.
4. Consideration should be given for seasonal average peak requirements.
5. The hospitals may be categorized as Category A (25 to 50 beds), Category B (51 to 100 beds), Category
C (101 to 300 beds), Category D (301 to 500) and Category E (501 to 750 beds).
Table 5.7 Water Storage Capacities (Ref. NBC 2016 Part 9, Section 1, Clause 4.4.10)
Sl.
No.
Description
Storage Capacity
1
In case only OHT is provided,
33.33 to 50 percent of one day’s requirement
2
In case only UGT is provided,
50 to 150 percent of one day’s requirement
3
In case combined storage is provided,
a)
For UGT
b)
For OHT
66.6 percent of one day’s requirement
33.3 percent of one day’s requirement
Table 5.8 Sanitation Requirements for Office Building
(Ref. NBC 2016 Part 9, Section 2, Clause 4.2.5.1, Table 1)
Sl.
No.
Fixtures
Public Toilets
Staff Toilets
Males
Females
Males
Females
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Executive Rooms and Conference Halls in Office Buildings
(i) Toilet suite comprising one
WC, one washbasin(with
optional shower stall if
building is used round the
clock at user’s option)
Pantry optional as per
use requirement
Main Office Toilets for
Staff and Visitors
Unit could be Model for
male/female or separate
depending on the number of
user of each facility
For individual officer rooms
(ii) Water closets
See Note
1per25
1per15
(iii) Ablution tap with each
Water closet
1ineachwatercloset
(iv) Urinals
See Note
-
Nil up to
61for7to20
2 for21to45
3 for46to70
4 for71to100
From101to
200,add@3%
Forover200,
[email protected]%
-
(v) Washbasins
See Note
1per25
1per25
(vi) Drinking water fountain
See Note
1per100
1per100
(vii) Cleaner’s sink
1perfloor
NOTE: Staff and public toilet utilities are generally Model in office buildings. Where
public toilets are to be provided independently, similar requirements as that of staff
46
toilet may be provided.
Table 5.9 Sanitation Requirements for Factories
(Ref.NBC2016Part9,Section2,Clause4.2.5.1,Table2)
Sl.
No.
Fixtures
Offices/Visitors
Workers
Males
Females
Males
Females
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(i)
Water
closets
(Workers and Staff
1forupto25
1forupto15
1forupto15
1forupto12
2for26to35
2for16to25
2for16to35
2for13to25
3for36to65
3for26to40
3for36to65
3for26to40
4for66to100
4for41to57
4for66to100
4for41to57
5for58to77
5for58to57
6for78to100
6for78to100
For persons 101–
200 add
3%
5%
3%
5%
For persons over
200add
2.5%
4%
2.50%
4%
(ii)
Ablution tap
1 in each water
closet
1 in each water
closet
1 in each water
closet
1 in each water closet
(iii)
Urinals
Nilupto6
-
Nilupto6
-
1for7to20
1for7to20
2for21to45
2for21to45
3for46to70
3for46to70
4for71to100
4for71to100
From
101
to
200,add
From
101
to
200,add
@3%
@3%
Sl.
No.
Fixtures
Offices/Visitors
Workers
Males
Females
Males
Females
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
47
Forover200,
Forover200,
[email protected]%
[email protected]%
(iv)
Wash basins
Wash basins
in
rows or troughs
andtapsspaced750
mmc/c
1 per 25 or part
thereof
1
per 25
or
part there of
1
per 25
or
part there of
1 per 25 or part
thereof
(v)
Drinking
water
fountain
1 per every 100 or part there of
With minimum one on each floor
1 per every 100 or part there of
With minimum one on each floor
(vi)
Cleaner’s sink
1 on each floor
1 on each floor
1 on each floor
1 on each floor
(vii)
Showers/bathing
rooms
As per trade requirements
(viii) Emergency shower
and
eye
wash
fountain
-
-
1 per every shop floor per 500 persons
NOTES:
1. For factories requiring workers to be engaged in dirty and dangerous operations or
requiring them to being extremely clean and sanitized conditions additional and
separate (if required so)toilet facilities and if required by applicable Industrial and
safety laws and the Factories Act shall be provided in consultation with the user.
2. Depending on the type of disability of a person and the hazard posed by the type
of activities in the factory for a person with disabilities, if a person with disabilities
is decided to be engaged for a particular activity, the requirements of accessibility
shall be guided by the provisions given in 13 of Part3 ‘Development Control Rules
and General Building Requirements’ of the Code.
Table 5.10 Sanitation Requirements for Cinema, Multiplex Cinema, Concert and Convention Halls,
Theatres and Stadia
(Ref. NBC 2016 Part 9, Section 2, Clause 4.2.5.1, Table 3)
Sl.
No.
Fixtures
Public
Staff
Males
Females
Males
Females
i)
Water Closets
1 per 100 up to
400 Over 400
add at 1 per 250
or part thereof
3 per 100 up to
200 Over 200
add at 2 per 100
or part thereof
1 for up to 15
1 for up to 12
2 for 16 to 35
2 for 13 to 25
ii)
Ablution tap
1 in each water closet
1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50
persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals
iii)
Urinals
----------
Nil up to 6
----------
48
1 per 25 or part
thereof
1 for 7 to 20
2 for 21 to 45
iv)
Wash basins
1 per 200 or part thereof
1 for up to 15
1 for up to 12
2 for 16 to 35
2 for 13 to 25
v)
Drinking water fountain
1 per every 100 or part thereof with minimum one on each floor
vi)
Cleaner's sink
1 per floor
vii)
Showers/bathing rooms
As per trade requirements
NOTES
1) Some WCs may be Indian Style, if desired.
2) Male population may be assumed as two-third and female population as one-third.
Table 5.11 Sanitation Requirements for Art Galleries, Libraries and Museums
(Ref. NBC 2016 Part 9, Section 2, Clause 4.2.5.1, Table 4)
Sl.
No.
Fixtures
Public
Staff
Males
Females
Males
Females
i)
Water Closets
1 per 200 up to
400 Over 400
add at 1 per
250 or part
thereof
1 per 100 up to
200 Over 200
add at 1 per
150 or part
thereof
1 for up to 15
1 for up to 12
2 for 16 to 35
2 for 13 to 25
ii)
Ablution tap
1 in each water closet
1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50
persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals
iii)
Urinals
1 per 50
----------
Nil up to 6
----------
1 for 7 to 20
2 for 21 to 45
iv)
Wash basins
1 for every 200
or part thereof.
For Over 400,
add at 1 per
250 or part
thereof
1 for every 200
or part thereof.
For Over 200,
add at 1 per
150 or part
thereof
1 for up to 15
1 for up to 12
2 for 16 to 35
2 for 13 to 25
v)
Drinking water fountain
1 per 100 persons or part thereof
vi)
Cleaner's sink
1 per floor (Minimum)
vii)
Showers/bathing rooms
As per trade requirements
NOTES
49
1) Some WCs may be Indian Style, if desired.
2) Male population may be assumed as two-third and female population as one-third.
Table 5.12 Sanitation Requirements for Hospitals with Indoor Patient Wards
(Ref. NBC 2016 Part 9, Section 2, Clause 4.2.5.1, Table 5)
Sl.
No
.
Fixtures
Patient
Staff
Males
Females
Males
Females
i)
Toilet suite comprising one WC and one
wash basin and shower stall
Private room with up to 4
patients
For individual
doctor's/officer's rooms
For General Wards, Hospital Staff and
Visitors
ii)
Water Closets
1 per 5 beds
or part
thereof
1 per 5 beds
or part
thereof
1 for up to 15
1 for up to 12
2 for 16 to 35
2 for 13 to 25
iii)
Ablution tap
1 in each water closet
1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for
every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets
and urinals
iv)
Urinals
1 per 15 beds
----------
Nil up to 6
----------
1 for 7 to 20
2 for 21 to 45
v)
Wash basins
2 for every 30 beds or part
thereof. Add 1 per additional
30 beds or part thereof
1 for up to 15
1 for up to 12
2 for 16 to 35
2 for 13 to 25
vi)
Drinking water fountain
1 per ward
1 per 100 persons or part
thereof
50
vii)
Cleaner's sink
1 per ward
----------
viii
)
Bed pan sink
1 per ward
ix)
Kitchen sink
1 per ward
NOTES
1) Some WCs may be Indian Style, if desired.
2) Male population may be assumed as two-third and female population as one-third.
3) Provision for additional and special hospital fittings where required shall be made.
4) Drinking water fountains are not recommended for hospitals for reasons of infection control. This is to
be decided by the health authority recommendations.
Table 5.13 Sanitation Requirements for Hospitals with Outdoor Patient Department
(Ref. NBC 2016 Part 9, Section 2, Clause 4.2.5.1, Table 6)
Sl.
No.
Fixtures
Patient
Staff
Males
Females
Males
Females
i)
Toilet suite comprising one WC
and one wash basin (with
optional shower stall if building
used for 24 h)
For up to 4 patients
For individual doctor's/officer's
rooms
ii)
Water Closets
1 per 100
persons or part
thereof
2 per 100
persons or part
thereof
1 for up to 15
1 for up to 12
2 for 16 to 35
2 for 13 to 25
iii)
Ablution tap
1 in each water closet
1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50
persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals
iv)
Urinals
----------
Nil up to 6
----------
1 for 7 to 20
51
1 per 50
persons or part
thereof
2 for 21 to 45
v)
Wash basins
2 per 100
persons or part
thereof
2 per 100
persons or part
thereof
1 for up to 15
1 for up to 12
2 for 16 to 35
2 for 13 to 25
vi)
Drinking water fountain
See Note 2
1 per 100 persons or part thereof
NOTES
1) Some WCs may be Indian Style, if desired.
2) Drinking water fountains are not recommended for hospitals for reasons of infection control. This is to
be decided by the health authority recommendation.
3) The WCs shall be provided keeping in view the location of main OPD waiting hall and sub-waiting
halls, floor wise, so as to serve the people effectively. The number of patients shall be calculated floor
wise. The OPD population shall include patient attendants @ at least 1 per patient.
4) Male population may be assumed as two-third and female population as one-third.
5) Provision for additional and special hospital fittings where required shall be made.
Table 5.14 Sanitation Requirements for Hospitals, administrative Buildings
(Ref. NBC 2016 Part 9, Section 2, Clause 4.2.5.1, Table 7)
Sl. No.
Fixtures
Staff Toilets
Males
Females
i)
Toilet suite comprising one WC, one urinal and
one wash basin (with optional shower stall if
building is used for 24 h)
For individual doctor's/officer's rooms
ii)
Water Closets
1 per 25
1 per 15
iii)
Ablution tap
1 in each water closet
1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be
provided for every 50 persons or part thereof in
the vicinity of water closets and urinals
iv)
Urinals
1 for 6 to 15
----------
2 for 16 to 50
v)
Wash basins
1 per 25
1 per 25
vi)
Drinking water fountain (See Note 2)
1 per 100
1 per 100
vii)
Cleaner's sink
1 per floor, minimum
viii)
Kitchen sink
1 per floor, minimum
NOTES
1) Some WCs may be Indian Style, if desired.
2) Drinking water fountains to be provided only when it is a separate block and patients will not use
it.
52
Table 5.15 Sanitation Requirements for Hospitals Staff Quarters and Nurses Homes
(Ref.NBC2016Part9, Section2, Clause4.2.5.1, Table8)
Sl.
No
Fixtures
Staff Quarters
Nurses
(1)
(2)
Males
Females
Males
Females
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(i)
Water closets
1 per 4
persons or
part thereof
1 per 4 persons
or part thereof
1 per 4 persons
or part there of
2
For 5to35
1 per 4 persons
or part there of
2
For 5 to 35
(ii)
Ablution tap
One in each
Water closet
One in each
Water closet
One in each
Water closet
One in each
Water closet
I water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50
persons or part there of in the vicinity of water closets and
urinals.
(iii)
Washbasins
1per 8 persons or part thereof
1per 8 persons or part thereof
(iv)
Bath(show
ers)
1per4 persons or part there of
1per4 persons or part there of
(v)
Drinking
Water fountain
1 per 100 persons or part
Thereof,Min1 per floor
1 per100 persons or part
Thereof,Min1 per floor
(vi)
Cleaner’s sink
1per floor
1per floor
NOTES:
(1) Some WCs may be Indian style, if desired
(2) For independent housing units, fixtures shall be provided as for residences
53
Table 5.16 Sanitation Requirements for Hotels
(Ref.NBC2016Part9,Section2,Clause4.2.5.1,Table9)
Sl.No
Fixtures
Public Rooms
Non-Residential staff
(1)
(2)
Males
Females
Males
Females
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(i)
Toilet suite
comprising one
WC wash basin
with shower or
A bathtub
Individual guestrooms with
attached toilets
-
(ii)
Water closets
1per100persons
upto400
Over400addat1per25
0orpartthereof
2per100person
sup to200
Over200add
at1per100
or part
thereof
1 forupto15
2 for16to35
3 for36to65
4 for66to100
1 forupto12
2 for13to25
3 for26to40
4 for41to57
5 for58to77
6 for78to100
(iii)
Ablution tap
One in each water
closet
One in each
Water closet
One in each
Water closet
One in each
Water closet
I water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or
part there of in the vicinity of water closets and
urinals.
(iv)
Urinals
1per50 persons or
part thereof
-
Nil upto
61for7to20
2 for21to45
3 for46to70
4 for71to100
-
(v)
Washbasins
1perWC/Urinal
1perWC
1 for upto15
(vi)
Bath(showers)
1per10 persons or part there of
-
-
(vii)
Cleaner’s sink
1per 30rooms, Min1per floor
54
(viii)
Kitchen sink
1perKitchen
NOTES:
(1) Some WCs may be Indian style,if desired
(2) Male population may be assumed as two-third and female populations one-third.
(3) Provision for additional and special fitting where required shall be made.
Table 5.17 Sanitation Requirements for Restaurants
(Ref. NBC 2016 Part 9, Section 2, Clause 4.2.5.1, Table 10)
Sl.
No.
Fixtures
Public Rooms
Non Residential Staff
Males
Females
Males
Females
i)
Water Closets
1 per 50 seats
up
to
200.
Over 200 add
at 1 per 100 or
part thereof
2 per 50 seats
up
to
200.
Over 200 add
at 1 per 100 or
part thereof
1 for up to 15
1 for up to 12
2 for 16 to 35
2 for 13 to 25
3 for 36 to 65
3 for 26 to 40
4 for 66 to 100
4 for 41 to 57
5 for 58 to 77
6 for 78 to 100
ii)
Ablution tap
1 in each water closet
1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every
50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals
iii)
Urinals
1
per
50
persons or part
thereof
----------
Nil up to 6
----------
----------
1 for 7 to 20
----------
----------
2 for 21 to 45
----------
----------
3 for 46 to 70
----------
----------
4 for 71 to 100
----------
iv)
Wash basins
1 per WC
1 per WC
1 per WC
1 per WC
v)
Cleaner's sink
1 per each restaurant
vi)
Kitchen sink/dish washer
1 per Kitchen
NOTES
1) Some WCs may be Indian Style, if desired.
2) Male population may be assumed as two-third and female population as one-third.
3) Provision for additional and special hospital fittings where required shall be made.
55
Table 5.18 Sanitation Requirements for Schools and Educational Institutions
(Ref. NBC 2016 Part 9, Section 2, Clause 4.2.5.1, Table 11)
Sl.
No.
Fixtures
Nursery
School
Non Residential
Residential
Boys
Girls
Boys
Girls
i)
Water Closets
1 per 15
pupils or
part thereof
1 per 40
pupils or
part thereof
1 per 25
pupils or
part thereof
1 per 8
pupils or
part thereof
1 per 6
pupils or
part thereof
ii)
Ablution tap
1 in each
WC
1 in each
WC
1 in each
WC
1 in each
WC
1 in each
WC
1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50
persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals
iii)
Urinals
----------
1 per 20
pupils or
part thereof
----------
1 per 25
pupils or
part thereof
----------
iv)
Wash basins
1 per 15
pupils or
part thereof
1 per 60
pupils or
part thereof
1 per 40
pupils or
part thereof
1 per 8
pupils or
part thereof
1 per 6
pupils or
part thereof
v)
Bath (showers)
1 per 40
pupils or
part thereof
----------
----------
1 per 8
pupils or
part thereof
1 per 6
pupils or
part thereof
vi)
Drinking water fountain
or taps
1 per 50
pupils or
part thereof
1 per 50
pupils or
part thereof
1 per 50
pupils or
part thereof
1 per 50
pupils or
part thereof
1 per 50
pupils or
part thereof
vii)
Cleaner's sink
1 per each floor
NOTES
1) Some WCs may be Indian Style, if desired.
2) For teaching staff, the schedule of fixtures to be provided shall be the same as in case of office
building.
56
Table 5.19 Sanitation Requirements for Hostels
(Ref. NBC 2016 Part 9, Section 2, Clause 4.2.5.1, Table 12)
Sl.
No.
Fixtures
Resident
Non Resident
Visitor/ Common
Rooms
Males
Females
Males
Females
Males
Females
i)
Water Closets
1 per 8 or
part
thereof
1 per 6 or
part
thereof
1 for up to
15
1 for up to
12
1 per 100
up to 400
2 per 100
up to 200
2 for 16 to
35
2 for 13 to
25
Over 400
add at 1
per 250
Over 200
add at 1
per 100
3 for 36 to
65
3 for 26 to
40
4 for 66 to
100
4 for 41 to
57
5 for 58 to
77
6 for 78 to
100
ii)
Ablution tap
1 in each water closet
1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons
or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals
iii)
Urinals
1 per 25 or
part
thereof
----------
Nil up to 6
----------
1 per 50 or
part
thereof
----------
----------
1 for 7 to
20
----------
----------
----------
2 for 21 to
45
----------
----------
----------
3 for 46 to
70
----------
----------
----------
4 for 71 to
100
----------
----------
iv)
Wash basins
1 per 8 or
part
thereof
1 per 6 or
part
thereof
1 for up to
15
1 for up to
12
1 per WC/
Urinal
1 per WC
2 for 16 to
35
2 for 13 to
25
3 for 36 to
65
3 for 26 to
40
4 for 66 to
100
4 for 41 to
57
5 for 58 to
77
6 for 78 to
100
v)
Bath/showers
1 per 8 or
part
thereof
1 per 6 or
part
thereof
----------
----------
----------
----------
vi)
Cleaner's sink
1 per each floor
NOTES - Some WCs may be Indian Style, if desired.
57
Table 5.20 Sanitation Requirements for Fruit and Vegetable Markets
(Ref.NBC2016Part9,Section2,Clause4.2.5.1,Table13)
Sl.
No.
Fixtures
ShopOwners
CommonToiletsMarket
Building
PublicToiletfor
FloatingPopulation
Males
Females
Males
Females
Males
Females
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
i)
Water
Closets
1per8orpartth
ereof
1 forupto15
2 for16to35
3 for36to65
4 for66to
100
1 forupto12
2 for13to25
3 for26to40
4 for41to57
5 for58to77
6 for78to100
1per50
(Min2)
1per50
(Min2)
ii)
Ablution
tap
One in
each
water
closet
One in
each
water
closet
One in each
water closet
One in each
water closet
One in each
water closet
One in each
water
closet
1 Water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided in receiving/ sale area of
each shop and for every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water
Closets and urinals
iii)
Urinals
-
-
Nil up to
61for7to20
2 for21to45
3 for46to70
4 for71to
100
-
1per50
-
iv)
Wash
basins
1per8orpartth
ereof
1 forupto15
2 for16to35
3 for36to65
4 for66to
100
1 forupto12
2 for13to25
3 for26to40
4 for41to57
-
-
v)
Bath/show
ers
1 per8
persons
or part
thereof
1
per6per
sons or
part
thereof
-
-
1per50
persons
1per50
persons
NOTE-
1)
Toilet facilities for individual buildings in a market should be taken same as that for office
buildings.
2)
Common toilets in the market buildings provide facilities for persons working in shops and the
irregular visitors.
3)
Special toilet facilities for a large floating population of out of town
buyers/sellers,labourers,drivers of vehicles for whom special toilet(public toilets).
58
Table 5.21 Sanitation Requirements for Bus Stations, Airports and Railway Stations
(Ref. NBC 2016 Part 9, Section 2, Clause 4.2.5.1, Table 14)
Sl.
No.
Fixtures
Junction Stations,
Intermediate Stations
and Bus Stations
Terminal Railway and
Bus Stations
Domestic and
International Airports
Males
Females
Males
Females
Males
Females
i)
Water Closets
3 for up to
1000
4 for up to
1000
4 for up to
1000
5 for up to
1000
Min 2
Min 2
Add 1 per
additional
1000 or
part
thereof
Add 1 per additional
1000 or part thereof
For 200 :
5
For 200 :
8
For 400 :
9
For 400 :
15
For 600 :
12
For 600 :
20
For 800 :
16
For 800 :
26
For 1000 :
18
For 1000 :
29
ii)
Ablution tap
1 in each water closet
1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or
part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals
iii)
Urinals
4 for up to
1000
----------
6 for up to
1000
----------
1 per 40 or
part
thereof
----------
Add 1 per
additional
1000 or
part
thereof
----------
Add 1 per
additional
1000 or
part
thereof
----------
----------
iv)
Wash basins
1 per WC/
Urinal
1 per WC
1 per WC/
Urinal
1 per WC
1 per WC/
Urinal
1 per WC
v)
Bath/showers
2 per 1000
3 per 1000
4 per 1000
vi)
Drinking water
fountain or taps (in
common lobby for M/F)
2 per 1000 or part
thereof
3 per 1000 or part
thereof
4 per 1000 or part
thereof
vii)
Cleaner's sink
1 per toilet compartment with 3 WCs
NOTES
1) Some WCs may be Indian style, if desired.
2) Male population may be assumed as three-fifth and female population as two-fifth.
3) Separate provision shall be made for staff and workers.
59
Table 5.22 Sanitation Requirements for Shopping Mall and Retail Buildings
(Ref. NBC 2016 Part 9, Section 2, Clause 4.2.5.1, Table 15)
Sl.
No.
Fixtures
Staff
Toilets
in
Shopping
Building
Public
Toilet
for
Floating
Population
Males
Females
Males
Females
i)
Water Closets
1 for up to 15
1 for up to 12
1 per 50 (Min 2)
1 per 50 (Min 2)
2 for 16 to 35
2 for 13 to 25
3 for 36 to 65
3 for 26 to 40
4 for 66 to 100
4 for 41 to 57
5 for 58 to 77
6 for 78 to 100
ii)
Ablution tap
1 in each water closet
iii)
Urinals
Nil up to 6
----------
1 per 50
----------
1 for 7 to 20
2 for 21 to 45
3 for 46 to 70
4 for 71 to 100
iv)
Wash basins
1 for up to 15
1 for up to 12
1 per 50 (Min 2)
1 per 50 (Min 2)
2 for 16 to 35
2 for 13 to 25
3 for 36 to 65
3 for 26 to 40
4 for 66 to 100
4 for 41 to 57
v)
Bath/showers
1 per 100 persons
----------
----------
NOTES
1) Toilet facilities for individual facilities in a shopping building should be taken same as that for office
buildings.
2) Staff toilets in the shopping buildings provide facilities for persons working in shops and building, as
well as for maintenance staff.
3) The number of persons against the fixture bath/showers represent the maintenance staff requiring
such facility.
4) Public toilet facilities are provided for a large floating population for buyers and visitors.
60
5.3.2.4 Construction Site
1.At construction sites, one toilet must be provided per 20 employees. In a work zone with between 21 and
199 employees, a toilet seat and one urinal must be provided for every 40 employees. For 200 or more workers,
regulations call for a toilet seat and a urinal per 50 workers. The toilet must be located within 200 m or 5-
minute walk.
2. Job sites that are not equipped with a sanitary sewer must, unless prohibited by local codes, provide
privies, in locations where their use will not contaminate either ground or surface water. Other alternatives
to a privy could be chemical toilets, re-circulating toilets, or combustion toilets.
3. Toilets should be cleaned regularly and maintained in good order, running water, must be provided along
with soap and individual hand towels.
5.3.2.5 Temporary Camp Toilets
Toilet facilities shall be provided within 60 m of the, site, which shall not be closer than 15 m of dining area
or kitchen. Make sure that toilet area is cleaned at least once per day, it is sanitary, adequately lighted and
is employee safe.
5.3.2.6 Special / Contingency Toilets
1) For Special events like open air theatre, religious/political gatherings, mela, etc. for which there are no
permanent toilet facilities, contingency toilets/PSUs shall be provided. The following considerations shall
determine the number of toilets to be provided for particular event:
a) Duration of the event
b) Type of crowd
c) Weather conditions
d) Whether finishing times are staggered if the event has multi-functions and the following guidelines shall
be applied with minimum 50 per cent female toilets.
61
Table 5.23 Contingency Toilets facilities for Special Events
Sl.No.
Patrons
For Males
For Females
Toilets
Urinals
Sinks
Toilets
Sinks
1
<500
1
2
2
6
2
2
<1000
2
4
4
9
4
3
<2000
4
8
6
12
6
4
<3000
6
15
10
18
10
5
<5000
8
25
17
30
17
3)
Special Purpose Toilets: Special toilet facilities shall be adequately provided in public projects
(transport terminals/ healthcare and other public spaces) in million plus cities for the Third gender with
appropriate cleanliness arrangements.
5.3.2.7 General guidance for water supply arrangements
1. For new construction: Provision shall be made for underground tank for the storage of water, having
capacity at 200 l. per person with adequate pumping arrangements to supply water to upper floors. Water
connection from the Water Supply system of the Authority will be allowed only for use of drinking and bathing.
For other purposes i.e. flushing and gardening etc., the individual shall be required to have own arrangements
of open well, tube well (with the permission of Ground Water Authority), rain water or recycled water, within
the premises. While according sanction to Layout Plan, the Authority shall make a special mention that
provision for space shall be kept for the construction of underground reservoir of adequate capacity along
with booster pumping station
2.The plumbing arrangement in case of new constructions shall be made in a way that the potable water shall
be used for drinking, cooking & bathing only and for rest of the uses, provision for dual piping system shall
be made for the buildings specified in chapter 11.
3. Low-capacity cistern should preferably be provided instead of normal 12.5 L capacity.
4. Provisions for sustainable methods of Water and Wastewater management and Water harvesting may be
referred from Chapter 10 and Chapter 11 of these Byelaws.
5.3.2.8 Provision for Closed Circuit Camera System
All buildings above 500 sqm. shall provide minimum two numbers of High-Definition Closed Circuit Cameras
facing the road and connected to compatible DVRs with recording facility of at least one week.
62
CHAPTER 6
6. PROVISIONS FOR HIGH RISE DEVELOPMENT
6.1 General
These provisions shall be in addition to the Chapter 4 for plan sanction procedure, general building
requirements (low/high) given in Chapter 5 of this document and structural safety given in Chapter7
6.2 Means of access: Shall be as specified in the Zonal Regulations
6.3 Parking Spaces
(1) The parking spaces shall be provided as per the provisions of Master Plan and Zonal Regulations as
prevalent. The location of parking spaces shall be well ventilated.
(2) In case of high-rise buildings parking will be permitted at any/all of the following:
a. Basements
b. Stilt floor
c. Stacked/ Multi-level/ Automated parking
6.4 Building components
6.4.1
Doorways
The doorway requirements shall be as prescribed in Clause no.5.2.6
6.4.2
Revolving Doors
Revolving door shall not be provided as a means of fire exit
6.4.3
Stairways
The internal staircases may be constructed with an external wall, or otherwise, and shall comply with the
following:
(1)A staircase shall not be arranged round a lift shaft.
The natural ventilation requirement of the staircase shall be, achieved through opening at each landing, of
an area 0.5 m² in the external wall. A cross ventilated staircase shall have 2 such openings in
opposite/adjacent walls or the same shall be cross ventilated through the corridor.
Enclosed staircase leading to more than one basement shall be pressurized.
The pressure difference for staircases shall be 50 Pa. For pressurized stair enclosure systems, the activation
of the systems shall be initiated by signalling from fire alarm panel.
The minimum width of tread without nosing shall be 250 mm for staircase of residential buildings. This shall
be minimum 300 mm for assembly, hotels, educational, institutional, business and other buildings. The
treads shall be constructed and maintained in a manner to prevent slipping. The maximum height of riser
shall be 190 mm for staircase of residential buildings(A-2) and 150 mm for other buildings. The number of
risers shall be limited to 12 per flight.
63
Handrails, to be provided on both sides, shall be of a height not less than 1 000 mm and not exceeding 1 200
mm. There shall be provisions of balusters with maximum gap of 150 mm
Access to exit staircase shall be through a fire door of a minimum 120 min fire resistance rating.
No living space, store or other fire risk shall open directly into staircases.
(2) The minimum width of staircase shall be as per Zonal regulations:
(3) Handrails shall be provided with a minimum height of 1.0 m from the center of the tread.
(4) Access to main staircase shall be gained through adequate fire resistance rating specified in Chapter12
Automatic closing doors shall be placed in the enclosing walls of the staircases. It shall be a swing type door
opening in the direction of the escape.
(5). No living space, store or other fire risk shall open directly into the staircase or staircases.
(6). External exit door of staircase enclosure at ground level shall open directly to the open spaces or can be
reached without passing through any door other than a door provided to form a draught lobby
(7). The exit sign with arrow indicating the way to the escape route shall be provided at a height of 0.5m from
the floor level on the wall and shall be illuminated by electric light connected to corridor circuits. All exit way
marking signs should be flushed with the wall and so designed that no mechanical damage shall occur to
them due to moving of furniture or other heavy equipment. Further all landings of floor shall have floor
indication boards indicating the number of floor. The floor indication board shall be placed on the wall
immediately facing the flight of stairs and nearest to the landing. It shall be of size not less than 0.5x 0.5m
and it shall be prominently on the wall facing the staircase.
(8). In case of single staircase, it shall terminate at the ground floor level and the access to the basement shall
be by a separate staircase. However, the second staircase may lead to basement levels provided the same is
separated at ground level by either a ventilated lobby with discharge points at two different ends or through
enclosures with fire resistance rating door specified in Chapter12 or through a fire protected corridor.
6.4.4
Lifts
General requirements of lifts shall be as follows:
(1) All the floors shall be accessible for 24 hours by the lifts. The lifts provided in the buildings shall not be
considered as a means of escape in case of emergency. In a dual line arrangement (lifts opposite to each other)
the lobby may be between 1.5 times to 2.5 times the depth of one car. For in-line (single line) arrangements
the lobby may be typically half of the above recommendations.
(2) Grounding switch, at ground floor level, to enable the fire service to ground the lift shall also be provided.
(3) The lift machine room shall be separate and no other machinery shall be installed therein.
(4) Walls of lift enclosures and lift lobby shall have fire rating of 2 hour; as specified in Chapter12 lifts shall
have a vent at the top of area not less than 0.2 Sqm
(5) Lift car door shall have a fire resistance rating of 1 hour.
(6) Lift lobby doors in lift enclosures shall have fire resistance as specified in Chapter12.
(7) Collapsible gates shall not be permitted for lifts and shall have solid doors with fire resistance of at least
1 hour.
64
(8) If the fire man lift shaft and lobby is in the core of the building, a positive pressure between 25 and 30 Pa
shall be maintained in the lobby and a positive pressure of 50 Pa shall be maintained in the lift shaft. The
mechanism for pressurization shall act automatically with the fire alarm; it shall be possible to operate this
mechanically also.
(9) Lifts if communicating with the basement, the lift lobby of the basements shall be pressurized as suggested
in clause 12.9.1(g) and 12.9.1(h) with self-closing door with fire resistance rating as specified in Chapter 12.
Telephone or other communication facilities shall be provided in lift cars and to be connected to fire control
room for the building.
(10) Exit from the fire man lift lobby, if located in the core of the building, shall be through a self-closing fire
door of half an hour fire resistance.
(11) Suitable arrangements such as providing slope in the floor of lift lobby shall be made to prevent water
used during firefighting, etc., at any landing from entering the lift shafts.
(12) A sign shall be posted and maintained on every floor at or near the lift indicating that in case of fire,
occupants shall use the stairs unless instructed otherwise. The sign shall also contain a plan for each floor
showing the locations of the stairways. Alternate source of power supply shall be provided for all the lifts
through a manually operated changeover switch.
(13) For Pressurization Specifications of various building components refer NBC Chapter 4 Fire and Life Safety
Pressurization of Staircases (Protected Escape Routes)
In case of High-rise buildings, “Clause-7:7.1 Fire Protection Requirements of Lifts in High Rise Buildings of
section 5 installation of lifts, escalators and Moving walks: 5A lifts”of part 8 of NBC-2016 shall be applicable
with respect to the fire ratings and other installation provisions.
6.4.5
Basements
6.4.5.1 General requirements
Basement floors shall be permitted as prescribed in the Zonal Regulations
6.4.5.2 Requirements for High rise development
(1) Each basement shall be separately ventilated. Vents with cross-sectional area (aggregate) not less than
2.5 percent of the floor area spread evenly round the perimeter of the basement shall be provided in
the form of grills or breakable stall board lights or pavement lights or by way of shafts. Alternatively,
a system of air inlets shall be provided at basement floor level and smoke outlets at basement ceiling
level. Inlets and extracts may be terminated at ground level with stall board or pavement lights, but
ducts to convey fresh air to the basement floor level have to be laid. Stall board and pavement lights
should be in positions easily accessible to the fire brigade and clearly marked ‘SMOKE OUTLET’ or
‘AIR INLET’ with an indication of area served at or near the opening
(2) The staircase of basements shall be of enclosed type having fire resistance rating as specified in Chapter
12. The staircase shall be situated at the periphery of the basement to be entered at ground level only,
from outside open air. The staircase shall communicate with basement through a lobby with self-closing
doors with fire resistance rating as per relevant NBC code mentioned above.
(3) In multi-storey basements, intake ducts may serve all basement levels, but each basement level and
basement compartment shall have separate smoke outlet duct or ducts. Ducts so provided shall have the
same fire resistance rating as the compartment itself. Fire rating may be taken as the required smoke
extraction time for smoke extraction ducts.For multistoried basements, clause 11.5 of Section -3: Air
Conditioning, Heating and Mechanical Ventilation of part 8- Building Services is applicable.
65
(4) Mechanical extractors for smoke venting system from lower basement levels shall also be provided. The
system shall be of such design as to operate on actuation of heat / smoke sensitive detectors or sprinklers,
if installed, and shall have a considerably superior performance compared to the standard units. It shall
also have an arrangement to start it manually.
(5) Mechanical extractors shall have an internal locking arrangement, so that extractors shall continue to
operate and supply fans for HVAC shall stop automatically with the actuation of fire detectors.
(6) Mechanical extractors shall be designated to permit 30 air changes per hour in case of fire or distress
call. However, for normal operation, air changes schedule shall be as given in Part 8, Building Services,
Section 3, Air-conditioning, Heating and Mechanical Ventilation of National Building Code, 2016.
(7) Mechanical extractors shall have an alternative source of supply.
h. Ventilating ducts shall be integrated with the structure and made out of brick masonry or reinforced
cement concrete and when this duct crosses the transformer area or electrical switchboard, fire dampers
shall be provided.
(8) Use of basements for kitchens working on gas fuel shall not be permitted, unless air conditioned. The
basement shall not be permitted below the ward block of a hospital/nursing home unless it is fully
sprinkled. Building services such as electrical sub-stations, boiler rooms in basements shall comply with
the provisions of the Indian Electricity Act / Rules. Boiler room shall be provided at the first basement
along the periphery wall with fire resistance rating as specified in Chapter 12 or shall be separated with
the blast wall.
(9) If cut-outs are provided from basements to the upper floors or to the atmospheres, all sides’ cut-out
openings in the basements shall be protected by sprinkler head at close spacing so as to form a water
curtain in the event of a fire.
(10) It is essential to make provisions for drainage of any such water on all floors to prevent or minimize
water damage of the contents. The drain pipes should be provided on the external wall for drainage of
water from all floors. On large area floors, several such pipes may be necessary which should be spaced
30 m apart. Care shall be taken to ensure that the construction of the drain pipe does not allow spread
fire / smoke from floor to floor.
6.4.6
Compartmentation
The building shall be suitably compartmentalized so that fire/smoke remains confined to the area where fire
incident has occurred and does not spread to the remaining part of the building. Compartmentation and
Pressurization method shall be adopted (as per Part 4 of NBC2016) to protect escape routes against ingress
of smoke, or toxic gases into the escape routes will be prevented. Pressurization shall be adopted for high rise
buildings and building having mixed occupancy/multiplexes having covered area more than 500 Sqm.
Compartmentation in high rise building should be followed as per NBC 2016.
6.4.7
Ramps
Ramps shall be provided as prescribed in Clause 5.2.5
66
6.4.8
Corridors
(1) Exit corridors and passageways shall be of width not less than the aggregate required width of exit
doorways leading from them in the direction of travel to the exterior.
(2) The width of the corridor shall be as specified in the Zonal Regulations.
(3) Where stairways discharge through corridors and passageways, the height of corridors and passageways
shall be not less than 2.4 m.
(4) All means of exit including staircases lifts lobbies and corridors shall be ventilated.
6.4.9
Glass Façade/ Service Ducts/Shafts/ Refuge Area/ Vents
(1) An Opening to the glass façade of min. width 1.5 m and height 1.5m shall be provided at every floor
at a level of 1.2 m from the flooring facing compulsory open space as well as on road side.
Construction that complies with the fire rating of the horizontal segregation and has any gap packed
with a non-combustible material to withstand thermal expansion and structural movement of the
walling without the loss of seal against fire and smoke.
(2) (2) Mechanism of Opening: The openable glass panel shall be either left or right shall have manual
opening mechanism from inside as well as outside. Such openable panels shall be marked
conspicuously so as to easily identify the openable panel from outside.
(3) Fire seal to be provided at every floor level between the external glazing and building structure.
(4) The glazing used for the façade shall be of toughened (tempered) safety glass as per I.S.2553.
(5) To avoid fire propagation vertically from one floor to another floor, a continuous glass I must be
separated internally by a smoke/ fire seal which is of non-combustible material having a fire
resistance rating of not less than 2 hours.
(6) Service ducts and shafts shall be enclosed by walls and doors with fire resistance rating (Refer Clause
12.7.1 of Chapter 12). All such ducts/shafts shall be properly sealed and stopped fire ingress at all
floor levels.
(7) A vent opening at the top of the service shaft shall be provided having an area between one- fourth
and one-half of the area of the shaft.
(8) The openable vent of minimum 2.5% of the floor area shall be provided. The openable vent can be
pop out type or bottom hinged provided with fusible link opening mechanism and shall also be
integrated with automatic Smoke Detection System.
a) Alternate vertical glass panels of the façade shall be openable type with the mechanism mentioned
above in order to ventilate the smoke.
b) Refuge areas covered with the glass façade shall have all the panels fully openable (either left or right
hinged) both from inside as well as outside. Glass quality and Practice of use of Glass in buildings shall have
to be in conformity with the BIS codes as given in Table 5.1 below:
IS Code
Specifications
2553(Part 1):1990
Specification for safety glass: Part 1 General purpose (third
revision)
2835:1987
Specification for flat transparent sheet glass (third revision)
438:1994
Specification for silvered glass mirrors for general purpose
(second revision)
67
5437:1994
Specification for figured rolled and wired glass (first revision).
14900:2000
Specification for transparent float glass.
16231 Part 1
General methodology for selection
16231 Part 2
Energy and Light
16231 Part 3
Fire and Loading
16231 Part 4
Safety related to Human Impact
Clause 3.4.8.2.2, clause 3.4.10.2 and E-4”Horizontal Exits /Refuge Area”of Annexure E; Additional
Requirements for High Rise Buildings of Part-4 of NBC 2016 are applicable.
6.5 Building Services
6.5.1
Staircase and Corridor Lighting
(1) The staircase and corridor lighting shall be on separate service and shall be independently connected
so as it could be operated by one switch installation on the ground floor, easily accessible to
firefighting staff at any time irrespective of the position of the individuate control of the light points,
if any.
(2) Staircase and corridor lighting shall also be connected to alternate supply from parallel high-tension
supply or to the supply from the stand-by generator.
(3) Emergency lights shall be provided in staircase and corridor/ passageway, horizontal exits, refuge
area; and all wires and other accessories used for emergency light shall have fire retardant property
Clause 2.13: Emergency and lighting system; Clause 3.4.6.2 Emergency power for fire and life safety
systems of part-4: and Annexure B-22.5 of Part-3 of NBC 2016 is applicable.
6.5.2
Electrical Services
(1) The electric distribution cables/wiring shall be laid in separate duct the duct shall be sealed at every floor
with non-combustible materials having the same fire resistance as that of the duct. Low and medium voltage
wiring running in shaft and in false ceiling shall run in separate conduits.
(2) Water mains, telephone cables, intercom cables, gas pipes or any other service line shall not be laid in the
duct for electric cables. Use of bus ducts/solid rising mains instead of cables is preferred.
(3) The provision of dedicated telecommunication ducts for all new building proposals is mandatory for
conveyance of telecommunication and other data cables.
(4) Separate circuits for water pumps lifts, staircases and corridor lighting and blowers for pressurizing system
shall be provided directly from the main switchgear panel (for detailed specifications refer NBC 2016, Chapter
4 Fire and Life Safety).
Clause 3.4.6: Electrical Installation; and E-5 “Electrical Services” of Annexure E; Additional Requirements for
High Rise Buildings of Part-4 of NBC 2016 are applicable.
6.5.3
Alternate Source of Electric Supply
A stand-by electric generator shall be installed to supply power to staircase and corridor lighting circuits,
fire lifts, the stand-by fire pumps, pressurization fans and blowers, smoke extraction and damper system
in case of failure of normal electric supply. The generator shall be capable of taking starting current of all
68
the machines and circuits stated above simultaneously. If the stand-by pump is driven by diesel engine,
the generator supply need not be connected to the stand-by pump.
Clause 3.4.6.2: Emergency power for fire and life safety systems; and clause 3.4.6.4 Standby supply, of
Part-4 of NBC 2016 are applicable.
6.5.4
Air-conditioning
Air-conditioning shall conform to the following:
a. Escape routes like staircases, common corridors, lift lobbies, etc. shall not be used as return air passage.
b. The ducting shall be constructed of substantial gauge metal in accordance with good practice.
c. Wherever the ducts pass through fire walls or floors, the opening around the ducts shall be sealed with
materials having fire resistance rating of the compartment.
d. Where duct crosses a compartment which is fire rated, the ducts shall be fire rated for same fire rating.
Further depending on services passing around the duct work, which may get affected in case of fire
temperature rising, the ducts shall be insulated.
e. ceiling Metallic ducts shall be used even for the return air instead of space above the false.
f. Where plenum is used for return air passage, ceiling and its fixtures shall be of non-combustible material.
g. The materials used for insulating the duct system (inside or outside) shall be of non-combustible material;
glass wool shall not be wrapped or secured by any material of combustible nature.
h. Air ducts serving main floor areas, corridors, etc. shall not pass through the staircase enclosure.
i. The air-handling units shall be separate for each floor and air ducts for every floor shall be separated and
in no way inter-connected with the ducting of any other floor.
j. If the air-handling unit serves more than one floor, the recommendations given above shall be compiled
with in addition to the conditions given below:
i. Proper arrangements by way of automatic fire dampers working on smoke detector / or fusible link for
isolating all ducting at every floor from the main riser shall be made.
ii. When the automatic fire alarm operates, the respective air-handling units of the air conditioning system
shall automatically be switched off.
iii. The vertical shaft for treated fresh air shall be of masonry construction.
iv. The air filters of the air-handling units shall be of non-combustible materials or fire rated (Refer Clause
12.7.1 of Chapter 12)
v. The air-handling unit room shall not be used for storage of any combustible materials.
vi. Inspection panels shall be provided in the main trunk line to facilitate the cleaning of ducts of accumulated
dust and to obtain access for maintenance of fire dampers.
vii. No combustible material shall be fixed nearer than 150 mm to any duct unless such duct is properly
enclosed and protected with non-combustible material (glass wool or spyglass with neoprene facing enclosed
and wrapped with aluminium sheeting) at least 3.2 mm thick and which would not readily conduct heat.
69
Clause 3.4.8: Air Conditioning, Ventilation and Smoke Control; and clause 3.4.8.2 Air handling unit of Part-
4 of NBC 2016 are applicable.
6.5.5
Transformers
(1) If transformers are housed in the building below the ground level it shall be necessarily in the first
basement in separate fire resistance room of 4 hours rating. Transformer shall be dry type and shall be kept
in an enclosure with walls, doors and cut-outs having fire resistance rating of 4 hour. The room shall
necessarily be at the periphery of the basement having separate and direct access from open area at ground
floor through a fire escape staircase. The entrance to the room shall be provided with a steel door of 2 hours
fire rating. A curb of a suitable height shall be provided at the entrance in order to prevent the flow of oil from
ruptured, transformer into other parts of the basement. The switchgears shall be housed in a separate room
separated from the transformer bays by a fire-resisting wall with fire resistance not less than 4 hours.
(2) The transformer shall be protected by an automatic foam sprinkler system. When housed at ground floor
level it/they shall be cut-off from the other portion of premises by Fire Resisting Walls of 4 hours rating.
(3) A tank of RCC construction of adequate capacity shall be provided at lower basement level, to collect the
oil from the catch pit in case of emergency. The pipe connecting the catch-pit to the tank shall be of non-
combustible construction and shall be provided with a flame-arrester.
(4) The electric sub-station shall be located in a separate building in accordance with I.E. Rules 68(I) and 64(I)
.
(5) If this is not possible due to site conditions, the sub-station shall be located on the ground floor. As far as
possible sub-station shall not be installed in a basement, for such situations special provisions like
mechanical ventilation, wherever required, cable ducting, cable trays, top/bottom entry of HV/LV cable,
hooks on Transformer(s) & HV panels, adequate fire detection and firefighting arrangement, adequate
drainage, effective measures to prevent flooding etc. shall be provided. Adequate precautions shall also be
taken for water proofing to prevent seepage of water. A ramp shall also be provided with a slope, not steeper
than 1 in 7, for easy movement of equipment’s to and from sub-station.
(6) Fire regulations – The installations shall be carried out in conformity with the local regulations and rules
there under wherever they are in force. At other places NBC guidelines shall be followed.
Clause 3.4.6.3: Substation/Transformers; clause 3.4.6.3.1Oil filled substation; 3.4.6.3.2 Dry type
substation; 4.8 Hazardous Areas, Gaseous, Oil Storage Yard, etc; 4.4.2.4.3.5 Ramps. -of Part-4 of NBC
2016 are applicable.
6.5.6
Gas supply
(1) Town Gas / L.P. Gas Supply Pipes – Where gas pipes are run in buildings, the same shall be run in
separate shafts exclusively for this purpose and these shall be on external walls, away from the staircases.
There shall be no interconnection of this shaft with the rest of the floors.
(2) LPG distribution pipes shall always be below the false ceiling. The length of these pipes shall be as short
as possible. In the case of kitchen cooking range area, apart from providing hood, covering the entire cooking
range, the exhaust system should be designed to take care of 30 cum per minute per Sqm of hood protected
area. It should have grease filters using metallic grill to trip oil vapours escaping into the fume hood.
Note: For detailed information on gas pipe installations, reference may be made to Para.9 ‘Plumbing Services,
Section 3 Gas Supply’, of National Building Code of India.
70
(3) For large/commercial kitchens all wiring in fume hoods shall be of fiberglass insulation. Thermal detectors
shall be installed into fume hoods of large kitchens for hotels, hospitals and similar areas located in high rise
buildings. Arrangements shall be made for automatic tripping of the exhaust fan in case of fire.
(4) If LPG is used, the same shall be shut off. The voltage shall be of 24 V or 100V DC operated with the
external rectifier. The valve shall be of the hand re-set type and shall be located in an area segregated from
cooking ranges. Valves shall be easily accessible. The hood shall have manual facility for steam or carbon
dioxide gas injection, depending on duty condition; and Gas meters shall be housed in a suitably constructed
metal cupboard located in a well-ventilated space, keeping in view the fact that LPG is heavier than air and
town gas is lighter than air
Clause 4.7 Gas Supply of Part-4 of NBC 2016 is applicable.
6.5.7
Boiler Room
Further, the following additional aspects may be taken into account in the location of Boiler/Boiler Room:
a. The boiler shall not be allowed in sub-basement but be allowed in the first basements away from the escape
routes.
b. The boilers shall be installed in a fire resisting room of 4 hours fire resistance rating, and this room shall
be situated on the periphery of the basement. Catch pit shall be provided at the low level. Entry to this room
may be provided with a composite door of two-hour fire resistance
c. The boiler room shall be provided with fresh air inlets and smoke exhausts directly to the atmosphere.
d. Foam inlets shall be provided on the external walls of the building at the ground floor level to enable the
fire services to use foam in case of fire.
e. The furnace oil tank for the boiler, if located in the adjoining room shall be separated by fire resisting wall
of 4-hour rating. Entry to this room shall be provided with a composite door of 2-hour fire resistance. A curb
of suitable height shall be provided at the entrance in order to prevent the flow of oil into the boiler room in
case of tank rupture.
Clause 3.4.9 Heating; clause 4.8 Hazardous Areas, Gaseous, Oil Storage Yard, etc of Part-4 of NBC 2016 is
applicable.
6.5.8
Helipad
Buildings above 200 m in height, helipad shall be provided.
6.5.9
Disaster Management / Fire Safety
Refer Chapter 12 of this document.
6.5.10 Sustainable Environment and Buildings
Refer Chapter 11& Chapter 15 of this document
6.5.11 Structural Safety
As per provisions made for Structural Safety in Chapter 7
71
CHAPTER 7
PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL SAFETY
7.1 Structural design and safety
For any building under the jurisdiction of these Byelaws structural/retrofitting design shall only be carried
out by a registered Licenced Structural Engineer. Proof checking of various designs/ reports shall be carried
out by competent authority as per Table 7.1wherever applicable.
.
7.1.1
Additional Provisions for natural hazard prone areas
Generally, the structural design of foundations, elements of masonry, timber, plain concrete, reinforced
concrete, pre-stressed concrete and structural steel shall conform to the provisions of Part 6: Structural
Design –
Section– 1 Loads, Forces and Effects
Section– 2 Soils and Foundations,
Section– 3 Timber and Bamboo,
Section– 4 Masonry,
Section– 5 Concrete &
Section– 6 Steel
Section– 7 Prefabrication Systems, Building and Mixed /Composite Construction of National Building Code
of India (NBC), taking into consideration the Indian Standards as given below.
For General Structural Safety
1) IS: 456:2000 ‘Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete’.
2) IS: 800-2007 ‘Code of Practice for General Construction in Steel’.
3) IS: 801-1975 ‘Code of Practice for Use of Cold Formal Light Gauge Steel Structural Members in General
Building Construction’
4) IS 875 (Part 2):1987 Design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures Part2 Imposed
Loads.
5) IS 875 (Part 3):1987 Design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures Part 3 Wind Loads.
6) IS 875 (Part 4):1987 Design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures Part 4 Snow Loads.
7) IS 875 (Part 5):1987 Design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures Part 5 special loads
and load combination.
8) IS: 883:1994 ‘Code of Practice for Design of Structural Timber in Building.
9) IS: 1904:1986 (R 2005) ‘Code of Practice for Structural Safety of Buildings: Foundation’
10) IS 1905:1987 ‘Code of Practice for Structural Safety of Buildings: Masonry Walls.
72
11) IS 2911(Part 1): Section 1: 2010 ‘Code of Practice for Design and Construction of Pile Foundation Section
1
Part 1: Section 2 Bored Cast-in-situ Piles
Part 1: Section 3 Driven Precast Concrete Piles
Part 1: Section 4 Bored Precast Concrete Piles
Part 2: Timber Piles
Part 3: Under Reamed Piles
Part 4: Load Test on Piles
For Cyclone/Wind Storm Protection
12) IS 875 (3):1987 ‘Code of Practice for Design Loads (other than Earthquake) for Buildings and Structures,
Part 3, Wind Loads’
13) Guidelines (Based on IS 875 (3)-1987) for improving the Cyclonic Resistance of Low-rise houses and other
building.
For Earthquake Protection
14) IS: 1893 (Part 1)-2002 ‘Criteria for Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures (Fifth Revision)’
15) IS: 13920-1993 ‘Ductile Detailing of reinforced Concrete structures subjected to Seismic Forces-Code of
Practice
16) IS: 4326-2013 ‘Earthquake Resistant Design and construction of buildings code of practice (second
revision)’
17) IS: 13828-1993 ‘Improving earthquake resistance of low strength masonry buildings-guidelines
18) IS: 13827:1993 ‘Improving Earthquake Resistance of Earthen Buildings-Guidelines
19) IS: 13935-2009 ‘Seismic Evaluation, Repair and Seismic Strengthening of Buildings -Guidelines’
For Protection of Landslide Hazard
20) IS 14458 (Part 1): 1998 Guidelines for retaining wall for hill area: Part1Selection of type of wall.
21) IS 14458 (Part 2): 1997 Guidelines for retaining wall for hill area: Part 2 Design of retaining/breast walls
22) IS 14458 (Part 3): 1998 Guidelines for retaining wall for hill area: Part 3Construction of dry stone walls
23) IS 14496 (Part 2): 1998 Guidelines for preparation of landslide – Hazard zonation maps in mountainous
terrains: Part 2 Macro-zonation.
Note: Whenever an Indian Standard including those referred in the National Building Code or the National
Building Code is referred, the latest revision of the same shall be followed except specific criteria, if any,
mentioned above against that code.
73
7.1.2
Structural Design Basis Report (SDBR)
In compliance of the design with the above Indian Standard, the Structural Engineer on Record will submit
a structural design basis report in the Performa attached herewith covering the essential safety requirements
specified in the Standard.
The ‘Structural Design Basis Report (SDBR)’consists of four parts
Part 1: General Information/ Data
Part 2: Load Bearing Masonry Buildings
Part 3: Reinforced Concrete Buildings
Part 4: Steel Buildings
a) Drawings and Documents to be submitted for approval of appropriate authorities shall include SDBR as
detailed below:
Part 1: Completed
Part 2: (if applicable) – completed
Part 3: (if applicable) – undertaking that completed Part 3 will be submitted before commencement of
construction.
Part 4: (if applicable) – undertaking that completed Part 4 will be submitted before commencement of
construction.
b) SDBR as detailed below shall be submitted to the appropriate authority as soon as design of foundation is
completed, but not later than one month prior to commencement of construction.
Part 1: Completed
Part-2, Part-3 or Part-4: (if applicable) Completed
7.1.3
Seismic strengthening/retrofitting
Prior to seismic strengthening/retrofitting of any existing structure, evaluation of the existing structure as
regards structural vulnerability in the specified wind/seismic hazard zone shall be carried out by the Licenced
Structural Engineer. If as per the evaluation of the Licenced Structural Engineer the seismic resistance is
assessed to be less than the specified minimum seismic resistance as given in the note below, action will be
initiated to carry out the upgrading of the seismic resistance of the building as per applicable standard
guidelines.
Note:
1. For masonry buildings reference shall be made to IS 4326 and IS 13935
2. For concrete buildings and structures reference shall be made to IS15988: 2013 Seismic evaluation and
strengthening of existing RCC buildings.
7.1.4
Buildings with Soft Storey
In case buildings with a flexible storey, such as the ground storey consisting of open spaces for parking that
is ‘Stilt buildings or any other storey with open halls, special arrangements are to be made to increase the
lateral strength and stiffness of the soft/open storey such as Steel bracing / Shear walls / Brick infill’s
between columns. Dynamic analysis of building is to be carried out including the strength and stiffness effects
74
of infills and inelastic deformations in the members, particularly, those in the soft storey, and the structural
members are to be designed accordingly.
Alternatively, the following design criteria are to be adopted after carrying out the earthquake analysis,
neglecting the effect of infill walls in other storeys:
a. The columns and beams of the soft storey shall be designed for 2.5 times the storey shears and moments,
calculated under seismic loads specified in the other relevant clauses; or,
b. Besides the columns designed and detailed for the calculated storey shears and moments, shear walls shall
be placed symmetrically in both directions of the building as far away from the Centre of the building as
feasible; to be designed exclusively for 1.5 times the lateral storey shear force calculated as before. For details
of design and provisions, IS 1893, Part 1 shall be referred. Further, the provisions of Clause 4.8 of Part-6 of
NBC is applicable. .
7.1.5
Review of structural design
1) The Local Authority shall create a Structural Design Review Panel (SDRP) consisting of senior Registered
Licenced Structural Engineers. whose task will be to review and certify the design prepared by Registered
Licenced Structural Engineer. whenever referred by the competent authority.
2) The Reviewing Agency shall submit addendum to the certificate or a new certificate in case of subsequent
changes in structural design.
3) Table-7.1 gives requirements of SDRP for different structures of different complexities.
(4) Buildings & structures greater than 45m m in height or more than G+14 floors will require proof
checking by SDRP. All other buildings requiring Proof Check as mentioned in Table 7.1, shall be Proof
checked by EMSE.
Table 7.1 Proof Checking Requirements for Structural Design
Sl. No
Type of Structure
Submission from SER
To be Proof Checked
1.
Load Bearing Buildings up to
three storeys
SDBR*
Not to be checked
2.
Buildings of 15.0 m height and
above.
SDBR
To be checked
Preliminary design
To be checked
3.
Buildings of 15.0 m height and
above.
SDBR
To be checked
Preliminary design
To be checked
Detailed
structural
design
and
structural
drawing
To be checked
4.
Non-Residential Buildings
SDBR
To be checked
Preliminary design
To be checked
Detailed
structural
design
and
structural
drawing
To be checked
* SDBR – Structural Design Basis Report
Notes:
1. Table 5.3may be referred for occupant load/live loads for different building types.
2.At the preliminary proposal stage of a project, the objective is to undertake feasibility study/comparison of a
number of possible alternatives of structural schemes and determine the most cost effective one, detailed
structural calculations are not necessary for each alternative scheme. However, it is necessary to determine the
member sizes and reinforcement content in order to determine the cost. By making conservative assumptions it
75
is possible to derive simplified calculations for both analysis and design. This is called ‘Preliminary or
approximate analysis, and design’.
After the most cost-effective scheme is selected and signed-off by the Client, the detailed calculations
are performed on the selected scheme to determine the precise structural members and composition (size,
dimension and stress behaviour), and this is called the ‘Detailed structural design’.
In the aforesaid, the design of structural members is typically assumed to account for all the stress
loads identified from section xx to be applicable in the given project.
3. Special structure means large span structures such as stadium, assembly halls, or tall structures such as
water tanks, TV tower, chimney, etc.
It will be seen from the Table 7.1 above that there is a wide range of structure typology, and the requirement
by the Competent Authority for third party verification will depend on the type of structure.
4. SER may adopt suitable structural design software for designing the buildings.
7.1.6
Certification regarding structural safety in design
Registered Licenced Structural Engineer shall give a certificate of structural safety of design as per Form-
XV at the time of completion, stating that the structure of the building has been designed as per the
relevant standards satisfying the soil investigation report submitted by GER and for the loads expected on
the building and that the building will be structurally safe if constructed accordingly. (as per Clause 3.17)
7.1.7
Constructional safety
7.1.7.1
Supervision
All constructions, shall be carried out under supervision of Licenced Professional who shall submit the
Completion certificate to the Local Authority for obtaining Occupation Certificate. .
7.1.7.2
Certification of structural safety in construction
Licenced Structural Engineer shall give a certificate of structural safety of construction as per Performa given
in Form- XVA at the time of completion, stating that the building is structurally safe and the construction is
in accordance with the specified designs and drawings. (as per Clause 3.17).
7.1.7.3
Inspection
All the construction for high-rise buildings higher than seven storeys, public buildings and special structures
shall be carried out under quality inspection program prepared and implemented under the Building Quality
Auditor (BQA) in seismic zones IV &V (as notified by the government).
7.1.8
Control of signage & outdoor display structures, cell phone towers and telephone Towers.
Following provisions shall apply for telecommunication infrastructure
a) Location: The Telecommunication Infrastructure shall be either placed on the building roof tops or on the
ground or open space within the premises subject to other regulations.
b) Type of structure
i. Steel fabricated tower or antennae on M.S. pole
ii. Prefabricated shelters of fibre glass or P.V.C. on the building roof top /terrace for equipment.
iii. Masonry Structure/ Shelter on the ground for equipment.
iv. D.G. set with soundproof cover to reduce the noise level.
76
c) Requirement:
i. Every applicant has to obtain/ procure the necessary permission from the ‘Standing Advisory Committee
on Radio Frequency Allocation’ (SACFA)issued by Ministry of Telecommunications.
ii. Every applicant will have to produce the structural safety & stability certificate for the tower as well as the
building from the Structural Engineer on Record (SER) which shall be the liability of both owner and SER.
iii. Applicant has to produce / submit plans of structure to be erected
d. Projection: No Pager and/or Telephone Tower shall project beyond the existing building line of the building
on which it is erected in any direction.
Provided, for TELECOMMUNICATION SPACES ANDCONNECTING HARDWARE, clause 3.1 of Section 6 of
Part-8 of NBC 2016 is applicable;
for signage & outdoor display structures, “Setion 2 Signs and Outdoor Display Structures” of Part-10 of NBC
2016 is applicable.
7.2
Inspection
The general requirement for inspection and certification of the development shall be as prescribed in Clause
no.3.15
7.2.1
Maintenance of Buildings
In case of building older than fifty years, it shall be the duty of the owner of a building, to get his building
inspected by a Licenced Structural Engineer within a year from the date of coming into force of these Byelaws.
The Structural Inspection Report (Form No.16, of the MHA Expert Committee Report) shall be produced by
the Owner to the Appropriate Authority. If any action, for ensuring the structural safety and stability of the
building is to be taken, as recommended by Licenced Structural Engineer, it shall be completed within five
years. For other buildings, the owner shall get his building inspected after the age of building has crossed
forty years. .
7.2.2
Protective Measures in Natural Hazard Prone areas
In natural hazard, prone areas identified under the land use Zonal Regulations, structures buildings and
installations which cannot be avoided, protective measures for such construction/development should be
properly safeguarded based on the suggestion given in the Report of the MHA Expert Committee - Volume I.
7.3
Registration
Registration of the required Licenced Professionals has to be done as per these bye laws.
7.4
Appointment of Professionals on Record
The Owner / Promoter shall engage the services of the Licenced Professionals for obtaining the building
licence and construction of the respective building.
7.5
Alternative Materials, Methods of Design and Construction and Tests
The provision of the Byelaws is not intended to prevent the use of any material or method of design or
construction not specifically prescribed by the byelaw provided any such alternative has been approved. The
building materials approved by B.I.S. or any statutory body will form part of the approved building material
and technology as part of the Byelaws.
The Local Authority shall promote and encourage use of pre-fabricated factory-made building components for
medium to large scale projects that have significant impact. The use of ready-mix concrete (RMC) shall also
be encouraged for in-situ concrete constructions.
Clause 11.2.6 may be referred for further aspects of Sustainability and incentivized promotion of alternative
materials, methods in construction.
77
CHAPTER 8
8
LAND USE ZONES
In order to promote public health, safety and the general social welfare of the community, it is necessary to
apply control and reasonable limitation on the development of land and buildings. This is to ensure that most
appropriate, economical and healthy development of the Town/City takes place in accordance with the land
use plan, and its continued maintenance over the years. For this purpose, the city is divided into number of
use zones, such as residential, commercial, industrial, public and semi-public etc. Each zone has its own
regulations, as the same set of regulations cannot be applied to the entire Town. Zonal Regulations protects
residential areas from the harmful invasions of commercial and industrial uses and at the same time promotes
the orderly development of industrial and commercial areas, by suitable regulations on spacing of buildings
to provide adequate light, air, protection from fire, etc. It prevents overcrowding in buildings and on land to
ensure adequate facilities and services.
Zonal regulations are not retrospective. It does not prohibit the uses of land and buildings that are lawfully
established prior to the coming into effect of these Zonal Regulations.
If these uses are contrary to the newly proposed uses, they are termed non-conforming uses and are gradually
eliminated over years without inflicting unreasonable hardship upon the property owner.
The Zonal Regulations and its enforcement ensure proper land use and development and form an integral
part of the Master Plan. It also ensures solutions to problems of development under local conditions.
The Master Plan along with the Zonal Regulations approved under sub section (3) of section 13 of the
Karnataka Town and Country Planning Act, 1961 approved by the Government, time to time shall be
applicable.
78
CHAPTER 9
9
PROVISIONS FOR DIFFERENTLY-ABLED, ELDERLY PERSONS AND CHILDREN
9.1 Applicability
These regulations shall be applicable to all buildings and facilities used by the public such as educational,
institutional, assembly, commercial, business, mercantile buildings and group housing constructed on plots
having an area of more than 2000 Sq.m. It shall not apply to private residential buildings.
9.2 Guidelines and Provisions
1.Provisions in the following guidelines shall apply:
2. ‘Guidelines and Space Standards for Barrier Free Built Environment for Disabled and Elderly Persons’,
(1998), Central Public Works Department, GoI
3. ‘Manual on Barrier Free Environment’, (2002), O/o the Chief Commissioner for Persons with Disabilities,
Ministry of Urban Development, Goo.
4. ‘National Building Code’, (2016), Bureau of Indian Standards,
5. ‘National Policy for Persons with Disabilities’, (2006), Ministry of Social
Justice and Empowerment, Goo.
6. Harmonised Guidelines and Space standards for Barrier Free Environment for Persons with
Disabilities”2016 published by TCPO.
‘
9.3 Types of buildings to adopt barrier free guidelines as notified by the State Government
9.3.1
Buildings to be designed for Ambulant Disabled People
Higher Secondary School, Conference Hall, Dance Halls, Youth Centres, Youth Clubs, Sport Centres, Sport
Pavilions, Boat Club Houses, Ice Rinks, Bowling Centres, Swimming Pools, Police Stations, Law Courts,
Courts Houses, Sport Stadiums, Theatres, Concert Halls, Cinemas, Auditoria, Small Offices (the maximum
plinth area 1400 Sqm) Snack Bars, Cafes and banqueting rooms (for capacity above 50 dinners).
Note:
a. In sport stadiums provisions shall be made for non-ambulant spectators (small wheel chair)
b. @ 1:1000 up to 10,000 spectators and @ 1:2000 for spectators above 10,000.
c. In Theatres, Concert Halls, Cinemas and Auditoria provisions shall be made for non-ambulant spectators
(Small Wheel Chairs) @ 1/250 up to 1000 spectators and 1/500 for spectators above1000.
9.3.2
Buildings to be designed for Non-Ambulant Disabled People
Schools for differently abled, Botanical Gardens, Religious Buildings, Elderly People Clubs, Village Halls,
Day Centres, Junior Training Centres, Post Offices, Banks, Dispensaries, Railway Stations, Shops, Super
Markets, and Departmental Stores.
Note: Large wheel chair criteria shall be applicable on ground floors of the following building, post offices,
banks, dispensaries, railway station, shops, supermarkets, and departmental stores.
79
9.3.3
Buildings to be designed for Non-Ambulant People (using small wheel chairs)
Public lavatories in Tourist Spots, Clubs, Motels, Professional and Scientific Institution, Museum, Art
Galleries, Public Libraries, Laboratories, Universities, College for further Education, Teachers Training
Colleges, Technical College, Exhibition Halls, Dentist Surgeries, Administrative Department of the Hospitals,
Service Stations, Car Parking Buildings, Airports Terminals, Bus Terminals, Factories Employing differently-
abled for sedentary works, Large Offices, (with plinth area above 1400 Sq.mt.), Tax Offices, Passport Offices,
Pension Offices, and Labour Offices, Cafes, Banqueting Rooms and Snack Bars (For capacity above
100dinners).
9.3.4
Site development
Level of the roads, access paths and parking areas shall be described in the plan along with specification of
the materials.
9.3.4.1 Access Path / Walk Way
Walkways and pathways (used here interchangeably shall meet the following general requirements:
a) Walkways shall be smooth, hard and have levelled surface suitable for walking and wheeling. Irregular
surfaces as cobble stones, coarsely exposed aggregate concrete, bricks, etc, often cause bumpy rides and
shall be avoided.
b) Minimum walkway width shall be provided as per B-2.2.2 (1800 mm). The width of footpath shall be in
accordance with 4.3.2.1.1
c) The walkway shall not have a gradient exceeding 1:20. If the slope or any part of a walkway on an accessible
route to a building exceeds 1:20, it shall be designed and constructed as a ramp in accordance with B-6.2.
d) Where pathway meets the road, a kerb shall be provided; which shall be designed in accordance with B-
2.3.
e) The cross-fall gradient across an accessible route shall not exceed 1:50 (20 mm/m), except
when associated with a dropped kerb.
f) The requirements for drainage of pathways shall be as per B-2.2.5.
g) When walkways exceed 60 m in length, it is desirable to provide rest area adjacent to the
walk at convenient intervals of 30 m in the form of benches/resting seats. For comfort, seat height shall be
between 450 mm and 500 mm, and the seating shall have a back rest and arm rests at 700 mm height. One
side of seating may be without arm rest to address the transfer needs of persons with disabilities. A colour
contrast should be provided around the seating area for ease of identification by persons with low vision.
h) Texture change in walkways adjacent to seating shall be provided for persons with vision impairment by
means of warning blocks (see B-2.5).
i) Gratings and manholes should be avoided in walks.
9.3.4.2 Parking
For parking of vehicles of differently-abled people, the following provisions shall apply:
Location of Parking
The designated accessible parking spaces that serve a building shall be located as near as possible to the
main entrance, and the distance from the accessible parking space to the main entrance shall not be more
than 30 m. In case the access is through lift, the parking shall be located within 30 m of the lift lobby. Kerb
ramp from parking space to an adjacent higher pedestrian path shall be provided in accordance with NBC
2016.
80
Accessible Car Parking Space Dimensions and Surface Requirements
The accessible car parking space shall meet the following requirements:
a) The minimum width of the parking space for a car shall be 3600 mm and the minimum length shall be 5
400 mm. This minimum width includes the transfer area beside the car with a minimum of 1 500 mm.
Number of Designated Accessible Parking Spaces
The following minimum requirements concerning the number of parking places shall apply:
a) A minimum of one accessible designated parking space shall be provided in every parking area;
b) For up to 10 parking spaces, one designated accessible parking space shall be provided;
c) For up to 25 parking spaces, two designated accessible parking space shall be provided;
d) For up to 50 parking spaces, three designated accessible parking spaces shall be provided;
e) For up to 100 parking spaces, four designated accessible parking spaces shall be provided;
f) For up to 200 parking spaces, six designated accessible parking spaces shall be provided; and
g) For over 200 parking spaces, six designated accessible parking spaces for 200 parking spaces and one for
each additional 100 parking spaces shall be provided.
In specialized facilities such as health care facilities, shopping areas and recrational facilities, a greater
number of designated accessible parking spaces shouldbe considered
9.4 Building requirements
The specified facilities in buildings for differently abled persons shall be as follows:
9.4.1
Approach to plinth level
Every building should have at least one entrance accessible to the differently able and shall be indicated by
proper signage. This entrance shall be approached through ramp together with the stepped entry.
(1) Ramped Approach: Ramp shall be finished with non-slip material to enter the building. Minimum
width of ramp shall be 1800mm with maximum gradient 1:12.
Length of ramp shall not exceed 9.0 meter having 800mm high hand rail on both sides extending 300mm
beyond top and bottom of the ramp. Minimum gap from the adjacent wall to the hand rail shall be 50mm.
(2) Stepped Approach: For stepped approach size of tread shall not be less than300mm and maximum
riser shall be 150mm. Provision of 800mm high hand rail on both sides of the stepped approach similar
to the ramped approach.
(3) Exit/Entrance Door: Minimum & clear opening of the entrance door shall be900mm and it shall not
be provided with a step that obstructs the passage of a wheelchair user. Threshold shall not be raised
more than 12mm.
(4) Entrance Landing: Entrance landing shall be provided adjacent to ramp with the minimum dimension
1800mm x 2000mm. The entrance landing that adjoins the toped of a slope shall be provided with floor
materials to attract the attention of visually impaired person's (limited to coloured floor material whose
colour and brightness is conspicuously different from that of the surrounding floor material or the
material that emits different sound to guide visually impaired persons. Finishes shall have a non-slip
surface with a texture traversable by a wheel chair. Kerbs wherever provided should blend to a common
level.
81
9.4.2
Corridor connecting the entrance/ exit for the differently abled
The corridor connecting the entrance / exit for differently abled leading directly outdoors to a place where
information concerning the overall use of the specified building can be provided to visually impaired persons
either by a person or by signs, shall be provided as follows:
a) Guiding floor materials shall be provided or device that emits sound to guide visually impaired persons.
b) The minimum width shall be 1500mm.
c) In case there is a difference of level, slope ways shall be provided with a slope of 1:12.
d) Handrails shall be provided for ramps/slope ways.
9.5
Stair-ways
One of the stair–ways - near the entrance / exit for the differently abled shall have the following provisions:
a) The minimum width shall be 1350 mm.
b) Height of the riser shall not be more than 150 mm and width of the tread300mm. The steps shall not have
abrupt (square) nosing.
c) Maximum number of risers on a flight shall be limited to 12
d) Handrails shall be provided on both sides and shall extend 300 mm on the top and bottom of each flight
of steps.
9.6
Lifts
Wherever lift is required as per Byelaws, provision of at least one lift shall be made for the wheel chair user
with the following cage dimensions of lift recommended for passenger lift of 13 person’s capacity of NBC 2016,
BIS. Section 4.9.3 Table no1-Desirable Lift size
Clear internal width 1100 mm
Clear internal depth 2000 mm
Entrance door width 900 mm
a) A hand rail not less than 600mm long at 1000mm above floor level shall be fixed adjacent to the control
panel.
b) The lift lobby shall be of an inside measurement of 1800 mm x 2000 mm or more.
c) The time of an automatically closing door should be minimum 5 seconds and the closing speed should
not exceed 0.25 m/ sec.
d) The interior of the cage shall be provided with a device that audibly indicates the floor, the cage has
reached indicates that the door of the cage of entrance/exit is either open or closed.
e) Graphic/Braille signage, as per the Harmonized Guidelines, shall be provided in the lift lobby.
9.7
Toilets
One special W.C. in a set of toilets shall be provided for the use of differently able with essential provision of
washbasin near the entrance for the differently abled.
82
a) The minimum size shall be 1500 mm x 1750 mm.
b) Minimum clear opening of the door shall be 900mm and the door shall swing out.
c) Suitable arrangement of vertical/horizontal handrails with 50mm clearance from wall shall be made in the
toilet.
d) The W.C. seat shall be 500mm from the floor
Other specifications shall confirm to the Annex B of part3 of NBC 2016.
9.7.1
Provision of WCs in buildings without lift:
Provision of special W.C. shall be made on all floors for buildings designed for ambulant disabled persons.
For buildings designed for non-ambulant disabled special W.C. shall be provided at Ground Floor. Size of
W.C. shall depend on the type of wheel chair used by the disabled.
9.7.2
Provisions of WCs in buildings with lift
Provision of Special W.C. shall be made on all floors. Size will depend on the category of disabled for whom it
has been provided.
9.7.3
Toilet Details: For Toilets Designed for Ambulant Disabled and Non-Ambulant Disabled.
Toilet rooms and sanitary rooms requirements of Ambulant Disabled and Non-Ambulant Disabled persons
should confirm to the Annex B of part3 of NBC 2016.
9.8
Designing for Children
In the buildings meant for the pre-dominant use of the children, it will be necessary to suitably alter the
height of the handrail and other fittings & fixtures etc.
Note: Guiding / Warning Floor Material: The floor material to guide or to warn the visually impaired
persons with a change of colour or material texture and easily distinguishable from the rest of the
surrounding floor materials. The material with different texture gives audible signals with sensory
warning when a person moves on this surface with walking stick. The guiding/warning floor material is
meant to give the directional effect or warn a person at critical places. It should be provided in the
following areas:
a. The access path to the building and to the parking area.
b. The landing lobby towards the information board, reception, lifts, staircases and toilets
c. Immediately at the beginning/end of walkway where there is a vehicular traffic.
d. At the location abruptly changing in level or beginning/end of a ramp.
e. Immediately in front of an entrance/exit and the landing.
9.9
Drinking Water:
The drinking water facility (fountains, coolers, taps, etc) shall comply with the following:
83
Wall/post-mounted cantilevered units shall have a clear floor space of at least 900 mm × 1 200 mm. the
front edge of the unit shall extend 430-480 mm from the wall. It shall have a clear knee space between
the bottom of the apron/ equipment and floor or ground of at least 900 mm wide, 200 mm deep extending
from the front edge of the equipment to back towards the wall, and 700 mm high. It shall have a toe space
not less than 900 mm wide, mm high, extending from the back wall to a maximum of 150 mm.
Freestanding or built-in-drinking water units not having a clear space under them shall have a clear floor
space of at least 1 200 mm wide mm in front of the unit.
Spout heights should be between 800-900 mm, measured from the floor to the spout outlet. The
maximum distance of the spout from the front edge of the drinking water facility shall be 125 mm. There
shall be water glass provision; a minimum 100 mm space below the spout outlet shall be provided to
allow for the insertion of a cup or glass.
Wall-mounted drinking water provision in an alcove is preferred, because it does not create a hazard for
persons with visual impairments. The provision of two drinking facilities at different heights is very
convenient for standing adults, people in wheelchairs and children. Where only one is provided, it shall
be at a height of 700 mm above floor level
Controls shall be centrally positioned at the front of the unit or, if at the side, on both sides, not more than
180 mm from the front. Control shall be easily operable with one hand with an operative force.
9.10 Refuge
An alternative to immediate evacuation of a building via staircases and/ or lifts is the movement of disabled
persons to areas of safety within a building. If possible, they could remain there until the fire is controlled
and extinguished or until rescued by the fire fighters.
a) It is useful to have the provisions of a refuge area, usually at the fire protected stair landing on each floor
that can safely hold one or two wheelchairs.
b) Hand Doorways with clear opening width of 900 mm and regular compliance
c) Have an alarm switch installed between 900 mm and 1200 mm from floor level.
Annex-B of Part 3 of NBC-2016 is applicable.
9.11 Proper signage
1) Appropriate identification of specific facilities within a building for the differently abled persons should be
done with proper signals.
2) Visually impaired persons make use of other senses such as hearing and touch to compensate for the lack
of vision, whereas visual signals benefit those with hearing disabilities. Signs should be designed and located
so that they are easily legible by using suitable letter size .The height of letters, figures, signs and graphical
symbols shall be between 15 mm and 55 mm. The minimum height of its relief shall be 0.8 mm; a height
between 1 mm and 1.5 mm is preferred .The profile of the relief should be shaped as a rounded upside-down
turned letter V.
3) For visually impaired persons, information board in brail should be installed on the wall at a suitable height
and it should be possible to approach them closely.Where an arrow is used in the tactile sign, a small arrow
shall be provided for Braille readers. On signs with multiple lines of text and characters, a semi-circular
Braille locator on the left margin shall be horizontally aligned with the first line of Braille text. Braille should
be raised, domed and comfortable totouch. It should be located 8 mm below the bottom line of the text and
be left justified.Common alternative formats may be used to assist people with visual impairments who are
best able to interpret information through hearing or touch. Embossed letters, raised pictograms and raised
84
arrows are tactile features that may be incorporated into signs, which may be particularly helpful to persons
with visual impairments.
4) To ensure safe walking, there should not be any protruding sign which creates obstruction in walking.
5) Public Address System may also be provided in busy public areas.
6) The symbols/information should be in contrasting colour and properly illuminated because people with
limited vision may be able to differentiate amongst primary colours.
7) International Symbol Mark for wheel chair be installed in a lift, toilet, staircase, parking areas, etc., that
have been provided for the differently abled.
9.12
Public Building regulations
In case of design regulations in public buildings (excluding domestic buildings), provisions for
differently-abled shall be adopted as per Appendix-XVI of the Byelaws and according to the Annex ‘D’
of Part 3, NBC 2016.
85
CHAPTER 10
10. RAINWATER HARVESTING
10.1
Rainwater harvesting principle
The harvesting of rainwater simply involves the collection of water from surfaces on which rain falls, and
subsequently storing this water for use. The rainwater collected can be stored for direct use or can be
recharged into the underground aquifers. In scientific terms water harvesting (broadly) refers to collection
and storage of rainwater from the rooftops. This also restricts evaporation and seepage into building
foundations. Every owner or occupier of a building having sital area of not less than 2400 square feet or every
owner who propose to construct a building on a sital area of not less than 1200 square feet shall provide rain
water harvesting structure for storage for reuse or for ground water recharge within such date as may be
notified by the State Government in such manner and subject to such conditions as may be provided in the
rules and guidelines issued by the Corporation, while submitting for the sanction of the building plan, shall
mandatorily include the complete proposal of rainwater harvesting and method of calculation as per Appendix
XVII
A rainwater harvesting system consists of:
i.
Roof catchment
ii.
Gutters
iii.
Down pipes
iv.
Rain water/ Storm water drains
v.
Filter chamber
vi.
Storage Tanks/ Pits/ Sumps
vii.
Ground Water recharge structures like pit, trench, tube well or combination of above structure.
Rainwater Harvesting is a way to capture the rain runoff, store that water aboveground or charge the
underground aquifers and use it later. This happens naturally in open rural areas. But in congested, over-
paved metropolitan cities, there is a need to devise methods to capture the rain water. The rainwater that is
incident on the surface/ roof top is guided to bore wells or pits or new/old/ abandoned wells through small
diameter pipes to recharge the underground water which can be used later whenever required.
Rainwater can be harvested to the extent of 55,000 Liters per 100Sq. m area per year from rooftops.
10.2
Factor Affecting Run Off from Catchment
i.
Rainfall - quantity, pattern, intensity & duration.
High intensity in less duration may get same quantity but may get wasted due to high surface
run off due to less infiltration capacity whereas mild rainfall with long duration will help in
recharging ground water.
ii.
Catchment area characteristic.
Unpaved surface have greater capacity of retaining rain water & similarly green patches of grass
can retain large proportion of rainwater.
Runoff depends upon the area and type as well as surface of catchment over which it falls as well as surface
features. Runoff can be generated from both paved and unpaved catchment areas. Paved surfaces have a
86
greater capacity of retaining water on the surface and runoff from unpaved surface is less in comparison to
paved surface. In all calculations for runoff estimation, runoff coefficient is used to account for losses due to
spillage, leakage, infiltrations catchment surface wetting and evaporation, which will ultimately result into
reduced runoff. Runoff coefficient for any catchment is the ratio of the volume of water that run off a surface
to the total volume of rainfall on the surface. The runoff coefficient for various surfaces is given in table 1.1.
Table 10.1 Runoff coefficients for various surfaces
Sl
No
Type of Surface
Coefficient of Runoff
1 Concrete roof area
0.9
2 Paved podium areas and asphalted roads
0.8
3
Tiles
0.8-0.9
4
Corrugated metal sheets
0.7-0.9
Ground Surface Covering
Untreated ground catchment
5
Soil on slope less than 10%
0.0-0.3
6
Rocky material catchment
0.2-0.5
7 Business area
8
Down Town
0.7-0.95
9
Neighbourhood
0.5-0.7
Residential Complexes in Urban Areas
10 Single family
0.3-0.5
11 Multiunits, detached
0.40-0.60
12 Multiunits, attached
0.60.75
13 Residential Complexes in Suburban Areas Apartments
0.5-0.70
Industrial
14 Light
0.5-0.7
15 Heavy
0.6-0.9
16 Parks, cemeteries
0.10-0.25
87
17 Play grounds
0.20-0.35
18 Railroad yard
0.20-0.35
19 Unimproved Land Areas
0.10-0.30
20 Aspheltic or concrete pavement
0.70-0.95
21 Brick pavement
0.70-0.85
22 Lawn, sandy soil having slopes
23 Flat 2%
0.05-0.10
24 Average 2 to 7%
0.10-0.15
(Ref: Clause 4.5.11.2 of Part 9, Plumbing Services (Including Solid Waste Management), Section 2, Drainage
and Sanitation, NBC 2016 and Rain water harvesting manual, CPWD,2019)
10.3
Rainwater harvesting techniques:
There are two main techniques of rain water harvestings.
a. Storage of rainwater on surface for future use.
b. Recharge to ground water.
10.4
Harvesting provisions in various Building categories:
All buildings in a city contribute to the rainwater runoff during the monsoon and hence such runoff can be
harvested for water reuse/recharge.
Rainwater harvesting in a building site includes storage or recharging into ground of rainwater falling on
the terrace or on any paved or unpaved surface within the building site.
The following systems may be adopted for harvesting the rainwater drawn from terrace and the paved
surface.
a)
Open well of a minimum of 1.00 m dia. and 6.00 m in depth into which rainwater may be channelled
and allowed after filtration for removing silt and floating material. The well shall be provided with
ventilating covers. The water from the open well may be used for non-potable domestic purposes such
as washing, flushing and for watering the garden, etc.
b)
Rainwater harvesting for recharge of ground water may be done through a bore well around which a
pit of one meter width may be excavated up to a depth of at least 3.00 m and refilled with stone
aggregate and sand. The filter drain water may be channelled to the refilled pit for recharging the
bore well.
c)
An impervious storage tank of required capacity may be constructed in the setback or any other space
and the rainwater may be channelled to the storage tank. The storage tank may be raised to a
convenient height above the surface and shall always be provided with ventilating the surface and
shall always be provided with ventilating covers and shall have draw-off taps suitably place so that
the rain water may be drawn off for domestic, washing, gardening and such other purposes. The
storage tanks shall be provided with an overflow.
88
d)
The surplus rainwater after storage may be recharged into ground through percolation pits, trenches,
or combination of pits and trenches. Depending on the geomorphologic and topographical condition,
the pits may be of the size of1.20 m width x 1.20 m length x 2.00 m to 2.50 m depth. The trenches
can be or0.60 m width x 2.00 m to 6.00 m length x 1.50 m to 2.00m depth. Terrace water shall be
channelled to pits or trenches. Such pits or trenches shall be backfilled with filter media comprising
the following materials. –
i.
40 mm stone aggregate as bottom layer up to 50% of the depth;
ii.
20 mm stone aggregate as lower middle layer up to 20% of the depth;
iii.
Course sand as upper middle layer up to 20% of the depth;
iv.
A thin layer of fine sand as top layer;
v.
Top 10% of the pits / trenches will be empty and a splash is to be provided in this portion in
such a way that roof top water falls on the splash pad;
vi.
Brick masonry wall is to be constructed on the exposed surface of pits /trenches and the
cement mortar plastered;
vii.
The depth of wall below ground shall be such that the wall prevents lose soil entering into
pits / trenches. The projection of the wall above ground shall at least be 15 cm;
viii.
Perforated concrete slabs shall be provided on the pits / trenches.
e)
If the open space surrounding the building is not paved, the top layer up to a sufficient depth shall
be removed land refilled with course sand to allow percolation of rainwater into ground.
The terrace shall be connected to the open well / bore well / storage tank /recharge pit /trench by means of
H.D.P.E. / P.V.C. pipes through filter media. A valve system shall be provided to enable the first washings
from roof or terrace catchments, as they would contain undesirable dirt. The mouths of all pipes and
opening shall be covered with mosquito (insect) proof wire net
For the efficient discharge of rainwater, there shall be at least two rain water pipes of 100 mm dia. for a roof
area of 100Sq.mRainwater harvesting structures shall be sited as not to endanger the stability of building or
89
earthwork. The structures shall be designed such that no dampness is caused in any part of the walls or
foundation of the building or those of an adjacent building.
The indicative provisions of rainwater harvesting in various buildings types are:
Table 10.2 Provisions for Rainwater harvesting by building types
Category /Use
Area of Plot
(sq.m.)
Provisions to be made
Other Conditions
Residential Plotted Houses
New Proposals
100 and above
Construction of Rain water harvesting
structure
Shall have emphasis on
both storage and re-
use.
Group Housing
New Proposal
All plot sizes
i.
Construction of rain water
harvesting structure.
ii.
Concrete paving to be avoided
and permeable materials are to
be used for all open parking
spaces.
Should
indicate
the
system of Storm Water
Drainage, Rain Water
Harvesting
Structure
and Recharging well.
Public and semi-public buildings
All Proposals
All plot sizes
i.
Shall
have
Rain
water
harvesting
structure
and
storage
ii.
Shall have recharge pits
Shall have emphasis on
both storage and re-
use.
Commercial /Mixed Use
All Proposals
All plot sizes
i.
Construction of Rain water
harvesting structure.
ii.
Soft Landscape provisions and
open spaces with percolation
pits.
iii.
Common treatment plant to be
made part of the integrated
development, funded by sale of
commercial space.
Should
indicate
the
system of storm water
drainage, Rain water
harvesting
structure
and recharging well.
Shall have emphasis on
both storage and reuse.
Industrial
All Proposals
All plot sizes
i.
Construction of Rain water
harvesting structure.
ii.
Soft Landscape provisions and
open spaces with percolation
pits.
iii.
Use of abandoned bore wells
for recharging of ground water.
iv.
Common treatment plant to be
made part of the integrated
development, funded by sale of
commercial space.
Should
indicate
the
system of storm water
drainage, Rain water
harvesting
structure
and recharging well.
Provision
should
be
made
not
to
inject
contaminated
water
into
recharge
structures in industrial
areas and care is to be
taken to keep such
structures away from
sewer
lines,
septic
tanks,
soak
pits,
landfill
and
other
90
sources
of
contamination.
Other proposals
All plot sizes
Similar as above
Similar as above
10.5
Rain Water Harvesting Provisions for Open spaces in cities
The open spaces/recreational land use generally constitute regional parks, district parks, playground
and stadium, sports complex, monument zones, public parking, Plaza and other public open space.
This may be as high as 30% to 50% of the city’s geographic area. All such public open spaces above
the size of 500 Sqm. shall have arrangements for complete utilization and capture of storm water
with scientific rainwater harvesting arrangements.
Following ideas may also be included:
i. Well cum Channel cum Percolation pits.
ii. Use of abandoned bore wells for recharging of ground water
iii. Artificial or natural Storage of storm water runoff from larger sites.
10.6
Ground Water Recharge
Recharging of ground water should be made mandatory not only for residential buildings but for all
types of buildings, including Group Housing Societies having a plot area more than 500 Sqm. and
above. The Ground Water Recharge should also be mandatory for open spaces like parks, parking,
plazas and playgrounds. The harvesting and recharge structures could be constructed by the Local
Authority with the involvement of community-based organizations like Resident Welfare Associations.
10.7
Enforcement and Monitoring
1. The Local Authority shall constitute an Environment Monitoring Cell which will be responsible for
enforcement and monitoring of the provisions of Rainwater Harvesting. The cell shall employ qualified
persons who are well versed with the interpretation of Building Byelaws and responsible for
enforcement as well as monitoring the functioning of the Rainwater Harvesting System.
2. The Local Authority shall include inspection of Rainwater Harvesting Structures before issuing
Completion Certificates or NOCs for service connections to the property.
3. Set an example in the city by ensuring that Rainwater is harvested in the properties assets owned
by them including public buildings, markets, centres, parking spaces, roads and parks etc.
4. The Local Authority shall also establish a mechanism to monitor 100% of RWH provisions in all
the buildings above 1000 Sqm with annual physical verification, while buildings less than 1000 Sqm
can be monitored on the basis of 10% random survey by competent authority.
5. With regard to open public spaces viz., Parks, playgrounds etc. the implementation of provision
rainwater harvesting may be done with the help of Residents Welfare Associations, Community
Building Organization and Non- Governmental Organizations.
6. The Local Authority shall ensure earmarking budgetary provision for the creation and maintenance
of rainwater harvesting structures in public spaces owned and maintained by them, like parking
spaces, parks, plazas etc.
91
7. The practice of incentives and penalties to promote rainwater harvesting shall be as as notified by
the government, considering the water level and scarcity.
CHAPTER 11
11. GREEN BUILDINGS AND SUSTAINABILITY PROVISIONS
Modern buildings consume about 25 to 30 % of total energy, and up to 30 % of fresh potable water, and
generate approximately 40 % of total waste. Sustainable buildings have demonstrated reduction in energy
and water consumption to less than half of the present consumption in conventional buildings, and complete
elimination of the construction and operational waste through recycling.
Thus, all buildings on various plot sizes shall comply with the green norms and conform to the requirements
mandatory for sanction as mentioned in this chapter.
These provisions are not specific to any rating system and are not intended to provide single metric indication
of overall building performance. These provisions allow the practitioners to easily exercise their engineering
judgment in holistically and objectively applying the underlying principles of sustainability to a development
or building facility, considering its functionality and required comfort level.
11.1
Provision for Applicability
The green building provisions are categorised as Mandatory provisions and Optional provisions.
The mandatory provisions shall be applicable to new buildings and existing buildings as follows;
a) New Buildings – The provisions of this Chapter and elsewhere in these Byelaws shall be applicable.
b) Existing Buildings
i) Buildings for which condition for making green building provisions were imposed in the building licence
or in the NOC / Clearance given by MOEF / KSPCB - All such provisions imposed shall be made within 6
months from the date of coming into force of these Byelaws.
The optional provisions are additional provisions over and above the mandatory provisions to achieve better
green rating for the buildings, both existing and new.
In case owners of properties desire to procure green building ratings from one or more rating bodies, they
may suitably incorporate the additional provisions as notified by the Government for the additional
incentives offered therein.
The green building mandatory provisions for new buildings on various plot sizes and construction areas are
indicated in the table 11.1
Table 11.1 Provisions and applicability for various plot sizes and construction areas (Residential and
Non-Residential)
Plot
Category
Applicable plot
area (Sq.m)
Applicable
construction area
(Sq.m)
Provisions
for
Residential
Provisions
for
Non-Residential
I
Upto
100
Any extent
4(a)
4(a)
92
II
Above
100
Upto 250
Above 100
1(a),4(a)
1(a),4(a)
III
251 to 500
101 to 250
1(a),4(a)
1(a),4(a)
251 to 500
1(a),1(b),2(a),4(a)
1(a),4(a)
Above 500
1(a),1(b),2(a),4(a)
1(a),1(b),2(a),4(a)
II
501to1000
101to250
1(a),4(a)
1(a),4(a)
251to500
1(a),1(b),1(d),2(a),
4(a)
1(a),1(d),2(a),4(a)
501to1000
1(a),1(b),1(d),2(a),
4(a)
1(a),1(b),1(d),2(a)
,4(a)
Above1000
1(a),1(b),
1(d),
2(a),3(a),
3(c),4(a)
1(a),1(b),1(d),
2(a),3(a),
3(c),4(a)
III
Above1000
101to250
1(a),4(a)
1(a),4(a)
251to500
1(a),1(b),1(d),2(a),
4(a)
1(a),1(d),2(a),4(a)
501to1000
1(a),1(b),1(d),2(a),
4(a)
1(a),1(b),1(d),2(a)
,4(a)
1001to2000
1(a),1(b),
1(d),
2(a),3(a),
3(c),4(a),4(b), 4(c)
1(a),1(b),
1(d),
2(a),3(a),3(c),4(a),
4(b),
4(c)
2001to5000
1(a),1(b),1(d),2(a),
2(b),
3(a),
3(b),3(c),4(
a),
4(b),
4(c)
1(a),1(b),
1(d),
2(a),2(b),
3(a),3(b),3(c),4(a)
,4(b),
4(c)
Above5000
1(a),1(b),1(c),1(d),
2(a),
2(b),
3(a),3(b),
3(c),4(a),
4(b),4(c)
1(a),1(b),
1(c),
1(d),2(a),2(b),
3(a),3(b),3(c),4(a)
,
4(b),4(c)
*Note: (1) provisions marked 1(a), 2(b) etc. are as per Clause 11.2
(2) Area mentioned above is the total construction area including the car parking area in the building.
The schemes/ projects formulated on the basis of provisions given in Master plan/ Zonal Regulations will require
approval as indicated:
EIA/ ECC (as per MoEF), NBC (latest), ECBC 2007 or latest, BEE Star rating/ LEED / IGBC/ GRIHA of TERI
Certification}
EIA- Environmental Impact Assessment Study Report,
ECC- Environmental Clearance Certificate,
MoEFCC – Ministry of Environment Forest and Climate Change.
93
NBC – National Building Code,
ECBC – Energy Conservation Building Code,
BEE – Bureau of Energy Efficiency,
LEED – Leadership in Energy and Environment Design,
IGBC –Indian Green Building Council,
GRIHA – Green Rating for Integrated Habitat Assessment,
TERI – The Energy and Resources Institute.
The prevailing provisions of the above shall be applicable. However, if there are any modifications in the
same, the modified provisions shall become automatically applicable
11.2
Provisions for Sanction of new buildings
1. Water Conservation and Management
a) Rainwater Harvesting (as detailed in Chapter 10 and as specified in Appendix-XVII)
b) Low Water Consumption Plumbing Fixtures (as specified by the Competent Authority or as notified by the
Government
c) Wastewater Recycle and Reuse (as specified in Appendix-XV)
d) Reduction of Hardscape (detailed at Clause 11.2.1)
2. Solar Energy Utilization
a) Installation of Solar Assisted Water Heating Systems (detailed at Clause 11.2.4). In case of non-residential
buildings, Solar Assisted Water Heating Systems / energy efficient centralised hot water system shall be
adopted only where hot water is required in the building.
b) Installation of Solar Photovoltaic Panels (detailed at Clause 11.2.3)
3. Energy Efficiency (Concept of passive solar design of buildings
a) Low Energy Consumption Electrical Fixtures (Electrical Appliances – BEE Star and Energy Efficient
Appliances) (as specified by the Competent Authority or as notified by the Government)
b) Energy Efficiency in HVAC systems. (as specified by the Competent Authority or as notified by the
Government)
c) Lighting of Common areas by LED devices. (As specified by the Competent Authority or as notified by the
Government
4. Waste Management
a) The Waste Management is categorised into;
i. Liquid Waste Management – Liquid Waste Management in buildings shall be as specified in Clause
No.11.2(1)(c)
ii. Solid Waste Management –
94
Solid Waste Management is further categorised into;
(a) Municipal Solid Waste (MSW) Management – MSW Management during the operation of buildings shall be
as specified in Appendix-XVIII-A.
(b) Construction & Demolition (C&D) Waste Management – C&D Waste Management during the construction,
renovation and demolition of buildings / structures shall be as specified in Appendix-XVIII-B.
11.2.1 Provision for Site level greening
In alignment with National Sustainable Habitat Mission, the Local Authority shall encourage augmentation
of green cover in the plot, by following:
The Urban Greening Guidelines, 2014 and other provisions as given below –
a.
Provision of minimum 1 tree / every 80S.qm of plot area for plot sizes >100 Sqm and planted within
the setback of the plot.
b. Compensatory Plantation for felled/transplanted tress in the ratio 1:3 within the premises under
consideration
c.
Choice of species for plantation in site and abutting the road to be adopted as per Section 8 of the
Urban Green Guidelines, 2014.
d. The unpaved area shall be more than or equal to 20% of the open spaces provided.
11.2.2 Water Re-use and Recycling
The recycled water should be used for flushing, HVAC, cleaning of non-living areas and horticultural
purposes.
11.2.3 Roof Top Solar Energy Installations
Roof top photovoltaic power station, or rooftop PV system, is a photovoltaic system that has its electricity-
generating solar panels mounted on the rooftop of residential or commercial buildings. The various
components of such a system include photovoltaic modules, mounting systems, cables, solar inverters and
other electrical accessories. Rooftop PV systems are faster than other types of renewable power plants. They’re
clean, quiet, and visually unobtrusive.
The norms for Roof Top Solar PV Installation and Generation for residential and non-residential buildings as
per the area standards mentioned in Table 11.1 shall be as follows and in compliance with the requirements
as notified by the Government.
Minimum 5% of the consumed electrical load (excluding the electrical load required for hot water generation
through electrical geysers, if applicable) or7.75 W/Sft (derived @ 12Sqm per 1 KWP as suggested by the
Ministry of New and Renewable energy) for ‘available roof space’, whichever is less.
The estimated consumed power load (at the time of applying for building sanction), to derive the required Roof
Top Solar PV Installation, may be calculated as notified by the government, -these Byelaws, provided that the
Owner / Promoter submits an Affidavit / Undertaking that if the actual consumed load during operation is
more than the estimated power load, the Owner / Promoter shall provide the required additional roof top
Solar PV installation as mentioned above. The Promoter shall be responsible for the initial five years of
operation and the Owners shall be responsible for the remaining period of operation of the building.
95
S.N
o.
Category
of
buildings/area
Area standards
Generation requirement *
Residential
1
Plotted Housing
For HIG Plots
and above
Minimum 5% of connected load or 20W/sqft for
"available roof space"**, whichever is less.
2
Group Housing
All
proposals,
as per Group
Housing
Norms
Minimum 5% of connected load or 20W/sqft for
"available roof space", whichever is less.
All other buildings (Government or Private, defined as per clause 1.16 b to g) (mandatory for buildings
having shadow free rooftop area > 50 sqmt)
3
Educational
Plot size of 500
sqmt
and
above
Minimum 5% of connected load or 20W/sqft for
"available roof space", whichever is less.
4
Institutional
5
Commercial
6
Industrial
7
Mercantile
8
Recreational
Note: ‘Available roof space’ = 70% of total area of roof / terrace, considering 30% area reserved for residents’
amenities.
If solar heating panels are erected on the roof, the same shall be part of the available roof space and the
balance area (after deducting the area covered by solar water heating panels) shall only be considered for
Solar PV panels.
11.2.4 Installation of Solar Assisted Water Heating System and other energy efficient centralised
hot water system in Building
No new building in the categories mentioned in Table 11.1 in which there is a system of installation for
supplying hot water shall be built unless the system of the installation is having an auxiliary solar assisted
water heating system or other permitted centralised hot water system specified in these Byelaws. Wherever
hot water requirement is continuous, auxiliary heating arrangement either with electric elements or oil of
adequate capacity can be provided.
Clearance of plan for the construction of new buildings of the aforesaid categories shall only be given if they
have a provision in the building design itself for an insulated pipeline from the rooftop in the building to
various distribution points where hot water is required. The building must have a provision for continuous
water supply to the solar water heating system or any other energy efficient centralised water heating system,
such as Heat Pump etc. The building should also have open space on the rooftop, which receives direct
sunlight. The load bearing capacity of the roof should at least be 50 kg/Sq. All new buildings of above said
categories must complete installation of solar water heating systems before obtaining necessary licence to
commence their business.
The capacity and specifications of the Solar Assisted Water Heating Systems shall be as specified in these
Byelaws.
Normal electric geysers may also be permitted for hot water generation, provided that additional Solar PV
Installation is done in the building for the additional power consumed for operating such electric geysers,
over and above the Solar PV installation required to be provided as per clause 11.2.3. If the available roof
96
space is not sufficient to provide the additional Roof top solar PV installation equivalent to the additional
power consumed for hot water generation, the shortfall shall be substituted through solar PV installations
elsewhere in the plot or through ‘Off site solar power generation’.
Note: ‘Off site solar power generation’ means the solar power generated outside the plot by the owner /
promoter or purchase of Solar power from third party Solar power generators through a power purchase
agreement made between such agency and the owner / promoter to purchase solar power equivalent to the
shortfall of solar power generation within the plot (required for the additional electric power consumed for hot
water generation).
Specifications: Installation of Solar Assisted Water Heating Systems shallconform to BIS specification IS
12933. The solar collectors used in the systemshall have the BIS certification mark.”
11.2.5 Sustainable Solid Waste Management
Zero Waste is a concept of waste management and planning approaches that emphasize waste prevention
as opposed to end waste management. This means restructuring production and distribution systems,
designing and managing products and processes to systematically follow the 3R rule of Reduce, Re-use and
Re-cycle the volume of waste, to conserve and recover all used resources, and therefore eliminating all
discharges to landfills, and prevent air, water and land pollution.
Zero Waste/ land- fill can be achieved by adopting systematic approach of segregation at source by planning,
by collection facilitation and most importantly by creating public awareness.
The green waste can be converted into fuel cakes, kitchen waste into manure, construction & demolition
waste into bricks, plastic waste into oil, paper, glass and steel back into the same and all residual inert
materials can also be converted into bricks.
The process to be adopted by the Local Authority and the Owner / Promoter of the buildings categorised in
Table 11.1 for Solid waste management shall be as mentioned in Appendix XVIIIA & XVIIIB
11.2.6 Sustainability of Building Materials
Sustainability of natural resources for building materials shall be ensured through conservation of available
natural resources and use of supplementary materials such as industrial/agricultural by-products,
renewable resources, factory-made building components and recycled construction and demolition waste.
Supplementary building materials (derived or processed waste) shall be suitably used in combination with
conventional resources offers dual advantages in purview of health & environmental benefits.
Use of Factory made pre-fab/pre-cast and recycled components with green benefits:
a)
Panels, hollow slabs, hollow blocks–etc. - conservation of materials, less water requirement
b)
Fly Ash bricks, Portland Pozzolana cement, Fly ash concrete, phosphor gypsum-based walling &
roofing panels, particle wood – recycled use of industrial/agricultural by-products. (Ref. Table 14)
c)
Fly ash/ AAC (Autoclaved aerated light weight concrete) panels/ CLC (Cellular light weight concrete)
panels- ensures thermal comfort (significant reduction in air conditioning requirement)
d)
Use of bamboo & rapidly growing plantation timbers- environmental benefits. Local materials are
generally suitable for prevailing geo-climatic conditions & have advantage of low transportation cost
& time. Sustainable use of building materials shall be encouraged which may combine certain
mandatory provisions and incentives.
97
The above provision is not included in the mandatory provisions but to avail additional incentives the
above provision may be adopted.
11.2.7 Sustainable C&D Waste Management
The process to be adopted by the Local Authority and the owner / promoter of the buildings for C&D
waste management shall be as mentioned in Appendix XVIII.
11.3
Various Guidelines for Green Rating System
The
Government
shall
notify
separate
Green
Rating
systems
for
buildings
by
selectively
combining/adopting/amending the provisions between the following guidelines:
1. IGBC guidelines by the Confederation of Indian Industries.
2. GRIHA guidelines by the Ministry of New and Renewable Energy, GoI. In pursuance of the National
Sustainable Habitat Mission on Energy Efficiency in Buildings, the Local Authority shall encourage the
provisions of the following Energy efficiency guidelines by certain mandatory provisions and incentives-
3. LEED Guidelines
4. ECBC guidelines prepared by Bureau of Energy Efficiency, Ministry of Power GoI
5. Model Energy Efficiency guidelines. (NSMH Sub report by Bureau of Energy Efficiency)
98
CHAPTER 12
12. FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
12.1
Scope
This part covers the requirements of the fire protection for the multi-storeyed buildings (high rise
buildings-as specified by fire department ) and low occupancies of categories such as Assembly,
Institutional, Educational (more than two storeyed and built-up area exceeds 1000Sq.m), Business
(where plot area exceeds 500 Sqm), Mercantile (where aggregate covered area exceeds 750 Sqm),
Hotel, Hospital, Nursing Homes, Underground Complexes, Industrial Storage, Meeting/Banquet
Halls, Hazardous Occupancies.
The requirements of NBC-2016 Part 4. and THE KARNATAKA FIRE FORCE ACT are applicable.
12.2
Procedure for obtaining NOC and Clearance Certificate from DFES
The procedure of obtaining NOC from Department of Fire & Emergency Services (DFES) is detailed in
clause no. 3.10.5 and the procedure of obtaining Clearance Certificate is detailed in Clause no. 3.18
12.3
Renewal of fire clearance
On
the
basis
of
undertaking
given
by
the
Fire
Consultant
/
Architect,
the
Chief
Fire
Officer
shall
renew
the
fire
clearance
in
respect
of
the
following
buildings
on
annual basis: -
1) Public entertainment and assembly
2) Hospitals
3) Hotels
4) Underground shopping complex and all high-rise buildings
12.4 Fee
For augmentation of fire service facilities for effecting rescue/firefighting operation in high rise building, fee
payable to Chief Fire Officer by the applicant(s) along with sets of plans for obtaining the No Objection
Certificate shall be as notified by the Government.
12.5 Responsibility of providing Fire Protection & Fire Fighting Measures
The engaged Licensed Professional of the project shall be responsible for making provisions for fire
protection and firefighting measure as provided in this Chapter
12.6 Terminology
For the purpose of this Chapter all the technical terms shall have the meaning as defined in National
Building Code of India, Part-IV, Fire Protection as amended from time to time but for the terms which
are defined otherwise in these Byelaws.
12.7 General
The DFES may insist on suitable provisions in the buildings from fire safety and means of escape
point of view depending on the occupancy, height or on account of new developments creating special
fire hazard, in addition to the provision of these Building Byelaws and part IV (Fire Protection) of
National Building Code of India, which are not contradicting to the provision of the Zonal Regulations.
99
12.7.1 Fire Resistance of Types of Constructions / Building Components
The fire resistance ratings for various types of construction for structural and non-structural
members shall be as given in Table 1 of Part IV of the NBC, 2016.Building elements/components
such as walls, columns, beams and floors shall have the requisite fire resistance rating in accordance
with the accepted standards at Tables 10 to 26 of Part IV of the NBC.
12.7.2 Means of Access
As provided in Zonal Regulations.
12.7.3 Provisions of Exterior Open Spaces around the building:
As provided in Zonal Regulations
12.7.4 Exit Requirement
As provided in Section 4.2 of Part 4, NBC 2016
As provided in Section 4.2 of Part 4, NBC 2016
Type of Exits: As provided in Section 4.2 of Part 4, NBC 2016
Number of Size of Exits: As provided in Section 4.4.2.1 of Part 4, NBC 2016.
Arrangements of Exits: As provided in Section4.4.2.2 of Part 4, NBC 2016
Occupant Load: As provided in Section 4.3 of Part 4, NBC 2016.
Capacity of Exit: As provided in Section4.4.2.3 of Part 4, NBC 2016
Staircase Requirements: As provided in Section 4.4.2.4.3 of Part 4, NBC 2016.
Minimum Width Provision for Stairways: As provided in Section 4.4.2.4.3.2 of Part 4, NBC 2016
Minimum Width Provision for Passageway/Corridors: As provided in Section 4.4.2.4.2 of Part 4, NBC 2016
Doorways: As provided in Section 4.4.2.4.1of Part 4, NBC 2016
Stairways: As provided in Section 4.4.2.4.3.2 of Part 4, NBC 2016
12.8 Fire Escapes or External Stairs:
1. Fire escape including Occupant load and Travel distance shall not be taken into account while
calculating the number of staircases for a building.
2. All fire escapes shall be directly connected to the ground.
3. Entrance to the fire escape shall be separate and remote from internal staircase.
4. The route to fire escape shall be free of obstructions at all times except the doorway leading to the
fire escape which shall have the required fire resistance.
5. Fire escape shall be constructed of non-combustible materials.
100
6. Fire escape stairs shall have straight flight not less than 125 cm wide with 25cm treads and risers
not more than 19 cm.
7. Handrails shall be at a height not less than 100 cm.
8. Fire escape staircase in the mercantile, business, assembly, hotel buildings above 24 m. height shall
be a fire tower and in such a case width of the same shall not be less than the width of the main
staircase. No combustible material shall be allowed in the fire tower.
12.8.1 Spiral Stairs
1. The use of spiral staircase shall be limited to low occupant load and to building height of9 m.
2. A spiral stair shall not be less than 150 cm in diameter and shall be designed to give the adequate
headroom.
12.8.2 Staircase Enclosures
1. The external enclosing walls of the staircase shall be of the brick or the R.C.C.
Construction having fire resistance of not less than two hours. All enclosed staircases shall have access
through self-closing door of one-hour fire resistance. These shall be single swing doors opening in the
direction of the escape. The door shall be fitted with the check action door closers.
2. The staircase enclosures on the external wall of the building shall be ventilated to the atmosphere at
each landing.
3. Permanent vent at the top equal to the 5% of the cross-sectional area of the enclosure and openable
sashes at each floor level with area equal to 1 to 15% of the cross-sectional area of the enclosure on
external shall be provided. The roof of the shaft shall be at least 1 m. above the surrounding roof.
There shall be no glazing or the glass bricks in any internal closing wall of staircase. If the staircase
is in the core of the building and cannot be ventilated at each landing, a positive of 5-mm. e.g. by
electrically operated blower/blowers shall be maintained.
4. The mechanism for pressurizing the staircase shaft shall be so installed that the same shall operate
automatically on fire alarm system/sprinkler system and be provided with manual operation
facilities.
12.8.3 Ramps
1. Ramps of slope of not more than 1 in 8 may be substituted for and shall comply with all the applicable
requirements of all required stairways as to enclosure capacity and limiting dimensions. Larger slopes
shall be provided for special uses but in no case greater than 1 in 8. For all slopes steeper than 1 in
10 and where the use is such as to involve danger of slipping, the ramp shall be surfaced with
approved non-slipping material.
2. The minimum width of the ramps in the Hospitals shall be 3.5 m. and, in the basement, using car
parking shall be 6.0 m or as specified in the Zonal Regulations.
3. Handrails shall be provided on both sides of the ramp.
4. Ramp shall lead directly to outside open space at ground level or courtyards of safe place.
5. For building above 24.0 m. in height, access to ramps from any floor of the building shall be through
smoke fire check door.
101
6. In case of nursing homes, hospitals etc. area exceeding 300Sq.m at each floor one of the exit facility
shall be a ramp of not less than 3.5 m. in width.
12.9 Provision of lifts
1) Provision of the lifts shall be made for all multi-storeyed building having a height of 15.0 m. and above.
2) All the floors shall be accessible for 24 hours by the lift. The lift provided in the buildings shall not be
considered as a means of escape in case of emergency.
3) Grounding switch at ground floor level to enable the fire service to ground the fire man lift car in case of
emergency shall also be provided.
4) The lift machine room shall be separate and no other machinery be installed in it.
5) The Karnataka Lifts Escalators and Passenger Conveyors Act,2012 shall also be complied with.
12.9.1 Lift Enclosure / Lift
General requirements shall be as follows
a)
Walls of lift enclosures shall have a fire rating of two hours. Lift shafts shall have a vent at the top of
area not less than 0.2 Sqm
b)
Lift motor room shall be located preferably on top of the shaft and separated from the shaft by the
floor of the room (not applicable for machine room less lifts).
c)
Landing door in lift enclosures shall have a fire resistance of not less than one hour.
d)
The number of lifts in one lift bank shall not exceed four. A wall of two hours fire rating shall separate
individual shafts in a bank.
e)
Lift car door shall have a fire resistance rating of 1 hour.
f)
For buildings 15.0 m. and above in height, collapsible gates shall not be permitted for lifts and solid
doors with fire resistance of at least one hour shall be provided.
g)
If the lift shaft and lobby is in the core of the building a positive pressure between 25 and 30 pa shall
be maintained in the lobby and a possible pressure of 50 pa shall be maintained in the lift shaft. The
mechanism for the pressurization shall act automatically with the fire alarm/sprinkler system and it
shall be possible to operate this mechanically also.
h) Exit from the lift lobby, if located in the core of the building, shall be through a self-closing fire smoke
check door of one-hour fire resistance.
i)
Lift shall not normally communicate with the basement. If, however, lifts are in communication, the
lift lobby of the basement shall be pressurized as in (g) with self-closing door as in (h).
j)
Grounding switch (es), at ground floor level shall be provided to enable the fire service to ground the
lifts.
k)
Telephone/talk back communication facilities may be provided in lift cars for communication system
and lifts shall be connected to the fire control room of the building.
102
l)
Suitable arrangements such as providing slope in the floor of the lift lobby shall be made to prevent
water used during firefighting, etc. at any landing from entering the lift shafts.
m) A sign shall be posted and maintained on every floor at or near the lift indicating that in case of fire,
occupants shall use the stairs unless instructed otherwise. The sign shall also contain a plan for each
floor showing the location of the stairways. Floor marking shall be done at each floor on the wall in
front of the lift-landing door.
n) Alternate power supply shall be provided in all the lifts.
12.9.2 Fire Lift
Following details shall apply for a fire lift in addition to above requirements:
a)
To enable fire service personnel to reach the upper floors with the minimum delay, one or more of the
lifts shall be so designed so as to be available for the exclusive use of the fireman in an emergency
and be directly accessible to every dwelling/lettable floor space on each floor.
b)
The lift shall have a floor area of not less than 1.4 Sqm It shall have a loading capacity of not less
than 545 kg. (8 persons lift) with automatic closing doors.
c)
The electric supply shall be on a separate service from electric supply mains in a building and the
cables run in a route safe from fire that is within a lift shaft. Lights and fans in the elevator having
wooden panelling or sheet steel construction shall be operated on 24-volt supply.
d)
In case of failure of normal electric supply, it shall automatically switch over to the alternate supply.
For apartment houses, this changeover of supply could be done through manually operated
changeover switch. Alternatively, the lift should be so wired that in case of power failure, it comes
down at the ground level and comes to stand still with door open.
e)
The operation of a fire lift shall by a single toggle of two-button switch situated in a glass-fronted box
adjacent to the lift at the entrance level. When the switches on landing; call points will become
inoperative and the lift will be on car control only or on a priority control device. When the switch is
off, the lift will return to normal working. This lift can be used by the occupants in normal times.
f)
The words ‘F1RE LIFT’ shall be conspicuously displayed in fluorescent paint on the lift landing doors
at each floor level.
g)
The speed of the fire lift shall be as specified in NBC 2016.
Buildings of Height as per requirement of fire department and above clause 7.1.1 sub clause (x)
Operational requirements of fireman’s Lift of NBC 2016 is applicable
12.10 Basement
As provided in Clause 5.1.9 and 6.4.5of these Building Byelaws.
12.10.1 Requirements
1)
The access to the basement shall be either from the main or alternate staircase providing access
and exit from higher floors. Where the staircase is continuing, the same shall be enclosed type
serving as a fire separation from the basement floor and higher floors. Open ramps shall be
permitted if they are constructed within the building line subject to the provision of the (iv).
103
2)
In case of basement for office, sufficient number of exit ways and access ways shall be provided
with a travel distance not more than 15.0 m. The travel distance in case of dead-end shall be 7.5
m.
3)
All floors shall be compartmented/zoned with area of each compartment being not more than
750 m2. The maximum size of the compartment shall be as follows in case of sprinklered
basement/building.
SI
No.
Use
Compartmentation
Area (m²)
i)
Basement car parking
3,000
ii)
Basements (other than car
parking)
2,000
iii)
Institutional buildings:
Subdivision C-1
1,800
iv)
Institutional buildings:
Subdivision C-2 and C-3
1,125
v)
Mercantile and assembly
buildings
2,000
vi)
Business buildings
3,000
vii)
All other buildings (excluding
low hazard and moderate
hazard industrial buildings and
storage buildings)
750
Each compartment shall have ventilation standards as laid down in Bye-Laws separately and independently.
The partition shall be made in consultation with Chief Fire Officer.
4)
The first basement (fully below ground level) can be used or services/parking/other permissible
services. Lower basements, if provided, shall exclusively be used for the uses permitted in the
Zonal Regulations only.
5)
Each basement shall be separately ventilated. Vents with cross-sectional area(aggregate) not less
than 2.5 percent of the floor area spread evenly round the perimeter of the basement shall be
provided in the form of grills or breakable starboard lights or pavement lights or by way of shafts.
Alternatively, a system of air inlets shall be provided at basement floor level and smoke outlets
at basement ceiling level. Inlets and extracts may be terminated at ground level with starboard
or pavement lights as before. But ducts to convey fresh air to the basement floor level have to be
laid. Starboard and pavement lights should be in positions easily accessible to the firemen and
clearly marked ‘SMOKE
OUTLET’ or ‘AIR INLET’ with an indication of area served at or near the opening.
6)
The staircase of basement shall be of enclosed type having fire resistance of not less than two
hours and shall be situated at the periphery of the basement to be entered at ground level only
from the open air and in such positions that smoke from any fire in the basement shall not
obstruct any exit serving the ground and upper stories of the building and shall communicate
with basement through a lobby provided with fire resisting self-closing door of one hour rating.
In case of basement being used as car parking only, the travel distance shall be 45 m
7)
In multi-storeyed basements, intake duct may serve all basements levels, but each basement and
basement compartment shall have separate smoke outlet duct or ducts. Mechanical extractors
for smoke venting system from lower basement levels shall also be provided. The system shall be
104
of such design as to operate on actuation of smoke, heat sensitive detectors/sprinklers, if
installed, and shall have a considerably superior performance compared to the standard units.
It shall also have an arrangement to start it manually.
8)
Mechanical extractors shall have an internal locking arrangement so that extractors shall
continue to operate and supply fans shall stop automatically with the actuation of fire detectors.
Mechanical extractors shall be designed to permit 30 air changes per hour in case of fire or
distress call. However, for normal operation, only 30 air changes or any other convenient factor
can be maintained.
9)
Mechanical extractors shall have an alternate source of power supply.
10) Ventilating ducts shall be integrated with the structure and made out of brick masonry or RCC
as far as possible and when this duct crosses the transformer area of electrical switchboard, fire
dampers shall be provided.
11) Kitchens working on gas fuel shall not be permitted in basement/sub-basement.
12) If cut-outs are provided from basement to the upper floors or to the atmosphere, all side cut-out
openings in the basements shall be protected by sprinkler headset closed spacing so as to form
a water curtain in the event of a fire.
13) Dewatering pump shall be provided in all bases.
12.11 Provision of helipad
All high-rise buildings of height 200 m. and above shall have provision for a Helipad as per clause no
6.5.8 of the Byelaws. The same shall be approved by the Authority.
12.12 Service ducts/refuge chute
a)
Service duct shall be enclosed by walls and door, if any, of 2 hours fire rating. If ducts are larger than
10 Sqm the floor should seal them, but provide suitable opening for the pipes to pass through, with
the gaps sealed.
b)
A vent opening at the top of the service shaft shall be provided between one fourth and one-half of
the area of the shaft. Refuge chutes shall have an outlet at least of wall of non-combustible material
with fire resistance of not less than two hours. They shall not be located within the staircase enclosure
or service shafts or air-conditioning shafts. Inspection panel and door shall be tight fitting with 1
hour fire resistance; the chutes should be as far away as possible form exits.
c)
Refuse chutes, if any provided in a building, shall have opening at least 1 m above roof level for
venting purpose and they shall have an enclosure wall of non-combustible material with fire
resistance of not less than 120 min. They shall not be located within the staircase enclosure or service
shafts, or air conditioning shafts. Refuse chutes inspection panel and doors shall be tight fitting with
60 min fire resistance. Sprinkler protection system shall be provided for the refuse chutes. Refuse
chutes shall be at least 6 m away from exits.
12.13 Electrical services
Electrical Services shall conform to the following:
a)
The electric distribution cables/wiring shall be laid in a separate duct shall be sealed at every floor
with non-combustible material having the same fire resistance as that of the duct. Low and medium
voltage wiring running in shaft and in false ceiling shall run in separate conduits.
105
b)
Water mains, telephone wires, inter-com lines, gas pipes or any other service lines shall not be laid
in ducts for electric cables.
c)
Separate conduits for water pumps, lifts, staircases and corridor lighting and blowers for pressuring
system shall be directly from the main switch panel and these circuits shall be laid in separate
conduit pipes, so that fire in one circuit will not affect the others. Master switches controlling essential
service circuits shall be clearly labelled.
d)
The inspection panel doors and any other opening in the shaft shall be provided with airtight fire
doors having fire resistance of not less than 1 hour.
e)
Medium and low voltage wiring running in shafts and within false ceiling shall run in metal conduits.
Any 230-voltage wiring for lighting or other services, above false ceiling should have 660V grade
insulation. The false ceiling including all fixtures used for its suspension shall be of non-combustible
material.
f)
An independent and well-ventilated service room shall be provided on the ground floor with direct
access from outside or from the corridor for the purpose of termination of electrical supply from the
licenses service and alternative supply cables. The doors provided for the service room shall have fire
resistance of not less than 2 hours.
g)
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) and Earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)shall be provided for
electrical circuit.
12.14 Staircase and corridor lights
The staircase and corridor lighting shall be on separate circuits and shall be independently connected so that
it could be operated by one switch installation on the ground floor easily accessible to firefighting staff at any
time irrespective of the position of the individual control of the light points, if any. It should be of miniature
circuit breaker type of switch so as to avoid replacement of fuse in case of crisis.
a)
Staircase and corridor lighting shall also be connected to alternate source of power supply.
b)
Suitable arrangement shall be made by installing double throw switches tonsure that the lighting
installed in the staircase and the corridor does not get connected to two sources of supply
simultaneously. Double throw switch shall be installed in the service room for terminating the stand
by supply.
c)
Emergency lights shall be provided in the staircase and corridor.
12.15 Air-conditioning
1)
Air- conditioning system should be installed and maintained so as to minimize the danger of spread
of fire, smoke or fumes thereby from one floor of fire area to another or from outside into any occupied
building or structure. –
2)
Air -Conditioning systems circulating air to more than one floor area should be provided with dampers
designed to close automatically in case of fire and thereby prevent spread of fire or smoke. Such a
system should also be provided with automatic controls to stop fans in case of fire, unless arranged
to remove smoke from a fire, in which case these should be designed to remain in operation.
3)
Air- conditioning system serving large places of assembly (over one thousand persons), large
departmental stores, or hostels with over 100 rooms in a single block should be provided with effective
means for preventing circulation of smoke through the system in the case of fire in air filters or from
other sources drawn into the system even though there is insufficient heat to actuate heat smoke
106
sensitive devices controlling fans or dampers. Such means shall consist of approved effective smoke
sensitive controls.
12.15.1 Details to be conformed for Air- Conditioning
Air-conditioning should conform to the following:
a)
Escape routes like staircase, common corridors, lift lobbies; etc. should not bemuse as return air
passage.
b)
The ducting should be constructed of metal in accordance with BIS 655:1963
c)
Wherever the ducts pass through fire walls or floor, the opening around the ducts should be sealed
with fire resisting material of same rating as of walls/floors.
d)
Metallic ducts should be used even for the return air instead of space above the false ceiling.
e)
The material used for insulating the duct system (inside or outside) should be of flame resistant (IS
4355: 1977) and non- conductor of heat.
f)
Area more than 750 Sqm on individual floor should be segregated by a firewall and automatic fire
dampers for isolation should be provided.
g)
In case of more than one floor, arrangement by way of automatic fire dampers for isolating the ducting
at every floor from the floor should be made. Where plenums used for return air passage, ceiling and
its features and air filters of the air handling units, these should be flame resistant. Inspection panels
should be provided in the main trenching. No combustible material should be fixed nearer than 15
cm. to any duct unless such ducting is properly enclosed and protected with flame resistant material
h) In case of buildings more than 24 m. in height, in non-ventilated lobbies, corridors, smoke extraction
shaft should be provided.
12.15.2 Fire Dampers
1. These shall be located in air ducts and return air ducts/passages at the following points:
a) At the fire separation wall.
b) Where ducts/passages enter the central vertical shaft.
c) Where the ducts pass through floors.
d) At the inlet of supply air duct and the return air duct of each compartment on every floor.
2. The dampers shall operate automatically and shall simultaneously switch off the air- handling fans.
Manual operation facilities shall also be provided.
Note: For blowers, where extraction system and dust accumulators are used, dampers shall be provided.
3. Fire/smoke dampers (for smoke extraction shafts) for building more than 24 m height.
For apartment houses in non-ventilated lobbies/corridor operated by detection system and manual
control sprinkler system. For other buildings, on operation of smoke/heat detection system and
manual control/sprinkler system.
107
4.
Automatic fire dampers shall be so arranged so as to close by gravity in the direction of air movement
and to remain tightly closed on operation of a fusible link.
12.16
Boiler Room
Provisions of boiler and boiler rooms shall conform to Indian Boiler Act, 2007.
Further, the following additional aspects may be taken into account in the location of boiler/ boiler room –
a)
The boiler shall not be allowed in sub-basement, but may be allowed in the basement away from the
escape routes.
b)
The boilers shall be installed in a fire resisting room of 4 hours’ fire resistance rating, and this room
shall be situated on the periphery of the basement. Catch pits shall be provided at the low level.
c)
Entry to this room shall be provided with a composite door of 2 hours’ fire resistance.
d)
The boiler room shall be provided with fresh air inlets and smoke exhaust directly to the atmosphere.
e)
The furnace oil tank for the boiler if located in the adjoining room shall be separated by fire resisting
wall of 4 hours rating. The entrance to this room shall be provided with double composite doors. A
curb of suitable height shall be provided at the entrance in order to prevent the flow of oil into boiler
room in case of tank rupture.
f)
Foam inlets shall be provided on the external walls of the building near the ground level to enable
the fire services to use foam in case of fire.
Clause 3.4.9 Heating; clause 4.8 Hazardous Areas, Gaseous, Oil Storage Yard, etc of Part-4 of NBC
2016 is applicable.
12.17
Alternate source of electric supply
A stand by electric generator shall be installed to supply power to staircase and corridor lighting circuits,
lifts detection system, fire pumps, pressurization fans and bowlers, Public Address (PA) system, exit sign,
smoke extraction system, Emergency lighting, Fire alarm system, Fireman's lifts (including all lifts),
Lighting in fire command center and security room, magnetic door hold open devices, Pressurization and
smoke venting in case of failure of normal electric supply. The generator shall be capable of taking starting
current of all the machines and circuits stated above simultaneously. If the standby pump is driven by
diesel engine; the generator supply need not be connected to the standby pump. The generator shall be
automatic in operation Diesel generator set(s) shall not be installed at any floor other than ground first
basement.
12.18
Safety measures in electric sub-station
1)
Clear independent approach to the sub-station from outside the building shall be made available
round the clock.
2)
The approaches/corridors to the sub-station area shall be kept clear for movement of men and
material at all times.
3)
The sub-station space is required to be provided with proper internal lighting arrangements.
4)
In addition to natural ventilation proper ventilation to the sub-station area is to be provided by grill
shutters and exhaust fans at suitable places so as to discharge all smoke from the sub-station
without delay in case of fire so that sub-station operations can be carried out expeditiously.
108
5)
Cable trenches of 0.6 m. X 0.6 m. dummy floor of 0.6 m. depth shall be provided to facilitate laying
of cable inside the building for connecting to the equipment.
6)
Steel shutters of 8’X 8’ with suitable grills shall be provided for transformers and sub-station room.
7)
The floor of the sub-station should be capable of carrying 10 tons of transformer weight on wheels.
8)
Built up substation space is to be provided free of cost.
9)
Sub-station space should be clear from any water, sewer, air conditioning, and gas pipe or telephone
services. No other service should pass through the sub-station space or the cable trenches.
10) Proper ramp with suitable slope may be provided for loading and unloading of the equipment and
proper approach will be provided.
11) RCC pipes at suitable places as required will be provided for the cable entries to the sub-station space
and making suitable arrangement for non-ingress of water through these pipes.
12) The sub-station space is to be provided in the approved/sanctioned covered area of the building.
13) Any other alteration /modification required while erection of the equipment will be made by the Owner
/ builder at site as per requirement.
14) Adequate arrangement for fixing chain pulley block above the fixing is available for load of 15 tons.
15) Provision shall be kept for the sumps so as to accommodate complete volume of transformer oil,
which can spill over in the event of explosion of the transformer in the basement of the building.
Sufficient arrangement should exist to avoid fire in the sub-station building from spread of the oil
from the sumps.
16) Arrangement should be made for the provision of fire-retardant cables so as to avoid chances of
spread of fire in the sub-station building.
17) Sufficient pumping arrangement should exist for pumping the water out, in case of fire so as to ensure
minimum loss to the switchgear and transformer.
18) No combustible material should be stacked inside the substation premises or in the vicinity to avoid
chances of fire.
19) It should be made mandatory that the promoters of the multi-storeyed building should get substation
premises inspected once a year to get their license revalidated for the provision of electric supply from
Electricity Board so that suitable action can be taken against the Owner / Builder in case of non-
implementation of Byelaws.
20) The sub-station must not be located below the 1st basement and above the ground floor.
21) The sub-station space should be totally segregated from the other areas of the basement by fire
resisting wall. The ramp should have a slope of 1:10 with entry room ground level. The entire Sub-
station space including the entrance in ground floor is handed over to the licensee of electricity free
of cost and rent.
22) The sub-station area shall have a clear height of 15 feet (4.5 m.) below beams. Further the Sub-
station area will have level above the rest of basement level by 2 feet.
23) It is to be ensured that the Sub-station area is free of seepage / leakage of water.
109
24) The licensee of electricity will have the power to disconnect the supply of the building in case of
violation of any of the above points. However, provision of emergency lights has to be made in the
sub-station for emergency operations.
25) Electric sub-station enclosure must be completely segregated with 4-hoursfire rating wall from
remaining part of basement.
26) The sub-station should be located on periphery /sub-basement and (not aboveground floor).
27) Additional exit shall be provided if travel distance from farthest corner tramp is more than l5 m.
28) Perfect independent vent system 30 air changes per hour linked with detection as well as automatic
high velocity water spray system shall be provided.
29) All the transformers shall be protected with Nitrogen Injection System Carbon Dioxide total flooding
system in case of oil filled transformer. In addition to this, manual control of auto high velocity spray
system for individual transformers shall be located outside the building at ground floor.
30) Suitable arrangement for pump house, water storage tanks with main electrical pump and a diesel-
operated pump shall be made if no such arrangement is provided in the building. In case the water
pumping facilities are existing in the building for sprinkler system, the same should however be
utilized for high velocity water spray system. Alternatively, automatic CO2 total flooding system shall
be provided with manual controls outside the electric sub-station.
31) System shall have facility to give an audio alarm in the basement as well as at the control room.
32) Fire control room shall be manned round the clock.
33) The electric sub-station shall have electric supply from alternate source for operation of vent System
lighting arrangements.
34) Cable trenches shall be filled with sand.
35) Partition walls shall be provided between two transformers as per the rules.
36) Electric control panels shall be segregated.
37) Exits from basement electric substation shall have self-closing fire smoke check doors of 2-hours
fire rating near entry to ramp.
38) All openings to lower basement or to ground floor shall be sealed properly.
39) Yearly inspection shall be carried out by electrical load sanctioning Authority.
40) Ramp to be designed in a manner that in case of fire no smoke should enter the main building.
41) Electric sub-station transformer shall have clearance on all sides as per BBL/relevant electric rules.
42) Other facility will be as per Building Byelaws and relevant electric rules.
43) Rising electrical mains shall consist of metal bus bars suitably protected from safety point of view.
44) Oil less transformer shall be preferred. If the sub-station is located in basement / ground floor of the
main building, the transformers shall be essentially of dry type. In case of dry type transformer room
with wall enclosure is not essential.
110
Note: The sub-station installations shall be carried out in conformity with the local fire regulations and
rules there under wherever they are in force. At other places NBC guidelines shall be followed.
12.19
Fire protection requirements
Buildings shall be planned, designed and constructed to ensure fire safety and thissha1l be done in
accordance with part IV Fire Protection of NBC, 2016 of India, unless otherwise specified in the Zonal
Regulations and these Byelaws. In the case of High-Rise buildings NOC &Clearance Certificate has
to be obtained from DFES.
12.19.1 First Aid /Fixed Fire Fighting /Fire Detection Systems and other Facilities
Provision of fire safety arrangement for different occupancy from Sl. No. 1 to 23 as indicated below shall be
as per Annexure ‘B-I’ ‘B-II’ & ‘B-III’.
1)
Access
2)
Wet Riser
3)
Down Comer
4)
Hose Reel
5)
Automatic Sprinkler System
6)
Yard Hydrant
7)
U.G. Tank with Draw off Connection
8)
Terrace Tanks
9)
Fire Pump
10) Terrace Pump
11) First Aid Fire Fighting Appliances
12) Auto Detection System
13) Manual operated Electrical Fire Alarm System
14) P.A System with talk back facility
15) Emergency Light
16) Auto D.G. Set
17) Illuminated Exit Sign
18) Means of Escape
19) Compartmentation
20) MCB /ELCB
21) Fire Man Switch in Lift
111
22) Hose Boxes with Delivery Hoses and Branch
23) Pipes Refuge Area
12.19.1.1
Note for Annexure ‘B-I’ ‘B-II’ & ‘B-III’
1)
Where more than one riser is required because of large floor area, the quantity of water and pump
capacity recommended in these Annexure should be finalized in consultation with Chief Fire Officer.
2)
The above quantities of water shall be exclusively for firefighting and shall note utilized for domestic
or other use.
3)
A facility to boost up water pressure in the riser directly from the mobile pump shall be provided in
the wet riser, down comer system with suitable fire service inlets (collecting head) with 2 to 4 numbers
of 63 mm inlets for 100-200 mm dia. main, with check valve and a gate valve.
4)
Internal diameter of rubber hose for reel shall be minimum 20 mm. A shut off branch with nozzle of
5 mm. size shall be provided.
5)
Fire pumps shall have positive suctions. The pump house shall be adequately ventilated by using
normal/mechanical means. A clear space of 1.0 m. shall be kept in between the pumps and enclosure
for easy movement/maintenance. Proper testing facilities and control panel etc. shall be provided.
6)
Unless otherwise specified in Byelaws, the firefighting equipment’s/ installation shall conform to
relevant Indian Standard Specification.
7)
In case of mixed occupancy, the firefighting arrangement shall be made as per the highest class of
occupancy, unless fire separation walls are provided between different occupancies.
8)
Requirement of water based first aid fire extinguishers shall be reduced to half if hose reel is provided
in the building.
12.20
Static water storage tank
a)
A satisfactory supply of water exclusively for the purpose of firefighting shall always be available in
the form of underground static storage tank/ Overhead tank with capacity specified in NBC 2016
with arrangements of replenishment by town’s main or alternative source of supply @ 1000 liters per
minute. The static storage water supply required for the above-mentioned purpose should entirely be
accessible to the fire tenders of the local fire service. Provision of suitable number of manholes shall
be made available for inspection repairs and insertion of suction hose etc. The covering slab shall be
able to withstand the vehicular load of 45 tons in case of high rise and 22 tons in case of low-rise
buildings. A draw off connection shall be provided. The slab need not strengthened if the static tank
is not located in mandatory driveway required around the building.
b)
To prevent stagnation of water in the static water tank the suction tank of the domestic water supply
shall be fed only through an over flow arrangement to maintain the level therein at the minimum
specified capacity.
c)
The static water storage tank shall be provided with a fire brigade inlet of 63mm dia. instantaneous
male inlets arranged in a valve box with a suitable fixed pipe not less than 15 cm dia. to discharge
water into the tank. Number of inlets shall be as specified in NBC. This arrangement is not required
where down comer is provided.
112
12.21
Automatic sprinklers
Automatic sprinkler system shall be installed in the following buildings:
a)
All buildings of 24 m. and above in height, except group housing and 45m and above in case of
apartment /group housing society building.
b)
Hotels below 15 m. in height and above 1000 Sqm built up area at each floor and or if basement is
existing.
c)
All hotels, mercantile and institutional buildings above15 m.
d)
Underground Shopping Complex.
e)
Underground car / scooter parking /enclosed car parking.
f)
Any special hazards where the Chief Fire Officer considers it necessary.
g)
For buildings, up to 24 m. in height where automatic sprinkler system is not mandatory as per these
Byelaws, if provided with sprinkler installation following relaxation may be considered.
i.
Automatic heat/smoke detection system and M.C.P. need not be insisted upon.
ii.
The number of Fire Extinguisher required shall be reduced by half.
Automatic sprinkler system requirement in the buildings should comply as per NBC 2016 PART 4 Table 7
Minimum requirements for firefighting equipments.”
12.22
Fixed Carbon di-oxide /Foam/DCO water spray extinguishing system
Fixed extinguishing installations shall be provided as per the relevant specifications in the premises
where use of above extinguishing media is considered necessary by the Chief Fire Officer.
12.23
Fire alarm system
1)
The requirements of fire detection systems in buildings should be followed as per Table 7 PART 4
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY of NBC 2016. ( As per requirement of fire department ) All residential
buildings like dwelling houses (including flats) boarding houses and hostels shall be equipped with
manually operated electrical fire alarm system with one or more call boxes located at each floor. The
location of the call boxes shall be decided after taking into consideration their floor without having to
travel more than the distance specified in NBC.
2)
The call boxes shall be of the break glass type without any moving parts, where the call is transmitted
automatically to the control room without any other action on the part of the person operating the
call boxes.
3)
All call boxes shall be wired in a closed circuit to a control panel in a control room, located as per
Byelaws so that the floor number from where the callbox is actuated is clearly indicated on the control
panel. The circuit shall also include one or more batteries with a capacity of 48 hours normal working
at full load. The battery shall be arranged to be a continuously trickle charged from the electric mains.
4)
The call boxes shall be arranged to sound one or more sounders so as to ensure that all occupants
of the floor shall be warned whenever any call box is actuated.
113
5)
The call boxes shall be so installed that they do not obstruct the exit ways and yet their location can
easily be noticed from either direction. The base of the call box shall be at a height of 1.5 m. from the
floor level.
6)
All buildings other than as indicated above shall, in addition to the manually operated electrical fire
alarm system, be equipped with an automatic fire alarm system.
7)
Voice evacuation systems shall employ Hindi, English and vernacular language using prerecorded
messages and integrate with fire alarm panels for alerting the zone of fire and surrounding
zones/floors as required for annunciation (see also Table 7 and its Note 1).
8)
Appropriate visual warning arrangement through visual strobes/beacons may be considered in
appropriate situations particularly in public buildings, at required locations to ensure visual as well
as alarm for persons with hearing impairment.
9)
For assembly buildings, institutional buildings and all buildings above 30 m in height where fire
alarm system is provided in accordance to Table 7, detectors shall also be provided inside the
electrical shafts, and lift machine rooms, etc, besides occupancy areas.
10) Fire alarm panels shall be connected in peer-to-peer network or with redundant cables, run in
different shafts. Each panel shall be able to work in standalone mode and master slave architecture
may be used where required.
11) Fire detection and alarm systems in buildings shall be so planned and programmed so as to enable
operations of various systems and equipment to facilitate requirements leading to life safety,
compartmentation
and
fire
protection.
These
systems
and
equipment
may
include
electromechanical systems such as air handling units; pressurization systems; smoke management
systems; creation of compartmentation through the release of fire barrier, hold-up fire doors, etc;
and monitoring of fire water storage tanks and pumps, pressures in hydrant and sprinkler system,
etc. These planning and requirements shall be based on building occupancy and other
requirements on case-to-case basis.
12) Automatic detection system shall be installed in accordance with the relevant standard specifications.
In buildings where automatic sprinkler system is provided, the automatic detection system may not be
insisted upon unless decided otherwise by the Chief Fire Officer
Note: The installation of Fire Alarm Systems shall be carried out in conformity with the local fire
regulations and rules, there under whenever they are in force and the provisions in local Byelaws, if
any. Several types of fire detectors are available in the market, but the application of each type is
limited and has to be carefully considered in relation to the type of risk and the structural features
of the building where they are to be installed.
12.24
Control Room
There shall be a control room on the entrance floor of the building with communication system
(suitable public-address system) to all floors and facilities for receiving the message from different
floors. Details of all floor plans along with the details of firefighting equipment and installation shall
be maintained in the Control Room. The Control Room shall also have facility to detect the fire on
any floor through indicator boards connecting fire detection and alarm system on all floors. The staff
in charge of the Control Room shall be responsible for the maintenance of the various services and
firefighting equipment and installation. The Control Room shall be manned round the clock by trained
firefighting staff.
a) Fire command centre shall be on the entrance floor of the building having direct access. The control
room shall have the main fire alarm panel with communication system (suitable public address
system) to aid floors and facilities for receiving the message from different floors.
b) Fire command centre shall be constructed with 120 min rating walls with a fire door and shall be
provided with emergency lighting. Interior finishes shall not use any flammable materials. All controls
and monitoring of fire alarm systems, pressurization systems, smoke management systems shall
114
happen from this room. Monitoring of integrated building management systems, CCTVs or any other
critical parameters in building may also be from the same room.
c) Details of all floor plans along with the details of firefighting equipment and installations (2 sets
laminated and bound) shall be maintained in fire command centre.
d) The fire staff in charge of the fire command centre shall be responsible for the maintenance of the
various services and firefighting equipment and installations in coordination with security, electrical
and civil staff of the building.
12.25
Fire drills and fire orders
The guidelines for fire drill and evacuation etc. for high-rise building may be seen in NBC 2016 part
IV. All such buildings shall prepare the fire orders duly approved by the Chief Fire Officer.
A qualified fire officer and trained staff shall be appointed for the following buildings:
a)
All high-rise buildings above 30 m. in height where covered area of one floor exceeds 1000 Sqm except
apartments / group housing.
b)
All hotels identified under classification 3 star and above category by Tourism Department and all
hotels above 15 m. in height with 150 beds capacity or more without star category.
c)
All hospital building of 15 m. and above or having number of beds exceeding100.
d)
Underground shopping complex where covered area exceeds 1000 Sqm
e)
All high hazard industries.
f)
Any other risk which Chief Fire Officer considers necessary.
g)
Fire drills shall be conducted, in accordance with the Fire Safety Plan, at least once every three
months for buildings during the first two years. Thereafter, fire drills shall be conducted at least once
every six months.
h) All occupants of the building shall participate in the fire drill. However, occupants of the building,
other than building service employees, are not required to leave the floor or use the exits during the
drill.
i)
A written record of such drills shall be kept on the premises for a three years period and shall be
readily available for fire brigade inspection.
The lightening protection warning light (red) for high-rise buildings shall be provided in accordance with
the relevant standard. The same shall be checked by electrical department.
12.26
Material used for construction of building
1)
The combustible/flammable material shall not be used for partitioning, wall panelling, false
ceiling etc. Any material giving out toxic gases/smoke if involved in the fire shall not be used
for partitioning of a floor or wall panelling or a false ceiling etc. The surface frames spread of
the lining material shall conform to class- I of the standard specification. The framework of
the entire false ceiling would be provided with metallic sections and no wooden framework
shall be allowed for panelling/false ceiling.
115
2)
Construction features/elements of structures shall conform to National Building Code and
BIS code.
12.27
Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG)
The
use
of
LPG
shall
not
be
permitted
in
the
high-rise
building
except
residential/hotel/hostel/kitchen/pantry (if any) and shall be located at the periphery of the
building on the ground level.
Fire suppression system and leakage detection system needs to be installed whenever
cooking appliances are using LPG in commercial kitchen.
12.28
House keeping
A high standard of housekeeping must be insisted upon by all concerned. There must be no laxity in this
respect. It must be borne in mind that fire safety independent to a large extent upon good housekeeping.
12.28.1 Details for Good Housekeeping: -
Good Housekeeping includes the following:
a)
Maintaining the entire premises in neat and clean condition.
b)
Ensuring that rubbish and combustible material are not thrown about or allowed to accumulate,
even in small quantity, in any portion of the building. Particular attention must be paid to corners
and places hidden from view.
c)
Providing metal receptacles/wastepaper basket (of non-combustible material) at suitable locations
for disposal of waste. Separate receptacles must be provided for disposal of cotton rags/waste,
wherever it is generated, these must under no circumstances be left lying around in any portion of
the building.
d)
Ensuring that receptacles for waste are emptied at regular intervals and the waste removed
immediately for safe disposal outside the building.
e)
Ensuring that all doors/fixtures are maintained in good repairs, particular attention must be paid to
self-closing fire smoke check doors and automatic fire/doors/rolling shutters.
f)
Ensuring that self-closing fire/smoke check doors close properly and that the doors are not wedged
open.
g)
Ensuring that the entire structure of the building is maintained in good repairs.
h) Ensuring that all electrical and mechanical service equipment’s are maintained in good working
condition at all times.
i)
Ensuring that Cars /Scooters etc. are parked systematically in neat rows. It is advisable to mark
parking lines on the ground in the parking areas near the building and in the parking area on ground
floor and in basement(s); as applicable, inside the building. A parking attendant must ensure that
vehicles are parked in an orderly manner and that the vehicles do not encroach upon the open space
surrounding the building.
12.28.2 Smoking Restrictions
1)
Smoking shall be prohibited throughout the basement(s) and in all areas where there is a profusion
of combustible materials. Easily readable ‘NO SMOKING’ signs must be conspicuously posted at
116
locations where they can catch the eye. Each sign must also include a pictograph. The sign may also
be illuminated.
12.28.3 Limiting the Occupant Load in Parking and Other Areas of Basement(s)
Where parking facility is provided in the basement(s) no person other than the floor parking attendant may
be allowed to enter and remain in the parking areas except for parking and removal of Cars/Scooters. Regular
offices must not be maintained in the storage/parking area in the basement(s)unless separated by Fire
separation walls. The stores/go down must be opened for the limited purpose of keeping or removing stores.
No person other than those on duty may be permitted in the air-conditioning plant room(s), HT/LT switch
room, transformer compartment, control room pump-house, generator room, stores and records etc.
12.29
Fire prevention
In addition to the measures recommended above, the following fire prevention measures must be implemented
when the building is in occupation.
a)
Storage of flammable substances, such as diesel oil, gasoline, motor oils, etc. must not be allowed
anywhere within the building. The only exception to this rule may be:
i.
Storage of diesel oil in a properly installed tank in a fire-resisting compartment in the generator room;
ii.
Diesel oil, gasoline, motor oil etc., filled in the vehicle tanks.
b)
Preparation of tea and warming of food must be prohibited throughout the hazardous building.
c)
Where heaters are used during winters, the following precautions must be taken.
i.
All heaters, except convector heaters, must be fitted with guards.
ii.
Heaters must not be placed in direct contact with or too close to any combustible material.
iii.
Heaters must be kept away from curtains to ensure that the latter do not blow over the heater
accidentally.
iv.
Heaters must not be left unattended while they are switched on.
v.
Defective heaters must be immediately removed from service until they have been repaired and tested
for satisfactory performance.
vi.
Use of heaters must be prohibited in the entire basement, fire control room and in all-weather maker
rooms throughout the building. Also, in all places where there is profusion of combustible flammable
materials.
d)
Fluorescent lights must not be directly above the open file racks in offices/record rooms. Where this
is unavoidable, such lights must be switched on only for as long as they are needed.
e)
Filling up of old furniture and other combustible materials such as scrap paper, rags, etc. must not
be permitted anywhere in the building. These must be promptly removed from the building.
f)
More than one portable electrical appliance must not be connected to any single electrical outlet.
g)
Used stencils, ink smeared combustible materials and empty ink tubes must note allowed to
accumulate in rooms/compartments where cyclostyling is done. These must be removed and
disposed of regularly.
117
h) All shutters/doors of main switch panels and compartments/shafts for electrical cables must be kept
locked.
i)
Aisles in record rooms and stores must have a clear uniform width of not less than 1.0 m. Racks
must not be placed directly against the wall/partition.
j)
In record rooms, offices and stores, a clear space of not less than 30 cm. must be maintained between
the top-most stack of stores/records and or lighting fittings whichever is lower.
k)
A similar clearance, and at (k) above must be maintained from fire detectors.
l)
Fire detectors must not be painted under any circumstances and must also be kept free from
lime/distemper.
m) Records must not be piled/dumped on the floor.
n) Welding or use of blow torch shall not be permitted inside the building, except when it is done under
strict supervision and in full conformity with the requirements laid down in IS: 3016-1966 code of
practice for fire precautions in welding and cutting operation.
o)
Printing ink/oil must not be allowed to remain on the floor. The floor must be maintained in a clean
condition at all times.
12.30
Occupancy restrictions
1)
The premises leased to any party shall be used strictly for the purpose for which they are leased.
2)
No dangerous trade/practices (including experimenting with dangerous chemicals) shall be carried
on in the leased premises.
3)
No dangerous goods shall be stored within the leased premises.
4)
The common/public corridor shall be maintained free of obstructions, and the occupants shall not
put up any fixtures that may obstruct the passage in the corridor and/or shall not keep any wares,
furniture or other articles in the corridor.
5)
The penalty for contravention of the condition mentioned above must be immediate termination of
lease and removal of all offending materials.
6)
Regular inspection and checks must be carried out at frequent intervals tonsure compliance with
conditions above.
Note: For any further details / clarification NBC, Part 4 shall be referred. Norms and standards in Part
4 of NBC 2016 shall be overriding in any instance of variance of standards.
118
CHAPTER 13
13. CONSERVATION OF HERITAGE SITES INCLUDING HERITAGE BUILDINGS, HERITAGE PRECINCTS
AND NATURAL FEATURE AREAS
The objective of this regulation shall be to conserve, regulate and manage buildings, artefacts,
structures, areas and precincts of historic and / or aesthetic and / or architectural and / or cultural
significance and / or environmental significance (heritage buildings and heritage precincts) and / or
natural features of environmental significance and or sites of science beauty, so as to promote
heritage sensitive development.
13.1 Applicability:
These regulations shall apply to all heritage sites, buildings, precincts and natural features declared
under Section 2(1ea) and 2(1eb) of the Karnataka Town and Country Planning Act, 1961 (Karnataka
Act 11 of 1963).
13.2 Establishment and composition of the Heritage conservation committee
(1) For every district, except Bengaluru District, there shall be a Heritage Conservation Committee
(herein after referred to as the committee), consisting of the following Members appointed by the State
Government
Table 13.1 Composition of heritage conservation committee for Mangalore City Corporation Areas:
TABLE
Committee Composition
1. The Deputy Commissioner
Chairman
2. The
Commissioner, Archaeology,
Museums and Heritage Department, Mysore
or his nominee.
Ex-Officio Member
3.
The Joint Director or Deputy Director or
Assistant Director of Town and Country
Planning of the Respective City Corporation.
Ex-Officio Member
4. Town planning Member of the respective urban
development authority
Ex-Officio Member
5. Representative from the Department of Tourism. Ex-Officio Member
6. The Assistant Director of Department of
Archaeology, Museums and Heritage of state.
Ex-Officio Member
7. The Commissioner of the respective corporation. Ex-Officio Member
8. The Commissioner of the respective City
Municipal Council.
Ex-Officio Member
9. The Chief officer of the respective Town
Municipal Council.
Ex-Officio Member
10.The Chief officer of the respective Town
Panchayat.
Ex-Officio Member
11.
A Structural Engineer having experience of at
least ten years in the field and membership of
the Institute of Engineers (India)
Member
12.Representative of Archaeological survey of India,
Government of India.
Member
13.The Project Director, DUDC Cell.
Ex-Officio Member
14.An Architect having at least ten years of
experience in architecture and
five
years
in heritage conservation architecture and
membership of the Council of Architecture.
Member
15.An
Environmentalist
with
post
graduate Member
119
degree from a recognized university and having
in depth knowledge and having experience of
ten years in the subject.
16.An Academician possessing a doctorate in
history or Archaeology and having knowledge of
the region for at least ten years.
Member
17.A
Natural
historian
possessing
post-
graduation in botany or zoology or forestry,
preferably with doctorate degree, having ten
years’ experience in the field.
Member
18.An Artist possessing degree in fine arts having
at Least ten years of experience in the field.
Member
19.Representatives of two NGOs in existence for
more Than three years.
Member
20.Representative of Indian Heritage Cities Network
(IHCN), Saraswathi Puram, Mysuru.
Member
21.The Commissioner or Member Secretary of
the Respective urban development authority or
planning authority.
Ex-Officio Member-
Convener
(2) The Committee shall have the power to appoint two additional members who may have lesser
experience, but who have special knowledge of the subject matter.
(3) The tenure of the non-official members shall be three years:
Provided that, the same person shall be eligible for reappointment for further period of three years.
(4) No meeting shall be conducted unless one-third of the members are present from the beginning to the
end of such meeting. Any vacancy in the office of members shall not vitiate any decision taken by the
majority of the members present.
13.3 Powers and functions of the committee- The Committee shall exercise the following powers and
following functions, namely: -
(1) to advise the Local Authority whether development permission shall be granted under these
regulations and the conditions under which permission may be accorded;
(2) to prepare a list of buildings, artefacts, structures, areas, precincts of historic, aesthetic,
architectural, cultural or environmental significance and a supplementary list of natural features of
environmental significance or scenic beauty including sacred groves, hills, hillocks, water bodies (and
the areas adjoining the same), open areas, wooded areas etc., to which these regulations shall apply
from time to time, and grade them according to the heritage value;
120
(3) to advise whether any relaxation, modification, alteration or variance of any of the zonal regulations
or building bye-laws is called for;
(4) to assist the Archaeology, Museums and Heritage Department (AM&HD) in framing regulations for
specific precincts and if necessary for natural features to guide the planning or local or competent
authority, regarding issue of permissions.
(5) To advise on the extent of Development Rights Certificates to be granted.
(6) To advise whether Development Right Certificates may be allowed to be consumed in a heritage
precinct.
(7) to advise in terms of these regulations to allow commercial or office or hotel use of a heritage building
and when to terminate the same.
(8) To advise the planning or local or competent authority in the operation of advertisements or
billboards or street furniture.
(9) To make recommendations to the local or competent authority regarding guidelines to be adopted by
those private parties or public or Government agencies that sponsor beautification schemes near
heritage building and precincts at public intersections and elsewhere.
(10) To provide technical advice, if possible, on the guidelines to the owners of heritage buildings or
precincts to protect, conserve or restore them.
(11) to recommend or advice the Archaeology, Museum and Heritage Department in preparing special
designs and guidelines or publications for the listed buildings, control of height and essential façade
characteristics, such as maintenance of specialty pes of balconies and other heritage items of the
buildings and to suggest suitable designs and appropriate material for replacements, keeping the old
form intact to the extent possible.
(12) to recommend or advice the Archaeology, Museum and Heritage Department in preparing guidelines
relating to design elements and conservation principles to be adhered to and to prepare other guidelines
for the purpose of these regulations.
(13) To advise the local authority on any other issues as may be required, from time to time, during the
course of scrutiny of development permissions and in overall interest of heritage or environmental
conservation.
(14) To appear before the Government either independently or through or on behalf of the local authority
in cases of listed buildings or precincts and listed natural features.
13.4 Procedure for the preparation of list of the heritage sites, buildings, precincts and natural
features. -
(1) The list of the heritage sites, buildings, precincts and additions there to shall be declared by the
planning authority on the advice of the committee and notified accordingly:
121
Provided that, before the list is so notified, objections and suggestions from all persons likely to be
affected shall be invited by newspaper notification of which at least two newspapers published in
local language, granting at least fifteen days of time.
(2) Restrictions on the heritage precincts shall be in force with effect from the date of such newspaper
notification:
Provided that, such listing does not prevent change of ownership or usage.
(3) The list may be supplemented from time to time by the Government, on receipt of proposal from the
concerned agency or suo motto:
Provided that, before the list is so notified, objections and suggestions from all persons likely to be
affected shall be invited by newspaper notification of which atleast two newspapers published in
local language, granting atleast fifteen days of time.
13.5 Criteria for listing. - Before the list so notified under clause 3, the following criteria
shall be observed, namely:-
(a)
Value for architectural, historical or cultural reasons.
A
Architectural
A(arc)
Historical
A(his)
Cultural
A(cul)
(b)
The date or period or design or unique use of the building or
artefact.
B
Building or artefact
Period
B(per)
Design
B(des)
Use
B(use)
(c)
Relevance to social or economic history.
C(seh)
(d)
Association with well-known persons or event.
D(bio)
(e)
A building or group of buildings or areas of distinct architectural
design or style, historic period or way of life having sociological
interest or community value.
E
Style
Historical
(f)
The unique value of building or architectural feature or
artefactorbeingpartofachainofarchitecturaldevelopmentthatwouldbebr
okenifitwerelost.
F
(g)
Its value as a part of a group of buildings.
G(gr)
(h)
Representing forms of technological development.
H(tec)
(i)
Vistas of natural or scenic beauty or interest, including
water-front areas, distinctive or planned lines of sight ,street lines
of sight, street line, sky line or topographical.
I(se)
(j)
Open spaces sometimes integrally planned with their associated
areas having a distinctive way of life which have the potential to be
areas of recreation.
J
(k)
Natural heritage sites.
NH
(l)
Sites of scenic beauty.
(sec)
122
13.6 Grading.-Heritage sites, buildings, precincts and natural features shall be graded as I, II, III,
as detailed below.-
GRADE–I
GRADE–II
GRADE–III
(a)Definition
(i) Shall comprises of
the
buildings
and
precincts of national
or historical importance,
embodying excellence
in architectural style,
design,
technology
and material, usage or
aesthetics, which may
be associated with a
great
historic
event,
personality,
movement
or institution;
(ii)
Shall have been
and
are
the
prime
landmark
of
the
region; and
(iii) All natural sites.
(i)Shall comprise of the
buildings and precincts
of
regional
or
local
importance
possessing
special architectural or
aesthetic
merit
or
cultural
or
historical
significance of a lower
scale than in Grade-1;
(ii)They shall have been
and
are
the
local
landmarks
that
contribute to the image
and
identity
of
the
region; and
(iii)They may be the work of
master craftsmen or may
be models of proportion and
ornamentation, or designed
to suit a particular climate.
(i) Shall comprise of the
buildings and precincts
of
important
townscapes.
(ii) They
evoke
architectural, aesthetic or
sociological interest of a
lower
scale
than
in
Grade–II; and
(iii)
They contribute to
determine the character
of the locality and are the
representatives of lifestyle
of
a
particular
community or region and,
be
distinguished
by
setting on a streetline or
special character of the
façade and uniformity of
height, width and scale.
(b)Objective
Deserves careful
preservation.
Deserves intelligent
Conservation.
Deserves protection of
unique
features
and
attributes.
(c)Scope for
changes
Interventions shall be
permitted to enter on
the exterior or interior
unless it is necessary
in
the
interest
of
strengthening
and
prolonging the life of
the
buildings
or
precincts or any part
or features thereof. For
this
purpose,
only
absolutely
essential
and minimal changes
shall be allowed and
they
must
be
in
accordance
with
the
original.
(i)Internal
changes
and
adaptive
reuse
shall
generally be allowed but
external changes shall be
subject to scrutiny. Care
shall be taken to ensure
the conservation of all
the special aspects for
which it is enlisted under
these regulations.
(ii)Extension
or
additional buildings in
the same
plot
or
compound
may be
allowed
in certain
circumstances:
Provided
that, the
extension or
additional building is in
harmony with and does
not detract from the
existing
heritage
buildings
or precincts,
especially in terms of
height and facade.
(i)External and internal
changes and adaptive
reuse shall generally be
allowed. Changes may
include extensions and
additional buildings in
the
same
plot
or
compound:
Provided
that
the
extension or additional
building is in harmony
with
and does not
detract
from
the
existing
heritage
building
or precinct
especially in
terms of
height or facade; and
(ii)Reconstruction
shall
be
allowed
when
the
building is structurally
weak or unsafe or
affected by accidental
fire
or
any
other
calamity
or
if
reconstruction
is
required
to
consume
123
the permissible FSI and
no
option
other
than
reconstruction
is
available:
Provided
that,
unless
absolutely
essential,
nothing shall be allowed
to spoil or destroy the
special
features
or
attributes for which it is
enlisted under these
regulations.
(d)Procedure
(i)Development permission
for
the changes shall
be given by
the
Planning Authority on
the advice of the
heritage conservation
committee.
(ii) All developments in
the areas surrounding
the enlisted building or
precinct,
shall
be
regulated
and
controlled, ensuring that
it does not mar the
grandeur of or view from
the enlisted building or
precinct.
(i)Development permission
for the changes shall be
given
by
the
Planning
Authority in consultation
with
a
sub-committee
formed under the heritage
conservation committee
(ii)All developments in the
areas
surrounding
the
enlisted building or precinct,
shall
be regulated
and controlled, ensuring that
it does not mar the grandeur
of or view from the enlisted
building or precinct.
(i)Development permission
shall be given for changes
by the Planning Authority
in accordance with the
guidelines, which shall be
laid down by Government
in
Consultation
with
Heritage
Conservation
Committee.
(ii)All developments in the
areas
surrounding
the
enlisted
building
or
precinct, shall be regulated
and
controlled,
ensuring that it does not
mar the grandeur of or view
from the enlisted
Building or precinct.
13.7 Restriction on development, re-development, repairs, etc.-
(1) No development or re-development or engineering operations or additions or alterations or repairs or
renovation, including the painting of buildings, replacement of special features or plastering or demolition
of any or part thereof of the enlisted buildings, precincts and natural features, including the compound
wall, shall be allowed, except with the prior written permission of the local planning authority, in
accordance with these regulations:
Provided that, before granting any such permission for alteration of boundaries of any enlisted
buildings, precincts or natural features, objections and suggestions from the public shall be
invited, by publishing prominently, in two local newspapers and duly considered by the
Committee:
Provided further that, only in exceptional cases, for reasons to be recorded in writing, the
planning authority may refer the matter back to the heritage conservation committee for
reconsideration.
(2) Heritage buildings and precincts which are under the control of department of Public Works or
Corporation or Universities or Boards and any other Government organizations, under the purview
of Government of Karnataka and Government of India, shall been listed and declared as heritage
properties:
Provided that, the decision of the heritage conservation committee, after such re-consideration
shall be final.
124
(3) To preserve the heritage value of the zone, the committee shall have the power to direct, especially
in areas designated, that the exterior design and height of buildings shall have prior approval.
(4) The local authority before permitting signs, outdoor display structures including street furniture in
the enlisted building or precinct, shall strictly follow the specifications, codes, conditions given
below.-
(A) The display or averting signs and outdoor display structures on building and land shall be
permitted in accordance with PartX- Signs and Outdoor Display Structures of National Building
Code of India.
(B) In addition to condition specified under item(A),the following provisions shall apply to
advertisement signs in different land use zones.-
(i) In case of residential Zone, the following non-flashing neon signs with illumination not
exceeding 40-watt light.
(a) One name plate with an area not exceeding 0.1 square metres for each dwelling unit.
(b) For other uses permissible in the zone, one identification sign or bulletin
boardwithanareanotexceeding10square metres, provided that, such area shall not exceed
1.5 metres height.
(c) ‘For sale’ or ‘for rent’ signs for real estate, not exceeding 2 square metres in area,
provided they are located on the premises offered for sale or rent.
(ii)
in
case
of
residential
Zones
with
shop
lines,
non-flashing
business
sign
placedparalleltothewallandnotexceeding1metreinheightperestablishment.
(iii) not withstanding the provisions under item (A) and (B), no advertisements ignore outdoor
display structures shall be permitted on buildings of architectural, aesthetic, historical
or heritage importance as may be decided by the local authority on the advice and
approval of the committee, including on Government buildings:
Provided that, in the case of Government buildings only advertising signs or outdoor display structures
shall be permitted, if they are related to the activities, purposes or programmes of the said building,
which shall be approved by the committee.
Provided further that, if the committee so advises, the local authority shall refuse permission for
any sign or outdoors display structure.
Provided also that, the Committee may prescribe additional guidelines for the same.
13.8
Responsibility of the owners. - It shall be the duty of the owners of enlisted buildings
and precincts to carryout regular repairs and maintenance, at their own cost. The Government
or the local authority shall not be responsible for such repairs and maintenance, except for the
buildings owned by the Government or local authority.
125
.
13.9 Regulations for specified heritage precincts or natural features. -
(1) In case of heritage precincts and natural features, where it is deemed necessary by the committee,
development permission in the form of commencement certificate shall be granted in accordance with
separate guidelines prescribed for the respective precincts or natural features, which shall be framed
by the Archaeology, Museum and Heritage Department (AM&HD) in consultation with the local
authority, on the advice of the committee.
(2) These guidelines shall concern architectural appearances, materials, the setting of buildings, their
volumes, height, planting of trees and include regulations, which will govern planning, building
permissions, choices of restoration methods or spatial planning.
(3) Separate guideline shall be prepared after commissioning a study of the enlisted precincts or natural
features by the Archeology, Museum and Heritage Department. The study shall identify the heritage
issues in all its aspects, fix the objectives to be reached in order to assure the conservation of the
heritage identified and to draft guidelines for management and development of the same. The local
authority shall consider the draft guidelines submitted by Archaeology, Museum and Heritage
Department and obtain public opinion by publishing in the official Gazette and in leading newspapers
for the purpose of inviting suggestions and objections from the public. The local authority,
Archaeology, Museum and Heritage Department and the Committee shall consider all the suggestions
and objections received within a period of sixty days from the date of publication in the official
Gazette.
(4) After consideration of the suggestions and objections, the Archaeology, Museum and Heritage
Department in consultation with local authority, acting on the advice of the committee, shall modify,
if necessary, the draft guidelines and forward the same to the local authority for further submission
to the Government for sanction;
Provided that, pending the consideration of suggestions and objections and pending final sanction from
Government to the draft guidelines, the committee shall have due regard to the draft guidelines, while
considering applications for development, re-development,etc.,of the heritage buildings or precincts or
natural features.
13.10 Road widening and building lines. -
(1) If road widening or building line, under the Karnataka Town and Country Planning Act, 1961, are
prescribed, they shall be in accordance with these regulations, so as to protect the features of the enlisted
buildings or precincts.
If any new road widening or building lines are proposed in the Master Plan, the local authority shall
consider the heritage provisions and environmental aspects while considering applications for
development permissions in these precincts. Necessary steps shall be taken to modify the Master Plan
accordingly and pending this action, the development of new roads shall not be carried out.
(2) No widening of the existing roads under the Karnataka Town and Country Planning Act, 1961 or
Master Plan shall be carried out in a manner which may affect the existing heritage buildings (even
if they are not included in a heritage precinct) or which may affect the enlisted natural features.
126
13.11 Master plan reservations. - If there are Master Plan reservations shown on heritage buildings
or precincts or enlisted natural features, the reservation may be deleted or modified if required.
The local authority, on the advice of the committee, shall move the Government to get these
reservations deleted or modified accordingly.
13.12 Grant of Transferable Development Rights (TDR) in cases of loss of development
rights. - The extent of Development Rights to be granted and used shall be determined by the rules
specially framed for transfer of development rights.
13.13 Incentive uses for heritage buildings.-In cases of buildings, included in the list, falling in
zones where office or commercial or hotel use is normally prohibited, if the owner or lessee agrees to
maintain the listed heritage building in its existing state and to preserve its heritage status with due
repairs and give a written undertaking to that effect, he may be permitted, with the approval of the
committee, to convert part or the whole thereof of the non-commercial area, within such heritage
building to commercial or office or hotel;
Provided that, if the heritage building is not maintained suitably or if the heritage value of the building
is allowed to be diminished in any manner, the local authority suo motto or on the advice of the
committee, shall revoke permission given for such use.
13.14 Maintaining skyline and architectural harmony.-Buildings within heritage precincts or in
the vicinity of heritage building or listed natural features, shall maintain the skyline and follow the
architectural style (without any high rise or multi-storied development), as may be existing in the
surrounding area, so as not to diminish or destroy the value and beauty of, or the view from, the said
heritage building or precinct or natural feature. The development within the precinct or in the vicinity
of heritage building or natural features shall be in accordance to the guidelines framed by
Archaeology, Museum and Heritage Department in association with the local authority on the advice
of the committee.
13.15 Repair fund.- With a view to give monetary help for repairs of the enlisted property, a separate
fund shall be created through Government grants or local authorities or public contributions, which
shall be available to the local authority, who shall disburse the funds on the advice of the
committee:
Provided that, nothing mentioned above shall be deemed to confer any right on the owner or occupier
of the plot to demolish or re-construct or make alterations or additions to his enlisted building or
building in a enlisted precinct, if in the opinion of the committee, such demolition or re-construction
or addition is undesirable.
13.16 Voluntary contribution and agreement with any voluntary organization, person or
company.- (1) The local authority may receive voluntary contributions towards the cost of
maintaining any enlisted building or precinct, and shall manage such contributions for the purpose
of preservation and conservation.
(2)Subject to the prior approval of the Government, local authority may enter into any agreement
with any person or voluntary organization or company, whether incorporated or not, willing to
preserve and conserve any enlisted building or precinct, owned by Government on such terms and
conditions as the Government may determine
127
CHAPTER 14
14
STREAMLINING OF BUILDING PLAN APPROVALS
14.1
Streamlining the building approval/sanction procedure (Ease of Doing Business)
In order to attract investments into the country, efforts are being made by the Government to improve
‘Ease of Doing Business’. In this direction, the limit of Built-up Area (BUA) for Foreign Direct Investment
(FDI) has been reduced from 50,000 Sqm to 20,000 Sqm. In this context, the local bodies have to operate
the entire building approval process in online mode, so that the building plan applications are submitted
online along with building fees and other charges, and after due scrutiny, the approvals are also conveyed
online.
Further, external bodies like Fire and Emergency Services Department, Airports Authority of India (AAI),
Metro Rail Corporation (MRC), Ministry of Railways, Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change
(MoEFCC), Karnataka State Pollution Control Board (KSPCB), Heritage Conservation Committee (HCC),
National Monuments Authority (NMA), Urban Art Commission (UAC), etc. shall grant No Objection
Certificate (NOC)/ approvals on the proposed building plans to the local bodies. All such external bodies
are mandated to prepare online NOC systems compatible to and integrated with that of the local bodies
and the desired information is to be sent to the concerned external bodies and their comments/ NOC/
approval are to be received online so that there is no need for building proponents to pursue matter with
local bodies or external agencies. The specific requirements of the external bodies are to be added in the
Common Application Form (CAF) of the Authority (as specified in Form I and Form II) so that building
proponent has to file all information at a single customized online application (as specified in Appendix-
II). The objective is to make the whole process simplified and streamlined to ensure ease in getting the
approvals for building licence within stipulated time.
14.2
Clearances at Master Plan level
Individual construction proposals should not generally require separate clearances from various
authorities each time. Such clearances should be integrated into the Zonal Regulations of the Master
Plan of the concerned Local Planning Area. The areas unaffected by any of the restrictions should be
clearly marked out and mapped, preferably on a GIS platform. Area zones of differential control
regulations (within the city) by any of these agencies may also be mapped accordingly. This will result in
a composite map of the city with various control regulations as per the various agencies clearly marked
on the map. Thus, the sites which are located outside these restricted/regulated areas would not require
availing clearance from the respective authorities, thereby reducing the clearance process significantly.
The composite map of each LPA would be incorporated as part of the automation process undertaken by
the Government and notified separately for each LPA as and when such maps are prepared, in
consultation with the concerned authorities, preferably on GIS platform.
Following are the clearances which should be integrated into the city Master Plan-
Table 14.1 Clearances from various agencies proposed to be integrated in Master Plans
Sl.
No.
Name of Agency
Type of Clearance
Area of Influence
1. National
Monuments
Authority
through
Competent Authority
Ancient Monument
approval
As prescribed in the AMASAR (Amendment
and Validation) Act, 2010 for protection of
monuments
2. Ministry
of
Environment
Environment
Clearance (EC)
As prescribed in the statutory provisions for
EIA and clearance based on the size of the
128
project in accordance with Environment
Protection Act, 1986
3. Ministry of Defence
Defence Clearance
Area in and around Defence Establishments
as identified by MoD.
4. Coastal
Zone
Management Authority
NOC
(if
near
sea/coastal areas)
Area under the CRZ regulations.
5. NHAI/PWD
Road access
Buffer zones as prescribed by NHAI along
National Highways.
6. Ministry of Railways
Area clearance
Buffer zones as prescribed by Railways along
Rail tracks/depots/yards etc.
7. Airport
Authority
of
India
Height clearance
Height restriction areas in the vicinity of
Airports
Efforts are being made at the Government of India level and the State Government level to coordinate with all
the Central and State ministries and their organizations so that they streamline their own internal processes
to issue no objection etc. wherever required by law. The efforts are mainly focused on delegating the powers
at appropriate levels, establishing an online application process for time bound delivery, creating public
awareness about their requirements, reviewing the restrictions and reducing them, sharing the data and
norms with local authorities to be incorporated in the Master Plan /Zonal Regulations.
Recognizing the concern for streamlining the procedures for clearances to be obtained from various
departments in least possible number of procedures and number of days, the following model shall be
adopted so that the entire process of Pre- and Post-Construction approvals shall be completed within one
month. The detailed timelines for building licence and occupation certificate as notified by government.
14.3
Risk Based Classification of building proposals
There is a need to make provisions for fast-tracking building permission procedures for all non-automatic
approvals. Therefore, in the spirit of ‘Ease of Doing Business’, the buildings have been classified further
on the basis of risk parameters/ risk-based classification to clear the building permits on fast track
system. This kind of classification shall be used for fast tracking the sanction of building plans.
14.3.1 Compound walls abutting public street without Building Development
Construction of Compound walls without Building Development shall be considered as very low
risk development for the application of these Byelaws.
14.3.2 Residential Buildings
For approval of the residential plotted and group housing buildings, risk-based classification
shall be as per Table 14.2 –
Table 14.2 Risk Matrix for development of different Residential buildings
Risks
Very Low
Low
Moderate
High
Criteria
Parameters
Size
of
the Plot
Square
Meters
Below125
m2
125
500 m2
Above 500
m2
All sizes
No.
of
Floors/
(G + no. of
floor)
(G+2)
(G+ 3)
(G+ 4 )
Above (G+4)
Type
of
Developm
ent
Various
Categories
Plotted
Plotted
Plotted/
Group
Housing
Group Housing
129
Approval for risk-based category of buildings may be granted by the designated officers of different
cadres as notified by Government.
14.3.3 Storage/Warehouse Buildings
For approval of the buildings meant for use as storage buildings/warehouses/go down, risk-based
classification shall be as per Table 14.3
Table 14.3 Risk Matrix for development of Storage/Warehouses
Risks
Very Low
Low
Moderate
High
Construction area
in all floors (Sqm)
Up to 250m2
Above 250m2
and
up
to
2000m2
Up to 2000m2
Above 2000m2
Height of building
Below 15m
Below 15m
Below 15m
Below 15m
Abutting proposed
Road width
Min. 12m
Min. 12m
Min. 12m
Min. 12m
Type of Material
Storage
Category A
Category A
Category B
(Stacking
Height-
Medium)
Category B
(Stacking Height-High)
Note:
i. The level of Risk is classified according to the material stored in the warehouse/storehouse. Material shall be
classified according to the Categories defined in Appendix-XXI.
ii. Approval for risk-based category of buildings may be granted by the designated officers of different cadres
as notified by Government.
.
iii. The building application processing fees shall be as prescribed in Appendix-VII.
14.3.4 Commercial & Industrial Buildings
For approval of the buildings meant for Commercial & Industrial uses, risk-based classification shall
be as per Table 14.4
Table 14.4 Risk Matrix for development of Commercial & Industrial Buildings
Risks
Low
Moderate
High
Criteria
Parameters
Size of the Plot
Square Meters
up to 350 m2
Above 350 m2
All sizes
Height of building
Meters
Less than 15m
Upto 18m
Above18m
Abutting Proposed
Road width
Meters
Min 6 m
Min 9 m
Min.12m
Note:
i. The level of Risk is classified according the size and height of the industrial building proposed.
ii. Approval for risk-based category of buildings may be granted by the designated officers of different cadres
as notified by Government.
. The building application processing fees shall be derived by an automated built-in calculator in the online
system.
130
14.4
Fast Tracking Tools:
Fast tracking tools are provided here below for issuing building licence. However, the procedure
prescribed in Clause 3.16, 3.17 & 3.18 shall be followed, except for the construction of Compound
walls abutting public street, without Building Developments. In case of construction of compound
wall without building development, Approval for risk-based category of buildings may be granted by
the designated officers of different cadres as notified by Government.
For very Low Risk Developments:
1)
Plans to be submitted online to the Local Authority along with the required details specified in clause
3.10.2 and Affidavit / Undertaking from the Applicant and Professional on Record for drawing &
supervision.
2)
Deemed Approval with Self-Certification by Professional on Record for drawings and by Owner
14.4.1 For Low-Risk Developments:
1)
Plans to be submitted online to the Local Authority along with the required details specified in
clause 3.10.2
Approval for risk-based category of buildings may be granted by the designated officers of different cadres as
notified by Government. as per the procedure specified in these Byelaws within the timelines specified in
Appendix VIII
14.4.2 For Moderate Risk Developments:
1)
Plans to be submitted online to the Local Authority along with the required details specified in clause
3.10.2
2)
Approval to be granted by the Local Authority within the timelines specified by Government
3)
Deemed licence to be issued online automatically if the Local Authority does not grant approval within
the timelines specified in Appendix VIII (KMC Act Procedure to be followed)
14.4.3 For High Risk Developments:
1)
Common application form (as specified in Form I & Form II) with all the details as specified in
Appendix-II for building licence and all required NOCs to be submitted online to the Local Authority
along with the details specified in clause 3.10.2
2)
NOCs to be issued by the concerned departments online within the timelines specified by Government
3)
Deemed NOCs to be issued online by the Local Authority if the concerned department does not issue
NOC within the specified timelines.
4)
Approval to be granted by the Local Authority within the timelines specified by Government
5)
Deemed licence to be issued online automatically if the Local Authority does not grant approval within
the timelines specified by Government (KMC Act Procedure to be followed)
14.5
Other Tools to enhance ease of doing business:
Some other Tools, regarding Fast-Track construction licences are:
131
14.5.1 ‘Citizens’ Charter
A ‘Citizens’ charter as notified by the Government shall list out the timelines and upper limits of time
for the delivery of citizen services of the Authority. The objective of issuing the charter is to improve the
quality of public service in terms of timely delivery. Such charters shall be brought out by all the Local
Body to maintain high standards of accountability and transparency. The standards of service to be
provided, the maximum number of days required for providing various citizen services and the standard
procedure shall be listed out in the citizens’ charter.
14.5.2 Capacity building
Capacity building measures are to be adopted for such functionaries to identify Training Needs (TNA) and
other technical requirement of duties that they are required to discharge as per the provisions of this
Byelaws. Fresh recruitments commensurate to the technical qualification/ experience are to be made by
the Local Authority (in consultation with the State Government, if required), if there is complete / notable
absence of the technical expertise needed for the said services.
The Local Authority shall conduct periodical orientation programmes, not less than once in 6 months for
all stakeholders, to enhance the capacity of all the stakeholders and to bring in more awareness among
the general public about the benefits of this Byelaws.
14.5.3 Simplification of Byelaws
The building Byelaws have been simplified for easy comprehension of lay person as well as professionals
involved in developmental activities. The simplification process also includes the process of application,
the filling up of forms and streamlining the process of application and sanctioning through online system.
132
CHAPTER 15
15. CLIMATE RESILIENT CONSTRUCTION – INTEGRATION OF ENVIRONMENTAL CLEARANCE WITH
SANCTION
Land, Air, Noise, Water, Energy, biological, socio-economic, solid / other waste management are the main
facets considered in relation to Pre, during and Post Building Construction for Sustainable Environment
Management. Therefore, it is necessary for the building process to ensure compliance to various conditions
laid down by the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change.
The building construction sector is a major contributor towards carbon footprints which affects
climate change. India is committed towards mitigating the effects of climate change and moving towards
internationally accepted norms for environmental friendly building construction. Currently this objective of
environmental safeguard is achieved through obtaining a specific environmental clearance (EC) for any
construction project having a size of more than 20,000 Sqm. This is administered under notification of
Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change.
With rapid urbanisation and growth of Indian economy, it is anticipated that the construction activity
will experience a proportionate growth. Government is also committed towards streamlining of clearances for
buildings and real estate sector and empowering the urban local bodies with an objective of Ease of Doing
Business.
Integration of environmental condition in building Byelaws:
1) When the State Government notifies the Byelaws and rules concurred by the Ministry of Environment,
Forest and Climate Change, the Central Government may issue an order stating that no separate
environmental clearance is required for buildings to be constructed in the State or authority areas.
2) The Local Authority shall certify the compliance of the environmental conditions prior to issuance of
Completion Report, as prescribed in the Byelaws, as per the requirements stipulated for such buildings based
on the recommendation of the Environmental Cell constituted in the Authority.
3) For the purpose of certification regarding incorporation of environmental conditions in buildings, the
Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change may empanel through competent agencies, the Qualified
Building Environment Auditors (QBEAs) to assess and certify the building projects, as per the requirements
of this notification and the procedure for accreditation of Qualified Building Auditors and their role as given
at Appendix-XIX.
4) In order to implement the integration of environmental condition in building Byelaws, the Local Authority
shall constitute the Environment Monitoring Cell (herein after called as Cell), for compliance and monitoring
and to ensure environmental planning within their jurisdiction.
5) The Cell shall monitor the implementation of the Byelaws and rules framed for Integration of environmental
conditions for construction of building and the Cell may utilise the services of the licensed professionals as
prescribed in Appendix-IA
6) The Cell shall function under the administrative control of the Authority.
7) The composition and functions of the Cell are given at Appendix-XX.
8) The environmental concerns are integrated in the building Byelaws, as per their size of the project, and the
Local Authority shall follow the procedure, as given below:
9) No Environmental Clearance from Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change and no Consent
to Establish and Operate under the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 and the Air
133
(Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 will be required from the State Pollution Control Boards for
buildings as specified by the competent Authority.
15.1
Environmental conditions for compliance during Building approvals
The Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change has now decided to integrate the environmental
concerns into building plan approval process and empowering the concerned local body to approve and certify
compliance of stipulated requirements. The new building construction proposals, for the purpose of this
chapter are classified in the following 3 categories: -
1) Building Category ‘1’: Built-up Area 5,000 Sqm to < 20,000 Sqm
2) Building Category ‘2’: Built-up Area ≥ 20,000 Sqm to 50,000 Sqm
3) Building Category ‘3’: Built-up Area ≥ 50,000Sq.m to 1,50,000 Sqm
Note: (area mentioned against each building category is the total constructed area of the building including
car parking area)
15.1.1 BUILDINGS CATEGORY ‘1’ (5,000 to < 20,000 Square meters)
A Self Declaration Form to comply with the environmental conditions as stipulated in Table 15.1 along
with Form-IIb and certification by the Building Environment Auditor to be submitted by the project
proponent as a common application for building licence to the Local Authority along with the specified fee
in separate accounts. Thereafter, the Local Authority may issue the building License incorporating the
environmental conditions in it and allow the project to start based on the self-declaration and certification
along with the application. After completion of the construction of the building, the project proponent may
update Form-IIb based on audit done by the qualified Building Environment Auditor (BEA) and shall
furnish the revised compliance undertaking to the Local Authority along with Form VIII. Any non-
compliance issues in buildings less than 20,000 square meters shall be dealt as prescribed in the rules
framed under Section 76F & 76 FFF of KTCP Act.
15.1.2 BUILDINGS CATEGORY ‘2’ (>20,000 to <1,50,000 Square meters)
A Self Declaration Form to comply with the environmental conditions as stipulated in Table 15.2 along with
Form-IIb and Compliance Report submitted by Environment Engineer on Record (EER) to be submitted by
the project proponent as a common application for building licence to the Local Authority along with the
specified fee in separate accounts. The fee for environmental appraisal will be deposited in a separate account.
The Environment Monitoring Cell will process the Application after obtaining Evaluation Report of the
Building Environment Auditor (of the compliance report submitted by the EER) and if the Application and
drawings / details submitted are in order, forward the same to the Commissioner.
If the Environment Monitoring Cell is of the opinion that the application/drawings submitted by the
proponent is not in accordance with the provisions of these Byelaws (based on the evaluation report submitted
by the Building Environment Auditor (BEA), the Environment Monitoring Cell shall suggest the necessary
changes to be made and forward the same to the Commissioner. The Commissioner shall issue endorsement
to the proponent as per the suggestions made by the Environment Monitoring Cell and the proponent shall
make the necessary changes and resubmit the application / drawings to the satisfactions of the Environment
Monitoring Cell and the Environment Monitoring Cell shall accept the revisions made by the proponent.
According to the Proponent or the concerned EER, if the defects / changes suggested in the endorsement are
incorrect, the proponent may file objection, to the commissioner, stating the correctness of the drawings /
details submitted.
134
If any such objection is received from the Proponent, the Commissioner shall conduct joint enquiry along
with the Applicant, the concerned EER, the Building Environment Auditor who has submitted the Evaluation
Report and the Environment Monitoring Cell which has suggested the changes in the drawings / details
submitted (based on which the endorsement was issued), by giving notice to all, within seven days of receiving
objection.
During the enquiry, the Commissioner, after hearing the views of both the parties, shall either accept or reject
the objection raised by the proponent and instruct the proponent accordingly in writing and sending a copy
of the same to the Environment Monitoring Cell and the decision of the Commissioner shall be final. The
Proponent shall abide by the decision of the Commissioner and make necessary changes as instructed by the
commissioner, if any and resubmit the application.
After receiving the recommendation of the Environment Monitoring Cell or after receiving the changes made
as instructed by the Commissioner (as mentioned above), the building Licence and environmental clearance
shall be issued in an integrated format by the Authority.
After executing all works in site as per the environmental clearance issued by the Local Authority and
certification of works by the licensed professional, the Completion Report shall be submitted as prescribed in
clause 3.17.
The project proponent shall submit Performance Data and Certificate of Continued Compliance of the project
for the environmental condition’s parameters applicable after completion of construction, from Building
Environment Auditors every year to the Environment Monitoring Cell with special focus on the following
parameters (as detailed in clause 11.2): -
(a) Energy Use (including all energy sources).
(b) Energy generated on site from onsite Renewable energy sources.
(c) Water use and waste water generated, treated and reused on site.
(d) Waste Segregated and Treated on site.
(e) Tree plantation and maintenance.
After completion of the project, the Cell shall randomly check the projects compliance status including the
yearly audit report. Penalties and action against the concerned persons for non-compliances of the
environmental conditions and parameters shall be initiated as prescribed in the rules framed under Section
76F and 76 FFF of KTCP Act.
15.1.3 BUILDINGS CATEGORY ‘3’ (≥ 50,000 to < 1,50,000 Square meters)
All the process mentioned in Clause 15.1.2 shall be followed except that after completion of the project, the
Cell shall check all the projects for compliance on a yearly basis including the yearly audit report submitted
by Building Environment Auditors.
135
Table 15.1: Environmental Conditions for Building and Construction
(Building Category ‘1’: 5,000Sqm to < 20,000Sqm)
Sl.
No.
Medium
Environmental conditions
1
Topography
Natural Drainage
The natural drain system should be maintained for ensuring unrestricted flow of water.
No construction shall be allowed to obstruct the natural drainage through the site. No
construction is allowed on wetland and water bodies. Check dams, bio swales,
landscape, and other sustainable urban drainage systems (SUDS) are allowed for
maintaining the drainage pattern and to harvest rainwater.
Buildings shall be designed to follow the natural topography as much as possible.
Minimum cutting and filling should be done.
2
Water
conservations-
Rainwater
Harvesting
and
Ground
Water
Recharge
A complete plan for rainwater harvesting water efficiency and conservation should be
prepared.
The provisions on rainwater harvesting and Ground water recharging prescribed in
Chapter 10 and as specified by the Local Authority or as notified by the Government
should be followed. A rainwater harvesting plan needs to be designed where the
recharge bores of minimum one recharge bore per 5,000 Sqm of built-up area and
storage capacity of minimum one day of total freshwater requirement shall be provided.
In areas where ground water recharge is not feasible, the rainwater should be harvested
and stored for reuse. The ground water shall not be withdrawn without approval from
the Competent Authority.
All recharges should be limited to shallow aquifer.
2(a)
At least 20% of the open spaces (setback area)) shall be pervious. Use of Grass pavers,
paver blocks with at least 50% opening, landscape etc. would be considered as pervious
surface.
2(b)
Water efficient appliances shall be used. Low flow fixtures or sensors be used to
promote water conservation. Details as specified by the Local Authority or as notified
by the Government shall be followed.
2(c)
Separation of grey and black water should be done by the use of dual plumbing system.
In case of single stack system separate recirculation lines for flushing by giving dual
plumbing system be done.
3
Solid
Waste
Management
Solid waste: Separate wet and dry bins must be provided in each unit and at the ground
level for facilitating segregation of waste.
The provisions of the Solid Waste (Management) Rules 2016 and the e-waste
(Management) Rules 2016, and the Plastics Waste (Management) Rules 2016 shall be
followed.
3(a)
All non-biodegradable waste shall be handed over to authorized recyclers for which a
written tie up must be done with the authorized recyclers.
3(b)
Treatment of wet waste and sanitary waste on site (organic dry waste also is preferred)
using Organic waste composter / Vermiculture pit, Black Soldier Fly larva or any other
approved technology shall be installed with a minimum capacity of 0.3 kg /person/day
must be installed.
4
Sewage Treatment
Plant
/
Sullage
Treatment Plant
Onsite sewage treatment of capacity of treating 100% wastewater to be installed, where
the sewer lines of the building cannot be connected to city level sewerage system.
In case the sewer line of the building can be connected to the city level sewerage system,
the relaxation on the size of STP / Sullage Treatment Plant should be obtained from
the competent Authority, subject to the minimum capacity of the STP / Sullage
Treatment Plant to cater to the requirement of recycled treated water in the project.
Treated waste water shall be reused on site for landscape, flushing, cooling tower, and
other end-uses. Excess treated water shall be discharged into the city level sewerage
system or as per CPCB norms. Natural treatment systems shall be promoted. Sludge
from the onsite sewage treatment, including septic tanks, shall be collected, conveyed
and disposed as per the Ministry of Urban Development, Central Public Health and
Environmental Engineering Organisation (CPHEEO) Manual on Sewerage and Sewage
Treatment Systems, 2013. Preferred types of STP / Sullage Treatment Plant shall be as
notified by the Government.
136
5
Energy
Compliance with the Energy Conservation Building Code (ECBC) of Bureau of Energy
Efficiency shall be ensured. Buildings in the States which have notified their own
ECBC, shall comply with the State ECBC. Details as notified by the Government shall
be followed.
All lighting and other electric fixtures shall be of low energy consumption (Electrical
Appliances – BEE Star and Energy Efficient Appliances)
Concept of passive solar design that minimize energy consumption in buildings by
using design elements, such as building orientation, landscaping, efficient building
envelope, appropriate fenestration, increased day lighting design and thermal mass etc.
shall be incorporated in the building design.
Wall, window, and roof u-values shall be as per ECBC specifications.
5(a)
Solar, wind or other Renewable Energy shall be installed to meet electricity generation
equivalent to 5% of the power consumption of the project subject to minimum provision
made as prescribed in clause 11.2.3 or as notified by the Government.
5(b)
Solar water heating shall be provided to meet the total hot water demand of the
commercial and institutional building. Residential buildings are also to meet its hot
water demand from solar water heaters, unless additional power supply from renewable
energy sources is provided equal to the power requirement of electric water heaters, as
prescribed in Clause 11.2.4.
Alternatively, any other hybrid system (including other cost-efficient technologies such
as heat pump etc.) may be proposed for hot water generation instead of solar water
heating system. Details prescribed in Clause 11.2.4 or as notified by the Government
shall be followed.
5(c)
Use of environment friendly materials in bricks, blocks and other construction
materials, shall be required for at least 20% of the construction material quantity.
These include fly ash bricks, hollow bricks, AACs, Fly Ash Lime Gypsum blocks,
Compressed earth blocks, and other environment friendly materials.
Fly ash should be used as building material in the construction as per the provisions
of the Fly Ash Notification of September 1999 as amended from time to time.
6
Air
Quality
and
Noise
Dust, smoke & other air pollution prevention measures shall be provided for the
building as well as the site. These measures shall include screens for the building under
construction, continuous dust/ wind breaking walls all around the site (at least 3 m
height). Plastic/tarpaulin sheet covers shall be provided for vehicles bringing in sand,
cement, murram and other construction materials prone to causing dust pollution at
the site as well as taking out debris from the site. Wheel washing for the vehicles should
be done before leaving the site.
Sand, murram, loose soil, cement, stored on site shall be covered adequately so as to
prevent dust pollution.
Wet jet shall be provided for grinding and stone cutting. Unpaved surfaces and loose
soil shall be adequately sprinkled with water to suppress dust.
All construction and demolition debris shall be stored at the site (and not dumped on
the roads or open spaces outside) before they are properly disposed. All demolition and
construction waste shall be managed as per the provisions of the Construction and
Demolition Waste Rules 2016. Details as specified by the Government shall be followed.
All workers working at the construction site and involved in loading, unloading, carriage
of construction material and construction debris or working in any area with dust
pollution shall be provided with dust mask.
For indoor air quality, the ventilation provisions as per National Building Code of India.
6(a)
The location of the DG set and exhaust pipe height shall be as per the provisions of the
CPCB norms.
7
Green cover
A minimum of 1 tree for every 80 Sqm. of land should be planted and maintained. The
existing trees will be counted for this purpose. Preference should be given to planting
native species
7(a)
Where the trees need to be cut, compensatory plantation in the ratio of 1:3 (i.e., planting
of 3 trees for every 1 tree that is cut) shall be done and maintained.
137
Table 15.2: Environmental Conditions for Building and Construction
(Building Category ‘2’: ≥ 20,000 Sqm to 50,000 Sqm)
Sl.
No.
Medium
Environmental conditions
1
Topography
Natural
Drainage
The natural drain system should be maintained for ensuring unrestricted flow of water.
No construction shall be allowed to obstruct the natural drainage through the site. No
construction is allowed on wetland and water bodies. Check dams, bio swales,
landscape, and other sustainable urban drainage systems (SUDS) are allowed for
maintaining the drainage pattern and to harvest rainwater.
Buildings shall be designed to follow the natural topography as much as possible.
Minimum cutting and filling should be done.
2
Water
conservations-
Rainwater
Harvesting and
Ground
Water
Recharge
A complete plan for rainwater harvesting water efficiency and conservation should be
prepared.
The provisions on rainwater harvesting and Ground water recharging prescribed in
Chapter 10 and Appendix-XVII as notified by the Government should shall be followed.
A rainwater harvesting plan needs to be designed where the recharge bores of minimum
one recharge bore per 5,000 Sqm of built-up area and storage capacity of minimum one
day of total freshwater requirement shall be provided. In areas where ground water
recharge is not feasible, the rainwater should be harvested and stored for reuse. The
ground water shall not be withdrawn without approval from the Competent Authority.
All recharges should be limited to shallow aquifer.
2(a)
At least 20% of the open spaces (setback area) shall be pervious. Use of Grass pavers,
paver blocks with at least 50% opening, landscape etc. would be considered as pervious
surface.
2(b)
Water efficient appliances shall be used. Low flow fixtures or sensors be used to promote
water conservation. Details as notified by the Government shall be followed.
2(c)
Separation of grey and black water should be done by the use of dual plumbing system.
In case of single stack system separate recirculation lines for flushing by giving dual
plumbing system be done. Details as specified as notified by the Government shall be
followed.
3
Solid
Waste
Management
Solid waste: Separate wet and dry bins must be provided in each unit and at the ground
level for facilitating segregation of waste.
The provisions of the Solid Waste (Management) Rules 2016 and the e-waste
(Management) Rules 2016, and the Plastics Waste (Management) Rules 2016 shall be
followed. Details as specified Appendix-XVIII-A shall be followed.
3(a)
All non-biodegradable waste shall be handed over to authorized recyclers for which a
written tie up must be done with the authorized recyclers.
3(b)
Treatment of wet waste on site (organic dry waste also is preferred) using Organic Waste
Converter, Vermiculture pit, Black Soldier Fly larva or any other approved technology
shall be installed, and sanitary waste shall be incinerated as specified in Appendix-
XVIII-A
4
Sewage
Treatment
Plant / Sullage
Treatment Plant
Onsite sewage treatment has to be done for treating 100% wastewater, by installing
Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) of required capacity to be installed, where the sewer lines
of the building cannot be connected to city level sewerage system.
In case the sewer line of the building can be connected to the city level sewerage system,
the relaxation on the size of STP or Sullage Treatment Plant (SuTP), as the case may be,
may be allowed should be obtained from the competent Authority, subject to the
minimum capacity of the STP / SuTP to cater to the requirement of recycled treated
water in the project and after getting NOC from the Authority to connect the excess raw
Sewage to the city level sewerage system. Treated waste water shall be reused on site
for landscape, flushing, cooling tower, and other end-uses. Excess treated water shall
be discharged into the city level sewerage system or as per CPCB norms. Natural
treatment systems shall be promoted. Sludge from the onsite sewage treatment,
including septic tanks, shall be collected, conveyed and disposed as per the Ministry
of Urban Development, Central Public Health and Environmental Engineering
Organisation (CPHEEO) Manualon Sewerage and Sewage Treatment Systems, 2013.
Preferred types of STP / Sullage Treatment Plant shall be as notified by the
Government..
138
5
Energy
Compliance with the Energy Conservation Building Code (ECBC) of Bureau of Energy
Efficiency shall be ensured Buildings in the States which have notified their own ECBC,
shall comply with the State ECBC. Details as notified by the Government shall be
followed.
All lighting and other electric fixtures shall be of low energy consumption (Electrical
Appliances – BEE Star and Energy Efficient Appliances)
Concept of passive solar design that minimize energy consumption in buildings by using
design elements, such as building orientation, landscaping, efficient building envelope,
appropriate fenestration, increased day lighting design and thermal mass etc. shall be
incorporated in the building design.
Wall, window, and roof u-values shall be as per ECBC specifications.
5(a)
Solar, wind or other Renewable Energy shall be installed to meet electricity generation
equivalent to 5% of the power consumption of the project subject to minimum provision
made as prescribed in clause 11.2.3 or as notified by the Government.
5(b)
Solar water heating shall be provided to meet the total hot water demand of the
commercial and institutional building. Residential buildings are also to meet its hot
water demand from solar water heaters, unless additional power supply from renewable
energy sources is provided equal to the power requirement of electric water heaters as
prescribed in Clause 11.2.4..
Alternatively, any other hybrid system (including other cost-efficient technologies such
as heat pump etc.) may be proposed for hot water generation instead of solar water
heating system. Details prescribed in Clause 11.2.4 or as notified by the Government
shall be followed.
5(c)
Use of environment friendly materials in bricks, blocks and other construction
materials, shall be required for at least 20% of the construction material quantity. These
include fly ash bricks, hollow bricks, AACs, Fly Ash Lime Gypsum blocks, Compressed
earth blocks, and other environment friendly materials.
Fly ash should be used as building material in the construction as per the provisions of
the Fly Ash Notification of September 1999 as amended from time to time.
6
Air Quality and
Noise
Dust, smoke & other air pollution prevention measures shall be provided for the
building as well as the site. These measures shall include screens for the building under
construction, continuous dust/ wind breaking walls all around the site (at least 3 m
height). Plastic/tarpaulin sheet covers shall be provided for vehicles bringing in sand,
cement, murram and other construction materials prone to causing dust pollution at
the site as well as taking out debris from the site. Wheel washing for the vehicles should
be done before leaving the site.
Sand, murram, loose soil, cement, stored on site shall be covered adequately so as to
prevent dust pollution.
Wet jet shall be provided for grinding and stone cutting. Unpaved surfaces and loose
soil shall be adequately sprinkled with water to suppress dust.
All construction and demolition debris shall be stored at the site (and not dumped on
the roads or open spaces outside) before they are properly disposed. All demolition and
construction waste shall be managed as per the provisions of the Construction and
Demolition Waste Rules 2016. Details as notified by the Government shall be followed.
All workers working at the construction site and involved in loading, unloading, carriage
of construction material and construction debris or working in any area with dust
pollution shall be provided with dust mask.
For indoor air quality, the ventilation provisions as per National Building Code of India.
6(a)
The location of the DG set and exhaust pipe height shall be as per the provisions of the
CPCB norms.
7
Green cover
A minimum of 1 tree for every 80 Sqm. of land should be planted and maintained. The
existing trees will be counted for this purpose. Preference should be given to planting
native species
7(a)
Where the trees need to be cut, compensatory plantation in the ratio of 1:3 (i.e., planting
of 3 trees for every 1 tree that is cut) shall be done and maintained.
8
Topsoil
Preservation
and Reuse
Topsoil should be stripped to a depth of 20 cm from the areas proposed for buildings,
roads, paved areas, and external services. It should be stockpiled appropriately in
designated areas and reapplied during plantation of the proposed vegetation on site.
139
9
Transport
A comprehensive mobility plan, as per MoUD best practices guidelines (URDPFI), shall
be prepared to include motorized, non-motorized, public, and private networks.
Road should be designed with due consideration for environment, and safety of users.
The road system can be designed with these basic criteria.
1. Hierarchy of roads with proper segregation of vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
2. Traffic calming measures.
3. Proper design of entry and exit points.
4. Parking norms as per local regulation.
Table 15.3: Environmental Conditions for Building and Construction
(Building Category ‘3’: ≥ 50,000 Sqm to 1,50,000Sqm)
Sl.
No.
Medium
Environmental conditions
1
Topography
Natural Drainage
The natural drain system should be maintained for ensuring unrestricted flow of
water. No construction shall be allowed to obstruct the natural drainage through the
site. No construction is allowed on wetland and water bodies. Check dams, bio
swales, landscape, and other sustainable urban drainage systems (SUDS) are
allowed for maintaining the drainage pattern and to harvest rainwater.
Buildings shall be designed to follow the natural topography as much as possible.
Minimum cutting and filling should be done.
2
Water
conservations-
Rainwater
Harvesting
and
Ground
Water
Recharge
A complete plan for rainwater harvesting water efficiency and conservation should
be prepared.
The provisions on rainwater harvesting and Ground water recharging prescribed in
Chapter 10 and as notified by the Government should be followed. A rainwater
harvesting plan needs to be designed where the recharge bores of minimum one
recharge bore per 5,000 Sqm of built up area and storage capacity of minimum one
day of total freshwater requirement shall be provided. In areas where ground water
recharge is not feasible, the rainwater should be harvested and stored for reuse. The
ground water shall not be withdrawn without approval from the Competent
Authority.
All recharges should be limited to shallow aquifer.
2(a)
At least 20% of the open spaces (setback area) shall be pervious. Use of Grass pavers,
paver blocks with at least 50% opening, landscape etc. would be considered as
pervious surface.
2(b)
Water efficient appliances shall be used. Low flow fixtures or sensors be used to
promote water conservation. Details as notified by the Government shall be followed.
2(c)
Separation of grey and black water should be done by the use of dual plumbing
system. In case of single stack system separate recirculation lines for flushing by
giving dual plumbing system be done. Details as notified by the Government shall
be followed.
3
Solid
Waste
Management
Solid waste: Separate wet and dry bins must be provided in each unit and at the
ground level for facilitating segregation of waste.
The provisions of the Solid Waste (Management) Rules 2016 and the e-waste
(Management) Rules 2016, and the Plastics Waste (Management) Rules 2016 shall
be followed. Details as as notified by the Government shall be followed.
3(a)
All non-biodegradable waste shall be handed over to authorized recyclers for which
a written tie up must be done with the authorized recyclers.
3(b)
Treatment of wet waste and sanitary waste on site (organic dry waste also is
preferred) using Organic waste composter/Vermiculture pit, Black Soldier Fly larva
or any other approved technology shall be installed with a minimum capacity of 0.3
kg /person/day must be installed.
4
Sewage Treatment
Plant
/
Sullage
Treatment Plant
Onsite sewage treatment of capacity of treating 100% wastewater to be installed,
where the sewer lines of the building cannot be connected to city level sewerage
system.
140
In case the sewer line of the building can be connected to the city level sewerage
system, the relaxation on the size of STP / Sullage Treatment Plant should be
obtained from the competent Authority, subject to the minimum capacity of the STP
/ Sullage Treatment Plant to cater to the requirement of recycled treated water in the
project.
Treated waste water shall be reused on site for landscape, flushing, cooling tower,
and other end-uses. Excess treated water shall be discharged into the city level
sewerage system or as per CPCB norms. Natural treatment systems shall be
promoted. Sludge from the onsite sewage treatment, including septic tanks, shall be
collected, conveyed and disposed as per the Ministry of Urban Development, Central
Public Health and Environmental Engineering Organisation (CPHEEO) Manual on
Sewerage and Sewage Treatment Systems, 2013. Preferred types of STP / Sullage
Treatment Plant shall be as notified by the Government.
5
Energy
Compliance with the Energy Conservation Building Code (ECBC) of Bureau of Energy
Efficiency shall be ensured Buildings in the States which have notified their own
ECBC, shall comply with the State ECBC. Details as notified by the Government
shall be followed.
All lighting and other electric fixtures shall be of low energy consumption (Electrical
Appliances – BEE Star and Energy Efficient Appliances)
Concept of passive solar design that minimize energy consumption in buildings by
using design elements, such as building orientation, landscaping, efficient building
envelope, appropriate fenestration, increased day lighting design and thermal mass
etc. shall be incorporated in the building design.
Wall, window, and roof u-values shall be as per ECBC specifications.
5(a)
Solar, wind or other Renewable Energy shall be installed to meet electricity
generation equivalent to 5% of the power consumption of the project subject to
minimum provision made as prescribed in clause 11.2.3 or as notified by the
Government.
5(b)
Solar water heating shall be provided to meet the total hot water demand of the
commercial and institutional building. Residential buildings are also to meet its hot
water demand from solar water heaters, unless additional power supply from
renewable energy sources is provided equal to the power requirement of electric water
heaters, as prescribed in Clause 11.2.4.
Alternatively, any other hybrid system (including other cost-efficient technologies
such as heat pump etc.) may be proposed for hot water generation instead of solar
water heating system. Details prescribed in Clause 11.2.4 or as notified by the
Government shall be followed.
5(c)
Use of environment friendly materials in bricks, blocks and other construction
materials, shall be required for at least 20% of the construction material quantity.
These include fly ash bricks, hollow bricks, AACs, Fly Ash Lime Gypsum blocks,
Compressed earth blocks, and other environment friendly materials.
Fly ash should be used as building material in the construction as per the provisions
of the Fly Ash Notification of September 1999 as amended from time to time.
6
Air
Quality
and
Noise
Dust, smoke & other air pollution prevention measures shall be provided for the
building as well as the site. These measures shall include screens for the building
under construction, continuous dust/ wind breaking walls all around the site (at
least 3 m height). Plastic/tarpaulin sheet covers shall be provided for vehicles
bringing in sand, cement, murram and other construction materials prone to causing
dust pollution at the site as well as taking out debris from the site. Wheel washing
for the vehicles should be done before leaving the site.
Sand, murram, loose soil, cement, stored on site shall be covered adequately so as
to prevent dust pollution.
Wet jet shall be provided for grinding and stone cutting. Unpaved surfaces and loose
soil shall be adequately sprinkled with water to suppress dust.
All construction and demolition debris shall be stored at the site (and not dumped
on the roads or open spaces outside) before they are properly disposed. All demolition
and construction waste shall be managed as per the provisions of the Construction
141
and Demolition Waste Rules 2016. Details as notified by the Government shall be
followed.
All workers working at the construction site and involved in loading, unloading,
carriage of construction material and construction debris or working in any area with
dust pollution shall be provided with dust mask.
For indoor air quality, the ventilation provisions as per National Building Code of
India.
6(a)
The location of the DG set and exhaust pipe height shall be as per the provisions of
the CPCB norms.
7
Green cover
A minimum of 1 tree for every 80 Sqm. of land should be planted and maintained.
The existing trees will be counted for this purpose. Preference should be given to
planting native species
7(a)
Where the trees need to be cut, compensatory plantation in the ratio of 1:3 (i.e.,
planting of 3 trees for every 1 tree that is cut) shall be done and maintained.
8
Topsoil
Preservation
and Reuse
Topsoil should be stripped to a depth of 20 cm from the areas proposed for buildings,
roads, paved areas, and external services. It should be stockpiled appropriately in
designated areas and reapplied during plantation of the proposed vegetation on site.
9
Transport
A comprehensive mobility plan, as per MoUD best practices guidelines (URDPFI),
shall be prepared to include motorized, non-motorized, public, and private networks.
Road should be designed with due consideration for environment, and safety of
users. The road system can be designed with these basic criteria.
1. Hierarchy of roads with proper segregation of vehicular and pedestrian
traffic.
2.
Traffic calming measures.
3.
Proper design of entry and exit points.
4.
Parking norms as per local regulation.
10
Environment
Management Plan
An environmental management plan (EMP) shall be prepared and implemented to
ensure compliance with the environmental conditions specified in item number 1 to
9 above. A dedicated Environment Monitoring Cell with defined functions and
responsibility shall be put in place to implement the EMP. The environmental cell
shall ensure that the environment infrastructure like Sewage Treatment Plant,
Landscaping, Rainwater Harvesting, Energy efficiency and conservation, water
efficiency and conservation, solid waste management, renewable energy etc. are kept
operational and meet the required standards. The environmental cell shall also keep
the record of environment monitoring and those related to the environment
infrastructure.
Note: The solid waste management system and wastewater management system proposed in the above tables
or as notified by the government (along with monitoring mechanism for the effective functioning of the
systems) shall be followed.
142
CHAPTER 16
16 KARNATAKA ENERGY CONSERVATION BUILIDING CODE (KECBC)
Compliance Requirements
a.
Buildings or building complex that have a connected load of 100kW or greater or a contract
demand of 120 KVA or greater and are intended to be used for commercial purposes must comply with
the Karnataka Energy Conservation Building Code 2018 (hereinafter referred to as the said code) as
modified from time to time:
Provided that, the buildings intended for private residential purposes only, are exempted for compliance.
b.
Commercial building. - A building is classified as “Commercial”, if it is used for any of the
following purposes, namely; -
a)
Hospitality: All hotels and resorts;
b)
Educational: School, collage, university and other educational Institutions;
c)
Healthcare: Hospitals, Out-patient units and other health care units;
d) Shopping Complex: Shopping malls, Stand-alone retails, Open-gallery malls and Super markets;
e)
Business: Day-time use and 24-hour use business units; and
f)
Assembly: Multiplex, Theatre and buildings used for transport services.
c.
The Provisions of the said code shall be applicable to the following building-systems, namely; -
a)
Building envelope;
b)
Mechanical systems and equipment’s, including heating, ventilating air-conditioning and service hot
water heating:
c)
Interior and Exterior lighting: and
d) Electric power, motors and renewable energy systems.
d.
The provisions of the said code shall not be applicable to plug loads, equipment’s and parts of
buildings that use energy for manufacturing processes, unless otherwise specified in the said code.
e.
The compliance of the energy performance of a building with the code, shall be ensured by the
owner by following the mandatory requirements of the code and by following either prescriptive method,
Building Envelope Trade off method or whole building performance method, as specified in the code.
143
f.
The compliance with the code shall be verified in the following stages, namely; -
a)
Stage-1: at the time obtaining the construction permit from the Authority;
b)
Stage-2:at the time of obtaining construction completion or occupancy certificate from the Authority;
and
c)
Stage-3:at the time of obtaining the electrical connection from DISCOMs
g. No objection Certificate with respect to the compliance with the Code, for electrical installation shall
be obtained from the State Electrical inspectorate.
Note: This chapter shall be read with the Karnataka Energy Conservation Building code (KECBC) 2018, as
modified from time to time. and the Karnataka Energy Conservation Building Code (KECBC) Rules 2018, as
from time to time
144
Annexure-A
Occupancy Categorization of Buildings for Water and Other Requirement for Fire fighting
Zone-I
Zone-II
Zone-III
GROUP ‘A’: RESIDENTIAL
GROUP ‘E’: BUSINESS
GROUP ‘G’: INDUSTRIAL
A-1 Lodging and Rooming
House
A-2 One or two family private
A-3 Dormitories
A-4 Apartment Houses
A-5 Hotels
A-6 Starred hotels
E-2 Laboratories, outpatient
clinics,
research
establishments,
libraries
and test houses
E-3
Electronic
data
processing
centres,
computer
installations,
information
technology
parks and call centres
E-4 Telephone exchanges
E-5 Broadcasting stations,
T.V. stations and air traffic
control towers
G-3 Buildings used for High hazard industries
GROUP ‘B’: EDUCATIONAL
GROUP ‘G’ INDUSTRIAL
GROUP ‘H’ STORAGE BUILDINGS
B-1 Schools up to senior
secondary level
B-2
All
others/
training
institutions
G-1 Buildings used for Low
hazard industries
G-2
Buildings
used
for
Moderate
hazard
industries
This shall include any building or part of a
building used primarily for the storage or
sheltering of goods, ware or merchandise,
vehicles or animals etc.
GROUP ’C’ INSTITUTIONAL
GROUP ‘J’ HAZARDOUS BUILDINGS
C-1 Hospitals and Sanatoria
C-2 Custodial Institutions
C-3
Penal
and
mental
Institutions
These shall include any building or part thereof
which is used for the storage, handling,
manufacture
or
processing
of
highly
combustible or explosive materials or products
which are liable to burn with extreme rapidity
and/or which may produce poisonous fumes or
explosions
GROUP ‘D’ ASSEMBLY
D-1
Buildings
having
a
theatrical or motion picture
or any other stage and fixed
seats for over 1000 persons
D-2
Buildings
having
a
theatrical or motion picture
or any other stage and fixed
seats up to 1000 persons
D-3
Buildings
without
a
permanent
stage having
accommodation for 300 or
more
persons
but
no
permanent
seating
arrangement
D-4
Buildings
without
a
permanent stage having
accommodation for less
than 300 persons with no
permanent
seating
arrangement
D-5
All
other
structures
including
temporary
structures designed for
145
assembly of people not
covered by D-1 to D-4, at
ground level
D-6 Buildings having mixed
occupancies of assembly
and
mercantile
(for
example, shopping malls
providing facilities such as
shopping,
cinema
theatres, multiplexes and
restaurants/ food courts)
D-7 Underground and elevated
mass rapid transit system
GROUP ‘E’ BUSINESS
E-1
Offices,
Banks,
professional
establishments,
like
offices
of
architects,
engineers, doctors, lawyers,
post offices and police stations
GROUP ‘F’ MERCANTILE
F-1
Shops,
Stores,
departmental stores, markets
(any with covered area up to
500m2)
F-2
Shops,
Stores,
departmental stores, markets
(any with covered area more
than 500m2)
F-3
Underground
shopping
centres
Annexure-BI
Fire Protection Requirements for Buildings in Zone-I Category
Sl.
No
Measures
Group-A: Residential A-3, A-4,
A-5, A-6 (see Note 3)
Group-B:
Educational
B-1, B-2 (see
Note 3 and
23)
Group-C:
Institutional
C-1, C-2, C-3 (see
Note 3 and 23)
I
II
III
IV
V
VI
VII
VIII
VII
VIII
IX
1
Access
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
2
Means of Escape
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
3
Compartmentation
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
4
Refuge Area
X
X
X
P
P
P
X
P
X
P
P
5
Emergency Lights
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
6
Exit Signs
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
7
Manually
Operated
Electronic
Fire
Alarm
System (MOEFA) with Talk
p
p
p
p
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
146
Back and PA system (see
Note 1)
8
Fire Extinguishers
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
9
First Aid Hose Reel
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
10
Yard Hydrant
X
X
P
P
P
P
X
P
P
P
P
11
Down Comer
P
X
X
X
X
X
P
X
X
X
X
12
Wet Riser
X
P
P
P
P
P
X
P
P
P
P
13
Automatic Fire Detection
and Alarm System (see Note
2)
X
X
X
P
P
P
X
X
P
P
P
14
Automatic
Sprinkler
System
S
S
FS
FS
FS
FS
S
S
FS
FS
FS
15
Under Ground Tank
X
P4
P5
P6
P5
P6
X
P7
P5
P6
P6
16
Over Head Tank
P8
P9
P10
P10
P11
P11
P12
P13
P11
P11
P11
17
Fire Pumps Near UGT (with
minimum
pressure
of
3.5Kg/cm2
at
remotest
location)
X
P1
5
P16
P17
P16
P16
X
P19
P15
P16
P16
18
Booster
Pumps
at
the
Terrace Tank level with
minimum pressure of 3.5
kg/cm2
P1
4
X
X
X
X
X
P14
X
X
X
X
19
Auto D.G. Set
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
20
MCB/ELCB
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
21
Hose Boxes
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
22
Fireman’s
Grounding
Switch
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
Fire Protection Requirements for Buildings in Zone-I Category
Sl.
No
Measures
Group-D: Assembly
D-1 to D-6 (see Note
22 and 23)
Group-E: Business E-1
(see Note 22)
Group-F: Mercantile F-
1, F-2 and F-3 (see
Note 3 and 23)
X
VII
VIII
XI
X
VII
VIII
VI
VII
VIII
XII
1
Access
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
2
Means of Escape
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
3
Compartmentation
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
4
Refuge Area
X
X
P
P
X
X
P
P
X
P
P
5
Emergency Lights
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
6
Exit Signs
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
7
Manually Operated Electronic
Fire Alarm System (MOEFA)
with Talk Back and PA system
(see Note 1)
P1
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
8
Fire Extinguishers
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
9
First Aid Hose Reel
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
10
Yard Hydrant
X
P
P
P
X
P
P
P
P
P
P
11
Down Comer
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
12
Wet Riser
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
13
Automatic Fire Detection and
Alarm System (see Note 2)
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
14
Automatic Sprinkler System
S
FS
FS
FS
S
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
15
Under Ground Tank
P2
4
P5
P6
P6
P7
P24
P5
P6
P24
P6
P5
147
16
Over Head Tank
P9
(P2
5)
P10
P11
P1
1
P9
(P2
5)
P10
P11
P11
P10
P11
P10
17
Fire Pumps Near UGT (with
minimum
pressure
of
3.5Kg/cm2
at
remotest
location)
P1
5
P15
P16
P1
8
P1
9
P15
P16
P18
P15
P16
P16
18
Booster Pumps at the Terrace
Tank level with minimum
pressure of 3.5 kg/cm2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
19
Auto D.G. Set
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
20
MCB/ELCB
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
21
Hose Boxes
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
22
Fireman’s Grounding Switch
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
Legend
I. Height 15 m and above up to 35 m
II. Height 35 m and above up to 45 m
III. Height 45 m and above up to 60 m
IV. Height above 60 m
V. Height 15 m and above up to 30 m
VI. Height above 30 m
VII. Height 15 m and above up to 24 m
VIII. Height 24 m and above up to 30 m
IX. Height 24 m and above up to 45 m
X. Height 10 m and above up to 15 m
XI. For D-6 Occupancy
XII. For F-3 Occupancy
P -To be provided.
X -Not to be provided.
S -Sprinklers to be installed in basement, if area of basement exceeds 200 Sq.m.
FS -Fully Sprinklered.
NOTES:
1. MOEFA System shall also include talk-back system and public address system for the occupancies of A-
5 less than 15 m in height if floor area exceeding 1000 m2 on any of the floor, C-1 less than 15 m in height
with plot area more than 1000 m2, D-1 to D-5 above 10 m to 15 m in height, and in all buildings 15 m
and above in height, except for A-3 and A-4 occupancies where these shall be provided for buildings of
height 24 m and above. These shall also be provided in car parking areas more than 300 m2 and in multi-
level car parking irrespective of other areas.
148
2. Automatic detection and alarm system is not required to be provided in car parking area. Such detection
system shall be required in other areas of car parking such as electrical rooms, cabins and other areas.
3. Minimum requirements for Fire Fighting Installations for Buildings less than 15 m in height and
requirements based on floor area and no.of rooms/floors of building, Refer NBC 2016, Part 4, Table 7.
Building above 15 m in height are not to be permitted for occupancies A-1 and A-2.
4. 75,000 Litres capacity
5. 1,50,000 Litres capacity
6. 2,00,000 Litres capacity
7. 50,000 Litres capacity
8. 25,000 Litres capacity
9. 5,000 Litres capacity per Riser
10.
10,000 Litres capacity per Riser
11.
20,000 Litres capacity per Riser
12.
25,000 Litres capacity per Riser
13.
5,000 Litres capacity per Riser if basement area exceeds 200 m2.
14.
Pump Capacity 900 Litre/min.
15.
Provide required number of sets of pumps each consisting of one electric and one diesel pump (stand
by) of capacity 2280 Lpm and one electric pumps of capacity 180 Lpm (see also notes 20 and 21)
16.
Provide required number of sets of pumps each consisting of two electric and one diesel pump (stand
by) of capacity 2280 Lpm and two electric pump of capacity 180 Lpm (see also notes 20 and 21)
17.
Provide required number of sets of pumps each consisting of two electric and one diesel pump (stand
by) of capacity 2850 Lpm and two electric pump of capacity 180 Lpm (see also notes 20 and 21). Lower
levels in high rise buildings 60m or above in height are likely to experience high pressure and therefore, it
is recommended to consider multi-stage, multi-outlet pumps (creating pressure zones) or variable
frequency drive pumps or any other equivalent arrangement.
18.
Provide required number of sets of pumps each consisting of two electric and one diesel pump (stand
by) of capacity 2850 Lpm and two electric pump of capacity 180 Lpm (see also notes 20 and 21)
19.
Provide required number of sets of pumps each consisting of one electric and one diesel pump (stand
by) of capacity 1620 Lpm and one electric pumps of capacity 180 Lpm (see also notes 20 and 21)
20.
One set of pumps shall be provided for each 100 hydrants or part thereof, with a maximum of two
sets. In case of more than one pump set installation, both pump sets shall be interconnected at their
delivery headers.
21.
Alternative to provisions of additional set of pumps, the objective can be met by providing additional
diesel pump of the same capacity and doubling the water tank capacity as required for one set of pumps.
22.
Minimum requirements for Fire Fighting Installations for Buildings less than 10 m in height and D-
7 occupancies, Refer NBC 2016, Part 4, Table 7.
149
23.
Building above 30 m in height not to be permitted for Group B, Group C, Group D and Group F
occupancies.
24.
1,00,000 Litres capacity
25.
Additional 5000 Litres to be provided if basement area exceeds 200 m2
Annexure-BII
Fire Protection Requirements for Buildings in Zone-II Category
Sl.
No
Measures
Group-E: Business E-2
to E-5 (see Note 22)
Group-G-1
: Industrial
Group-G-2
: Industrial
I
II
III
IV
V
VI
VII
VIII
IX
1
Access
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
2
Means of Escape
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
3
Compartmentation
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
4
Refuge Area
X
X
P
P
X
X
X
X
X
5
Emergency Lights
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
6
Exit Signs
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
7
Manually Operated Electronic Fire
Alarm System (MOEFA) with Talk
Back and PA system (see Note 1)
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
8
Fire Extinguishers
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
9
First Aid Hose Reel
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
10
Yard Hydrant
X
P
P
P
X
P
X
P
P
11
Down Comer
X
X
X
X
P
X
P
X
X
12
Wet Riser
P
P
P
P
X
P
X
P
P
13
Automatic Fire Detection and Alarm
System (see Note 2)
P
P
P
P
X
P
P
P
P
14
Automatic Sprinkler System
S
FS
FS
FS
S
S
FS
FS
FS
15
Under Ground Tank
P1
P3
P4
P5
X
P2
X
P3
P4
16
Over Head Tank
P6
(P10
)
P7
P8
P8
P8
(P10
)
P6
(P10)
P11
P7
P8
17
Fire
Pumps
Near
UGT
(with
minimum pressure of 3.5Kg/cm2 at
remotest location)
P16
P12
P1
3
P15
X
P16
X
P16
P13
18
Booster Pumps at the Terrace Tank
level with minimum pressure of 3.5
kg/cm2
P19
(P21
)
X
X
X
P19
(P21
)
X
P20
X
X
19
Auto D.G. Set
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
20
MCB/ELCB
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
21
Hose Boxes
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
22
Fireman’s Grounding Switch
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
150
Annexure-BIII
Fire Protection Requirements for buildings in Zone -III Category
Legend
I. Height 10 m and above up to 15 m
II. Height 15 m and above up to 24 m
III. Height 24 m and above up to 30 m
IV. Height above 30 m
V. Covered area more than 500 m2 (for building height up to 15 m)
VI. Covered area more than 500 m2 (for building height above 15 m)
VII. Covered area more than 500 m2 and up to 1000 m2 (for building height up to 15 m)
VIII. Covered area more than 500 m2 and up to 1000 m2 (for building height above 15 m)
IX. Covered area more than 1000 m2
P -To be provided.
X -Not to be provided.
S -Sprinklers to be installed in basement, if area of basement exceeds 200 Sq.m.
FS -Fully Sprinklered.
NOTES:
1. 50,000 Litres capacity
2. 75,000 Litres capacity
3. 1,00,000 Litres capacity
4. 1,50,000 Litres capacity
5. 2,00,000 Litres capacity
6. 5,000 Litres capacity per Riser
7. 10,000 Litres capacity per Riser
8. 20,000 Litres capacity per Riser
9. 25,000 Litres capacity per Riser
10. Additional 5000 Litres to be provided if basement area exceeds 200 m2
11. 50,000 Litres capacity per Riser
12. Provide required number of sets of pumps each consisting of one electric and one diesel pump (stand by) of
capacity 2280 Lpm and one electric pumps of capacity 180 Lpm (see also notes 17 and 18)
151
13. Provide required number of sets of pumps each consisting of two electric and one diesel pump (stand by) of
capacity 2280 Lpm and two electric pump of capacity 180 Lpm (see also notes 17 and 18)
14. Provide required number of sets of pumps each consisting of two electric and one diesel pump (stand by) of
capacity 2850 Lpm and two electric pump of capacity 180 Lpm (see also notes 17 and 18). Lower levels in
high rise buildings 60m or above in height are likely to experience high pressure and therefore, it is
recommended to consider multi-stage, multi-outlet pumps (creating pressure zones) or variable frequency
drive pumps or any other equivalent arrangement.
15. Provide required number of sets of pumps each consisting of two electric and one diesel pump (stand by) of
capacity 2850 Lpm and two electric pump of capacity 180 Lpm (see also notes 17 and 18)
16. Provide required number of sets of pumps each consisting of one electric and one diesel pump (stand by) of
capacity 1620 Lpm and one electric pumps of capacity 180 Lpm (see also notes 17 and 18)
17. One set of pumps shall be provided for each 100 hydrants or part thereof, with a maximum of two sets. In
case of more than one pump set installation, both pump sets shall be interconnected at their delivery
headers.
18. Alternative to provisions of additional set of pumps, the objective can be met by providing additional diesel
pump of the same capacity and doubling the water tank capacity as required for one set of pumps.
19. Pump Capacity 450 Litre/min.
20. Pump Capacity 900 Litre/min.
21. Additional 450 Litres/min. to be provided if basement area exceeds 200 m2
22. Buildings above 15 m in height not to be permitted for G-3 occupancies
23. Buildings above 15 m in height not to be permitted for Group H Group J occupancies However, buildings
above 45 m in height shall not be permitted for multi-level car parking (MLCP) occupancy.Minimum
requirements for Fire Fighting Installations for Zone III occupancies i.e Group G, Group H and Group J
occupancies should comply with NBC 2016, Part 4, Table 7.
Note: For any further details / clarification NBC, Part 4 shall be referred. Norms and standards in Part 4 of
NBC 2016 shall be overriding in any instance of variance of standards.
152
Annexure-C
1. Water Requirement Criterion: Unless otherwise specified in Annexure B, water requirement for fire
fighting in different categories of occupancies shall be based on following.
Occupancy
Category
Sprinkler
Design
Discharge
Density
(lt./min/Sqm.)
Sprinkler
Design
Area
(Sqm.)
Max.
area
coverage/
Sprinkler
(Sqm.)
No. of House
Streams* Fully
other
Sprinkled
Duration
of
Discharge
(Min.)
Fully
Sprinkled
Wet
Riser
Sprinkled
LEVEL-I
02.5
084
21
24
45
45
LEVEL-II
05.0
360
12
36
60
90
LEVEL-III
10.0
225
09
36
90
90
Note: The discharge through a standard hose stream shall be taken as 567 lt./min.
2. Estimation of Total Water Requirements Fully Sprinklered Buildings
Occupancy
Category
Sprinkler(lt.)
Riser(lt.)
Total(lt.)
Wet
Riser
cum
Down
Comer (lt.)
LEVEL-I
9,450
51,030
60,480
(60,000)
1,02060
(1,00,000)
LEVEL-II
1,08,000
1,02,060
2,10,060
(2,00,000)
2,04,120
(2,00,000)
LEVEL-III
2,02,500
1,02,060
3,04,560
(3,00,000)
3,06,180
(3,00,000)
3. Water Storage Tanks
1. The design of the water storage tanks shall be as laid down in National Building Code of India.
2. The capacity of underground water storage tank shall not be more than85% of the total water requirement.
3. The capacity of overhead tank shall not be less than 15% of the total water requirement.
4. Underground water storage tank be provided in the setback areas.
Occupancy
Category
Under Ground Static Tank
Over Head Tank
Fully Spkd. (lt.)
Riser (lt.)
Fully Spkd. (lt.)
Riser(lt.)
LEVEL-I
50,000
85,000
10,000
15,000
LEVEL-II
1,70,000
1,70,000
30,000
30,000
LEVEL-III
2,50,000
2,50,000
50,000
50,000
4. Riser/Down comer
1. The size of the riser/ down comer shall be such that velocity of flow does not exceed 5 m/second subject
to a minimum of 100 mm. diameter.
2. The number of riser/down comer shall be calculated on the basis that if 30 m. of delivery hose is laid, it
reaches the farthest comer of the remotest compartment on the floor.
3. The riser/down comer shall be provided in the staircase/staircase lobby in such a manner that it does not
obstruct the means of escape.
153
4. Only single headed hydrants shall be used on the riser/down comer.
5. The size of hose to be provided with the internal hydrants shall be 50mmdiameter and with 63 mm diameter
instantaneous male/female couplings.
6. Diffuser branch shall only be provided in the hose boxes.
7. In case of partially sprinklered building tapping from the wet riser is permitted for sprinkler feed.
8. In case of fully sprinklered building separate rising mains and pumps shall bemused for sprinkler system
and wet riser.
5. Selection of Pumps
1. Pumping requirement shall be met by a single pump or combination of pumps.
2. If more than one pump is installed to meet the pumping requirement they shall be so arranged that they
come into operation one after another depending upon fall in pressure in the mains and the combined
pumping capacity shall be 20% more than the actual pumping capacity needed.
3. Jockey pump shall be selected to give minimum 3% and maximum 5% of aggregate pumping requirement
at the same pressure to that of the main pump subject to maximum discharge of 450 LPM.
4. Standard pumps shall only be used having discharge capacity as 180LPM, 2280LPM 2850 LPM & 4550
LPM.
5. The pump shall be capable of giving the pressure as shown in the table below:
Occupancy Category
Pressure* At Terrace Level
Fully Spkd. (Kgf. /Cm2)
Riser (Kgf. /Cm2)
LEVEL-I
3.5
3.5
LEVEL-II
3.5
5.5
LEVEL-III
3.5
7.0
* Orifice plates shall be installed at the hydrants on rising mains / yard
hydrants to ensure that the pressure does not exceed 7 Kgf. /Cm2
154
APPENDIX-I
(see clause 2.123, 3.10.1, 3.10.1.c, 3.10.1.e, 7.3, 12.5)
PROCEDURE FOR REGISTRATION OF VARIOUS STAKE HOLDERS WITH THE AUTHORITY
A. The Stake holders to be registered with the Local Authority are;
1. Land owners who intend to apply for building licence in the plot owned by them.
2. Promoters who are developing Real estate projects within the jurisdiction of the Authority
3. Professionals on record for drawings (to prepare drawings for building licence and for NOCs
from different departments)
4. Professionals on record for supervision (to supervise the works executed in site - civil works
and other services)
5. Professionals who are interested in registering with the Local Authority as licensed
Professionals, to verify the site plan and building plans with reference to the site conditions,
6.
Contractors intending to undertake construction activities within the jurisdiction of the Local
Authority (for Civil, electrical, Plumbing and Sanitation, HVAC, Fire and Emergency services)
B. The following procedure shall be adopted by the Local Authority to register the Stake holders with
the Authority;
1. The Stake holders shall register themselves with the Local Authority by providing their
identity proof, submitting an undertaking cum affidavit (in the format specified in Form XVII)
and payment of the fees as notified by the government.
2. The landowners who intend to apply for building licence in the plot owned by them shall
submit the particulars of the site and the building proposed to be constructed on the site,
while registering with the Local Authority whenever he proposes to develop a building. The
registration shall be done along with the application for building licence.
3. The Promoter who intends to develop real estate project within the jurisdiction of the
Authority, shall do a onetime registration with the Authority.
4. Professionals intending to prepare the required drawings and details (Architectural,
Structural, Services and Environmental), the Professionals intending to prepare the required
drawings and details for obtaining NOCs from the concerned departments and the
Professionals intending to supervise the construction of the various components of the
building shall do a onetime registration with the Local Authority in the respective category
based on the eligibility criteria of Qualification, Experience and Competence, as specified
notified by the government.
5. Professionals who are interested in registering with the Local Authority as licensed
Professionals to verify the site plan and the building plan with reference to the site conditions,
shall do a onetime registration with the Local Authority in the respective category based on
the eligibility criteria of Qualification, Experience and Competence, as notified by the
government.
6. Contractors intending to undertake construction activities within the jurisdiction of the Local
Authority (for Civil, electrical, Plumbing and Sanitation, HVAC, Fire and Emergency services)
shall do a onetime registration with the Authority.
C. The procedure for registration and allotting the registration no. for the stake holders and the fee
payable for licensed professionals shall be as notified by the government.
Government Notification No. UDD 14TTP 2017 dated 30.10.2017 should be followed.
155
APPENDIX-II
(see clause 3.10.2)
DETAILS OF PLANS AND OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE SUBMITTED FOR SANCTION FROM THE LOCAL
AUTHORITY FOR DIFFERENT TYPES OF BUILDINGS.
A – Requirements of Key Plan (see clause 3.11.1)
The key plan shall be prepared in a legible scale showing the location of the plot in the Master Plan containing
the following features within 500m around the plot, namely: -
(a) Location of all existing and proposed roads of the Master Plan mentioning the existing and proposed
width and hierarchy of roads;
(b) Location of all existing Storm Water Drains and other water bodies;
(c) Location / Alignment of overhead or underground HT power supply lines (High Tension Electric lines);
(d) Location / Alignment of sewerage system of ULB;
(e) Location of Railway line / Railway station within 50m from the boundary of the plot;
(f) Index of drawing as specified in Appendix-III.
B – Requirements of Site Plan (see clause 3.11.2)
The site plan shall be prepared in a legible scale, preferably of 1:200 or 1:500 with plan oriented in North-
South direction. The site plan shall contain the following details, namely: -
(a)
All site boundaries with dimensions, by superimposing the survey sketch issued by Revenue
Department, the sketch attached to the title document and the survey sketch prepared by conducting
physical survey of plot using Total Intelligent Station. At least 3 boundary points of all the sketches
should match when superimposed. The innermost boundaries of the plot derived by superimposing all
the sketches shall be considered as the boundary of the plot and the area of the plot within such
boundary shall be considered as the extent of the plot as existing at site;
(b)
Extent of plot, which shall be lesser of the extent as per document, revenue sketch or as existing at
site (as derived from clause ‘a’ above);
(c)
All roads abutting the plot with existing width, proposed width and center line of the road. The road
widening line and building line, if any, shall be marked on the plot, if applicable, showing the portion
of the plot required for road widening; (in case of varying width of the road, the survey of the road using
total intelligent station shall be attached showing the average width of the road as per the provisions
of the ZR)
(d) Portion of Plot to be reserved for Park and Open Spaces and Civic Amenities, if required as per Section
17 of KTCP Act,1961. (e) Land use as per Master Plan and the permitted land use as per Zonal
Regulations;
(f)
Contours of the plot at 1m intervals along with the levels of the adjoining plots and of the abutting
roads;
(g)
Location with dimensions and extent of Kharab lands within the plot;
(h)
Location of roads of the Master Plan passing through the plot, if any;
(i)
Location of all natural features such as trees, water bodies (including wells, ponds, storm water drains,
etc.) quarries including buffer area, etc.;
156
(j)
Location of city level sewerage and H.T. lines passing through the plot including buffer area;
(k)
Eligibility for relaxation of setbacks as per Zonal Regulations;
The following additional details shall be incorporated in the site plan;
(a) Building footprint (portion of the floor plan of the building projecting above the ground) for Ground
coverage and setbacks and the projections in the upper floors, beyond the footprint area (in dotted
line).
(b) Details of constructions provided in the setback area of the plot, including ramps (along with slope of
ramp), driveway and also the parking spaces provided in the open yard.
(c) Details of the over ground and underground services provided such as water supply, sewerage, power
supply and telecommunication system and details of the rain water harvesting system (pipelines,
cables, chambers, manholes, transformer and generator yard / substation, STP and pump room, solid
waste management plant, etc.)
(d) Entry and exit to plot with gate and entry / exit arch details.
(e) Levels contiguous to the building and the boundaries / corners of the plot.
(f) Details for identification of neighbouring properties.
(g) Portion of the plot earmarked as unpaved areas as per clause and chapter wherever applicable.
(c)
Index of drawing as specified in Appendix-III.
C – Requirements of Floor Plan for parking area (see clause 3.11.3)
The following details shall be provided in the plan of the floor showing parking area (for full or portion of the
floor)
(a) Details of entry / exit ramps (ramp from outside the building to the parking floor and ramp between
parking floors, as applicable), such as number of ramps, width of the ramp and slope.
(b) Width of all driveways in the parking area and the width of each of the parking bay abutting the driveway.
(c) Width of columns provided in the parking floors and clear spacing between the columns, location of
staircases, lifts and toilets, with dimensions.
(d) Level of floor with reference to the ground level contiguous to the building or the road level whichever is
considered for the height of the building.
(f) Minimum Setback line from the boundary of the plot and in case of basement floor, the distance between
the boundary and the parking floor periphery.
(g) Details of any other uses proposed within the parking area / floor.
(h) no. of parking bays provided (4-wheeler and 2-wheeler), separately showing single parking, double parking
(one behind the other and one above the other – mechanical parking) and automatic parking devices adopted
such as car lift etc. (along with the approval of the agencies specified by the Authority or notified by the
Government), as applicable.
(i) Index of drawing as specified in Index of drawing as specified in Appendix-III.
D – Requirements of Floor Plans of other uses (see clause 3.11.4)
(1) Residential:
Separate floor plans for each of the typical floors have to be prepared with the following details;
(a) Plan of the dwelling units with areas of sub uses such as foyer, living, dining, bedroom, study, kitchen,
bathroom, WC, toilet, balcony etc. mentioned separately. The carpet area (excluding exterior wall and balcony
of the dwelling unit) and plinth area (including exterior wall and balcony of the dwelling unit) of the dwelling
157
unit has to be mentioned. Area of exclusive balcony and terrace attached to each dwelling unit has to be
mentioned.
(b) Room dimensions and details of doors, windows, ventilators, duct doors and other openings shall be
shown.
(c) All common areas such as staircases and lifts, corridors / passages, service / ventilation ducts, stores,
entrance lobby etc. have to be shown along with dimensions.
(d) Level of floor with reference to the ground level contiguous to the building or the road level whichever is
considered for the height of the building.
(f) Minimum Setback line from the boundary of the plot and balconies projecting beyond the setback line.
(g) No. of dwelling units in each floor (details of all types of dwelling units) and no. of typical floors.
(h) Terrace floor plan with details of open terrace, covered terrace, staircase room, lift / lift machine room,
overhead tank, toilets and other permitted constructions in the terrace floor. (If overhead tank and the lift
machine room is located one level above the terrace floor, the same has to be specifically mentioned in the
Terrace floor plan).
(i)Details of all staircases provided (width, tread, riser, landing, handrail, head room, no. of steps in each
flight).
(j) Details of corridors / passage (minimum width required and width provided, parapet details)
(k) Section lines
(l) Index of drawing as specified in Appendix-III.
(2) Commercial:
Separate floor plans for each of the typical floors have to be prepared with the following details;
(a) Plan of the commercial premises with areas of sub uses such as retail display area, office area, work area,
stores, toilet, etc. mentioned separately. The carpet area (excluding exterior wall and balcony of the premises)
and plinth area (including exterior wall and balcony of the premises) of the premises has to be mentioned.
Area of exclusive balcony and terrace attached to each dwelling unit has to be mentioned.
(b) Room dimensions and details of doors, windows, ventilators, duct doors and other openings shall be
shown.
(c) All common areas such as staircases and lifts, corridors / passages, service / ventilation ducts, stores,
entrance lobby etc. have to be shown along with dimensions.
(d) Level of floor with reference to the ground level contiguous to the building or the road level whichever is
considered for the height of the building.
(f) Minimum Setback line from the boundary of the plot and balconies projecting beyond the setback line.
(g) No. of premises in each floor and no. of typical floors.
(h) Terrace floor plan with details of open terrace, covered terrace, staircase room, lift / lift machine room,
overhead tank, toilets and other permitted constructions in the terrace floor. (If overhead tank and the lift
machine room is located one level above the terrace floor, the same has to be specifically mentioned in the
Terrace floor plan).
(i) Common toilet requirements and provisions made.
(j) Details of all staircases provided (width, tread, riser, landing, handrail, head room, no. of steps in each
flight).
(k) Details of corridors / passage (minimum width required and width provided, parapet details)
(l) Section lines
(j) Index of drawing as specified in Appendix-III.
(3) Other non-residential and non-commercial:
All details similar to that of commercial use except details of no. of premises, carpet area and plinth area of
the independent premises in the floors, within the non-residential and non-commercial uses.
Index of drawing as specified in Appendix-III.
E – Requirements of Sections of Building (see clause 3.11.5)
158
Drawings for the vertical sections cut across the floor plans of the building shall be provided in such a way
that any one or more section drawings shall cut across all the main staircases connecting all the respective
floors of the building.
Section drawings shall also be drawn across all the floors wherever the plan of a floor projects outward or
recedes inward from the lower floor, including section cut across upper Ground floor and lower ground floor,
if applicable.
The section shall also cut across maximum earth cut or fill areas of the plot showing the original ground level
and the formed ground level with the proposed retaining wall details. The section shall also show the general
foundation details of the building.
The section drawings shall mark all the building components and structural elements (foundation, walls, slab
& beams, roof, etc.,) along with the dimensions. The type / specification of material for each component shall
also be mentioned.
The section drawing shall also show the ground levels contiguous to the building, average ground level
contiguous to the building and also the levels of each floor. The section drawing shall also have the floor to
floor height (including mezzanine floor, if applicable) and the height of the building measured from the average
ground level contiguous to the building or the road level, as the case may be, to the terrace floor level or the
roof level, as the case may be.
Index of drawing as specified in Appendix-III.
F – Requirements of Elevation of buildings (see clause 3.11.6)
Elevation drawings shall be drawn for all side elevations showing the structural features of the building visible
on each elevation such as windows and other openings, slab and other architectural projections.
Height of the building with reference to ground level or road level.
Index of drawing as specified in Appendix-III.
G – Requirements of Drawings for all services provided
a – Electrical system including use of alternate energy (see clause 3.11.7(a))
Electrical drawings of all floors showing the location of electrical fixtures, switch boards, etc., both
inside the specific use areas and common areas along with fixture schedule and details of wiring.
Details of electrical ducts (horizontal & vertical), panel room, 11KV sub-station (transformer and
other requirements) and generator facilities.
Single line diagram of the power distribution system.
Details of alternate energy sources proposed.
(as detailed in Clause 5.3)
b- Water Supply system (see clause 3.11.7(b))
Drawings showing Plumbing pipelines and fixtures inside the toilets of specific use areas and
common areas with fixture schedules and pipeline layout.
Pipeline details in Sanitary ducts and connectivity to overhead and sump tanks and connectivity from
Municipal water supply line and water pumping system.
Details of Solar water heating system
(as detailed in Clause 5.3)
c – Rain Water harvesting & ground water recharging system (see clause 3.11.7(c))
Drawings showing Terrace water collection, filtration and connection to sump tank or ground water
recharging pits.
Ground water recharging
(as detailed in Chapter 10&Clause 11.2)
d – Sewerage system (see clause 3.11.7(d))
Drawings showing Drainage pipelines and sanitary fixtures inside the toilets of specific use areas and
common areas with fixture schedules and pipeline layout.
159
Pipeline details in Sanitary ducts and connectivity to Inspection chambers and manholes.
Inspection chambers and manholes in the ground and connectivity to Municipal sewer lines or
sewage treatment plant.
(as detailed in Clause 5.3)
e – HVAC system (see clause 3.11.7(e)
A. Floor Plan
1. Corresponds to submitted or previously approved building plans, including interior layout, room
names & uses, wall & roof insulation R-values, door/window/skylight U-factors
2. Location, volume, and/or rates in CFM of exhaust, make-up air, outdoor air and combustion air
3. Location of equipment & appliances, fire, smoke and ceiling radiation dampers, grease duct wraps
kitchen hood exhaust duct, grease duct enclosures, suppression systems, controls, monitors, etc.
4. Duct sealing requirements stated
5. HVAC distribution via ductwork, sizing, location
a. Metal duct gauge, geometry (round, square, rectangular)
b. Flexible duct diameter, specification
c. Flexible connector diameter, length limitations
d. Underground duct construction, materials, vapours barriers, insulation (R-values),
clearances, cross section, slope
e. Plenum construction materials and locations
B. Sections or Details
1. Insulation for duct or pipe; type, R-value labelling required on plans and in the field
2. Pipe: size, type, hydronic or gas
3. Exhaust rates in CFM
4. Kitchen hood construction information provided
5. Air transfer to corridors only as allowed by code
6. Clothes dryer exhaust duct distribution, length, access doors, etc.
7. Metal duct gauge, geometry, means of fastening, maximum length
8. Transition duct limitations & requirements
9. Grease duct wrap defined for manufacturer and type
10. Hydronic systems have floor assembly which meets minimum under-floor/slab
insulation
and testing requirements
C. Equipment Information
160
1. Equipment schedules or similar provided which define equipment type, capacities, efficiencies,
kitchen hood suppression, as well as associated air rates in CFM
2. Listing shows compliance with ASTM/UL/NFPA/ANSI etc. standards as required to be met by the
code
3. Operation, setback/demand control ventilation/operational controls/interlocks sequencing of all
equipment, and location of controls
4. Provision of economizer indicated if required as part of installation
5. Provision of make-up air
6. Platform & clearance locations for rooftop equipment defined
7. Roof access indicated on plans (if required)
8. Guardrail location and dimensions for roof equipment as required by code
9. Condensate disposal location indicated
10. Duct smoke detection system (if required)
11. Duct smoke detector locations, model defined, installation defined (on return only or return &
supply), sequence of operation defined
12. Control panel location, model
13. Smoke control system
14. Apparatus used (based on submitted calculations)
15. Designate pressure classification of the duct system based on inches w.g.
16. Fire, smoke & ceiling radiation dampers defined for ratings, locations & operations
17. Hydronic systems fully defined for type of, length of, size of, flow rate in pipe; testing requirements
addressed, under floor insulation (shall be addressed in building envelope calculations)
18. Structural weight of rooftop equipment listed on plan and associated structural design accounted
for
D. Calculations
1. Room by room heat loss calculations, not just an overall summary
2. Heat gain calculations may be done by area served by appliance (if AC provided)
3. Transmission plus greater of infiltration or ventilation (furnace sizing)
4. Structural calculations provided to verify that weight of proposed appliances does not exceed load
bearing capability of roof, mezzanine, platform, etc.
5. Volume of exhaust and outdoor air intake are approximately the same
161
6. Smoke control system sizing
7. Outside air required for each room/space where different occupancies are served by one appliance
E. Ventilation Criteria
1. Mechanical ventilation rates used meet minimums listed in SPS Table 364.0403 (or as justified
and
found acceptable by the Dept.)
2. Natural ventilation as allowed by SPS Table 364.0402
3. Exceptions met and clearly stated on plans or in calculations
F. Minimum Clearances
1. Exhaust & outside air intakes to property lines & buildings
2. Distance between intake to exhaust ventilation openings
3. Overhead clearances (suspended appliance)
4. Location of intakes above ground/roof
5. Combustible material clearances to heat-producing appliance
G. Type of fuel used by HVAC equipment
1. Natural Gas
2. Electricity
3. Fuel Oil
4. Wood or pellets
H. Combustion Air
1. Provide calculations used to determine if internal building air can be used, or if outside combustion
air
is required to be provided
2. Define number, location and size of transfer ducts, and louver/grill openings
I. Balancing Report is Required to be On-Site
J. Maintenance & Operation Manuals are Required to be Provided to Owner
(as detailed in Clause 5.3)
H – Requirements of Landscape plan (see clause 3.11.8)
Landscape plan shall be enclosed with the application for building licence in case of building
proposed in plots above 4000 Sqm. The following details shall be provided in the landscape plan
(a) Building foot print and all other constructions proposed in the yard including details of the over ground
and underground services provided such as water supply, sewerage, power supply and
162
telecommunication system and details of the rain water harvesting system (pipelines, cables,
chambers, manholes etc.)
(b) Details of the parking spaces and other concreted or paved areas provided in the yard.
(c) Area reserved for park and open spaces (as per the provisions of Section 17 of KTCP Act
(d) Areas proposed to be developed as green space (including in the areas reserved as park and open spaces)
(e) Type of land landscape, plantation and trees proposed.
(f) Index of drawing as specified in Appendix-III.
Provisions of Part 10 of NBC 2016 are applicable
I – Requirements of Circulation Plan and Traffic study & Impact (see clause 3.11.9.)
Detailed calculations of traffic studies conducted in the locality and the impact of the development proposed,
on the existing traffic scenario.
J – Requirements of Structural Drawings (see clause 3.11.10)
Structural drawings show the structural support components and details of the proposed project,
from the foundation to the rooftop. All structural systems for a building that is designed must be
signed and sealed by a licensed engineer.
Minimum information requirements for structural drawings include, but are not limited to, the
following:
Foundation plans, pile design (with layout), details, sections and all applicable schedules e.g. (pile
schedules)
Slab-on-grade and slab plans, section and details
Cast-in-place concrete floor plans
Floor framing plans, sections and details
Roof framing plans, sections and details
Structural steel framing plans, sections and details
Pre-engineered building design certificates and drawings
Load bearing walls, pads, columns, beams and joists
Pre-cast concrete plans, details and sections
Connection details for all components
Retaining walls
Building mounted antennas
Large, heavy or high signs
Pedestrian bridges, crane runways, and other special structures
●
All other requirements as detailed in Chapter 7
163
K – Requirements of Green Building drawings (see clause 3.11.11)
(as detailed in Chapter 11)
APPENDIX-III
(see Appendix-II)
A – Index of Key Plan
The details to be contained are as follows
1. Name and address of the Applicant and space for signature
2. Name and address of Professional on record for drawing and space for signature
3. Name and address of the Local Authority and space for signature of Commissioner
4. Title of drawing
5. Survey nos., village name, Taluk name and district name where the plot is situated.
6. Existing and proposed width of roads abutting the plot
7. Marking of North direction
8. Date of approval
B – Index of Site Plan;
The details to be contained are as follows
1. Name and address of the Applicant and space for signature
2. Name and address of Professional on record for drawing and space for signature
3. Name and address of the Authority and space for signature of CEO
4. Title of drawing
5. Survey nos., village name, Taluk name and district name where the plot is situated.
6. Existing and proposed width of roads abutting the plot
7. Extent of plot
(a) Total extent (as per document, as per site condition and considered for building licence)
(b) Extent to be surrendered for road widening (whether compensation paid – monetary of in
the form of DR)
(c) Extent to be surrendered for P & OS and CA, if applicable.
(d) Net area for development
(e) Net area considered for FAR calculation
8. Land use analysis
164
(a) Land uses of plot as per Master Plan
(b) Permitted land uses as per Zonal regulations
(c) Existing land use of areas in the plot (% of area for roads, Park & Open Space and Civic Amenities,
if applicable and % of area for development).
9. Summary of area statement of buildings with floor wise area details and FAR (permitted and
proposed including DR / TDR).
10. Ground coverage (permitted and proposed)
11. Setbacks (required and provided)
12. Parking space (required and provided)
13. Public Toilet for Commercial Buildings (required and provided)
14. % of floor areas provided for community facilities, in case of Group housing.
15. Details of Means of Access, if applicable.
16. Marking of North direction
17. Date of approval
C – Index of Floor Plan for parking area
The details to be contained are as follows
1. Name and address of the Applicant and space for signature
2. Name and address of Professional on record for drawing and space for
signature
3. Name and address of the Local Authority and space for signature of Commissioner
4. Title of drawing
5. Survey nos., village name, Taluk name and district name where the plot is situated.
6. Land use analysis
(a) Land uses of plot as per Master Plan
(b) Permitted land uses as per Zonal regulations
(c) Proposed land use for different specific uses in the floor (% of floor area
for different specific uses in the floor, including the proportionate
percentage of common areas)
6. Summary of area statement, including floor area of buildings with floor wise area details required
for calculating parking space requirement.
7. Parking space (required and provided)
8. Date of approval
165
D – Index of Floor Plans of other uses
The details to be contained are as follows
1. Name and address of the Applicant and space for signature
2. Name and address of Professional on record for drawing and space for signature
3. Name and address of the Local Authority and space for signature of Commissioner
4. Title of drawing
5. Survey nos., village name, Taluk name and district name where the plot is situated.
6. Summary of area statement of floor with details of total construction areas, areas considered for
FAR & exempted from FAR, toilet areas, specific use areas & common areas, areas considered for
parking calculations and details of FAR (permitted and proposed including DR / TDR).
7. Schedule of openings
8. Carpet area and plinth area of individual dwelling units and commercial premises in the floor.
9. no. of staircases and lifts (width of each staircase and capacity of each lift)
10. Public Toilet for Commercial Buildings (required and provided)
11. % of floor areas provided for community facilities, in case of Group housing.
12. No. of seats in case of Assembly buildings and no. of beds in case of hospitals and nursing homes.
18. Date of approval
E – Index of Sections of Building
The details to be contained are as follows
1. Name and address of the Applicant and space for signature
2. Name and address of Professional on record for drawing and space for signature
3. Name and address of the Local Authority and space for signature of Commissioner
4. Title of drawing
5. Survey nos., village name, Taluk name and district name where the plot is situated.
6. Date of approval
F – Index of Elevation of buildings
The details to be contained are as follows
1. Name and address of the Applicant and space for signature
2. Name and address of Professional on record for drawing and space for signature
3. Name and address of the Local Authority and space for signature of Commissioner
166
4. Title of drawing
5. Survey nos., village name, Taluk name and district name where the plot is situated.
6. Date of approval
G – Index of Drawings for all services provided
The details to be contained are as follows
1. Name and address of the Applicant and space for signature
2. Name and address of Professional on record for drawing and space for signature
3. Name and address of the Local Authority and space for signature of Commissioner
4. Title of drawing
5. Survey nos., village name, Taluk name and district name where the plot is situated.
6. Summary of the particular service provided (minimum requirements and provisions made)
7. Date of approval
H Index of Landscape plan
The details to be contained are as follows
1. Name and address of the Applicant and space for signature
2. Name and address of Professional on record for drawing and space for signature
3. Name and address of the Local Authority and space for signature of Commissioner
4. Title of drawing
5. Survey nos., village name, Taluk name and district name where the plot is situated.
6. Summary of the landscape details provided (type of landscape and tree plantation made)
7. Date of approval
I – Index of Circulation Plan and Traffic study & Impact
The details to be contained are as follows
1. Name and address of the Applicant and space for signature
2. Name and address of Professional on record for drawing and space for signature
3. Name and address of the Local Authority and space for signature of Commissioner
4. Title of drawing
5. Survey nos., village name, Taluk name and district name where the plot is situated.
6. Summary of the road network provided in the development plan
167
7. Summary of traffic study conducted and impact (critical conditions and provisions made)
8. Date of approval
J – Index of Structural Drawings
The details to be contained are as follows
1. Name and address of the Applicant and space for signature
2. Name and address of Professional on record for drawing and space for signature
3. Name and address of the Local Authority and space for signature of Commissioner
4. Title of drawing
5. Survey nos., village name, Taluk name and district name where the plot is situated.
6. Summary of the structural design and drawings (minimum requirements and provisions made)
7. Date of approval
K – Index of Green Building drawings
The details to be contained are as follows
1. Name and address of the Applicant and space for signature
2. Name and address of Professional on record for drawing and space for signature
3. Name and address of the Local Authority and space for signature of Commissioner
4. Title of drawing
5. Survey nos., village name, Taluk name and district name where the plot is situated.
6. Summary of the Green building requirements (minimum requirements and provisions made for
each category of green building requirement)
7. Date of approval
168
APPENDIX-IV
(see clause 3.10.1(c), 3.10.2)
DETAILS OF PLANS AND OTHER PARTICULARS TO BE SUBMITTED FOR NOCS FROM OTHER
DEPARTMENTS FOR DIFFERENT TYPES OF BUILDINGS.
(as prescribed by the respective departments)
APPENDIX V
(see clause 3.10.6(1))
PROCEDURE FOR EMPANELMENT OF PROFESSIONALS BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY AND
SELECTION OF LICENSED PROFESSIONALS
The following procedure shall be adopted for empanelling the professionals by the Local Authority
and to select the licensed professional for site inspection to verify the various components of buildings
executed at site.
1. The eligibility of licensed professionals to verify different types of buildings, based on the
qualification, experience and competence fixed as notified by the Government.
2. The Local Authority shall call Expression of Interest from eligible professionals for
empanelment.
3. The Local Authority shall register the professionals for empanelment.
4. The Local Authority shall select the licensed professionals for inspecting the site and
submitting site inspection report as specified in these Byelaws.
5. The licensed professional selected by The Local Authority for inspection of any building site,
shall confirm his acceptance to undertake inspection work and submit site inspection report
(within the timelines notified by government), on the same day of receiving intimation from
The Authority, failing which The Local Authority shall select another licensed professional.
APPENDIX-VI
(see clause 3.10.2)
DETAILS OF DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED FOR BUILDING LICENCE
The following documents shall be submitted along with the application, namely: -
(a)
RTC / Khata as per date of application;
(b)
Extract of Mutation Register;
(c)
Copy of the Title document such as Sale Deed, etc.;
(d)
Copy of the registered document of GPA / authorisation letter, if applicable;
(e)
Joint development Agreement or MOU and affidavit of all the owners of plots amalgamated for
approval of plot, in case of amalgamated plots;
(f)
Latest Encumbrance Certificate;
169
(g)
Survey sketch issued by Revenue Department for conversion purpose or any other purpose;
(h)
Plot surveyed sketch (using Electronic Total Station)
(i) Conversion Order;
(j)
LAQ NOC;
(k)
All applicable NOCs from other departments;
(l)
Photographs of the site (minimum 4 nos., each from north, south, east and west) showing
the natural and built developments within the site and also the abutting roads;
(m)
Copy of the plot approval obtained (showing the extent of the plot surrendered / to be surrendered
for road widening)
(n)
Latest Property Tax Paid Receipt
(o) Photo and other identity proof of the applicant;
(p)
Specifications of the buildings and
Any other documents specified by the Local Authority or notified by the Government;
Note: 1. In case of licence for the construction of Compound Wall for the boundary of the plot abutting the
road, the documents mentioned in (a), (c), (d), (e), (g), (h), (o) only have to be submitted.
2. In case of licence for the demolition of buildings, the documents mentioned in (a), (c), (d), (e), (n), (o) only
have to be submitted.
APPENDIX-VII
(see clause 3.10.2, 3.10.8(2), 3.14, 3.15.4(1), 3.15.4(3), 3.15.5(a))
VARIOUS FEES FOR SANCTION OF BUILDING LICENCE AND OTHER FEES PAYABLE AS PER
THESE BYELAWS
The following fees shall be paid for sanction of building licence at the rates specified by the Local
Authority or notified by the government.
1. Registration fee payable by Stakeholders
2. Scrutiny fee & Inspection fee, as applicable
3. Licence fee
4. Fee for alteration in plan
5. Infrastructure cess
6. Solid waste management cess
7. Greenery cess
8. Construction and demolition waste disposal cess
9. Labour Welfare cess
10. Refundable Security Deposit
11. Fee for revalidation of licence
12. Fees for respective NOC
Any other fees prescribed by the Local Authority as per KMC Act or as notified by the Government
170
Note:
1. In case of revised licence (for alteration / change of use etc.), the scrutiny fees shall be charged
for the entire building. All other fees shall be charged only for the additional areas, if proposed to
be constructed.
APPENDIX-VIII
(see clause 3.10.5(1 & 2), 3.10.8(1), 3.15.3, 14.2, 14.4.2, 14.4.3, 14.4.4)
TIMELINES FOR DIFFERENT ACTIVITIES FOR ISSUING BUILDING LICENCE, NOCS AND
CERTIFICATION OF WORKS EXECUTED AT SITE AS PER THE CONDITIONS OF NOC, BY
DIFFERENT DEPARTMENTS, FOR DIFFERENT TYPES OF BUILDING.
(As Notified by the government from time to time)
APPENDIX-IX
(see clause 3.10.6(2))
PROCEDURE FOR SITE INSPECTION BY LICENSED PROFESSIONALS AND SUBMISSION OF
SITE INSPECTION REPORT. (As notified by the government)
171
APPENDIX-X
(see clause 3.15.4(1), 3.15.4(2))
VALIDITY PERIOD OF SANCTION AFTER COMMENCEMENT OF WORK AT SITE AND
EXTENSION OF VALIDITY.
1. Validity period for commencement of work – 2 years from the date of sanction
2. Initial validity period for completion of work
a) B1, B2 and B3 buildings – 4years from the date of sanction.
c) B4 buildings – 5 years from the date of sanction for buildings upto G + 9 floors. Additional one
year for every 5 floors or part thereof
b) B5 buildings – 5 years from the date of sanction.
3. Extension of validity
Extension of validity may be permitted by paying yearly revalidation fee as specified by the Local
Authority or as notified by the government.
APPENDIX-XI
(see clause 3.16.5(2))
DETAILS TO BE MAINTAINED IN THE SITE/ SITE OFFICE OF THE CONSTRUCTION SITE.
The person to whom a permit is issued shall, during construction keep, posted in a conspicuous
place on the property in respect of which the permit was issued
a) A copy of the building permit;
b) A copy of the approved drawings and specifications of the property in respect of which the
permit was issued.
c) Where tests of any materials are made to ensure conformity with the requirements of the
Byelaws, records of test data shall be kept available for inspection during the construction of the
building and for such a period thereafter as required by the Authority.
APPENDIX-XII
(see clause 3.16.7(1), 3.16.9(1), 3.17.1(1))
STAGES OF INSPECTION OF VARIOUS COMPONENTS OF BUILDING EXECUTED AT SITE BY
LICENSED PROFESSIONALS
1. Commencement of Mass excavation (beyond 3m depth from natural ground level) and in case of
Retaining wall structures such as touch piles, sheet piling, other RCC structures etc. independent of
the building
2. Commencement of foundation work (marking of orientation of building should be completed
whereby the licensed professional can easily verify the perimeter of the proposed building and the
RCC or masonry footing / foundation work should have commenced)
3. Completion of foundation
4. Completion of each RCC slab (floors and terrace)
5. Exterior masonry completion in each floor
6. Completion of building exterior works and common areas
7. Completion of yard works and services
8. Completion of all works
172
APPENDIX-XIII
EVALUATION OF POWER CONSUMPTION FOR PROJECTS
(Clause 5.3.1.1)
ELECTRICAL LOAD REQUIREMENT FOR THE BUILDING
Details of electrical load considered for electrical fittings and diversity considered for the project to be
updated in chart – 1
Following details to be updated in Chart-1
1. Type of building
a) Residential - (HIG, MIG, LIG B, LIG A & EWS)
b) Commercial
c) Other buildings
2. Specifications of Electrical fixtures
3. Diversity factors
a)
Occupancy Diversity
Residential
●
HIG -80%
●
MIG – 90%
●
LIG B – 100%
●
LIG A & EWS – 100%
Commercial – 100%
Other Buildings -80%
b)
Connection Diversity
Residential
●
HIG, MIG & LIG B – 50%
●
LIG A & EWS – 40%
Commercial (Premises) – 70%
Commercial (Common Area) - 80%
Other Buildings - 60%
c)
Consumption Diversity
Residential
●
HIG, MIG & LIG B – 70%
●
LIG A & EWS – 80%
Commercial (Premises) – 60%
Commercial (Common Area) - 70%
Other Buildings - 50%
173
FOR RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
-Following points to be updated in Chart -1, 2a1etc for different dwelling units
Area wise Electrical fixtures details, quantity, Load of each fixtures & diversity as per building type.
Round the clock load for each fixture in each area to be updated.
Following points to be updated in Chart - 2b for common area
Area wise Electrical fixtures details, quantity, Load of each fixtures & diversity as per building type.
Round the clock load for each fixture in each area to be updated.
Summary Chart – 3.
178
Energy Efficient Lighting
SUMMARY OF POWER LOAD AND CAPACITY OF TRANSFORMER, DIESEL GENERATOR AND SOLAR PV PANEL FOR RESIDENTIAL APARTMENT BUILDINGS - CHART 3
Updated on: -------------
Name of Project :
Type of Building :
0-1
1-2
2-3
3-4
4-5
5-6
6-7
7-8
8-9
9-10
10-11
11-12
12-13
13-14
14-15
15-16
16-17
17-18
18-19
19-20
20-21
21-22
22-23
23-24
1
1 BHK (Chart 2a1)
2
2 BHK (Chart 2a2)
3
3 BHK (Chart 2a3)
4
5
6
Common area &
Parking including
Club House (2b)
STAGE -1 (25% load for premises and 60% load for common areas)
STAGE -2 (50% load for premises and 80% load for common areas)
STAGE -3 (75% load for premises and 100% load for common areas)
FINAL STAGE (100% load for premises and 100% load for common areas)
TOTAL NO OF
DWELLING UNITS
SUMMARY
Kw
SOLAR PV PANEL REQUIREMENT AS PER BUILDING BYELAW (5% of the Total Power Consumption per Day is Considered)
Kva
Kva
Kva
Kva
Kva
Kva
Standard DG Sizes in KVA : 30, 35, 40, 50, 62.5, 70,
82.5, 100, 125, 140, 160, 180, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300,
320 365 400 500 600 625 650 750 810 1010 KVA
Total Load = [ O /0.85 ] Kva ( P )
D.G. Capacity = [ P/0.85 ] Kva ( Q )
Standard Transformer Sizes in KVA : 63, 100, 250, 315,
500, 630, 750, 800, 1000 KVA (check the availability of
proposed sizes with MESCOM/ standard suppliers)
DG CAPACITY REQUIRED ( Q ) Kva
DG LOAD CONSIDERED
DG PROPOSED - 1
DG PROPOSED - 2
TOTAL PEAK LOAD CONSIDERED ( O ) K
TOTAL PEAK LOAD CONSIDERED ( P ) Kv
Transformer Proposed
Peak Hour Load
(Kw)
Solar PV Panel Requirement (Considering 1 Kw Solar PV Panels shall
produce Average 4 Kwh (Units) per Day)
Kw
Total Power Consumption per Day as per this Summery Load Chart
Kwh (Units)/
Day
Kwh (Units)/
Day
Actual Power Consumption shall be considered as 50% of the summery
Kwh (Units)/
Day
Premises Load for 100% Ocupancy ( A )
Premises Load for 25% Ocupancy ( B )
Premises Load for 50% Ocupancy ( C )
Premises Load for 75% Ocupancy ( D )
Common area & Parking including Club House Load 100% ( E )
Total
Consumption
Kwh (Units) per
Day
Remarks
Allotted Load
(Kw)
Peak Hour Load
After Diversity
(Kw)
ROUND THE CLOCK LOAD (IN KW) AFTER DIVERSITY
Sl.
No. Premises/Facilities
No. of units
Connected Load
(Kw)
Total
Connected Load
(Kw)
Kw
NOTE:
5% of the Actual Power Consumption considered for Solar PV Panels
Final Rounded Off Quantity Solar PV Panels shall be provided
Total Load = [ A+E ] Kw ( O )
Total Load = [ B+(E x 0.6) ] Kw ( F )
Total Load = [ F /0.85 ] Kva ( G )
D.G. Capacity = [ G/0.85 ] Kva ( H )
Total Load = [ C+(E x 0.8) ] Kw ( I )
Total Load = [ I /0.85 ] Kva ( J )
D.G. Capacity = [ J/0.85 ] Kva ( K )
Total Load = [ D+E ] Kw ( L )
Total Load = [ L/0.85 ] Kva ( M )
D.G. Capacity = [ M/0.85 ] Kva ( N )
179
Electric lighting is a major energy consumer in a building. Enormous energy saving are possible using
energy efficient equipment, effective control and careful/proper design. Using less electric lighting reduces
heat gain thus saving air-conditioning energy and improving thermal comfort. Electric lighting design also
strongly affects visual performance and visual comfort by aiming to maintain adequate and appropriate
illumination while controlling reflection and glare.
By installing new lighting technologies, we can reduce the amount of electricity consumed and energy
cost associated with lighting.
There are several types of energy efficient lighting and affordable lighting technology. The following are a
few examples of energy-saving opportunities with efficient lighting.
1. Installation of Compact Fluorescent Lamps (CFLs) in place of Incandescent Lamps.
CFL use a different, more advanced technology than incandescent light bulbs and come in a range of
styles and sizes based on brand and purpose. They can replace regular, incandescent bulbs in almost any
light fixture including globe lamps for bathroom vanity, lamps for recessed lighting, dimming and 3 way
functionality lights. CFLs use about 2/3 less energy than standard incandescent bulbs, give the same amount
of light, and can last 6 to 10 times longer.
2. Installation of Energy Efficient Fluorescent Lamps in place of Conventional Fluorescent lamps.
The recommended style of fluorescent lighting is a T-8. T-8 lights are most cost effective. They usually are
30% to 40% more efficient than standard T-12 fluorescent lamps, which have poor colour rendition and cause
eye strain. T-8 lamps provide more illumination, better colour and don’t flicker. T-5 lamps are the most energy
efficient and also tend to transmit the best colour.
Each style of fluorescent lamp cannot function without a ballast. A ballast is an electrical device used in
fluorescent lamps to regulate starting and operating charecteristics of the lamp. Some ballast are magnetic
whereas other are electronic. Electronic high frequency ballasts are now standard for most fluorescent lights.
Due to differences in wattage between the types of lights, if converting from a t-12 to T-8 light, one must also
change the type of ballast being used.
3. Installation of Energy Efficient LED Lamps in place of Conventional Fluorescent & Fluorescent
lamps.
LEDs are solid state semiconductor devices and are more energy efficient than even CFLs. They produce
little heat and higher quality lighting than any other lamp. At the time of inception the usage of LEDs
was limited as single bulb indicators in electronic circuits. LED lamps use 75 percent less energy than
traditional incandescent and 50 percent less energy than that of a CFL. They can last 8-25 times longer
compared to incandescent and up to four times longer than a CFL. Unlike incandescent and CFLs, LED
lamps produce no heat and hence they are cool enough to touch. But, these are more expensive; however,
they are affordable over the long run.
4. Installation of Occupancy /Motion sensors to turn lights ON and OFF where appropriate.
Lighting can be controlled by occupancy sensors to allow operation whenever someone is within the area
being scanned. When motion can no longer be detected, the lights shut off.
180
Lighting Energy Savings Potential with Occupancy Sensors
Application
Potential Energy Savings
Offices (Private)
25-50%
Offices (Open areas)
20-25%
Restrooms
30-75%
Corridors
30-40%
Storage areas
45-65%
Meeting Rooms
45-65%
Conference Rooms
45-65%
Warehouses
50-75%
Source: U S Department of Energy
5. Use an automated device, such as a key tag system, to regulate the electric power in a room.
The key tag system uses a master switch at the entrance of each guest room, requiring the use of a
room key-card to activate them. Using this technique, only occupied rooms consume energy because
most electrical appliances are switched off when the key-card is removed (when the guest leaves the
room). Along with lighting, the heating, air conditioning, radio and television may also be connected to
the master switch. This innovation has a potential savings of energy.
6. Offer Nightlights to prevent the bathroom lights from being left ON all night.
Many guests opt to have a light on while they sleep. By turning the bathroom light On and leaving
the bathroom door cracked open, guests are able to find their way through an unknown room in the
middle of the night. Those who are accompanied by children may often do the same to comfort their child.
By offering a nightlight, the energy used to power a bathroom light during the night time can be avoided
and guest will still be able to feel comfortable in unfamiliar territory.
7. Replace the Sign Boards with Light Emitting Diode (LED) Sign boards.
The development of light emitting diode (LEDs) has allowed the replacement of signage lighting with
a more energy efficient alternative. Multiple LEDs, Properly configured, produce equivalent lighting and
consume 95% less electricity than incandescent bulbs and 75% less than energy efficient compact
fluorescent lamps. A major benefit is the 20-year life cycle rating of LEDs; they virtually eliminate
maintenance.
Comparison of Three models of signages
Incandescent
Fluorescent
LED
Input Power (Watts)
40
11
2
Yearly Energy (kWH)
350
96
18
Lamp Life (Years)
0.25-0.5
1-2
10+
8. Use High Efficiency (HID) Exterior Lighting
High Intensity discharge (HID) lighting is much more efficient and preferable to incandescent, quarts-
halogen and most fluorescent light fixtures. HID types (from least to most efficient) include mercury
vapor, metal halide and high pressure sodium. Mercury vapour is seldom used anymore. Both metal
181
halide and high pressure sodium are excellent outdoor lighting systems. High pressure sodium has a
pink-orange glow and used when good colour rendition isn’t critical. Metal halide, though less efficient,
provides clean white light and good colour rendition.
9. Add light controls such as Photosensors or time clocks
Photo sensors controls, monitors daylight conditions and allow fixtures to operate only when needed.
Photo sensor detect the quantity of light and send a signal to a main controller to adjust the lighting.
Photo sensors are commonly used with outdoor lighting to automatically turn lights ON at dusk and OFF
at dawn, a very cost effective control device. This helps to lower energy costs by ensuring that unnecessary
lighting is not left on during daytime hours.
Time controls save energy by reducing lighting time of use through pre-programmed scheduling. Time
clock equipment ranges from simple devices designed to control a single electrical load to sophisticated
systems that control several lighting zones. They are one of simplest, least expensive and most efficient
energy management devices available.
ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) SYSTEMS
⮚
HVAC systems should comply with Karnataka Energy Conservation Building Code (ECBC)
2014, Clause 4. Refer Clause 4.2 for Mandatory Requirements like Natural Ventilation,
Minimum Equipment Efficiencies, Controls, Piping, Ducts, System Balancing, and Condensers.
Also refer Clause 4.3 for Prescriptive Requirements of HVAC System.
TIPS FOR THE SELECTION OF HVAC STSTEMS
⮚
HVAC system Heat load calculations shall be as per latest American national standards institute
(ANSI)/American society for heating, refrigerating and air conditioning engineers (ASHRAE)/Indian
society for heating, refrigerating and air conditioning engineers (ISHRAE).
⮚
HVAC Systems shall be categorized as under:
a.
Small sized - “0” to “300” TR – Residential/Commercial applications.
b. Medium sized - “300” to “1000” TR – Residential/Commercial/Industrial applications.
c.
Large sized – between “1000” to “3000” TR and above – Commercial as well as Industrial
applications.
⮚
Small sized:
a.
For Split systems up to 2 TR, minimum Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) for the fixed speed air
conditioners and Indian Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (ISEER) for inverter based systems
shall be mandatory. EER above 3.5 and ISEER above 4.0 shall be advised for energy rated
buildings. (minimum 3 star ratings shall be used)
b. For ducted split systems ranging from 3 TR to 17 TR an IkW of 1.2 kW per TR shall be advised.
(Original Manufacturers Engineering data/ Catalogue should be checked for the efficiency of the
system)
c.
VRF/VRV systems shall have a minimum Co Efficient of Performance (COP) of above 3.7 for the
cooling only machines and 4.0 for heat pumps. (should check with Engineering Data/ Catalogue)
182
⮚
Medium sized:
a.
Apart from aforementioned minimum criteria, an IkW of less than 1.0 kW per TR shall be
mandatory.
b. Commercial applications shall have systems with secondary refrigerants – such as chilled water
– where more than 5000 Sqm of area shall be air conditioned, to achieve an IkW of less than 1.0
c.
Heat
recovery
shall
be
extensively
utilized
among
conditioned
spaces
such
as
Hospital/Hospitality,
Health
care,
Pharmaceuticals,
Manufacturing
and
other
Industries/applications where fresh air requirements are huge and mandatory.
d. An exclusive diversity of 20% shall be mandatory for systems which shall cater more than 5000
Sqm’s of conditioned space.
e.
HVAC systems shall be controlled by intelligent Building management systems to save on energy
and to maintain IAQ. The same shall be mandatory.
⮚
Large sized:
a.
Systems which operate on waste heat shall be installed wherever possible.
b. Heat recovery systems shall be mandatory wherever possible.
c.
An IkW of less than 1.0 kW per TR shall be mandatory along with intelligent BMS.
⮚
General Guidelines for Commercial and public spaces:
a.
An average indoor temperature shall be set at 24 to 26 Deg C. for summers and 21 to 23 Deg C.
for extreme winter. HVAC systems shall be designed and commissioned accordingly to save on
energy.
b. A CO2 concentration of less than 1000 ppm shall be advised for public spaces. (Fresh Air supply
is required)
BUREAU OF ENERGY EFFICIENCY (BEE) STAR LABELS- TIPS
●
BEE Star Label – Small Label for Tv’s, Computers/ laptops, fans and tube lights.
●
BEE Star Label – Big Label for Refrigerators, Air conditioners, geysers and washing machines.
●
Look for Stars on an appliance model, more stars means more electricity saving.
●
Look for the year on the label as star ratings change periodically when standards improve. A BEE 5
star rated model in 2013 may be equivalent to BEE ¾ star model in 2014.
●
Although BEE star rated appliances do comply with Indian Standards, but higher star rating does
not mean better quality.
●
BEE star rating is available in following home appliances: Refrigerators, Air Conditioners, Water
heaters, T8 Tube Lights, 1200 mm sweep ceiling fans.
183
APPENDIX-XIV
A.
REQUIREMENT OF NUMBER AND TYPE OF LIFTS (see clause 5.3.1.2)
PRELIMINARY DESIGN FOR LIFTS - THE PASSENGER HANDLING CAPACITY OF LIFTS (Ref: NBC
2016, PART 8 SECTION 5A, Clause 4)
** 1) Considering buildings with average floor height of 3.0 m.
2) For any other building, the speed of the lifts will have to be validated against the total population and
travel height of the building.
1. Population
The population of the building is estimated using the Net usable area (NUA). The NUA excludes circulation
areas (stairs, corridors, foyers, etc), structural instructions (columns, ducts, etc) and facilities (pantry,
kitchens, toilets, conference rooms, training rooms, server rooms, storage areas, etc).
Table 1 gives typical values for the density of population.
Table 1 occupancy Area Per Person in office
Buildings
Sl No.
Building
type
Open
Plan/Hall
seating
cellular
Plan/
Cabins
i
Premium
10m2
12m2
ii
Regular
8m2
10m2
iii
Low end
5m2
8m2
Date:
C
T. Stops
N
H*
L
D
A
B = Lift Speed**
S
tv
tp
tc
to
T
RTT
P
Full speed
Up
Full speed
Down
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
0.0
2
3
3
0
0
0.0
2
3
3
0
0
0.0
2
3
3
0
0
0.0
2
3
3
0
0
#
**
Note:
*
Project Name
Configuration
of Lifts: Speed
INT = Quality of
Service
Population
HC = Quantity of Service
Remarks
C = Lift Capacity (No. of Passangers)
Total Number of Stops
N = Number of Floors above Main Terminal
Floors
H = Average highest reversal floor *
L = Number of Lifts
D = Total Travel Distance in Meters above
Main Terminal Floors
A = Average inter floor Distance = D/(N-1)
B = Lift Speed in mps (NBC Recommended 0.6 -
1.0 m/s up to 6 Floors, 1.0 -1.5 m/s for 7 -15
Floors, 1.5 -1.75 m/s for 16 -20 Floors, 1.75 -2.5
m/s for 21 -30 Floors, 3.0 -4.0 m/s for 31 -45
Floors, 4.0 -6.0 m/s for 46 -60 Floors, 6.0 m/s
and above for Above 60 Floors)**
S = Average Number of Stops = N[1-(1-1/N) p]
tv = Single floor transit time = average inter
floor distance/rated speed =A/B
tp = Passenger Transfer Time =2s
tc = Door Close = 3s
to = Door Open = 3s
T = door operating time (tc+to) + single floor
flight time tv
RTT =The Up Peak Round Trip Time in Seconds
RTT = 2Htv + (S + 1)(T - tv) + 2Ptp
INT = Average Time Intervel in Seconds, INT =
RTT/L (r/f) For Office Buildings <25s Excellent,
25<30s Very Good, 30<35s Good, 35<40s Fair,
40<45s Poor, >45 Unsatisfactory
Average Waiting Time in Seconds (r x .8) For
Office Buildings <25s Premium, 25 to 35s
Regular
P = Average Number of Passengers carried in a
Car (0.8 x C)
Tp = Total Population (100%)
Total population to be handled during peak
morning period (0.75 x 0.8 x Tp)
HC = 5 min Lift Handling Capacity in
Percentage HC
=((300xPxLx(100/Population))/RTT) or
((300xPx(100/Population))/INT)
Recommended Handling Capacity for
Residential Buildings % = H (HIG > 8%, MIG 6 to
8%, LIG 5 to 7%), For Office Buildings 10 to 15%
for Multi Tenancy and 15 to 25% for Single
Tenancy
Nominal Travel Time (Distance/
Speed (D/B)) (NBC
Recommended NTT for Office,
Commercial or Hotel Buildings (1)
15 to 25s Excellent (2) >25 to 35s
For more details and for Special/ Specific Buildings, refer the abstracts of NBC 2016 attached here with
1) Minimum one stretcher lift shall be provided in each building having height more than 30 m so as
to take care of medical as well as other emergencies. This lift shall have minimum car entrance width
of 800 mm and car depth of 2100 mm may be considered in residential/commercial buildings.
(clause 8.4.6)
2) There shall be at least one fireman's lift per building. Buildings of Height 21 m and Above and below 60 m
The fireman's lift shall have a floor area of minimum 1.43 m2. It shall have loading capacity of not less than
3) Buildings of Height 60 m and Above The fireman's lift shall have loading capacity of not less than
1000 kg and floor area not less than 2.35 m2. (clause 7.1.2)
a) Considering buildings with average floor height of 3.0 m.
b) For any other building, the speed of the lifts will have to be validated against the total population and
184
For certain specialized building functions such as BPO, areas ranging from 6m2 to 10m2 per person may be
considered.
2. Quantity of Service
It is measured in terms of the total number of passengers handled during the peak 5 min period of the day.
The minimum recommended quantity of service is given in Table 2.
Table 2 Recommended Quantity of Service in Office
Buildings
Sl No.
Type of Occupancy
Quantity of
service percent
i
Multi Tenancy
10 to 15
ii
Single Tenancy
15 to 25
Fee
3. Quality of Service
The interval or the average time between successive arrivals of the lift cars at the main lobby is generally
considered as an indicator of passenger waiting time.
Table 3 gives the quality of service based on interval.
Table 3 Recommended Quality of Service in Office
Buildings (Based on Interval)
Sl No.
Quality of Service
Interval
s
i
Excellent
Less than 25
ii
Very Good
25 to less than 30
iii
Good
30 to less than 35
iv
Fair
35 to less than 40
v
Poor
40 to less than 45
vi
Unsatisfactory
45 and above
Table 4 gives the quality of service measured as average waiting time.
Table 4 Recommended Quality of service in Office
Buildings (Based on Average Waiting Time)
Sl No.
Class of Building
Average Waiting
Time s
i
Premium
<25
ii
Regular
25 to 35
4. Traffic Analysis Equation
185
The classical method to size a lift installation requires the determination of the time, in second, that it takes
for a single lift to make a round trip around the building during the up-peak traffic condition. This is called
the round trip time and is given by:
RTT = 2Htv + (S+I)(T-tv) + 2 Ptp
where,
N = Number of floors above main terminal floors,
H = Average highest reversal floor
S = Average No of stops
N-[1-(1-1/N)P]
P = Average passengers carried
= 0.8 * maximum actual car capacity,
tv = single floor transit time=average inter floor distance/rated speed,
T = door operating time (tc+ to) + single floor flight time tf(1),and
tp = Passenger transfer time.
The derivation of the round trip time equation assumes the following:
a)
Traffic pattern corresponds to pure up-peak.
b)
Passengers arrive according to a rectangular probability distribution.
c)
Lifts, on an average, fill to 80 percent of the actual car capacity by numbers irrespective of the
weight of each passenger or the space that maybe occupied
d)
All floors are equally populated
e)
Rated speed is achieved In a single floor jump,
f)
Inter floor heights are equal
g)
Door dwell time does not exceed the calculated passenger transfer time.
Interval, INT = RTT/L, where L is the number of lifts in a single group.
5 min handling capacity, HC=
300*P*L*100/Population
RTT
or
300*P*100/Population
INT
The down peak round trip time is estimated as:
RTT down peak = Ntv + (0.5S+1)(T - tv) + 2Ptp
The mid-day round trip time is estimated as:
RTT mid-day =
2Htv + 2S(T - tv) + 4Ptp
An estimation of interfoor performance can be obtained using:
AWT interfloor = INT uppeak + [o.22+1.78* A interfloor/HC uppeak]
Where A interfloor is the number of passengers arriving during the interfloor period.
Configuration of Lifts: Number
Determination of number of lifts depends on the required quality and quantity of service. It should be noted
here that grouping of lifts and location should be given adequate attention.
Configuration of Lifts: Capacity
Determination of car capacity depends on the required quality and quantity of service. A larger car, while
improving the handling capacity might adversely impact the quality of service.
Configuration of lifts: Speed
186
In addition to the speeds derived from the calculations for handling capacity and interval, the nominal travel
time is used for selecting suitable rated speeds. The higher the building, the faster lifts are needed. The
recommended values for nominal travel time in case of an office, commercial or hotel building are given in
Table 5.
Table 5 Recommended Nominal Travel Time for Office,
Commercial or Hotel Buildings
Sl No.
Level
Nominal Travel Time
s
i
Excellent
15 to 25
ii
Good
> 25 to 35
iii
Satisfactory
> 35 to 45
Configuration of lifts: Layout
The width of the lift well entrance is the basis element in the determination of the best proportions.In other
words, the width of the car is determined by the width of the entrance and the depth of the car is regulated
by the loading per square metre permissible under this standard.
Centre opening doors are the most practicable and the most efficient entrance units for passenger lifts.Given
the same door speed,the centre opening is much faster than the side opening type> For passenger lifts,wider
cars are preferred as the ingress and egress efficiency is higher. For service/ freight/ stretcher lifts deeper
cars are preferred, so as to easily carry the stretcher/goods.
Planning for Specific Building Features
Special Building Facilities
Facilities like cafeteria, food courts, restaurants, gymnasia, etc., in the building impact the circulation
patterns in a building and should be considered for lift traffic design
Basement Service
Buildings are sometimes designed with car parks or other facilities at basement levels below the terminal
floor. Such floors, if they are served by the main lifts have an adverse impact on the up-peak, down-peak and
mid-day traffic patterns.
It is therefore better to provide basement service to the main lobby by a separate group of 'shuttle' lifts so as
to avoid compromising the traffic handling capability of the main group.
Multiple Entry Levels
Some buildings have main entry points at more than one level. The effect of more than one main terminal is
disruptive and adversely impacts effective circulation and movement. If there are more than one entrance
levels, means should be provided to bring all the routes to a single terminal floor.
If this is not possible, then the lift system planning should take into account the extra times incurred
stopping and loading at multiple entry floors. Another difficulty is in deciding whether the building
population will use each entrance equally. In the absence of any guidance, the solution is to assume an
entrance bias with an additional 10 percent and size the lifts to meet the additional required handling
capacity.
The loss of lift efficiency because of multiple entry levels could be as 15 percent per additional entry level.
Both basement service and multiple entry level buildings with lifts serving all floors also can impact the
security of the building.
Non-Smoking Buildings
187
When buildings are defined as non-smoking buildings, designers need to factor in the additional load put on
the lifts on account of additional trips that smokers make to go outside the building.It is appropriate to
provide pressurized smoking zones at the floor level rather than require smokers to make additional trips.
Reserved lifts
When lifts have to be reserved for VIP personal movement, designers should not consider these lifts as part
of the lift group.
Zoning (Vertical)/Sky Lobbies in Very Tall Buildings
As the number of floors served increases, the value of H and S also increase, adversely impacting the round
trip time and performance of the lift system. This has led to the concept of zoning in tall buildings. In stacked
zoning, a tall building is effectively divided into horizontal layers or stacks. RTT, quality and quantity of
service can be arrived at separately for each zone. The desired level of service can be attained by adjusting
two parameters in this case- the number of lifts and the number of floors in the zone. The round trip time for
each zone is given by:
RTT = 2Htv + (S + 1) (T-tv) + 2Ptp + 2[texpress - tt(1)]
Where texpress is the flight time from the main terminal to the express zone terminal/Sky lobby.
The round trip time for shuttle lifts serving only 2 floors-main terminal and sky lobby is given by:
RTT = 2T + 2Ptp
Planning For Specific Building Types
Residential Buildings
The peak traffic condition occurs during the morning down peak when many adults and children are leaving
for work and school at the same time. Population assumptions would also need to consider the service staff,
drivers of cars, etc. For high rise buildings the delivery of newspapers and milk and disposal of garbage are
also required to be considered.
In the luxury housing segment, where the number of ratio of service staff to residents is fairly high, separate
service lifts may be required for door deliveries and service staff. Typical average daily population for a
residential building is given in Table 6.
The passenger handling capacity shall be as given in Table 7. The intervals shall be as per values in Table 8.
Table 9 gives the recommended quality of service measured as average waiting time for residential buildings
and Table 10 gives the nominal travel times.
Sizing of lifts should consider the requirement to shift the
stretchers, heavy material, etc and it is recommended that at least one lift in each building should be a deep
car which can accommodate a regular ambulance stretcher.
Table 6 Typical Average Population for Residential Buildings
Sl
No.
Type of Apartment
Number of Bedrooms Per Apartment
1
2
3
3 With Servent
Quarters
4 With or
Without
Servent
Quarters
i)
High End Apartments
a)
Residents
2 to
3
3 to
4
5
5
5 to 6
b)
Resident Service Staff
0
0
0
1
1
c)
Floating Service Staff
1
2 to
3
3 to
4
3 to 4
4 to 5
ii)
Mid End Building
a)
Residents
3
4
5
5
5 to 6
b)
Resident Service Staff
0
0
0
1
1
c)
Floating Service Staff
1
1
2 to
3
2 to 3
3 to 4
iii)
Low End Building
a)
Residents
4 to
5
5 to
6
NA
NA
NA
b)
Floating Service Staff
0.5
0.5
NA
NA
NA
188
NOTE -- Unless separate lifts are provided for service staff, due consideration for service staff shall be
given while calculating the required number of lifts.
Table 7 Recommended Handling Capacity for Residential
Buildings
Sl No.
Class of Building
Handling Capacity
Percent
i
High end Building
> 8
ii
Mid end Building
6 to 8
iii
Low end Building
5 to 7
Table 8 Recommended Quality of Service for Residential
Buildings (Based on Time Interval)
Sl No.
Class of Building
Interval
s
i
High end Building
≤ 60
ii
Mid end Building
61 to 80
iii
Low end Building
81 to 100
Table 9 Recommended Quality of Service in Residential
Buildings (Based on Average Waiting Time)
Sl No.
Level
Average Waiting
Time s
i
High end Building
≤ 30
ii
Mid end Building
31 to 45
iii
Low end Building
46 to 60
Table 10 Recommended Nominal Travel Time for
Residential Buildings
Sl No.
Level
Nominal Travel Time
s
i
High end Building
25 to 35
ii
Mid end Building
36 to 45
iii
Low end Building
46 to 60
Note - In case of super high rise buildings considering limit of
speed as 10 m/s, the travel time may be longer than specified
above.
Hospitals
Factors to be considered include number of staff and shift patterns, number of visitors and visiting hours,
location of operation theatres, facilities, delivery of housekeeping supplies, waste disposal, evacuation
189
procedures and segregation of sterile areas. When carrying out traffic analysis for hospitals, designers
should consider establishing average car loading by volume rather than by weight. Arrival rates may
approximate 10 percent to 15 percent and interval may be 30 s to 50 s.
The sizing of the lift car and doors should be such that a standard hospital stretcher and attendant can be
easily accommodated. Where the hospital bed is likely to be moved the lift car should be able to
accommodate the standard hospital bed including the auxiliary support equipment like oxygen cylinders,
etc.
In large hospitals it is recommended that the lifts for the patients/hospital beds (or stretchers) should be
separated from the lifts for staff/visitors.
NOTE - For hospital buildings, designers should also consider that in an emergency a number of patients
would require to be evacuated on stretchers
Hotels
The most demanding time is during the check in and check out period and two way traffic occurs during
this period with guests going to and from rooms and restaurants and in and out of the hotel. Calculations
should be made assuming an equal number of up and down stops during this period. Average room
occupancy may range from 1.5 to 2 persons and arrival rates from 10 to 15 percent .Security
considerations need to be taken into account whilst establishing the circulation and lift requirements.
Escalators such as from the lobby to banquet/function level. Adequate number of service lifts need to be
provided for service movement of housekeeping and room service staff as well as movement of material.
Retail - Malls with Multiplexes
Pedestrian movement in retail establishment like malls is generally centered on escalators, and lifts do not
play a major part. However, provision should be made for movement of shopping trolleys, wheel chairs,
perambulators and persons with limited mobility from one level to another. A commonly applied solution is
the installation of inclined moving walks. Where lifts are provided, assumptions of lift car sizing should take
into account space occupied by trolleys and shopping bags. Where multiplexes are located on the upper
floors, the last movie of the day gets over after the mall is closed at which time the escalators might not be
available. In such cases the lift provision has to be adequate to handle the egress of the total multiplex
population.
Airports/Railway Stations
While moving walks and escalators greatly improve the building circulation, the use of lifts has to be
considered for persons with limited mobility and for movement of baggage trolleys from one level to another.
The RTT equation of 4.2.5 may be used, but car occupancy levels taking into account space occupied by
trolleys.
Multi-Level Car Parking
Multi-level car parks may be standalone public car parks or attached to office, retail or residential
complexes. These car parks may be fully automated where drivers would leave the cars inside or on a
trolley at the entry floor and the car is parked and retrieved automatically. The other alternative would be
for the use of car lifts and/or ramps.
When the movement of the cars is dependent on car lifts, detailed study has to be carried out to
establish the required number of car lifts ensuring that average car retrieval / parking time does not
exceed 2 min.The sizing of the car lifts has to be adequate to fit the largest vehicle that is intended to be
transported as well as adequate space to enable evacuation of passengers in the eventuality of an
entrapment. Designers will also need to take into account the probability of queues developing and provide
for holding lanes.
Multi - Level Car Parking Passenger Traffic
When car lifts or ramps are the means for parking the cars, then means would ned to be provided for the
movement of passengers from and to the parking floors. If the main building lifts also serve the parking
floors, it is to be noted that, performance will be adversely impacted due to multiple entry floors. Additional
entry floors will also affect the security of the building. It is therefore recommended that separate lifts
should be considered to move passengers. If separate parking lifts are provided, the basic RTT equation of
4.2.5 may be used. Average vehicle occupancy may be considered as 1.5 per car for office car parks, 4 for
airports and retail and 2 elsewhere.
Schools and Other Educational Institutions
In schools and other educational institutions, the traffic flow would consist of peak demand for short
duration that would exist just before the start or after finishing of a class or lecture.It is unlikely that an
economical solution can be implemented for such high peak requirements. Therefore the design of the
190
building has to be such that heavy stair usage is facilitated.
Buildings with 24 x 7 Operations
In buildings operating 24 x 7 (round the clock), the peak traffic conditions would not be a typical up peak
but will occur during shift changes. The handling capacity should take into account the incoming as well as
outgoing traffic. Calculation shall be made assuming both up and down stops during this period. Particular
attention should be paid while designating the drop off points, these should be assigned to a level so as to
not increase that the lifts in such buildings would have a significantly higher number of starts/stops per
hour than a conventional building.
Observatory
The height at which the observatory is located and the number of people expected at the
observatory level shall decide the speed and the number of lifts. The circulation logic is crucial in locating
the observatory lifts. Also, if the observatory is connected with lounge/cafe/souvenir shops, etc, separate
service lifts may need to be provided.
Other Considerations
Designers need to be aware that the door opening and closing times, acceleration and deceleration times,
etc., would vary between the suppliers and equipment types and can impact the overall lift performance.
The dispatch algorithms and controller responses would also vary between the supplier and the equipment
types and can impact the actual operational results.
Lifts will breakdown as well require to be shut down for regular maintenance and repairs. Lift availability
might be hampered during renovation of the building as a lift might be taken up for movement of material
and debris. Designers should take into consideration the impact of such non-availability of lifts. The
provision of well -located and easily accessible stairs can considerably lessen the demands on the lifts and
therefore architect/engineer should consider this aspect in the layout.
Lift Speed
For passenger lifts in a building, the general recommendations as given in Table 11 may be followed.
Quiet Operation of Lifts
Every precaution should be taken with passenger lifts to ensure quiet operation of the lift doors and
machinery. The insulating of the lift machine and any motor generator from the floor by rubber cushions,
prevents transmission of most of the noise.
Table 11 Lift Speed
Sl No.
No. of Floors
Speed m/s
i
Up to 6
0.6 to 1.0
ii
7 to 15
1.0 to 1.5
iii
16 to 20
1.5 to 1.75
iv
21 to 30
1.75 to 2.5
v
31 to 45
3.0 to 4.0
vi
46 to 60
4.0 to 6.0
vii
Above 60
6.0 and above
NOTES
1) Above table is considering buildings with average floor height of 3.0
m.
2) For office buildings average floor height is 4.2 m (see table 5 and Table
10).
3) Finalizing the lift speed for any building depends on detailed traffic
analysis because number of floors, area per floor, area per person and
class of building are crucial factors, which serve as inputs for such
traffic analysis.
4) Finalizing the speed for hotel depends on the number of keys per floor
and similarly for an observatory depends on the number of expected
footfall.
191
5) For any building, the speed of the lifts will have to be validated against
the total population and travel height of the building.
STANDARD REQUIREMENTS FOR LIFTS (Refer: Part 8, Section 5A of NBC 2016)
Minimum floor to floor height for landings on same side for horizontally sliding door is f+750 mm, where 'f'
is clear entrance height, in mm. (clause 5.10.3.2)
Civil Requirements: Requirements of Lift Well Enclosure -- Requirements of the Pit -- Requirements
Associated with Machine Room and Pully Room -- (Refer: clause 6.1)
Electical Installation Requirements: Main Swtches -- Residual Current Device -- Supply Cables Wiring and
Apparatus --Earthing (Refer: clause 6.2)
FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR LIFTS: Fire Protection Requirements of Lifts in High Rise
Buildings -- Evacuation Lifts (Refer: clause 7)
MINIMUM TECHNICAL AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: General Requirements -- Power and Control
Systems -- Capacity and Loading -- Other Technical and Safety Requirements -- Painting at works and on
Site -- Emergency Manual Rescue (Refer: clause 8)
Emergency Lights for Critical Areas Battery powered (at least 2 h rating) emergency lights should be installed
at critical and strategic locations including emergency exit points. These will provide illumination by self-
contained battery source even on failure of a.c. mains. On resumption of a.c. power supply, they will switch
back to mains automatically and simultaneous recharge the battery to the required level.
For office buildings, it is desirable to have at least a battery of 2 lifts at two or more convenient points. If this
is not possible, it is advisable to have at least two lifts side by side at the main entrance and one lift each at
different sections of the building for inter-communication. When two lifts are installed side by side, the
machine room shall be suitably planned. All machines and switchgear may be housed in one machine room.
192
Minimum-Maximum Net Car Areas for Various Rated Loads (Table 24 -Clause 8.3)
Minimum net car inside area for fireman lift is 1.43 m2.
193
RECOMMENDED DIMENSIONS OF PASSANGER LIFTS & SERVICE LIFTS
(Ref: PART 8, Section 5A, Table 12, Clause 5.10.3.1 of NBC 2016)
194
TABLE - 1
(All dimensions are in millimeters)
Notes:
1. All dimensions given above for lifts having centre opening power operated doors (COPD) with
counterweight at rear, are recommended dimensions primarily for architects and building planners.
Any variations mutually agreed between the manufacturer & the purchaser are permitted. However,
variation in,
a)
Car inside dimensions shall be within the minimum and maximum area limits specified in
accordance with accepted standards.
b)
Entrance width on higher side is permitted.
c)
Entrance width on lower side is permitted up to 100 mm subject to minimum of 700 mm
2. The minimum size of the lift car and all other requirements relating to accessibility, in all public
buildings shall be in accordance with 13 of Part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and General
Building requirements’ of the code.
TABLE – 2
Recommended Dimensions of Stretcher / Hospital Lifts
(Ref: PART 8, Section 5A, Table 13, Clause 5.10.3.1 of NBC 2016)
(All dimensions are in millimeters)
195
Notes:
1. All dimensions given above for lifts having Two panel telescopic doors (2P TSPD) with counterweight
at side, are recommended dimensions primarily for architects and building planners. Any variations
mutually agreed between the manufacturer & the purchaser are permitted. However, variation in:
a)
Car inside dimensions shall be within the maximum area limits specified in accordance with
accepted standards.
b)
Entrance width on higher side is permitted.
c)
Entrance width on lower side is permitted up to 100 mm subject to minimum of 700 mm.
2. Car depth of 2100 mm may be considered in residential/commercial buildings, where use of only
ambulance stretcher is envisaged. The hoist-way depth may be reduced accordingly.
TABLE – 3
Recommended Dimensions of Goods Lifts with Machine Room
(Ref: PART 8, Section 5A, Table 14, Clause 5.10.3.1 of NBC 2016)
(All dimensions are in millimeters)
Notes:
All dimensions given above for lifts having Centre Opening power operated doors (COPD) with
counterweight at side, are recommended dimensions primarily for architects and building planners.
Any variations mutually agreed between the manufacturer & the purchaser are permitted. However
the minimum rated load for the goods lift shall be based on a load of not less than 3.45 kN/m² of
the net inside car area.
196
TABLE – 4
Recommended Dimensions of Machine Room Height, Overhead, Pit depth for Passenger, Goods,
Stretcher/Hospital Lifts with Machine Room
(Ref: PART 8, Section 5A, Table 15, Clause 5.10.3.1 of NBC 2016)
(For speed up to 3.5 m/s)
(All dimensions are in millimeters)
(For speed from 4.0 m/s to 10.0 m/s)
197
(All dimensions are in millimeters)
CH – Car clear inside height measured from Car finished floor level to false ceiling.
Notes:
1. Recommended dimensions for pit depth, overhead and Machine-Room for different lift speeds
are given in the table above. These dimensions may differ in practice as per individual
manufacturer’s design depending upon load, speed and drive. However, the Pit Depth and
Overhead shall be such as to conform to the requirements of bottom clearance and top
clearance in accordance with the accepted standards.
2. In case of Goods lifts of minimum pit depth required is 1600 mm.
3. In case of lift speeds 3.5 m/s and 4.0 m/s with rear counterweight the Pit Depth requirement
could be less by about 500 mm to 1000 mm.
TABLE – 5
Recommended dimensions of Automobile Lifts with Machine Room – Through Type Car (Rated Speed = 0.6
m/s or 1.0 m/s)
(Ref: PART 8, Section 5A, Table 16, Clause 5.10.3.1 of NBC 2016)
(All dimensions are in millimeters)
Notes:
1. All dimensions given above for lifts having centre opening power operated doors (COPD) with
counterweight at side, are recommended dimensions primarily for architects and building
planners. Any variations mutually agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser are
permitted. However, the minimum rated load for the automobile lift shall be based on a load of
not less than 1.45 kN/m² of the net inside car area.
198
2. Dimensions of machine room height, pit depth and overload may differ in practice as per
individual manufacturer’s design depending upon load, speed and drive. However, the pit depth
and overhead shall be such as to conform to the requirement of bottom clearance and top
clearance in accordance with the accepted standards.
3. The lift car width should be selected such that in case of emergency while the automobile is in
the car-lift the driver should be able to open the automobile door and come out of the
automobile.
Recommended dimensions of Dumbwaiter Lifts
(Ref: PART 8, Section 5A, Table 17, Clause 5.10.3.1 of NBC 2016)
(All dimensions are in millimeters)
Notes:
Entrance width ‘E’ is based on assumption of provision of vertical biparting doors (No car door is normally
provided)
TABLE – 7
Recommended dimensions of Passenger Lifts MRL COPD
(Ref: PART 8, Section 5A, Table 18, Clause 5.10.3.1 of NBC 2016)
(All dimensions are in millimeters)
Notes:
1)
All dimensions given above for lifts having center opening power operated doors (COPD) with
counterweight at side, are recommended dimensions primarily for architects and building planners.
Any variations mutually agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser are permitted.
However, variation in,
a) Car inside dimensions shall be within the maximum area limits specified in accordance with
accepted standards.
b) Entrance width on higher side is permitted.
c) Entrance width on lower side is permitted up to 100 mm subject to minimum of 700 mm.
199
2)
The minimum size of the lift car and all other requirement relating to accessibility, in all public
buildings shall be in accordance with 13 of part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and General
Building Requirements’ of the Code.
TABLE – 8
Recommended dimensions of Stretcher/Hospital Lifts MRL (2P Telescopic Door/4P COPD, Speed
1.0 m/s to 2.0 m/s)
(Ref: PART 8, Section 5A, Table 19, Clause 5.10.3.1 of NBC 2016)
Notes:
1)
All dimensions given above for lifts having 2 panel telescopic or 4 panel center opening power
operated doors (4P COPD) with counterweight at side, are recommended dimensions primarily for
architects and building planners. Any variations mutually agreed to between the manufacturer and
the purchaser are permitted. However, variation in,
i) Car inside dimensions shall be within the maximum area limits specified in accordance with
accepted standards.
ii) Entrance width on higher side is permitted.
iii) Entrance width on lower side is permitted up to 100 mm subject to minimum of 700 mm.
2)
Car depth of 2100 mm may be considered in residential/commercial buildings where use of only
ambulance stretcher is envisaged. The hoist-way depth maybe reduced accordingly.
TABLE – 9
Pit Depth for Passenger/Stretcher/Hospital Lifts MRL
(Ref: PART 8, Section 5A, Table 20, Clause 5.10.3.1 of NBC 2016)
(All dimensions are in millimeters)
Notes:
Recommended dimensions for pit depth for different lift speeds are given in the table. These
dimensions may differ in practice as per individual manufacturers design depending upon load,
200
speed and drive. However, the pit depth shall be such as to conform to the requirements of bottom
clearance and top clearance in accordance with the accepted standards.
TABLE – 10
Overhead Height for Passenger and Stretcher/Hospital Lifts MRL
(Ref: PART 8, Section 5A, Table 21, Clause 5.10.3.1 of NBC 2016)
(All dimensions are in millimeters)
Notes:
Recommended dimensions for overhead for different lift speeds are given in the table. These
dimensions may differ in practice as per individual manufacturers design depending upon load,
speed and drive. However, the overhead shall be such as to conform to the requirements of bottom
clearance and top clearance in accordance with the accepted standards.
TABLE – 11
Recommended dimensions of Goods Lifts MRL (Speed 1.0 m/s)
(Ref: PART 8, Section 5A, Table 22, Clause 5.10.3.1 of NBC 2016)
Notes:
1)
CH is the clear car height from car finished floor level to car roof (goods lifts will normally not have
any false ceilings)
2)
Normal range for CH is 2100 mm to 2400 mm.
3)
Door height is less than or equal to the car height CH.
4)
In case counterweight safety is applicable check for dimensions with lift manufacturer.
201
5)
All dimensions given above for lifts having telescopic or centre opening power operated doors
(COPD) with counterweight at side, are recommended dimensions primarily for architects and
building planners. Any variations mutually agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser
are permitted. However, the minimum rated load for the goods lift shall be based on a load of not
less than 3.45 kN/m² of the net inside car area.
6)
Recommended dimensions for overhead and pit depth for different lift speeds are given in the table.
These dimensions may differ in practice as per individual manufacturers design depending upon
load, speed and drive. However, the overhead and pit depth shall be such as to conform the
requirements of bottom clearance and top clearance in accordance with the accepted standards.
TABLE – 12
Recommended Dimensions of Automobile Lifts MRL COPD (Speed 0.5 m/s to 1.0 m/s)
(Ref: PART 8, Section 5A, Table 23, Clause 5.10.3.1 of NBC 2016)
(All dimensions are in millimeters)
Notes:
1)
Car height normal range is 2100 mm to 2700 mm.
2)
Overhead height shown is required for all values of car height CH shown above.
3)
In case counterweight safety is applicable check for dimensions with lift manufacturer.
4)
All dimensions given above for machine room less lifts with 6 panel center opening power doors
(6P COPD) used for automobiles are recommended dimensions for architects and building
planners. Any variations mutually agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser are
permitted. However, the minimum rated load for the automobile lift shall be based on a load of
not less than 1.45kN/m² of the net inside car area.
5)
Dimensions of pit depth and overhead may differ in practice as per individual manufacturers
design depending upon load, speed and drive. However, the pit depth and overhead shall be
such as to conform to the requirements of bottom clearance and top clearance in accordance
with the accepted standards.
6)
The lift car width should be selected such that in case of emergency while the automobile is in
the lift car the driver should be able to open the automobile door and come out of the
automobile.
202
B.
REQUIREMENT FOR ELECTRICAL SUB STATION (see clause 5.3.1.3)
Spaces for Electrical Installations
The spaces required for different electrical installations are given at 3.1 to 3.3
Electric Sub-station – The norms given in 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 shall be adopted for provision of space for
sub-station.
AREA REQUIRED FOR TRANSFORMER ROOM AND SUBSTATION FOR DIFFERENT CAPACITIES
C-1 The requirement for area for transformer room and substation for different capacities of transformers is
given below for guidance:
Capacity of
Transformer
( kVA )
Total
Transformer
Room Area,
Min
Total Substation
Area (Incoming,
HV Panels, MV
Panels, Transformer
Roof but Without
Generators), Min
Suggested
Minimum Face
Width
1 × 160
14.0
90
9.0
2 × 160
28.0
118
13.5
1 × 250
15.0
91
9.0
2 × 250
30.0
121
13.5
1 × 400
16.5
93
9.0
2 × 400
33.0
125
13.5
3 × 400
49.5
167
18.0
2 × 500
36.0
130
14.5
3 × 500
54.0
172
19.0
2 × 630
36.0
132
14.5
3 × 630
54.0
176
19.0
2 × 800
39.0
135
14.5
3 × 800
58.0
181
14.0
2 × 1000
39.0
149
14.5
3 × 1000
58.0
197
19.0
203
NOTES:
1 The areas given in respect of the different categories of rooms hold good, if they are provided with
independent access doors in accordance with local regulations.
2 The minimum height of substation room/HV switch room/MV switch room shall be arrived at considering
1 200 mm clearance requirement from top of the equipment to the below of the soffit of the beam. In case
cable entry/exit is from above the equipment (transformer, HV switchgear, MV switchgear), height of
substation room/HV switch room/MV switch room shall also take into account requirement of space for
turning radius of cable above the equipment height
3 Additional space will be required in cases where the load requirement calls for redundancy for enhanced
reliability through addition of switchgear, such as, bus couplers, etc.
4 For transformers of other capacity, it may lead to some minor changes in dimensioning.
The break-up spaces required for different installations in a sub-station are given as below:
1. Supply company’s Switchgear room and or space of meters.
2. Transformer Rooms: The number and size of transformer rooms shall be ascertained from the
total power requirements of the company. To determine the size of transformer and clearance
around a transformer, reference may be made to good practice (I.S.1887-1967 code of
practice
for installation and maintenance of Transformer). A 500 KVA transformer may be provided with a
minimum space of 4 m. X 4 m.
If transformer is to be installed outdoor space shall be provided on similar considerations and
adequate provision for safety enclosure is to be made. For transformer having large oil content (more
than 2000 lt.) soak pits are to be provided in accordance with rule 64 of Indian Electricity Rules,
1956.
3. High Voltage Switch Rooms: In case of sub-station having one transformer, the owner is required to
provide only one high voltage switch. In the case of single point supply for two
transformers, the
number of switches required is 3 and for ‘n’ transformers the number of switches is n+1. The floor
area required in case of a single switch will be roughly 4mX1m and for every additional switch the
length should be increased by 1m.
4. Low Voltage Switch Rooms: The floor area requirement in respect of low voltage switchgear room
cannot be determined by any formula.
5. Room for Stand-by-Generator: A room space not less than 6 m. X 9 m. may be provided for housing a
standby Generator set of 50 KW.
Location of electric sub-station in basement of multi-storeyed buildings:
1
The electric sub-station should be provided in the approved/sanctioned covered area of the
buildings not below the first basement level and should be on the periphery of the building
with clear independent round the clock approach having proper ramp with slope.
The ramp should be designed in such a manner that in case of fire no smoke should enter
the main buildings. The exit from basement electric sub-station shall have self-closing
fire/smoke check doors of 2 hours. F.R. near entry to ramp. Additional exit shall be provided
if travelled distance from the farthest corner of the ramp is more than 15m.
2
The electric sub-station should be totally segregated from rest of the basement having 4
hours. F.R. wall and should have adequate internal lighting and ventilation. A perfect
independent ventilation system of 30 air charges per hour linked with detection as well as
automatic medium velocity water spray system for individual transformer shall be located
outside the building at ground floor, fire control room shall be manned round the clock
and shall also have and audio system in the
basement as well as in the control room. No
204
service such as water, sewer, air-conditioning, gas pipes or telegraphs services should pass
through electric substation of the cable trench.
3.
The rising mains should be of metal bus bars. The floor of electric substation should be 2
ft above the rest of basement floor and designed suitably to carry 10 tons of transformer
weight on wheels also having provision of proper cable trenches 0.6 X 0.6 m. depth. Dummy
floor of 0.6 m. depth be provided to facilitate laying of cables inside the building connecting
to equipment. Fire retarding cables should be provided and cable trenches be filed with said
cables. R.C.C. pipes at suitably places as required will be provided for cable entries to the
sub-station spaces with suitable water proofing arrangement. A provision of 12 ft. clear
height below Beams should be made in the electric sub-station area along with adequate
arrangement for fixing chain pulley block for a load of 15 tons. Provision of sumps shall be
kept in the floor so that complete volume of transformer oil in the event of spill over could
be accommodated. Sufficient arrangement to prevent spread of fire to oil pumps is made.
4.
Transformers room and sub-station room shall be provided with steel shutters of 8’ X 8’
with suitable grills. Sufficient arrangement for pumping the water out, in case
of
flooding should be made to minimize loss to switchgear and transformer.
5.
In view of experience of installation of exhaust chimneys in the multi-storeyed buildings at
undesirable locations, proper provision in the form of vertical exhaust leading to above
terrace level should be made for the substation.
6.
Electric sub-station space should be made available free of cost by promoters and should
be free of seepage/leakage of water. There should be no combustible material kept in side
or in the vicinity. Periodic inspection of electric sub-station shall be mandatory and violation
of any byelaw will be dealt, sternly with penalty and immediate disconnection.
Ideal Location
(i) The ideal location for an electric sub-station for a building or group of buildings would be at
the load center and shall be located on the ground floor in a separate building. Such
building should have direct access through a motorable road to ensure easy access or
removal of equipment. The floor level of the sub-station or switch room (in case of LT) shall
be above the highest flood level of the locality.
(ii) In case the sub-station has to be located within the main building itself for unavoidable
reasons, then it should be located on ground floor with easy access from outside. Location
of sub-station in the basement floors should be avoided as far as possible on account of
likely flooding and fi re hazard. In case it is unavoidable, then fool proof anti-flooding
measures have to be taken, which includes provision of automatic dewatering pumping and
construction of waterproof basement. Such portion (for sub-station) should be isolated from
the rest of basement and should have easy entry and exit arrangement. Also, suitable
mechanical ventilation and fi re detection/ protection system to be provided to conform to
B.I.S. requirements and requirements of local fi re authority. Only dry type transformers
and switchgear to be provided, unless they are installed in a separate service building
separated from the main building.
(iii) Emergency power supply equipment (such as generating sets) shall not be allowed to be
installed above ground floor or below first basement level of building. 10
(iv) Facility for connection from sub-station to adjoining building to feed emergency load shall
be permitted.
Other Requirements for Sub-station
205
1.
The sub-station will preferably be located on the ground level failing which it can be in the
basement floor in no case at higher level.
2.
The entire space will be provided at one floor in continuation.
3.
The minimum width of the sub-station space shall not be less than 6 m.
4.
The areas given above in respect of the different categories of rooms hold good if they are provided
with windows and independent access doors.
5.
All the rooms should be provided with partition up to the Ceilings and shall have proper
ventilation. Special care should be taken to ventilate the transformer rooms and where
necessary, louvers at lower levels and exhaust fans at higher level shall be provided at
suitable locations.
6.
In order to prevent storm water entering the transformer and switch rooms through the soak
pits, the floor level of the sub-station shall be at least 15 cm above the highest flood water level
that may be anticipated in the locality.
Cable Trenches Shafts Etc.
1. Suitable number of vertical shafts, rising mains, distribution boxes, etc. shall also be provided as per
the requirements at suitable location. Cable trenches with suitable handy covers for entry of the
cables up to the substation onwards up to the street adjoining other building shall also be provided
as per the requirements.
These vertical shafts, rising mains, distribution boxes, cable trenches, etc. shall be so constructed
as to be accessible only to authorized personnel. The rising mains and other installations in the
vertical shafts, tap off boxes distribution boxes etc. required at each floor shall be provided, installed
and maintained by the owner at their own cost. Adequate enclosed space shall also be provided at
each floor for installation of equipment’s for distribution on respective floors such as distribution
boxes, cut-out, and meter boxes and main switches.
2. Location of Switch Room: In large installations other than where a substation is provided, a separate
switch room shall be provided. This shall be located as closely possible to the electrical load centre
and suitable ducts shall be laid with minimum number of bends form the point of entry of the supply
to the position of the main switchgear. The switch room shall also be placed in such a position that
rising ducts may readily be provided there from to the upper floors of the building in one straight
vertical run. In larger building, more than one rising duct and horizontal ducts may also be required
for running cables from the switch room to the foot of each rising main. Such cable ducts shall be
reserved for the electrical services only, which may, however, include medium and low voltage
installations, such as call bell systems. Telephone installation should be suitably segregated. Power
distribution shall start with suitable number of rising mains (or rising cables) for vertical distribution.
A large building will be divided into suitable number of parts, each part served by a rising main.
Suitable provision shall be kept for laying cables/ bus duct from switch room to feed each rising
main.
3. Location and Requirement of Distribution Panels: The electrical gear distribution panels and other
apparatus, which are required on such floor, may conveniently be mounted adjacent to the rising
mains, and adequate space should be provided at each floor for this purpose.
LT Distribution Switchgear Only following type switchboards will be used: (a) Main/Submain
switchboard of cubicle type. (b) DBs – Conventional DBs of reputed makes can also be used with the
approval of technical sanctioning authority in addition to prewired DB. (c) Specially designed
switchboards. Also specially designed switchboards can be used with detailed specification and
fabrication drawings approved by the technical sanctioning authority
Location of Switchboards (i) Switchboards are to be located in common areas like corridors, lobby
etc. and not to be located in locked room. (ii) Switchboard shall be located only in dry situation and
in well-ventilated space. They shall not be placed in the vicinity of storage battery or exposed to
chemical fume. 38 (iii) Switchboards shall not be erected above gas stove, or sinks or within 2.5 meter
of any washing unit in washing rooms of launderings or in the bath rooms, toilets, or kitchen. (iv) As
far as possible main boards shall not be located in basement. Such main boards can be located in
206
ground floor. (v) It is preferable to locate floor main boards in rising main shafts of adequate size,
with steel doors (having ventilation) or in suitable room. (vi) Similarly DBs can be in suitable nitches
in corridor walls having doors. (vii) Locating main boards under staircase or standing open in corridor
is not a desirable practice, besides being highly unaesthetic. (viii) The main switchboard, which
receives power to the building, should be invariably located in a switch room, having round the clock
access, for emergency attendance to the switchboard
4. Location and Requirement of PBX/PABX Room: Information regarding provision and location of
PBX/PABX room, telephone outlets and riser shall be ascertained form the relevant Authority.
Adequate space should be provided for installation of Sub-Distribution Board.
GENERAL
The maintenance of the built-up space for electric sub-station, distribution equipment, vertical shafts and
enclosure at each floor shall be done by the owner. The standby arrangement for electricity supply up to and
including the substation equipment and distribution pillars at the sub-station shall be provided compulsorily.
207
APPENDIX-XV
WATER REQUIREMENT, WASTEWATER GENERATION AND TREATMENT OF
WASTEWATER IN BUILDINGS
A. Classification of Buildings:
For the purpose of assessing the water requirement for buildings, the buildings are
classified as follows;
I. Residential
II. Non-Residential
1.
Group A: Hotels
2.
Group B: Educational
3.
Group C: Institutional / Hospital
4.
Group D: Assembly
5.
Group E: Business
6.
Group F: Mercantile
7.
Group G: Industrial
8.
Group H: Storage
9.
Group I: Hazardous
10. Traffic Terminal Stations
In case of mixed use buildings, the portion of the building proposed for each use
shall be considered for assessing the water requirement for each use, as specified
herein and the cumulative requirement shall be considered as the water
requirement for the building;
B. Components of Project to assess Water Requirement:
The following components in the Project related to water requirement, as applicable,
shall be specified for each building to assess the water requirement;
I. Source of Domestic Water Supply –
The domestic water supply for the building shall be through any of the following
systems or a combination of them;
1.
From MCC water supply system
2.
From Well / Borewell (with or without Water Treatment Plant -
WTP)
3.
From Rainwater Harvesting system (with or without WTP)
4.
From Water Tanker
This information is required to assess the overall water requirements in the city.
II. Domestic Water Distribution System –
The domestic water distribution system in the building shall be though any of the
following systems;
1. Direct supply from Centralised Water Supply System (MCC or Private),
without Over Head Tank (OHT) and Sump Tank
2. Gravity distribution System from OHT, with or without Sump Tank.
3. Pressurised distribution System through Hydro pneumatic pumping System.
208
III. Sewerage System and Reuse of Treated Water –
The Sewerage System for the building shall be any of the following systems, for
treatment of wastewater (grey or / and black water), reuse of treated wastewater
and disposal of treated and untreated wastewater.
Note:
1. Sewage – Black Water
2. Sullage – Grey Water
3. STP – ‘Sewage Treatment Plant’ usually refers to Plants designed for treating grey water and
black water together. STP may also be for treating exclusively black water.
4. SuTP – Sullage Treatment Plant refers to Plants designed for treating grey water.
5. UGD – City Level Under Ground Drainage System
Various scenarios for Wastewater Treatment & Disposal are as follows;
1.
Buildings where UGD is available –
a) Scenario 1:
i. 100% Sullage Treatment in SuTP for reuse of treated water & Excess
Treated Water to be used for Ground Water Recharge or Disposal into
Storm Water Drains as per the Water Balance Chart.
ii. 100% Sewage disposal into UGD, if permitted by MCC, as per the
Water Balance Chart.
b) Scenario 2:
iii. 100% Sullage Treatment in SuTP for reuse of treated water as per
the Water Balance Chart.
iv. Sewage treatment in STP/ETP to the extent of additional treated
water required as per the Water Balance Chart.
v. Excess sewage disposal into UGD, if permitted by MCC, as per the
Water Balance Chart.
Note: 1. This system shall be permitted where the total requirement of treated water
to be reused in the building is more than the treated water generated in SuTP and
additional treated water required is generated from STP/ETP.
2.If approval for a Project is obtained under Scenario 1, but during the course of
operation, it is observed (through the automated metering system installed in the
project) that the total requirement of treated water to be reused in the building is
more than the treated water generated in SuTP, then additional STP/ETP has to be
installed in the Project as per Scenario 2.
c) Scenario 3:
100% Sullage and Sewage treatment in STP/ETP for reuse of treated
water (for flushing and landscape / garden) and the excess treated water
to be further treated in RO Plant for domestic use.
Note: This system is optional for the owners of the building, if they intend to further treat
the excess treated water from the STP/ETP, using RO Plant to generate potable water for
domestic use.
Additional incentives shall be provided for treatment of wastewater as per Scenario 3, as
decided by MCC.
Note: In Scenario 1 & 2 above, if MCC does not permit disposal of raw sewage into UGD,
then the sewage has to be treated as specified for Scenario 3 or as specified for the
buildings where UGD is not available.
209
2.
Buildings where UGD is not available –
a) Small Buildings
i. 100% Sullage disposed into Leach Pit as per the Water
Balance
Chart.
ii. 100% Sewage disposed into Septic Tank (Sewage
generated upto
15 KLD) as per the Water Balance Chart.
b) Large Buildings
i. Scenario 1:
(a)
100% Sullage treated in SuTP for reuse of treated water & Excess
Treated Water to be used for Ground Water Recharge or
Disposal into Storm Water Drains as per the Water Balance
Chart.
(b)
100% Sewage treated in STP/ETP for reuse of treated water &
Excess Treated Water to be used for Ground Water Recharge or
Disposal into Storm Water Drains as per the Water Balance
Chart.
ii. Scenario 2:
100% Sullage and Sewage treatment in STP/ETP for reuse of treated
water (for flushing and landscape / garden) and the excess treated
water to be further treated in RO Plant for domestic use.
Note: This system is optional for the owners of the building, if they intend to further
treat the excess treated water from the STP/ETP, using RO Plant to generate potable
water for domestic use.
Additional incentives shall be provided for treatment of wastewater as per Scenario
3, as decided by MCC.
IV. Hot water system –
Hot water supply for the various uses in the building shall be through any of the
following systems.
1.
Centralised Solar Water Heating System
2.
Centralised Heat Pump System
3.
Gas Geyser for individual units
4.
Electric Geyser for individual units
V. Water Tanks –
1.
Domestic water tank –
a) Under Ground Tank (UGT) / Sump tank
b) Over Head Tank (OHT)
2.
Fire storage tank (including all types of tanks) – (For buildings above 21 m
height)
a) UGT / Sump tank
b) OHT
3.
Treated water tank –
a) UGT / Sump Tank
b) OHT
4.
Other Tanks
210
a) Hot water tank
b) RO water tank
5.
WTP Tank
VI. Centralised RO Plant
VII. Domestic Water Treatment Plant (WTP)
VIII. Gym
IX. Gym with Spa (Jacuzzi, Steam, Sauna, Ayurvedic Therapy)
X. Swimming Pool
XI. Other water bodies
XII. Landscape/Garden
XIII. Cooling Towers for HVAC & DG Set
XIV. Automated Water Meters
Automated Water Meters shall be installed as follows;
1.
Domestic Water Supply – Separate Meters to be installed as
specified
in the Water Balance Chart for Online monitoring of domestic water supplied
from the following sources.
a) City Level Water Supply Source (M1)
b) Open well / Bore well (M2)
c) Rainwater Harvesting (M3)
d) Water Tankers (M4) (in case of separate tank to Sump Tank – through
gravity or pumping)
2.
Domestic Water Distribution – The total domestic water
supplied
is
presumed to be used for the domestic purposes in the
apartments
/
premises and common areas specified herein and
shall also be used for the
shortfall in the treated water generated, if required (for the use of treated water
in the Project). Therefore,
a Separate Meter (M5) has to be installed for the
domestic water supplied towards the shortfall in treated water generated as
specified in the Water Balance Chart for Online monitoring.
3.
Treated water generated, reused and excess water disposed –
Separate
Meters to be installed as specified in the Water Balance
Chart
for
Online
211
monitoring of treated water generated, reuse of treated water and excess treated
water disposed as follows;
a) Treated water generated separately from SuTP / STP/ETP (M6)
b) Treated water reuse separately from SuTP / STP/ETP (M7)
c) Landscape Irrigation (M8)
d) Flushing (M9)
e) Excess treated water disposal separately from SuTP / STP/ETP (M10)
4.
Water Meters for individual units – Separate Meters to be installed
as
specified herein for Online monitoring of consumption of domestic water and
treated wastewater for individual units as follows;
a) Domestic water (for kitchen, dining wash basin and all toilets)
b) RO water (in case of centralised RO water supply)
c) Hot water (in case of centralised Hot water supply)
d) Treated water (in all toilets)
Note: The installation of Water Meters for individual units is not mandatory, but optional, to
claim incentives as specified herein.
XV. Any other requirements (Specific to the project, if applicable)
C. GENERAL INFORMATION OF THE PROJECT - Table-1:
(a)
Project Information
The following Project information shall be entered in Table-1;
1.
Project Name
2.
Address & Location of the Project
3.
Building category
a) Residential (Any one or more type, automatically selected from the details
entered in Table-1b, based on the various types of residential apartments
mentioned in Table-1a)
b) Non-Residential (Any one or more type, automatically selected based on
the various types of non-residential premises mentioned in Table-1c).
The following parameters have to be entered in Table-1c based
on
the
requirements of the building (of each block, in case of
multiple blocks in a
project) to derive the total water requirement
for the building (excluding water
requirement for amenities,
landscape etc.)
i.
In case of hotels, the following details have to be provided;
(a) No. of Beds
(b) No. of restaurant seats
(c) No. of Staff
ii. In case of Educational Building, the following details have to be provided;
(a) Strength of school
(b) Teaching and non-teaching staffs
iii. In case of hostels, the following details have to be provided;
(a) No. of Beds
(b) No. of Wardens’ residences
(c) No. of Staff
212
iv. In case of Hospital:
Gross Area in Sqm to be provided for;
(a) No. of beds not exceeding 100.
(b) No. of beds exceeding 100.
(c) Outpatient department (OPD)
(The water requirement includes requirement of patients,
attendants, visitors and staff. Additional water requirement for
kitchen,
laundry and clinical water shall be computed as per
actual
requirements)
v. In case of Assembly Building, the following details have to be provided;
(a) Gross Area in Sqm for Concentrated use without fixed seating
(b) Gross Area in Sqm for less concentrated use without fixed seating
(c) No. of fixed seats for fixed seating building (Cinemas, Concert halls
and Theatres and Multiplex)
(d) Gross Area in Sqm for Dining areas and restaurants with seating
and tables
(e) Gross Area in Sqm for Food Court
vi. In case of Business Building, the Gross Area in Sqm including canteen
have to be provided.
vii. In case of Mercantile Building, the following details have to be provided;
(a) Gross Area in Sqm for Street floor and sales basement
(b) Gross Area in Sqm for Upper sales floor
(c) Gross Area in Sqm for Storage/warehouse, receiving and the like.
viii. In case of Industrial Building, the following details have to be provided;
(a) Gross Area in Sqm for Factories including canteen where
bathrooms are required to be provided.
(b) Gross Area in Sqm for Factories including canteen where no
bathrooms are required to be provided.
ix. In case of Storage Building, the Gross Area in Sqm has to be provided.
x. In case of Hazardous Building, the Gross Area in Sqm has to be provided.
xi. In case of traffic terminal stations, average no. of users / day (total annual
passenger traffic / 365) plus staff plus vendors and the facility details to
be provided;
(a) Airport
(b) Railway station (Junction) with bathing facility
(c) Railway station (Junction) without bathing facility
(d) Railway station (Intermediate) with bathing facility
(e) Railway station (intermediate) without bathing facility
(f)
Interstate Bus Terminals
(g) Interstate Bus Terminals/Metro Stations
Note: 1. wherever there are multiple work shifts, the no. of users within a 24-hour period may
be considered as per actuals.
Gross Area - The area of the floor within the inside perimeter of the outside walls of the floor
of the building under consideration with no deduction for corridors and passages, toilets,
internal walls, internal columns or other features for each occupancy. In case the common
213
passages are shared for different uses, then proportionate area of such common passages
shall be added to the plinth area of all the premises of the respective use.
The water requirement, wastewater generation, treatment and disposal in case of factories,
storage & hazardous buildings and traffic terminal stations have to be assessed separately
on a case-by-case basis and are not detailed herein. The details provided herein related to the
above buildings are only for general information.
c) Mixed use automatically selected based on the various types of
apartments / premises mentioned in Table-1b&1c.
(b)
Components to Water Requirement Assessment – Table-1d (as per Item
No. B above)
Mark Yes / No for the Components applicable for the Project to assess water
requirement.
(c)
Other information – Table-1e
1. Height of the building (of the tallest building in case of multiple buildings in the
Project) (m)
2. Largest Compartment Perimeter of Water Curtain of Car Parking Spaces in
any of the Basement Floors of the Project (m)
3. Basement Area (Sqm)
4. Area of landscape and type of landscape (lawn and other plantation areas)
Note: The water requirement for landscaping purposes is considered as,
a) For Lawns 7 Liters/Sqm/day and
b) For Other Landscapes like Shrubs and Trees 5 Liters /Sqm/day.
1.
Water Treatment Plant Tank Capacity (If provided)
2.
Quantity of water stored in Swimming pool
3.
Quantity of water stored in Other water bodies.
Note: 1. Make up water for Swimming Pool, Fish pond, Water fountain, etc. to
be considering based on
quantity of water evaporated and that required for backwash - 2% of total volume of stored water to be
considered as water requirement for Pool Make up, Fish pond, Water fountain, etc.
2. Quantity of water for initial filling of swimming pool & other water bodies and periodical replacement of
swimming pool & other water bodies are not considered.
4.
Capacity of Cooling tower* (Tonnage) for HVAC
5.
Capacity of Cooling tower* (Tonnage) for DG Set
Note: *Water consumption for Cooling Towers shall be considered as per the
manufacturer’s requirement and running hours of the systems.
6.
Market cleaning area (common areas and Fresh Fish & Meat area)
7.
Mall cleaning area (common areas of the Mall)
8.
Any other water components, to be specified.
D. WATER REQUIREMENT ASSESSMENT FOR RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
I. Occupant Assessment – Table-2a
214
The details of Table-2a are automatically calculated from Table-1b
II. Water Requirement, Wastewater Generation, Treated Water Usage &
Sewage/Excess Treated Water Disposal for Residential Buildings – Table-2b(2)
The following water requirements of the building (for all blocks together in case
of multiple blocks in a project and for the residential portion of the building in
case of mixed use building) in Table-2b(2) shall be automatically calculated from
Table-1d, Table-2a and Table-2b(1).
1.
Water requirement for residential use and other uses in common area per
person per day for domestic use and for treated water reuse.
2.
Water requirement for Club house facilities
a) Gym – 15 LPHD for Domestic & 10 LPHD for Flushing
b) Gym along with Jacuzzi, Steam, Sauna, ayurvedic therapy - 20 LPHD for
Domestic & 25 LPHD for Flushing.
3.
Water requirement for Building management team
1 person considered for 10 dwelling units & Water requirement considered is
25 LPHD for Domestic & 25 LPHD for Flushing
4.
Other requirements (to be specifically mentioned as additional
water
requirement)
Note:1. Only normal fixtures are considered, and water efficient plumbing fixtures are
considered only for providing additional incentives as per these Byelaws
2. Make up water for swimming pool & water bodies is considered based on
quantity of water evaporated and that required for backwash i.e., 2% of total
volume of
stored
water
to
be
considered
as
water
requirement].
3. Quantity of water for initial filling of swimming pool and water bodies and
periodical replacement of swimming pool & other water bodies are not
considered.
III. Storage of water for Fire Fighting Purposes – Table-2c(2) (For highrise
buildings - above 21m height)
The minimum requirement of UGT & OHT for Fire Fighting shall be automatically
calculated in Table-2c(2) from Table-2c(1).
Note: 1. One set of pumps shall be provided for each 100 hydrants or part thereof, with a maximum of two
sets. In case of more than one pump set installation, both pump sets shall be interconnected at their delivery
headers.
Alternative to provisions of additional set of pumps, the objective can be met byproviding additional diesel
pump of the same capacity and doubling the water tank capacity as required for one set of pumps.
IV. Septic Tank /Sullage Treatment Plant/ Sewage Treatment Plant Capacity –
Table-2d
1.
Buildings where UGD is available
a) Capacity of SuTP for 100% Sullage Treatment -
i. Total Sullage generated is calculated automatically from Column f
(B2) of Table-2b(2).
ii. The capacity of SuTP is calculated automatically adding 20% (for
contingencies) of the quantity calculated in (i) above and is rounded
off to multiples of 5 KLD.
215
b) Capacity of 100% SuTP & STP for additional treated water required:
i. Total Sullage generated is auto filled from Column f (B2) of Table-
2b(2).
ii. The Capacity of SuTP is calculated automatically
adding
20%
(for contingencies)of the quantity calculated in (i) above and
is
rounded off to multiples
of 5 KLD.
iii. Total treated water requirement will be calculated automatically
from Column j(B6) of Table-2b(2).
iv. Shortfall of treated water will be calculated automatically
by
deducting Total treated water
generated by SuTP fromthe total
treated water
required for the project.
v. The Capacity of STP is calculated automatically adding
20% (for
contingencies)of the quantity calculated in (iv) above and is rounded
off to the multiples of 5 KLD.
c) Capacity of 100% STP with RO Plant:
i. Total Sullage & Sewage generated is calculated
automatically
from Column h (B4) of Table-2b(2).
ii. Capacity of STP is calculated automatically adding 20% (for
contingencies)of the quantity calculated in (i) above and is rounded
off in the multiples of 5 KLD.
2.
Buildings where UGD is not available
a) For Small Buildings
100% Sullage disposed into Leach Pit & 100% Sewage disposed into Septic
Tank.
(Septic tanks are only recommended upto 15 KLD of Sewage generation and for small
communities and institutions where UGD connection not available.)
Note:For Size of Septic tank refer Design criteria and Construction of Septic Tanks (Ref: IS:
2470 (Part 1) – 1985) APPENDIX A, (Clause 3.4.5.2)
b) For Large Buildings
i. Capacity of 100% SuTP & 100% STP
(a) Total Sullage generated is calculated automatically from Column
f (B2) of Table-2b(2).
(b) The Capacity of SuTP is calculated automatically adding 20% (for
contingencies)of the quantity calculated in (a) above and is
rounded off to the multiples of 5 KLD.
(c) Total Sewage generated is calculated automatically from Column
g (B3) of Table-2b(2).
(d) The Capacity of STP is calculated automatically adding 20% (for
contingencies)of the quantity calculated in (c) above and is
rounded off to the multiples of 5 KLD.
ii. TheCapacity of 100% STP with RO Plant
(a) Total Sewage generated is auto filled fromColumn h (B4) of Table-
2b(2).
216
(b) Capacity of STP is calculated automatically adding 20% (for
contingencies)of the quantity calculated in (a) above and is
rounded off to the multiples of 5 KLD.
V. Centralised RO Plant -Table-2e(1) (If applicable)
1.
Capacity of RO plant for Drinking water supply is automatically
calculated in Table-2e(1) from Table-2a& Table-2b(2);
2.
The specifications of RO Plant to be entered in Table-2e(2)
VI. Centralised Hot Water System with Solar Thermal Collectors or Heat Pump
system- Table-2f (If applicable)
1. Centralised Hot water with Solar thermal collector system -
Capacity of Centralised Hot Water System with Solar Thermal Collector is
automatically calculated in Table-2f from Table-2a.
Note: 1. If more hot water requirement* is proposed than that mentioned below, the same to
be manually entered.
* Hot water requirement per person considered as,
- 15 Liters per Person shall be considered for MIG & supply for 12 Hrs is assumed.
- 20 Liters per Person shall be considered for HIG & supply for 15 Hrs is assumed.
2. Recommended SS hot water storage tank capacity, number of Solar Thermal Collectors of
125 Liters (Size 1 m x 2 m) and area required for installing Solar Thermal Collectors (2 Sqm per
125 Liters Collector) will be calculated automatically.
2.
Centralised Hot water with Heat pump system -
Capacity of Centralised Hot Water System with Heat Pump System is
automatically calculated in Table-2f from Table-2a.
Note: Supply gap of 7 hours is considered to fill the entire capacity of hot water storage tank,
assuming it is empty at the night after consumption.
VII. Water Tank Capacity
1.
Domestic Water Tank Capacity
a) Total Domestic UGT capacity (without SuTP or STP / with SuTP / with
SuTP & STP / with STP) is automatically calculated in Table-2g from
Table-2b(2)
b) Total Firefighting UGT capacity as per Table-2c(2)
c) Total Domestic OHT capacity (without SuTP or STP / with SuTP / with
SuTP & STP / with STP) is automatically calculated in Table-2g from
Table-2b(2)
d) Total Firefighting OHT capacity as per Table-2c (2)
2.
Treated Water Tank Capacity
a) Total Treated Water UGT capacity (with SuTP / with STP) is automatically
calculated in Table-2g from Table-2b(2)
b) Total Treated Water OHT capacity (with SuTP / with STP) is automatically
calculated in Table-2g from Table-2b(2)
217
3.
Water Treatment Plant Tank Capacity (If applicable) – To be
entered
manually.
VIII. Water Balance Chart
Water requirement quantities to be updated in each level of the Water balance
chart as per the Table-1 & Table-2 parameters.
E. WATER REQUIREMENT ASSESSMENT FOR NON-RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
I. Occupant Assessment & Domestic and Treated water Requirement for Non-
Residential Buildings
The following water requirements of the building (for all blocks together in case of
multiple blocks in a project and for the non-residential portion of the building in
case of mixeduse building) in Table-3a shall be automatically calculated from
Table-1c and Table-1e
1. Water requirement for Hotels (Excluding laundry, Kitchen, Staff
and
Water
bodies), based on Star rating (upto 3 Star, 4 Star and above)
2. Water requirement for Educational Building (Without boarding
facilities /With
boarding facilities/ Hostels)
3. Water requirement for Institutional: Hospital
i. (The water requirement includes requirement of patients, attendants, visitors and
staff. Additional water requirement for kitchen, laundry and clinical water shall be
computed as per actual requirements)
4. Water requirement forAssembly Building or Cinemas, Concert
halls
and
Theatres and Multiplex, or for Dining areas and restaurants or Food Court
5. Water requirement forBusiness Building: offices including
canteen.
6. Water requirement for Mercantile Building for Street floor and
sales
basement, Upper sales floor, Storage/warehouse.
7. Water requirement for Industrial Building for Factories including canteen
with
or without bathroom
8. Water requirement for Storage Building.
9. Water requirement for Hazardous Building.
10. Water requirement for traffic terminal stations, Airport, Railway
station
(Junction) with bathing facility, Railway station (Junction)
without
bathing
facility, Railway station (Intermediate) with
bathing facility, Railway station
(intermediate) without bathing
facility, Interstate Bus Terminals, Interstate
Bus Terminals/Metro Stations
Note: The water requirement for Industrial buildings, Storage & Hazardous buildings, and
Traffic Terminal Stations provided herein are for understanding the principles of assessment.
The water requirements for these buildings have to be calculated on a case-by-case basis.
II. Other water requirements for non-residential buildings-Table-3b
Other water requirements of the building in Table-3b shall be
automatically calculated from Table-1c and Table-1e
1.
Water requirement for Club house facilities
a) Gym – 15 LPHD for Domestic & 10 LPHD for Flushing
218
b) Gym along with Jacuzzi, Steam, Sauna, ayurvedic therapy - 20 LPHD for
Domestic & 25 LPHD for Flushing.
2.
Water requirement for Building management team
1 person considered as specified in ______ & Water requirement considered
is 25 LPHD for Domestic & 25 LPHD for Flushing
3.
Other requirements (to be specifically mentioned as additional
water
requirement)
III. Water Requirement, Wastewater Generation, Treated Water Usage &
Sewage/Excess Treated Water Disposal for Non-Residential Buildings – Table-
3c
The details of Table-3c is automatically calculated from Table-1c, Table-1e,
Table-3a and Table-3b
IV. Storage of water for Fire Fighting Purposes- Table-3d(1) (For highrise buildings
- above 21m height)
The minimum requirement of UGT & OHT for Fire Fighting shall be
automatically calculatedin Table-3d(2) from Table-3d(1).
V. Septic Tank /Sullage Treatment Plant/ Sewage Treatment Plant Capacity –
Table-3e
1.
Buildings where UGD is available:
a) Capacity of SuTP for 100% Sullage Treatment:
i. Total Sullage generated is calculated automatically of Table-3c.
ii. The capacity of SuTP is calculated automatically adding 20% (for
contingencies) of the quantity calculated in (i) aboveand is rounded
off to multiples of 5 KLD.
b) Capacity of 100% SuTP & STP for additional treated waterrequired:
i. Total Sullage generated is auto filled from of Table-3c.
ii. The capacity of SuTP is calculated automatically adding 20% (for
contingencies) of the quantity calculated in (i) and is rounded off to
multiples of 5 KLD.
iii. Total treated water requirement will be calculated automatically
from Table-3c.
iv. Shortfall of treated water will be calculated automatically by
deducting Total treated water generated by SuTP from the total
treated water required for the project.
v. The Capacity of STP is calculated automatically adding 20% (for
contingencies)of the quantity calculated in (iv) above and is rounded
off to multiples of 5 KLD.
c) Capacity of 100% STP with RO Plant:
i. Total Sullage & Sewage generated is calculated automatically
from of Table-3c.
219
ii. The Capacity of STP is calculated automatically adding (for
contingencies) of the quantity calculated in (i) above and is rounded
off to multiples of 5 KLD.
2.
Buildings where UGD is not available
a) For Small Buildings
100% Sullage disposed into Leach Pit & 100% Sewage disposed
into
Septic Tank.
(Septic tanks are only recommended upto 15 KLD of Sewage generation and for
small
communities and institutions where UGD connection not available.)
Note: For Size of Septic tank refer Design criteria and Construction of Septic Tanks (Ref: IS: 2470 (Part 1) –
1985) APPENDIX A, (Clause 3.4.5.2)
b)
For Large Buildings
i.
Capacity of 100% SuTP & 100% STP
(a)
Total Sullage generated is calculated automatically from Table-3c.
(b)
The Capacity of SuTP is calculated automatically adding 20% (for
contingencies)of the quantity calculated in (a) above and is rounded off to
multiples of 5 KLD.
(c) Total Sewage generated is calculated automatically from Table-3c.
(d) The Capacity of STP is calculated automatically adding 20%
(for
contingencies)of the quantity calculated in (c) aboveand is rounded off to
multiples of 5 KLD.
ii.
Capacity of 100% STP with RO Plant
(a) Total Sewage generated is auto filled fromof Table-3c.
(b) The Capacity of STP is calculated automatically adding 20% (for
contingencies)of the quantity calculated in (a) above and is rounded off to
multiples of 5 KLD.
VI. Centralised RO Plant -Table-3f(1) (If applicable)
1. Capacity of RO plant for Drinking water supply is automatically calculated
based on the requirement.
2. The specifications of RO Plant to be entered in Table-3f(2)
VII. Centralised Hot Water System with Solar Thermal Collectors or Heat Pump
system- Table-3g (If applicable)
1.
Centralised Hot water with Solar thermal collector system
Capacity of Centralised Hot Water System with Solar Thermal Collector is
automatically calculated based on the requirement.
2.
Centralised Hot water with Heat pump system
Capacity of Centralised Hot Water System with Heat Pump System is
automatically calculatedbased on the requirement.
VIII. Water Tank Capacity
220
1.
Domestic Water Tank Capacity
a) Total Domestic UGT capacity (without SuTP or STP / with SuTP / with
SuTP & STP / with STP) is automatically calculated in Table-3h from
Table-3c
b) Total Firefighting UGT capacity as per Table-3d
c) Total Domestic OHT capacity (without SuTP or STP / with SuTP / with
SuTP & STP / with STP) is automatically calculated in Table-3h from
Table-3c
d) Total Firefighting OHT capacity as per Table-3d
2.
Treated Water Tank Capacity
a) Total Treated Water UGT capacity (with SuTP / with STP) is automatically
calculated in Table-3h from Table-3c
b) Total Treated Water OHT capacity (with SuTP / with STP) is automatically
calculated in Table-3h from Table-3c
3.
Water Treatment Plant Tank Capacity (If applicable) – To be
entered
manually.
IX. Water Balance Chart
Water requirement quantities to be updated in each level of the Water balance chart
as per the Table-1 & Table-3 parameters.
221
TO BE ENTERED
I PROJECT INFORMATION
AUTO FILLED
1
Project Name
-
Date :
2
Address/Location
-
3
Building Category
(Residential / Non-Residentail / Mixed
Use)
DETAILS OF APARTMENTS / PREMISES
a)
INPUT FOR OCCUPANT LOAD (RESIDENTIAL)
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
EWS
1 BHK
> 30
< 40
1 BHK
> 40
< 50
2 BHK
> 45
< 60
1 BHK
> 50
< 60
2 BHK
> 60
< 70
3 BHK
> 75
< 95
1 BHK
> 60
< 70
2 BHK
> 70
< 95
3 BHK
> 95
< 120
1 BHK
> 70
2 BHK
> 95
3 BHK
> 120
4 BHK &
ABOVE
EWS
LIG-A
LIG-B
MIG
HIG
LIG-A
LIG-B
MIG
HIG
LIG-B
MIG
HIG
HIG
>30 <40
>40 <50
>50 <60
>60 <70
>70
>45 <60
>60 <70
>70 <95
>95
>75 <95
>95 <120
>120
>120
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
0
0
TOTAL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Percentage
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
Note: Service Apartments, Studio Apartments, 4 BHK & above Apartments shall be considered in HIG Category.
b)
INPUT FOR OCCUPANT LOAD (NON-RESIDENTIAL)
i Group A: Hotels:
Type of Occupancy
No. of
Beds
No. of
Staffs
No. of
Restaurant
Seats
Water
requirement
for Laundry
Water
requirement
for Kitchen
No. of Kitchen Staffs
Water
requirment for
Water Bodies
upto 3 star rating
4 star and above
ii Group B: Educational:
Strength of
School
No. of
Teaching
Staff
No. of Non-
Teaching Staff
No. of Beds
No. of
Warden
Residence
No. of Hostel
Staffs
iii
iv
Group C: Institutional: Hospital:
Gross Area
(Sqm)
v
Group D: Assembly:
Gross Area
(Sqm)
No. of Seats
vi
Group E: Business: (including canteen)
Gross Area
(Sqm)
vii
Group F: Mercantile:
Gross Area (Sqm)
viii Group G: Industrial:
Gross Area (Sqm)
Factories including canteen where bath rooms are required to be provided
Factories including canteen where no bath rooms are required to be provided
ix
Group H: Storage:
Gross Area (Sqm)
Storage
x
Group J: Hazardous
Gross Area (Sqm)
Hazardous
xi
Traffic Terminal Stations
Seasonal average
peak passangers
handled
II COMPONENTS OF BUILDING RELATED TO WATER REQUIREMENT (Mark 'YES/NO' in the relevant spaces below based on the requirements of the Project)
1
A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B
1
1
2
Gravity Distribution System (From OHT)
3
-
TABLE - 1a
AREA DETAILS FOR APARTMENT CATEGORIES
TABLE-1
GENERAL INFORMATIONS OF THE PROJECT
Type of Occupancy
Without boarding facilities
With boarding facilities
TABLE - 1c
Type of Occupancy
CATEGORY
BHK
CARPET AREA (Sqm)
LIG-A
LIG-B
MIG
From Private Well (Without WTP)
From Private Well (With WTP)
Type of Occupancy
Street floor and sales basement
Upper sales floor
Storage/warehouse, receiving and the like
HIG
TABLE - 1b
BLOCKS
NO. OF APARTMENTS IN THE PROJECT UNDER VARIOUS CATEGORIES
1BHK
2BHK
3BHK
TOTAL
Type of Occupancy
Airports
Railway station (Junction) without bathing facility
Railway station (Intermediate) with bathing facility
Railway station (Intermediate) without bathing facility
Interstate Bus Terminals
Direct Supply System From Centralised Water Supply
System (MCC Or Private)
Buildings where UGD is not available
100% Sullage and Sewage treatment in STP/ETP for reuse of treated water and the excess treated
water to be further treated in RO Plant for domestic use
Rain Water Harvesting (Without WTP)
From Private Borewell (With WTP)
2 100% Sullage Treatment in SuTP & Sewage treatment in STP/ETP to the extent of additional treated
water required & Excess sewage disposal into UGD
2 FOR LARGE BUILDINGS
a. 100% Sullage treated in SuTP & 100% Sewage treated in STP/ETP for reuse of treated water &
Excess Treated Water to be used for Ground Water Recharge or Disposal into Storm Water Drains
Interstate Bus Terminals/Metro Stations
From Private Borewell (Without WTP)
FOR SMALL BUILDINGS
100% Sullage disposed into Leach Pit & 100% Sewage disposed into Septic Tank
DOSMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Hostel
Type of Occupancy
Business: (including canteen)
1 100% Sullage Treatment in SuTP & Excess Treated Water to be used for Ground Water Recharge or
Disposal into Storm Water Drains & 100% Sewage disposal into UGD
Type of Occupancy
No. of beds not exceeding 100
No. of beds exceeding 100
Out patient department (OPD)
Type of Occupancy
Concentrated use without fixed seating
TABLE - 1d
SOURCE OF DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY
SEWERAGE SYSTEM
From MCC Water Supply System
Buildings where UGD is available
Type of Occupancy
Type of Occupancy
Type of Occupancy
Railway station (Junction) with bathing facility
Less concentrated use without fixed seating
Fixed seating (Cinemas, Concert halls and Theaters and Multiplex)
Dining areas and restaurants with seating and table (water requirement including
kitchen)
Food court (water requirement including kitchen)
Water Tankers
Rain Water Harvesting (With WTP)
3
Pressurised Distribution System (Hydro Pneumatic
Pumping System)
b. 100% Sullage and Sewage treatment in STP/ETP for reuse of treated water and the excess treated
water to be further treated in RO Plant for domestic use
222
1
2
1
3
2
4
5
3
6
4
7
8
9
10
A
C
1
1
2
2
B
D
1
1
2
2
E
III OTHER INFORMATIONS
1
Meters
2
Meters
3
Area of Basement
SqM
4
Landscape Area
a) Lawns
SqM
SqM
5
Litres
6
Water Stored in Swimming Pool
Litres
7
Water Stored in Other water
bodies
Litres
8
Litres
9
Litres
10
SqM
11
SqM
12
Any other water components, to be
specified
Water Treatment Plant Tank Capacity (If
provided)
HVAC Cooling Tower water requirement as
per manufacturers standards
DG Set Cooling Tower water requirement
as per manufacturers standards
b) Other Landscape -Shrubs and Trees
Height of the building (of the tallest
building in case of multiple buildings in
the Project) (m)
Largest Compartments Perimeter of Water
Curtain of Car Parking Spaces in any of
the Basement Floors in the project (If
applicable)
Under Ground Tank (UGT)/ Sump Tank
Electric Geyser for individual units
Gas Geyser for individual units
Over Head Tank (OHT)
Fire Storage Tank
Under Ground Tank (UGT)/ Sump Tank
WATER TANKS
Domestic Water Tank
Treated Water Tank
Common area and Fresh Fish & meat area
of markets (For Cleaning)
Common area in Mall (For Cleaning)
TABLE 1e
RO Water Tank
Cooling Tower for HVAC
Cooling Tower for DG Sets
Other Water Components
Water Treatment Plant
Under Ground Tank (UGT)/ Sump Tank
Over Head Tank (OHT)
Other Tanks
Only Gym
Hot Water Tank
Over Head Tank (OHT)
WTP Tank
Gym Along With Jacuzzi, Steam, Sauna, Ayurvedic Therapy, Etc.
OTHER BUILDING COMPONENTS
Centralised Solar Water Heating System using Solar
Thermal Collectors
Landscape/Garden
Other Water Bodies
Centralised RO Plant
HOT WATER GENERATION SYSTEM
Swimming Pool
Centralised Heat Pump System
223
D
I OCCUPANT ASSESSMENT FOR WATER REQUIREMENT FOR RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
d = b x c
e
f = d x e
1
-
1.0
-
2
-
1.0
-
-
1.0
-
-
3
-
1.0
-
-
1.0
-
-
1.0
-
-
4
-
0.9
-
-
0.9
-
-
0.9
-
-
5
-
0.85
-
-
0.85
-
-
0.85
-
-
0.85
-
-
0
-
(A2)
*
DIVERSITY OF OCCUPANCY
-
1
HIG (85% Occupancy) =
0.85
-
2
MIG (90% Occupancy) =
0.90
3
LIG-B (100% Occupancy) =
1.00
4
LIG-A (100% Occupancy) =
1.00
5
EWS (100% Occupancy) =
1.00
***Building manangement team (1 staff considered for 10 Units).
II WATER REQUIREMENT, WASTE WATER GENERATION, TREATED WATER USAGE & SEWAGE/EXCESS TREATED WATER DISPOSAL FOR RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
FOR HIG APARTMENTS (CONSIDERING 225 LPHD)
FOR MIG APARTMENTS (CONSIDERING 200 LPHD)
a
b
c
d
d1
d2
a
c
d
d1
d2
Residential usage
Residential usage
1
Bathing (including hand wash,
shaving, health faucet)
1
60
42
18
1
1
55
39
16
2
Toilet Flushing
1
60
60
0
2
1
58
58
0
3
Washing Cloths
1
20
20
0
3
1
20
20
0
4
Cleaning house
0.8
12
12
0
4
0.8
10
10
0
5
Washing Utensils
1
14
10
4
5
1
12
8
4
6
Cooking
0
7
7
0
6
0
6
6
0
7
Drinking
0
4
4
0
7
0
3
3
0
8
Toilet Cleaning
1
9
9
0
8
1
7
7
0
Other usage in common areas
0
Other usage in common areas
0
9
Corridor, Staircases, Terrace,
Civic amenity spaces & other
Common area cleaning
0.8
9
9
0
9
0.8
7
7
0
10
Yard Cleaning
0
5
5
0
10
0
4
4
0
11
Parking areas
0.2
5
5
0
11
0.2
3
3
0
12
Landscape irrigation
0
6
6
0
12
0
5
5
0
13
Swimming Pool makeup
0.2
5
5
0
13
0.2
4
4
0
14
Other water bodies
0.2
3
3
0
14
0.2
2
2
0
15
Car wash
0.5
6
6
0
15
0.5
4
4
0
Grand Total
225
203
22
200
180
20
FOR LIG-B APARTMENTS (CONSIDERING 175 LPHD)
FOR LIG-A / EWS APARTMENTS (CONSIDERING 150 LPHD)
a
b
c
d
d1
d2
a
c
d
d1
d2
Residential usage
1
Bathing (including hand wash,
1
53
37
16
1
1
53
37
16
2
Toilet Flushing
1
55
55
0
2
1
50
50
0
3
Washing Cloths
1
17
17
0
3
1
15
15
0
4
Cleaning house
0.8
7
7
0
4
0.8
5
5
0
5
Washing Utensils
1
9
6
3
5
1
6
4
2
6
Cooking
0
6
6
0
6
0
4
4
0
7
Drinking
0
3
3
0
7
0
2
2
0
8
Toilet Cleaning
1
5
5
0
8
1
4
4
0
Other usage in common areas
0
0
9
Corridor, Staircases, Terrace,
Civic amenity spaces & other
Common area cleaning
0.8
6
6
0
9
0.8
4
4
0
10
Yard Cleaning
0
3
3
0
10
0
2
2
0
11
Parking areas
0.2
2
2
0
11
0.2
1
1
0
12
Landscape irrigation
0
4
4
0
12
0
3
3
0
13
Swimming Pool makeup
0.2
2
2
0
13
0.2
0
0
0
14
Other water bodies
0.2
1
1
0
14
0.2
0
0
0
15
Car wash
0.5
2
2
0
15
0.5
1
1
0
Grand Total
175
156
19
150
132
18
Note:
1. Landscape Irrigation water requirement vary from project to project depends on landscape area provided.
2. Water consumption for operating and maintenace staffs to be considered at actual depends on the project size.
3. Water consupmtion for Clubhouse and amenity users to be considered at actual depending on the project size.
4. * Water requirements is considered based on normal fixtures and water efficient plumbing fixtures are considered only for providing additional incentives as per these Byelaws
EWS/LIG-A
LIG-B
MIG
HIG
Grey water
Black Water
Total
Sewage
Domestic
Treated
Sullage
Total
Domestic
Treated
Sewage
Total
a
b
c
d
d
d
d
e = d x No of
Occupants
f = c x e
g = c x e
h = f + g
i = e
j = e
k = i + j
l = e
m = e
n = l + m
(i)
RESIDENTIAL USAGE
1
Bathing
1.0
53.0
53.0
55.0
60.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
Toilet Flushing
1.0
50.0
55.0
58.0
60.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
3
Washing Cloths
1.0
15.0
17.0
20.0
20.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
4
Cleaning house
0.8
5.0
7.0
10.0
12.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
5
Washing Utensils
1.0
6.0
9.0
12.0
14.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
6
Cooking
0.0
4.0
6.0
6.0
7.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
7
Drinking
0.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
4.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
8
Toilet Cleaning
1.0
4.0
5.0
7.0
9.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
OTHER USAGE IN COMMON AREAS
9
Corridor, Staircases, Terrace,
Civic amenity spaces & other
Common area cleaning
0.8
4.0
6.0
7.0
9.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10
Yard Cleaning
0.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
11
Parking areas
0.2
1.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
12
Landscape irrigation
0.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
13
Swimming Pool makeup
0.2
0.0
2.0
4.0
5.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
14
Other water bodies
0.2
0.0
1.0
2.0
3.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
15
Car wash
0.5
1.0
2.0
4.0
6.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
OTHER WATER REQUIREMENTS FOR RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
(ii)
Club House Facilities (See Reference 1 (i) or 1 (ii))
a) Gym
Domestic
0.8
15.0
15.0
15.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Flushing
1.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
b) Gym along with Jacuzzi, Steam, Sauna, Ayurvedic therapy, etc
Domestic
0.8
25.0
25.0
25.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Flushing
1.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
(iii)
Building manangement team (1 staff considered for 10 Units)
Domestic
0.8
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Flushing
1.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
(iv)
Other requirements if any
Sl No
Usage Area
Waste
water
recovery
factor
Water
Requirem
ent per
person per
day
(Ltrs/pers
on/day)
* Water
Requirement
per person per
day with
water
efficient
plumbing
fixtures (Ltrs
/ person /
day)
TABLE-2b(2)
Waste Water Generation (Litres)
Water Usage if Sullage Treatment
Plant (Litres)
Water Usage if Sewage
Treatment Plant (Litres)
Total Water
requirement
(Litres)
Landscape irrigation
Swimming Pool makeup
Other water bodies
Car wash
Grand Total
* Water
savings
(With water
efficient
plumbing
fixtures)
(Ltrs /
person / day)
Water
Requiremen
t per person
per day
(Ltrs/person
/day)
* Water
Requirement
per person per
day with
water
efficient
plumbing
fixtures (Ltrs
/ person /
day)
Corridor, Staircases, Terrace,
Civic amenity spaces & other
Common area cleaning
Yard Cleaning
Water Requirement per person per day
(Ltrs/person/day)
(Refer Table 1d)
Sl No
Parking areas
Cleaning house
Washing Utensils
Cooking
Drinking
Toilet Cleaning
Other usage in common
Car wash
b
Residential usage
Usage Area
Water
Requiremen
t per person
per day
(Ltrs/person
/day)
* Water
Requirement
per person per
day with
water
efficient
plumbing
fixtures (Ltrs
/ person /
day)
* Water
savings
(With water
efficient
plumbing
fixtures)
(Ltrs /
person /
day)
Bathing (including hand
Toilet Flushing
Cooking
Cleaning house
Washing Utensils
Sl No
Toilet Flushing
Washing Cloths
b
* Water
savings
(With water
efficient
plumbing
fixtures)
(Ltrs /
person /
day)
Waste
water
recovery
factor
Drinking
Toilet Cleaning
Corridor, Staircases, Terrace,
Civic amenity spaces & other
Common area cleaning
Yard Cleaning
Parking areas
Landscape irrigation
Swimming Pool makeup
Other water bodies
Sl No
Usage Area
Waste
water
recovery
factor
Water
Requirem
ent per
person per
day
(Ltrs/pers
on/day)
* Water
Requirement
per person per
day with
water
efficient
plumbing
fixtures (Ltrs
/ person /
day)
* Water
savings
(With water
efficient
plumbing
fixtures)
(Ltrs /
person / day)
Waste
water
recovery
factor
Building manangement team*** (A5 = A1 x 10%)
Total No of Occupants (Rounded off) (A3 = Round off A2)
Clubhouse amenities** (15% Occupancy considered)(A4 = A3 x 15%)
(A1)
MIG
1 Bedroom Dwelling Unit
[15 percent of population considered to use the building facilities in residential buildings. (Ref: Part
9, Section 1, Clause 1.1.b Notes 2 of NBC 2016)].
1 Bedroom Dwelling Unit
2 Bedroom Dwelling Unit
3 Bedroom Dwelling Unit
Usage Area
DOMESTIC WATER, TREATED WATER & TOTAL WATER REQUIREMENT WITH & WITHOUT WATER EFFICIENT PLUMBING FIXTURES
4
5
6
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
HIG
2 Bedroom Dwelling Unit
3 Bedroom Dwelling Unit
4 Bedroom Dwelling Unit and above
TABLE-2b(1)
a
b
c
3 Bedroom Dwelling Unit
-
6
EWS
1 Bedroom Dwelling Unit
-
4
1 Bedroom Dwelling Unit
2 Bedroom Dwelling Unit
-
4
-
LIG-A
1 Bedroom Dwelling Unit
2 Bedroom Dwelling Unit
-
5
LIG-B
-
4
7
6
5
4
5
TABLE - 2
WATER REQUIREMENT ASSESSMENT FOR RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
Sl
No
TYPE OF DWELLING UNITS
NO. OF DWELLING
UNITS
NO. OF PERSONS PER
UNIT
(Ref: Part 9, Section 1,
Clause 4.1.a of NBC 2016)
TOTAL NO.
OF
PERSONS
DIVERSITY
OF
OCCUPANCY
*
TOTAL NO.
OF
OCCUPANTS
AFTER
DIVERSITY
TABLE-2a
TOTAL
0
Grand Total
**Occupancy for using building facilities/ Club house (Excluding EWS & LIG-A) = Total No. of
persons (A2) x15%.
Washing Cloths
Bathing (including hand
wash, shaving, health faucet)
Sl
No
Usage Area
Waste
water
recovery
factor
224
Total
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
(B1)
(B2)
(B3)
(B4)
(B5)
(B6)
(B7)
(B8)
(B9)
(B10)
Treated water Generation
-
-
Excess Treated water disposal
-
-
Raw Sewage Disposal
-
REFERENCES:
1
Water Requirement
i. Gym - Domestic -15 lphd and Flushing 10 lphd considered.
2
No of persons for building management team (A5), 10% of no. of dwelling units
Water Requirement
Offices (Including canteen) - Domestic -25 lphd and Flushing 20 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, Sl No: viii of NBC 2016)
III
STORAGE OF WATER FOR FIRE FIGHTING PURPOSES
Sl
No
UG Static
water storage
tank #
Terrace
Tank #
Remarks
A
Residential Buildings
a)
Lodging and Rooming Houses (A-1) (see note 3)
1) Less than 15m in height
i) Upto 15 rooms
NR
5000
(see note 1)
ii) More than 15 and upto 30 rooms
NR
5000
(5000)
(see note 2)
iii) More than 30 rooms
NR
10000
(5000)
(see note 2)
b)
One or two Family Private Dwellings (A-2)
NR
NR
c)
Dormitories (A-3) and Apartment Houses (A-4)
1) Less than 15 m in height
NR
5000
(5000)
(see note 2)
2) 15 m and above but not exceeding 35 m in height
NR
25000
3) Above 35 m but not exceeding 45 m in height
75000
5000
4) Above 45 m but not exceeding 60 m in height
150000
10000
5) Above 60 m in height
200000
10000
i)
-
Mtrs
ii)
Ltrs (C1)
Ltrs (C2)
-
Lts (C3=C1+C2)
iii)
Lts (C4)
NOTES AND REFERENCES:
#
**
(No of nozzles in largest compartment perimetre = (Largest compartment perimeter /3.0m +1 Nos & Flow rate per nozzle = 33 LPM)
1. Required to be provided if basement area exceeds 200 Sqm
2. Additional value given in peranthesis shall be added if basement area exceeds 200 Sqm
3. Buildings above 15 m in height are not to be permitted for occupancies A-I and A-2.
IV
SEPTIC TANK / SULLAGE TREATMENT PLANT/ SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT CAPACITY (The recycled water should be used for Toilet Flushing, Cleaning and Landscape Irrigation purposes)
1 BUILDINGS WHERE UGD IS AVAILABLE
2 BUILDINGS WHERE UGD IS NOT AVAILABLE
a) Capacity of 100% SuTP
Total Sullage generated (Table 1e(2), column f (B2) (D1)
-
Lts/day
Add 20% extra capacity for contingencies (D2 = D1 +20%)
-
Lts/day
Required SuTP Capacity (D3 = D2/1000)
-
KLD
b) For Large Buildings
Recommended SuTP Capacity (Round off in multiples of 5KLD) (D4)
KLD
i. Capacity of 100% SuTP & 100% STP
Required SuTP Capacity (D3)
-
KLD
b) Capacity of 100% SuTP & STP for additional treated water required
Recommended SuTP Capacity (Round off in multiples of 5KLD) (D4)
KLD
Required SuTP Capacity (D3)
-
KLD
Total Black water generated (Table 1e(2), column g (B3) (D15)
-
Lts/day
Recommended SuTP Capacity (Round off in multiples of 5KLD) (D4)
KLD
Add 20% extra capacity for contingencies (D16 = D15 +20%)
-
Lts/day
Treated water generated from SuTP (D5 = D1 x 95%)
-
Lts/day
Required STP Capacity (D17 = D16/1000)
-
KLD
Total treated water required [Table 1e(2), column j (B6)] (D6)
-
Lts/day
Recommended STP Capacity (Round off in multiples of 5KLD) (D18)
KLD
Shortfall of SuTP Treated water (D7 = D6-D5)
-
Lts/day
Add 20% extra capacity for contingencies (D8 = D7 +20%)
-
Lts/day
ii. Capacity of 100% STP with RO Plant
(for the shortfall in treated water requirement to be treated in STP)
Total Sewage generated [Table 1e(2), column h (B4)] (D19)
-
Lts/day
Required STP Capacity (D9 = D8/1000)
-
KLD
Add 20% extra capacity for contingencies (D20 =D19 +20%)
-
Lts/day
Recommended STP Capacity (Round off in multiples of 5KLD) (D10)
KLD
Required STP Capacity (D21 = D20/1000)
-
KLD
c) Capacity of 100% STP with RO Plant
Recommended STP Capacity (Round off in multiples of 5KLD) (D21)
KLD
Total Sewage generated [Table 1e(2), column h (B4)] (D11)
-
KLD
Add 20% extra capacity for contingencies (D12 = D11 +20%)
-
Lts/day
Notes:
Required STP Capacity (D13 = D12/1000)
-
KLD
Recommended STP Capacity (Round off in multiples of 5KLD) (D14)
KLD
V
CAPACITY OF RO PLANT FOR DRINKING WATER SUPPLY
i) No of Occupants
-
Nos
ii) Diversity of Occupancy
0.90
iii) Drinking water requirement per person per day *
3.00
Litres
iv)
-
LPD
v) Required RO Plant Capacity per hour (¼ th of the total drinking water requirement)** =
-
LPH
vi) Recommended RO plant capacity (Round off in multiples of 250 LPH)=
LPH
vii) RO Plant SS water storage tank capacity (Round off in multiples of 250 Lits) # =
-
Litres
RO PLANT SPECIFICATIONS
Sl.
No.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
Notes:
* Drinking Water requirement should be assessed as per Table 1e, column 'd'
**
# Storage tank capacity for 1 day's requirement
VI
1. CENTRALISED SOLAR HOT WATER SYSTEM WITH SOLAR THERMAL COLLECTORS
1)
No of Occupants
-
Nos
2)
Diversity of Occupancy
0.90
3)
Hot water requirement per person per day *
Litres
* Hot Water requiment for Residential apartment buildings
a) 15 Liters per Person shall be considered for MIG & Supply for 12 Hrs is assumed
b)
Note: If more hot water requirement is proposed, the same has to be mentioned.
4)
=
-
Ltrs (E1)
5)
Add wastage of 5% (E2 = E1 + 5%)
=
-
Ltrs (E2)
6)
=
Ltrs (E3)
7)
SS Hot Water Storage Tank Capacity Required# [E4 = 80% of the Recommended Hot Water requirement (E3)]
=
-
Ltrs (E4)
# Assuming 80% of the people will take bath at the peak hour consumption of hot water from 6:30am to 8:30am.
8)
Recommended SS Hot Water Storage Tank Capacity [E5 = Rounded off value of (E4) in multiples of 125Lit]
=
Ltrs (E5)
9)
=
-
Nos (E6)
10)
=
-
SqM (E7)
2. CENTRALISED HOT WATER SYSTEM WITH HEAT PUMP
11)
=
-
Ltr/Hr (E8)
##
12)
=
T (E9)
13) Electrical Power Consumption of the Heat Pump
(25% of the Rated output power, Refer ### )
=
kW (E10)
Standards for the selection of Heat Pump with Rated Output Power and Hot Water at the Temperature of 60◦C from the ambient Temp. of 25◦C =35◦C Delta T
a) For Small Buildings
100% Sullage disposed into Leach Pit & 100% Sewage disposed into Septic Tank
CENTRALISED HOT WATER SYSTEM WITH HEAT PUMP AND SOLAR THERMAL COLLECTORS FOR RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS (TO
CALCULATE THE CAPACITY/SIZE OF THE SYSTEM)
(UPTO 21 Mtrs BUILDING HEIGHT, NO FIRE SERVICES REQUIRED AS PER THE KARNATAKA FIRE FORCE (AMMENDMENT) ACT
2023, DATED 27-07-2023)
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS OF UGT & OHT FOR FIRE FIGHTING
Recommended Hot Water requirement (E3 = Rounded off value of (E2) in multiples of 125Lit.)
Total Hot water requirement (Hot water requirement per person x Total No. of Persons x Diversity of
Occupancy) (E1)
Specifications
TABLE-2d
Type of Building Occupnacy
TABLE-2c(2)
TABLE-2c(1)
TABLE-2f
6hours/day of maximum running time of RO Plant considered (RO membrane shall be replaced every 2200 hours of running
(size of each membrane is 250LPH) ie. The life of membrane is 2200/6hrs =365days = 1 year)
Height of Building
UNDERGROUND TANK (SUMP TANK) CAPACITY
a) For Wet Riser, Yard Hydrant and Sprinklers per set of pumps
[Refer Table 1f(1)]
b) For Water Curtain (If applicable) **
TOTAL SUMP TANK CAPACITY =
OVERHEAD (TERRACE) TANK CAPACITY [Refer Table 1f(1)]
TABLE-2e(2)
1. Providing Sullage/Sewage Treatement Plant is a mandatory requirement for the residential buildings having
Waste water generation more that 80 KLD or 120 Nos of Flats.
2. Sullage/Sewage Treatment Plant or Septic tanks should be provided, if UGD system is not available for all
Buildings (Septic Tank shall be permitted for buildings upto 300 users) (Refer, IS : 2470 (part 1) -1985 for
Design criteria and Construction of Septic Tanks)
Description
Capacity of Plant
Membrane Material & Size
Water quality indicator
Controls system
TABLE-2e(1)
Storage Tanks Capacity
Optional Components like Ultra Violet treatment, Ozonation, Micron Filters (0.2 Micron), pH
Booster, Mineral Booster, etc.
Area Required for installing Solar Thermal Collectors (2 SqM required / 125 Litre Solar Thermal
Collector Panel (100Kg/Collector with water)) (E7= 2 SqM x E6)
Septic tanks are only recommended for small communities and institutions whose contributory population does not
exceed 300 (Refer: NBC 2016, Part 9, Section 2, Clause 4.5.14.5.2 Septic Tanks) or Sewage/Black Water generation
is less than 15 KLD whichever is higher. Refer Design criteria and Construction of Septic Tanks (Ref: IS: 2470 (Part
Total Drinking water requirement
{No. of Occupants x Diversity of Occupancy x Drinking water per person per day) =
Refer Table 7, Minimum Requirements for Fire Fighting Installations Part 4 Fire and Life Safety of NBC 2016
5. Alternative to provisions of additional set of pumps, the objective can be met by providing additional diesel pump of the same capacity and doubling
the water tank capacity as required for one set of pumps. (refer Note 23, Table 7, Minimum Requirements for Fire Fighting Installations Part 4 Fire
and Life Safety of NBC 2016 )
Water requirement for water curtain nozzles for 60 minutes considering the largest compartment's perimeter out of all compartments of car parking
in any of the basement. (Ref: Annex H (Clause 6.4.2.2. and 6.8.1.5), Clause H-4.c, Part 4 - Fire and life safety of NBC 2016)
Tank size required (Litres) = No. of nozzles (in the perimeter of the Largest compartment) x Flow rate per water curtain nozzle (LPM) x 60 Minutes.
20 Liters per Person shall be considered for HIG& Supply for 15 Hrs is assumed
Occupancy for using building facilities/ Club house (A4)
Number of 125 Lit. Solar Thermal Collectors (Size 1m x 2.0m)(E6 = E3 /125 = No. of Collectors)
Hot Water required per hour from Heat Pump (E8 = E4 / 7 Hours ##)
Hot Water supply gap 7 hours considered to fill the entire capacity of Hot water storage tank, assuming
it is empty at the night after consumption
Recommended Heat Pump Capacity (Refer ###)
15 percent of population considered to use the building facilities in residential buildings. (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Clause 1.1.b Notes 2 of NBC 2019)
4. One set of pumps shall be provided for each 100 hydrants or part thereof, with a maximum of two sets. In case of more than one pump set
installation, both pump sets shall shall be interconnected at their delivery headers. (Refer Note 22, Table 7, Minimum Requirements for Fire Fighting
Installations Part 4 Fire and Life Safety of NBC 2016)
ii. Gym along with Jacuzzi, Steam, Sauna, Ayurvedic therapy, etc.- Domestic -25 lphd and Flushing 20 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, Sl No: x of NBC 2016)
Building manangement team
225
###
VII
WATER TANK CAPACITY
1
DOMESTIC WATER TANK CAPACITY *
a)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G1)
66.70%
100.00%
b)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G2)
66.70%
100.00%
c)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G3)
66.70%
100.00%
d)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G4)
66.70%
100.00%
e) TOTAL FIRE FIGHTING UG TANK CAPACITY AS PER Table 1f(2) (C3)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G5)
f)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G6)
33.30%
16.67%
g)
-
Litres
Litres
(G7)
33.30%
16.67%
h)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G8)
33.30%
16.67%
i)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G9)
33.30%
16.67%
j) TOTAL FIRE FIGHTING OVERHEAD TANK CAPACITY AS PER Table 1f(2) (C4)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G10)
2
TREATED WATER TANK CAPACITY *
a)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(H1)
66.70%
100.00%
b)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(H2)
66.70%
100.00%
c)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(H3)
33.30%
16.67%
d)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(H4)
33.30%
16.67%
3
-
Litres
~
Litres
(I)
NOTES & REFERENCES:
* General guide lines for calculation of capacity of these storage tanks are as follows (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Clause 4.4.10 of NBC 2016)
a) ln case only OHT is provided, it maybe taken as 33.3 to 50 percent of 1.2 times of one day’s requirement;
b) In case only UGT is provided, it maybe taken as 50 to 150 percent of 1.2 times ofone day’s requirement; and
c) In case combined storage is provided, it maybe taken as 66.7 percent UGT and 33.3 percent OHT of 1.2 times of one day’s requirement.
** In case Hydropneumatic system used, it maybe taken as 100 percent for UGT of one day's requirement and 16.65 percent OHT of 1.2 times of one day's requirement.
VIII WATER BALANCE CHART
TABLE-2g
WATER TREATMENT PLANT TANK CAPACITY (If applicable)
TOTAL DOMESTIC OHT CAPACITY = 33.3% of Requirement per day** = 0.333 x 1.2 x [Without Sewage/Sullage Treatment Plant
B1, from Table 1e(2)]
TOTAL TREATED WATER UGT CAPACITY = 66.7% of Requirement per day = 0.667 x 1.2 x [With Sullage Treatment Plant B6 from
Table 1e(2)]
1 T =3.3kW =81L/Hr, 1.5T =4.9kW =120L/Hr, 2 T =6.8kW =167L/Hr, 3 T =11.2kW =275L/Hr, 5 T =18.8kW =462L/Hr, 6 T =22kW =540L/Hr, 8 T =30kW
=737L/Hr, 10 T =38kW =934L/Hr, 12 T =44kW =1081L/Hr, 15 T =58kW =1425L/Hr, 20 T =75kW =1843L/Hr, 25 T =86kW =2113L/Hr. (1kW = 860Kcal is
considered)
TOTAL TREATED WATER OHT CAPACITY = 33.3% of Requirement per day = 0.333 x 1.2 x [With Sullage Treatment Plant B6 from
Table 1e(2)]
TOTAL DOMESTIC UG TANK CAPACITY = 66.7% of 1.2 x Requirement per day** = 0.667 x 1.2 x [With Sewage Treatment Plant
B8, from Table 1e(2)]
TOTAL DOMESTIC UGT CAPACITY = 66.7% of 1.2 x Requirement per day** = 0.667 x 1.2 x [With Sullage Treatment Plant B5,
from Table 1e(2)]
TOTAL DOMESTIC OHT CAPACITY = 33.3% of Requirement per day** = 0.333 x 1.2 x [With Sullage & Sewage Treatment Plant
B5, from Table 1e(2)]
TOTAL DOMESTIC OHT CAPACITY = 33.3% of Requirement per day** = 0.333 x 1.2 x [With Sullage Treatment Plant B5, from
Table 1e(2)]
TOTAL TREATED WATER OHT CAPACITY = 33.3% of Requirement per day = 0.333 x 1.2 x [With Sewage Treatment Plant B9 from
Table 1e(2)]
TOTAL TREATED WATER UGT CAPACITY = 66.7% of Requirement per day = 0.667 x 1.2 x [With Sewage Treatment Plant B9 from
Table 1e(2)]
TOTAL DOMESTIC UGT CAPACITY = 66.7% of 1.2 x Requirement per day** = 0.667 x 1.2 x [With Sullage & Sewage Treatment
Plant B5, from Table 1e(2)]
TOTAL DOMESTIC OHT CAPACITY = 33.3% of Requirement per day** = 0.333 x 1.2 x [With Sewage Treatment Plant B8, from
Table 1e(2)]
TOTAL DOMESTIC UGT CAPACITY = 66.7% of 1.2 x Requirement per day** = 0.667 x 1.2 x [Without Sewage/Sullage Treatment
Plant B1, from Table 1e(2)]
226
E
I
DOMESTIC AND TREATED WATER REQUIREMENT FOR NON RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1 of NBC 2016)
Normal
Fixtures
Water
Efficient
Fixtures *
Normal
Fixtures
Water
Efficient
Fixtures
*
Domestic #
Flushing
Domesti
c ##
Flushing
c1
c2
d = c/b
e
f
g (a)
g (b)
g ( c)
h (a)
h (b)
h ( c)
I (a) = e x g(a)
or g(b)
I (b) =
e x g( c)
j (a) = f x
h(a) or
h(b)
j (b) =
f x h( c)
A
0.00
0
0
0
5
3
10
120
72
60
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
5
3
10
260
156
60
0
0
0
0
B
0.00
0
0
0
10
6
5
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
10
6
5
90
54
45
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
10
6
5
90
54
45
0
0
0
0
C
0.00
0
0
0
5
3
10
230
138
110
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
5
3
10
300
180
150
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
10
6
5
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
D
0.00
0
0
0
4
2.4
6
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
4
2.4
6
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
5
3
10
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
55
33
15
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
25
15
10
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
E
0.00
0
0
0
5
3
10
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
F
Group F: Mercantile: (See Note 7a and 7
0.00
0
0
0
5
3
10
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
5
3
10
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
5
3
10
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
G
Group G: Industrial: (See Note 8a and 8b
0.00
0
0
0
5
3
10
30
18
15
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
5
3
10
20
12
10
0
0
0
0
H
0.00
0
0
0
5
3
10
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
I
0.00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
J
0.00
0
0
0
40
24
30
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
40
24
30
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
30
18
15
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
25
15
20
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
15
9
10
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
25
15
20
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
0.00
0
0
0
10
6
5
25
15
20
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
A 1
A 2
A 3
A 4
0
Ltrs/day
0
Ltrs/day
0
Ltrs/day
* Water requirement per person per day considered using water efficient plumbing fixtures
# If Normal plumbing fixtures used consider g (a) and if Water Efficient plumbing fixtures used consider g (b)
## If Normal plumbing fixtures used consider h (a) and if Water Efficient plumbing fixtures used consider h (b)
NOTES AND REFERENCES:
1
7
2
3
8
4
9
10
5
11
6
II
OTHER WATER REQUIREMENT FOR NON RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
Domestic
Sullage
Treated
Treated
Domestic
Sullage
Treated
Treated
Total
1
Building Facilities/ Club House (See Note 1)
-
Persons
15
10
-
-
-
(a1)
-
-
Persons
25
20
-
-
-
(a2)
-
2
-
Litres
2%
-
-
(a3)
-
3
-
Litres
2%
-
-
(a4)
-
3
-
Sqmt
7
-
-
(a5)
-
Sqmt
5
-
-
(a6)
4
-
Litres
-
-
(a7)
5
-
Litres
-
-
(a8)
6
-
Sqmt
10
-
-
(a9)
-
7
-
Sqmt
5
-
-
(a10)
-
8
-
-
-
-
(a11)
-
-
-
-
-
(a12)
(a13)
(a14)
(a)
(a15)
WATER REQUIREMENT ASSESSMENT FOR NON-RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
TABLE-3a
Total Water Requirement / Day in Litres
Visitors/ floating
population
Owners/ Staffs
(e x g)
Domestic
Flushing
Domestic
Sl
No
TYPE OF OCCUPANCY
Occupant Load Factor (M 2/Person)
(Ref: Part 4,Table 3 of NBC 2016)
Gross Area
in Sqm (See
Note 1)
Seating
Capacity
(No. of
persons)
Total
Occupants
/No of
Persons
b) Hotel (4 Star and above)
(See Note 2a and 2b)
Group B: Educational:
a) Without boarding facilities
(See Note 3a and 3b)
Flushing
Water Requirement /Person /Day
for Owners & Staffs
a) No. of beds not exceeding 100 (See
Note 4a and 4b)
15
b) No. of beds exceeding 100 (See Note
4a and 4b)
15
c) Out patient department (OPD) (See
Note 4a and 4b)
10
b) With boarding facilities
(See Note 3a and 3b)
c) Hostels
(See Note 3a and 3b)
Group C: Institutional: Hospital:
(The water requirement includes
requirement of patients, attendants,
visitors and staff. Additional water
requirement for kitchen, laundry and
clinical water shall be computed as per
actual requirements)
a
b
Group A: Hotels: (Excluding laundry,
Kitchen, Staff and Water bodies) (See
Note 2)
a) Hotel (Upto 3 Star)
(See Note 2a and 2b)
Visitors/
floating
population
(See Table 3i)
Owners /
Staff
(See Table
3i)
Water Requirement /Person /Day for
Visitors & Floating population
c) Fixed seating (Cinemas, Concert halls
and Theaters and Multiplex)
1.2
d) Dining areas and restaurants with
seating and table (water requirement
including kitchen)
1.8
e) Food court (water requirement
including kitchen)
1.8
Group D: Assembly: (See Note 5a and
5b)
a) Concentrated use without fixed
seating
0.65
b) Less concentrated use without fixed
seating
1.4
b) Upper sales floor
6
c) Storage/warehouse, receiving and the
20
a) Factories including canteen where
bath rooms are required to be provided
10
Group E: Business: (including canteen)
(See Note 6a and 6b)
10
a) Street floor and sales basement
3
Traffic Terminal Stations (See Note 11)
a) Airports
(See Note 11a)
b) Railway station (Junction) with bathing
(See Note 11b)
b) Factories including canteen where no
bath rooms are required to be provided
10
Group H: Storage: (See Note 9a and 9b)
30
Group J: Hazardous (See note 10a and 10
10
f) Interstate Bus Terminals
(See Note 11f)
g) Interstate Bus Terminals/Metro Station
(See Note 11g)
c) Railway station (Junction) without bath
(See Note 11c)
d) Railway station (Intermediate) with bath
(See Note 11d)
e) Railway station (Intermediate) without b
(See Note 11e)
Total Domestic Water Requirement (DWS) (A1+A3)
Total Flushing Water Requirement (FWS) (A2+A4)
TOTAL
TOTAL - A
Hotels:
b. Water Requirement : Street floor and sales basement/Shopping and retail (Mall)
a. Occupant Load is considered Number of Beds + Staff + Requirement of restaurant seats (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Clause -4.1.b of NBC 2016)
i) Staffs -Domestic 25 lphd and Flushing 20 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, Sl No: xiv.a of NBC 2016)
b. Upto 3 Star - Domestic 120 lphd and Flushing 60 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, (Clause 4.1.2) Sl No. vi of NBC 2016)
4 star and above - Domestic 260 lphd and Flushing 60 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, (Clause 4.1.2) Sl No. vii of NBC 2016)
ii) Visitors -Domestic 5 lphd and Flushing 10 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, Sl No: xiv.b of NBC 2016)
Total Water Requirement (DWS+FWS) (A=A1+A2+A3+A4)
Gross Area - The area of the floor within the inside perimeter of the outside walls of the floor of the building under consideration with no deduction for
corridors and passages, toilets, internal walls, internal columns or other features for each occupancy. In case the common passages are shared for different
uses, then proportionate area of such common passages shall be added to the plinth area of all the premises of the respective use.
Mercantile:
a. Occupant Load:
i) Street floor and sales basement - 3.00 SqM per person (Ref: Part 4, Table 3, Sl No: v.a of NBC 2016)
ii) Upper sales floor - 6.00 SqM per person (Ref: Part 4, Table 3, Sl No: v.b of NBC 2016)
iii) Storage/warehouse, receiving and the like - 20.00 SqM per person (Ref: Part 4, Table 3, Sl No: v.c of NBC 2016)
ii) With boarding facilities - Domestic 90 lphd and Flushing 45 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, (Clause 4.1.2) Sl No. xiii.b of NBC 2016)
ii) Factories including canteen where no bath rooms are required to be provided -Domestic 20 lphd and Flushing 10
lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, Sl No: ii of NBC 2016)
Institutional/ Hospital:
iii) Water requirement should be assessed on a case to case basis.
a. Occupant Load:
Storage
Educational:
Industrial
a. Occupant Load:
ii) Schools Occupant Load - Strength of school + Teaching and non-teaching staff (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Clause 4.1.b of NBC 2016)
iii) Hostel Occupant Load - Number of beds + 4.5 x (warden's residence) + staff (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Clause 4.1.b of NBC 2016)
a. Occupant Load - 10.00 SqM per person (Ref: Part 4, Table 3, Sl No: vii of NBC 2016)
b. Water Requirement
b. Water Requirement
i) Without boarding facilities - Domestic 25 lphd and Flushing 20 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, (Clause 4.1.2) Sl No. xiii.a of NBC 2016)
i) Factories including canteen where bath rooms are required to be provided -Domestic 30 lphd and Flushing 15 lphd
(Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, Sl No: i of NBC 2016)
ii. Number of beds exceeding 100 - Domestic 300 lphd and Flushing 150 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1 (Clause 4.1.2),
Sl No. iii.b of NBC 2016)
Hazardous
iii. Out patient department (OPD) - Domestic 10 lphd and Flushing 5 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1 (Clause 4.1.2), Sl No. iii.c of NBC 2016)
a. Occupant Load - 10.00 SqM per person (Ref: Part 4, Table 3, Sl No: ix of NBC 2016)
Assembly:
b. Water Requirement should be assessed on a case to case basis.
i. Indoor patients area is 15.0 SqM per person (Ref: Part 4, Table 3, Sl No: iii.a of NBC 2016)
a. Occupant Load - 30.00 SqM per person (Ref: Part 4, Table 3, Sl No: viii of NBC 2016)
Car parking area under occupancy other than storage shall also be 30.00 SqM per person (Ref: Part 4, Table 3, Sl No:
viii, (see Note 5) of NBC 2016)
ii. Outdoor patients area is 10.0 SqM per person (Ref: Part 4, Table 3, Sl No: iii.b of NBC 2016)
b. Water Requirement :
i. Number of beds not exceeding 100 - Domestic 230 lphd and Flushing 110 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1 (Clause 4.1.2), Sl No. iii.a of NBC 2016)
b. Water Requirement -Domestic 25 lphd and Flushing 20 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, Sl No: viii of NBC 2016)
b) Railway station (Junction) with bathing facility -Domestic 40 lphd and Flushing 30 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table
1, Sl No: xv.b of NBC 2016)
a. Occupant Load:
i. Concentrated use without fixed seating area is 0.65 SqM per person (Ref: Part 4, Table 3, Sl No: vi.a of NBC 2016)
Traffic terminal stations
ii. Less concentrated use without fixed seating is 1.40 SqM per person (Ref: Part 4, Table 3, Sl No: vi.b of NBC 2016)
Occupant Load - The number of persons shall be determined by average number of passengers handled by stations,
with due considerations given to the staff and vendors who are using these facilities. Consideration should be given for
seasonal average peak requirements. (Ref: Part 9, Table 1, Notes 3 and 4 of NBC 2016)
iii. Fixed Seating - In case of assembly occupancy having fixed seats, the occupant load shall be determined by multiplying the number of seats by 1.2 (Ref: Part
4, Table 3, Sl No: vi.c (see note 4) of NBC 2016)
iv. Dining areas and restaurants with seating and table is 1.80 SqM per person (Ref: Part 4, Table 3, Sl No: vi.d of NBC 2016)
Sl No
PURPOSE
QUANTITY
UNIT
Water Requirement (Liters/ Day/ Unit)
Business: (Offices -including canteen)
f) Interstate Bus Terminals -Domestic 25 lphd and Flushing 20 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, Sl No: xv.f of NBC
a. Occupant Load - 10.00 SqM per person (Ref: Part 4, Table 3, Sl No: vi of NBC 2016)
g) Interstate Bus Terminals/Metro Stations -Domestic 10 lphd and Flushing 5 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, Sl
No: xv.g of NBC 2016)
b. Water Requirement -Domestic 25 lphd and Flushing 20 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, Sl No: viii of NBC 2016)
Sullage
Genaration Remarks
Notation
TABLE-3b
b) Gym along with Jacuzzi, Steam,
Sauna, Ayurvedic therapy, etc
Pool make up - Swimming Pool (See Note
2)
Landscape
a) Gym
OCCUPANT ASSESSMENT & WATER REQUIREMENT FOR NON RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
Mall Cleaning (Common area) (See Note
6b)
Other requirements
i. Concentrated use without fixed seating area/Stadium - Domestic 4 lphd and Flushing 6 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, Sl No: xi of NBC 2016)
TABLE - 3
Other Water Bodies (Fish Pond, Water
Fountains, etc.)
Total Water Requirement (Liters/ Day/ Unit)
TOTAL (B)
DG Set Cooling Tower (See Note 4)
Market Cleaning (Common area and stall
area) (See Note 6a)
a) Lawns (See Note 4a)
b) Other Landscape -Shrubs and Trees
(See Note 4b)
HVAC Cooling Tower (See Note 4)
iii. Fixed Seating (Cinemas, concert halls and theaters and multiflex) - Domestic 5 lphd and Flushing 10 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, Sl No: xii of NBC
2016)
c) Railway station (Junction) without bathing facility -Domestic 30 lphd and Flushing 15 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1,
Table 1, Sl No: xv.c of NBC 2016)
iv. Restaurants (water requirement including kitchen) - Domestic 55 lphd and Flushing 15 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, Sl No: ix.a of NBC 2016)
d) Railway station (Intermediate) with bathing facility -Domestic 25 lphd and Flushing 20 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1,
Table 1, Sl No: xv.d of NBC 2016)
v. Food Court (water requirement including kitchen) - Domestic 25 lphd and Flushing 10 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, Sl No: ix.b of NBC 2016)
e) Railway station (Intermediate) without bathing facility -Domestic 15 lphd and Flushing 10 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section
1, Table 1, Sl No: xv.e of NBC 2016)
b. Water Requirement :
Water Requirement:
a) Airports -Domestic 40 lphd and Flushing 30 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, Sl No: xv.a of NBC 2016)
ii. Less concentrated use without fixed seating/Stadium - Domestic 4 lphd and Flushing 6 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, Sl No: xi of NBC 2016)
227
NOTES AND REFERENCES:
1
Water Requirement
i. Clubhouse (Gym, Jacuzzi, Steam, Sauna, Ayurvedic therapy, etc.)- Domestic -25 lphd and Flushing 20 lphd (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Table 1, Sl No: x of NBC 2016)
ii. Gym - Domestic -15 lphd and Flushing 10 lphd considered.
2
3
4
5
6
a) Non Veg and Veg Market Cleaning water shall be considered as 10 Liters per Sqm of Market area (10 liters x Area = Liters/day)
b) Mall Cleaning water shall be considered as 5 Liters per Sqm of Common area of the mall (5 liters x Area = Liters/day)
III
Total Water requirement (Litres)
(B = A + a)
-
Litres
Waste Water Generation (Litres)
Grey water
(B1 = A1+A3+a15)
-
Litres
Black Water
(B2 = A2+A4+a1+a2)
-
Litres
Total Waste Water
(B3 = B1+B2)
-
Litres
Water Usage if Sullage Treatment Plant (Litres)
Domestic
(B4 = A1+A3+a12)
-
Litres
Treated Sullage
(B5 = A2+A4+a13+a14)
-
Litres
Treated water disposal
(B5(1) = (B1x95%)-(B5)
-
Litres
Water Usage if Sewage Treatment Plant (Litres)
Domestic
(B6 = A1+A3+a12+a13)
-
Litres
Treated Sewage
(B7 = A2+A4+a14)
-
Litres
Treated water disposal
(B7(1) = (B3x90%)-(B7)
-
Litres
IV
Sl
No
UG Static water
storage tank #
Terrace
Tank #
Remarks
A
a)
1)
i)
NR
5000
(see note 1)
ii)
NR
5000
(5000)
(see note 2)
iii)
NR
10000
(5000)
(see note 2)
b)
1)
i)
NR
5000
(5000)
(see note 6)
ii)
10000 for every
500 Sqm floor
area subject to
minimum of
50000
(See Note 7)
10000
(5000)
(see note 6)
iii)
100000
(see Note 8)
10000
(See Note 4)
2)
150000
20000
3)
200000
20000
c)
250000
20000
B
1)
i)
NR
10000
(5000)
(see note 6)
2)
NR
25000
3)
50000
5000
(see note 6)
C
a)
1)
i)
NR
5000
(see note 6)
ii)
NR
5000
(5000)
(see note 6)
iii)
NR
10000
(5000)
(see note 6)
iv)
75000
10000
2)
100000
10000
3)
150000
20000
4)
200000
20000
b)
1)
i)
NR
10000
(5000)
(see note 6)
ii)
NR
15000
(5000)
(see note 6)
2)
100000
5000
(5000)
(see note 6)
3)
150000
10000
4)
200000
20000
D
a)
1)
i)
NR
20000
(5000)
(see note 6)
ii)
NR
25000
(5000)
(see note 6)
2)
100000
5000
(5000)
(see note 6)
3)
150000
10000
4)
200000
20000
b)
200000
20000
c)
E
1)
NR
10000
(5000)
(see note 6)
2)
50000
5000
(5000)
(see note 6)
3)
100000
10000
4)
150000
20000
5)
200000
20000
F
a)
1)
i)
NR
5000
(5000)
(see note 6)
ii)
NR
20000
(5000)
(see note 6)
iii)
NR
25000
(5000)
(see note 6)
2)
100000
10000
3)
200000
20000
b)
150000
10000
G
a)
i)
NR
5000
(see note 5)
ii)
NR
20000
(5000)
(see note 6)
iii)
NR
20000
(5000)
(see note 6)
iv)
75000
5000
(see note 6)
b)
i)
NR
10000
ii)
NR
20000
iii)
NR
50000
iv)
100000
10000
v)
150000
10000
c)
i)
NR
10000
ii)
NR
25000
iii)
50000
10000
iv)
100000
20000
v)
150000
20000
H
1)
NR
25000
2)
i)
50000
10000
ii)
75000
10000
iii)
100000
10000
3)
150000
10000
J
1)
i)
Minimum 240
min Fire fighting
requirments
NR
ii)
Minimum 240
min Fire fighting
requirments
50000
WATER REQUIREMENT, WASTE WATER GENERATION, TREATED WATER USAGE & SEWAGE/EXCESS TREATED
WATER DISPOSAL FOR RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
TABLE-3c
STORAGE OF WATER FOR FIRE FIGHTING PURPOSES
(UPTO 21 Mtrs BUILDING HEIGHT, NO FIRE SERVICES REQUIRED AS PER THE KARNATAKA FIRE FORCE
(AMMENDMENT) ACT 2023, DATED 27-07-2023)
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS OF UGT & OHT FOR FIRE FIGHTING
Upto 15m in height
Single storey building
more than one floor building but not exceeding 15m
Storage Buildings
Hazardous Buildings
More than Ground plus one floor
Multilevel car parking (MLCP)
Covered area upto 50 Sqm
Covered area more than 50Sqm and upto 150 Sqm
Covered area more than 150Sqm and upto 300Sqm
Covered area more than 300Sqm and upto 500Sqm
Covered area more than 5000Sqm
Below 15m in height and Covered area less than 250Sqm
Below 15m in height and Covered area more than 250Sqm
Ground Floor only
Ground plus one floor
Ground plus one storey and total of all floor area exceeding
500Sqm
More than Ground plus one storey
above 15m and but not exceeding 24m in Height
above 24m and but not exceeding 30m in Height
Underground shopping complex
Industrial Buildings
Low Hazard (See note 10)
Moderate Hazard (see note 10)
High Hazard (see note 11)
Covered area upto 100 Sqm
Covered area more than 100Sqm and upto 500 Sqm
Covered area more than 500Sqm (For building height upto
15m)
Covered area more than 500Sqm (For building height above
Covered area upto 100 Sqm
Covered area more than 100Sqm and upto 500 Sqm
Covered area more than 500Sqm and upto 1000Sqm (For
building height upto 15m)
Covered area more than 1000Sqm (For building height above
15m)
Covered area more than 1000Sqm
Less than 10m in height
above 10m and but not exceeding 15m in Height
above 15m and but not exceeding 24m in Height
above 24m and but not exceeding 30m in Height
above 30m in height
Mercantile Buildings
F-1 & F-2 (See Note 9)
Less than 15m in height
Ground plus one storey, with total of all floor area not
exceeding 500Sqm
Less than 10m in height
Upto 300 person
More than 300 person
above 10m and but not exceeding 15m in Height
above 15m and but not exceeding 24m in Height
above 24m and but not exceeding 30m in Height
D-6*
D-7* (Refer Clause no 6.4.4 of Part 4, NBC 2016)
Business Buildings
Custodial, Penal & Mental
Less than 10m in height
Upto 300 person
More than 300 person
10m and above but not exceeding 15m in Height
15m and above but not exceeding 24m in height
24m above but not exceeding 30m in height
Assembly Buildings
Buildings D-1 to D-5*
Hospitals, Sanatoria and nursing homes
Less than 15m in height with Plot area upto 1000Sqm
Upto Ground plus one storey, with no beds
Upto Ground plus one storey, with beds
Ground plus two or more storeys, with no beds
Ground plus two or more storeys, with beds
Less than 15m in height with Plot area more than 1000Sqm
15m and above but not exceeding 24m in Height
above 24m but not exceeding 45m in height
15m and above but not exceeding 30m
above 30m in height
Hotels (A-6)
Less than 15m in height
Ground plus one or more storeys
15m and above but not exceeding 24m in Height
above 24m but not exceeding 30m in height
Educational Buildings
Institutional Buildings
TABLE-3d(1)
Floor area exceeding 1000Sqm on any of the Floor
More than 15 and upto 30 rooms
More than 30 rooms
Water consumption for cooling towers shall be considered as per the manufacturers requirement and also consider the daily running hours of the systems.
Water consumption for Ice Plant shall be considered as per the manufacturers requirement and also consider the daily running hours of the systems.
Type of Building Occupnacy
Residential Buildings
Lodging and Rooming Houses (A-1) (See note 3)
Less than 15m in height
Upto 15 rooms
Population of 15 percent shall be considered for likely to use the building facilities.
Pool Make up, Fish pond, Water fountain, etc considered 2% of Total volume of stored water.
The water requirement for landscaping purposes is generally taken as 6 to 8 Litre/SqM/day for lawns. For shrubs and trees the above value can be reduced considerably. (Ref: Part 9,
Section 1, Clause 4.1.5.2 of NBC 2016).
a) For Lawns 7 Litre/SqM/day shall be considered.
b) For Other Landscapes like Shrubs and Trees 5 Litre/SqM/day shall be considered.
Hotels (A-5)
Less than 15m in height
Floor area not exceeding 300Sqm on any of the Floor
Floor area exceeding 300Sqm but not more than 1000 Sqm
on any of the Floor
228
i)
-
Mtrs
ii)
Ltrs (C1)
Ltrs (C2)
-
Lts (C3=C1+C2)
iii)
Lts (C4)
NOTES AND REFERENCES:
#
*
**
(No of nozzles in largest compartment perimetre = (Largest compartment perimeter /3.0m +1 Nos & Flow rate per nozzle = 33 LPM)
1
2 Automatic detection and alarm system is not required to be provided in car parking area. Such detection system shall however be required in other areas of car parking such as electrical rooms, cabins and other areas.
3 Buildings above 15 m in height are not to be permitted for occupancies A-I and A-2.
4 Required to be installed in basement, if area of basement exceeds 200 Sqm.
5 Required to be provided if basement area exceeds 200 Sqm.
6 Additional value given in peranthesis shall be added if basement area exceeds 200 Sqm
7 Required to be provided for blrildings with more than two storeys (Ground + One).
8 Required to be provided for blrildings with more than one storey.
9 Buildings above 30 m in height not to be permitted for Group B, Group C, Group D and Group F occupancies.
10 Buildings above 18 m in height not to be permitted for G-l and G-2 occupancies.
11 Buildings above 15 m in height not to be permitted for G-3 occupancies.
1
2
V
SEPTIC TANK / SULLAGE TREATMENT PLANT/ SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT CAPACITY (The recycled water should be used for Toilet Flushing, Cleaning and Landscape Irrigation purposes)
1 BUILDINGS WHERE UGD IS AVAILABLE
2 BUILDINGS WHERE UGD IS NOT AVAILABLE
a) Capacity of 100% SuTP
Total Sullage generated (D1 = B1 from Table 3c)
-
Lts/day
Add 20% extra capacity for contingencies (D2 = D1 +20%)
-
Lts/day
Required SuTP Capacity (D3 = D2/1000)
-
KLD
b) For Large Buildings
Recommended SuTP Capacity (Round off in multiples of 5KLD) (D4)
KLD
i Capacity of 100% SuTP & 100% STP
Required SuTP Capacity (D3)
-
KLD
b) Capacity of 100% SuTP & STP for additional treated water required
Recommended SuTP Capacity (Round off in multiples of 5KLD) (D4)
KLD
Required SuTP Capacity (D3)
-
KLD
Total Black water generated (B2 from Table 3c) (D15)
-
Lts/day
Recommended SuTP Capacity (Round off in multiples of 5KLD) (D4)
KLD
Add 20% extra capacity for contingencies (D16 = D15 +20%)
-
Lts/day
Treated water generated from SuTP (D5 = D1 x 95%)
-
Lts/day
Required STP Capacity (D17 = D16/1000)
-
KLD
Total treated water required (D6 = B4 from Table 3c)
-
Lts/day
Recommended STP Capacity (Round off in multiples of 5KLD) (D18)
KLD
Shortfall of SuTP Treated water (D7 = D6-D5)
-
Lts/day
Add 20% extra capacity for contingencies (D8 = D7 +20%)
-
Lts/day
ii Capacity of 100% STP with RO Plant
(for the shortfall in treated water requirement to be treated in STP)
Total Sewage generated [B3 from Table 3c] (D19)
-
Lts/day
Required STP Capacity (D9 = D8/1000)
-
KLD
Add 20% extra capacity for contingencies (D20 =D19 +20%)
-
Lts/day
Recommended STP Capacity (Round off in multiples of 5KLD) (D10)
KLD
Required STP Capacity (D21 = D20/1000)
-
KLD
c) Capacity of 100% STP with RO Plant
Recommended STP Capacity (Round off in multiples of 5KLD) (D21)
KLD
Total Sewage generated [B3 from Table 3c] (D11)
-
KLD
Add 20% extra capacity for contingencies (D12 = D11 +20%)
-
Lts/day
Notes:
Required STP Capacity (D13 = D12/1000)
-
KLD
Recommended STP Capacity (Round off in multiples of 5KLD) (D14)
KLD
VI
CAPACITY OF RO PLANT FOR DRINKING WATER SUPPLY
i)
LPD
ii) Required RO Plant Capacity per hour (¼ th of the total drinking water requirement )** =
-
LPH
iii) Recommended RO plant capacity (Round off in multiples of 250 LPH)=
LPH
iv) RO Plant SS water storage tank capacity (Round off in multiples of 250 Lits) # =
-
Litres
RO PLANT SPECIFICATION
Sl.
No.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
Notes:
* Drinking Water requirement as per requirment
**
# Storage tank capacity for 1 day's requirement
VII
1. CENTRALISED SOLAR HOT WATER SYSTEM WITH SOLAR THERMAL COLLECTORS
1)
=
Ltrs (E1)
2)
Add wastage of 5% (E2 = E1 + 5%)
=
-
Ltrs (E2)
3)
=
Ltrs (E3)
4)
SS Hot Water Storage Tank Capacity Required# [E4 = 80% of the Recommended Hot Water requirement (E3)]
=
-
Ltrs (E4)
# Assuming 80% of the people will take bath at the peak hour consumption of hot water from 6:30am to 8:30am.
5)
Recommended SS Hot Water Storage Tank Capacity [E5 = Rounded off value of (E4) in multiples of 125Lit]
=
Ltrs (E5)
6)
=
-
Nos (E6)
8)
=
-
SqM (E7)
2. CENTRALISED HOT WATER SYSTEM WITH HEAT PUMP
9)
=
-
Ltr/Hr (E8)
##
10)
=
T (E9)
11) Electrical Power Consumption of the Heat Pump (25% of the Rated output power, Refer ### )
=
kW (E10)
Standards for the selection of Heat Pump with Rated Output Power and Hot Water at the Temperature of 60◦C from the ambient Temp. of 25◦C =35◦C Delta T
###
VIII WATER TANK CAPACITY
1
DOMESTIC WATER TANK CAPACITY *
a)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G1)
66.70%
100.00%
b)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G2)
66.70%
100.00%
c)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G3)
66.70%
100.00%
d)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G4)
66.70%
100.00%
e) TOTAL FIRE FIGHTING UG TANK CAPACITY AS PER Table 3d(2) (C3)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G5)
f)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G6)
33.30%
16.67%
g)
-
Litres
Litres
(G7)
33.30%
16.67%
h)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G8)
33.30%
16.67%
i)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G9)
33.30%
16.67%
j) TOTAL FIRE FIGHTING OVERHEAD TANK CAPACITY AS PER Table 3d(2) (C4)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(G10)
2
TREATED WATER TANK CAPACITY *
a)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(H1)
66.70%
100.00%
b)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(H2)
66.70%
100.00%
c)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(H3)
33.30%
16.67%
d)
-
Litres
~
Litres
(H4)
33.30%
16.67%
3
-
Litres
~
Litres
(I)
NOTES & REFERENCES:
* General guide lines for calculation of capacity of these storage tanks are as follows (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Clause 4.4.10 of NBC 2016)
a) ln case only OHT is provided, it maybe taken as 33.3 to 50 percent of 1.2 times of one day’s requirement;
b) In case only UGT is provided, it maybe taken as 50 to 150 percent of 1.2 times ofone day’s requirement; and
c) In case combined storage is provided, it maybe taken as 66.7 percent UGT and 33.3 percent OHT of 1.2 times of one day’s requirement.
** In case Hydropneumatic system used, it maybe taken as 100 percent for UGT of one day's requirement and 16.65 percent OHT of 1.2 times of one day's requirement.
TABLE-3d(2)
CENTRALISED HOT WATER SYSTEM WITH HEAT PUMP AND SOLAR THERMAL COLLECTORS FOR RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS (TO
CALCULATE THE CAPACITY/SIZE OF THE SYSTEM)
TOTAL TREATED WATER OHT CAPACITY = 33.3% of Requirement per day = 0.333 x 1.2 x [With Sullage Treatment Plant B5 from Table 3C]
TOTAL TRAETED WATER OHT CAPACITY = 33.3% of Requirement per day = 0.333 x 1.2 x [With Sewage Treatment Plant B7 from Table 3C]
Recommended Hot Water requirement (E3 = Rounded off value of (E2) in multiples of 125Lit.)
2. Sullage/Sewage Treatment Plant or Septic tanks should be provided, if UGD system is not available for all Buildings
(Septic Tank shall be permitted for buildings upto 300 users) (Refer, IS : 2470 (part 1) -1985 for Design criteria and
Construction of Septic Tanks)
TABLE-3f(1)
Total Drinking water requirement (as per requirment)
TABLE-3f(2)
Description
Specifications
Capacity of Plant
Membrane Material & Size
One set of pumps shall be provided for each 100 hydrants or part thereof, with a maximum of two sets. In case of more than one pump set installation, both pump sets shall shall be interconnected at their delivery headers. (Refer Note 22, Table 7, Minimum
Requirements for Fire Fighting Installations Part 4 Fire and Life Safety of NBC 2016)
WATER TREATMENT PLANT TANK CAPACITY (If applicable)
TOTAL DOMESTIC UGT CAPACITY = 66.7% of 1.2 x Requirement per day** = 0.667 x 1.2 x [Without Sewage/Sullage Treatment Plant B,
from Table 3C]
TOTAL DOMESTIC UGT CAPACITY = 66.7% of 1.2 x Requirement per day** = 0.667 x 1.2 x [With Sullage Treatment Plant B4, from Table
3C]
TOTAL DOMESTIC UGT CAPACITY = 66.7% of 1.2 x Requirement per day** = 0.667 x 1.2 x [With Sullage & Sewage Treatment Plant B4,
from Table 3C]
TOTAL DOMESTIC UG TANK CAPACITY = 66.7% of 1.2 x Requirement per day** = 0.667 x 1.2 x [With Sewage Treatment Plant B6, from
Table 3C]
TOTAL DOMESTIC OHT CAPACITY = 33.3% of Requirement per day** = 0.333 x 1.2 x [Without Sewage/Sullage Treatment Plant B, from
Table 3C]
TOTAL DOMESTIC OHT CAPACITY = 33.3% of Requirement per day** = 0.333 x 1.2 x [With Sullage Treatment Plant B4, from Table 3C]
TOTAL DOMESTIC OHT CAPACITY = 33.3% of Requirement per day** = 0.333 x 1.2 x [With Sullage & Sewage Treatment Plant B4, from
Table 3C]
TOTAL DOMESTIC OHT CAPACITY = 33.3% of Requirement per day** = 0.333 x 1.2 x [With Sewage Treatment Plant B6, from Table 3C]
TOTAL TREATED WATER UGT CAPACITY = 66.7% of Requirement per day = 0.667 x 1.2 x [With Sullage Treatment Plant B5 from Table 3C]
Area Required for installing Solar Thermal Collectors (2 SqM required / 125 Litre Solar Thermal Collector
Panel (100Kg/Collector with water)) (E7= 2 SqM x E6)
Hot Water required per hour from Heat Pump (E8 = E4 / 7 Hours ##)
Hot Water supply gap 7 hours considered to fill the entire capacity of Hot water storage tank, assuming it is empty
at the night after consumption
Recommended Heat Pump Capacity (Refer ###)
1 T =3.3kW =81L/Hr, 1.5T =4.9kW =120L/Hr, 2 T =6.8kW =167L/Hr, 3 T =11.2kW =275L/Hr, 5 T =18.8kW =462L/Hr, 6 T =22kW =540L/Hr, 8 T =30kW =737L/Hr, 10 T
=38kW =934L/Hr, 12 T =44kW =1081L/Hr, 15 T =58kW =1425L/Hr, 20 T =75kW =1843L/Hr, 25 T =86kW =2113L/Hr. (1kW = 860Kcal is considered)
TABLE-3h
TABLE-3g
Total Hot water requirement (E1)
Number of 125 Lit. Solar Thermal Collectors (Size 1m x 2.0m)(E6 = E3 /125 = No. of Collectors)
TOTAL TREATED WATER UGT CAPACITY = 66.7% of Requirement per day = 0.667 x 1.2 x [With Sewage Treatment Plant B7 from Table 3C]
Water quality indicator
Controls system
Storage Tanks Capacity
Optional Components like Ultra Violet treatment, Ozonation, Micron Filters (0.2 Micron), pH Booster, Mineral
Booster, etc.
6hours/day of maximum running time of RO Plant considered (RO membrane shall be replaced every 2200 hours of running
(size of each membrane is 250LPH) ie. The life of membrane is 2200/6hrs =365days = 1 year)
Alternative to provisions of additional set of pumps, the objective can be met by providing additional diesel pump of the same capacity and doubling the water tank capacity as required for one set of pumps. (refer Note 23, Table 7, Minimum Requirements for Fire
Fighting Installations Part 4 Fire and Life Safety of NBC 2016 )
TABLE-3e
Septic tanks are only recommended for small communities and institutions whose contributory population does not exceed
300 (Refer: NBC 2016, Part 9, Section 2, Clause 4.5.14.5.2 Septic Tanks) or Sewage/Black Water generation is less than 15
KLD whichever is higher. Refer Design criteria and Construction of Septic Tanks (Ref: IS: 2470 (Part 1) – 1985)
1. Providing Sullage/Sewage Treatement Plant is a mandatory requirement for the residential buildings having Waste
water generation more that 35 KLD or 5000Sqm Builtup area.
Refer Table 7, Minimum Requirements for Fire Fighting Installations Part 4 Fire and Life Safety of NBC 2016
Water requirement for water curtain nozzles for 60 minutes considering the largest compartment's perimeter out of all compartments of car parking in any of
the basement. (Ref: Annex H (Clause 6.4.2.2. and 6.8.1.5), Clause H-4.c, Part 4 - Fire and life safety of NBC 2016)
Tank size required (Litres) = No. of nozzles (in the perimeter of the Largest compartment) x Flow rate per water curtain nozzle (LPM) x 60 Minutes.
Height of Building
UNDERGROUND TANK (SUMP TANK) CAPACITY
a) For Wet Riser, Yard Hydrant and Sprinklers per set of pumps [Refer Table
2c]
b) For Water Curtain (If applicable) **
TOTAL SUMP TANK CAPACITY =
OVERHEAD (TERRACE) TANK CAPACITY (Refer Table 2c)
MOEFA System shall also include talk-back system and public address system for the occupancies given in the table for (d) (I) (iii) under A-5, (a) (I) (iv) and (a) (2) under C-I, and (a) (2) under D-I to D-5, in all buildings 15 m and above in height, except for A-3 and
A-4 occupancies where these shall be provided for buildings of height 24 m and above. These shall also be provided in car parking areas more than 300 m2 and in multi-level car parking irrespective of their areas.
a) For Small Buildings
100% Sullage disposed into Leach Pit & 100% Sewage disposed into Septic Tank
D-1: Buildings having a theatrical or motion picture or any other stage and fixed seats for over 1000 persons
D-2: Buildings having a theatrical or motion picture or any other stage and fixed seats upto 1000 persons
D-3: Buildings without a permanent stage having accomodation for 300 or more persons but no permanent seating arrangement
D-4: Buildings without a permanent stage having accomodation for less than 300 persons with permanent seating arrangement
D-5: All other structures including temporary structures designed for assembly of people not coverved by subdivicion D-1 to D-4, at ground level
D-6: Buildings having mixed occupancies of Assembly & Merchantile(for example, Shopping Malls providing facilities such as shopping, cinema theatres,
multiplexes & restaurants / Food Courts.
D-7: Underground and elevated mass rapid transit system
229
TABLE-3i
(to Table 3a of Notification for Water Demand & Water Balance Chart)
Additional visitors / floating population for different uses shall be
TYPE OF OCUPANCY
Visitors/
floating
population
Owners /
Staff
Group A: Hotels:
a) Hotel (Upto 3 Star)
10%
90%
b) Hotel (4 Star and above)
10%
90%
Group B: Educational:
a) Without boarding facilities
5%
95%
b) With boarding facilities
5%
95%
c) Hostels
5%
95%
Group C: Institutional: Hospital:
a) No. of beds not exceeding 100
10%
90%
b) No. of beds exceeding 100
10%
90%
c) Out patient department (OPD)
85%
15%
Group D: Assembly:
a) Concentrated use without fixed seating
85%
15%
b) Less concentrated use without fixed seating
85%
15%
c) Fixed seating (Cinemas, Concert halls and Theatres and Multiplex)
85%
15%
d) Dining areas and restaurants with seating and table (water
requirement including kitchen)
85%
15%
e) Food court (water requirement including kitchen)
85%
15%
Group F: Mercantile:
a) Street floor and sales basement
90%
10%
b) Upper sales floor
90%
10%
c) Storage/warehouse, receiving and the like
10%
90%
Group E: Business: (including canteen)
10%
90%
Group G: Industrial:
a) Factories including canteen where bath rooms are required to be
provided
10%
90%
b) Factories including canteen where no bath rooms are required to be
provided
10%
90%
Group H: Storage:
10%
90%
Group J: Hazardous
10%
90%
Traffic Terminal Stations:
a) Airports
90%
10%
b) Railway station (Junction) with bathing facility
90%
10%
c) Railway station (Junction) without bathing facility
90%
10%
d) Railway station (Intermedite) with bathing facility
90%
10%
e) Railway station (Intermedite) without bathing facility
90%
10%
f) Interstate Bus Terminals
90%
10%
g) Interstate Bus Terminals/Metro Stations
90%
10%
Notes and References:
1. Polpulation of 5 to 15 percent, depending on the usage of building,
shall be considered for visitors and floating population likely to use the
building facilities. (Ref: Part 9, Section 1, Clause 4.1.b -Notes 2 of NBC
230
ANNEXURE-XVA
Design criteria and Construction of Septic Tanks (Ref: IS : 2470 (Part 1) – 1985)
1. SCOPE – This code lays down recommendations for the design, layout, construction and maintenance of septic
tanks. It is applicable to houses, flats, residential housing colonies, hostels and boarding schools where the number
of users does not exceed 300 persons.
2. TERMINOLOGY
3. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
3.3 Location of Septic Tank
3.3.1 Septic tank should be located at a place open to sky, as far away as possible from the exterior of the wall of
building and should not be located in swampy areas or areas prone to flooding. It should also be accessible for
cleaning.
3.4 Septic Tank Design
3.4.1 Sewage flow
3.4.1.1 The maximum flow to the tank is based on the number of plumbing fixtures discharging simultaneously. For
this purpose various sanitation facilities are equated in terms of fixtures units. Fixtures equivalents are given in
Table 1.
Note – Fixtures unit is a quantity in terms of which the load producing effect of different plumbing fixtures on the
plumbing system are expressed on some arbitrarily chosen scale. In the design of septic tank, it is taken as 9 litres
per minute.
TABLE 1
FIXTURE EQUIVALENT (Clause 3.4.1.1)
FACILITY
EQUIVALENT FIXTURE UNIT
Water closet
1
Bath
½
Wash basin/kitchen sink
½
Urinal (with auto flush)
1
Urinal (without auto flush)
½
Slop sink
1
Laboratory sink
2
Combination fixture
1
Shower bath
1
Bath tub
2
Drinking fountain
½
Ablution tap
½
Dish water
½
3.4.1.2 The estimated number of fixture units and the number of fixture units that contribute to the peak discharge
in small installations serving up to 20 persons, for residential housing colonies up to 300 persons and for hostels and
boarding schools are given in Tables 2 to 4
231
TABLE 2
ESTIMATED PEAK DISCHARGE FOR SMALL TANKS UPTO 20 USERS
NUMBER OF USERS
(1)
NUMBER OF FIXTURE
UNITS
(2)
PROBABLE NUMBER
OF FIXTURE UNITS
DISCHARGING
SIMULTANEOUSLY
(3)
PROBABLE PEAK
DISCHARGE 1pm
(4)
5
1
1
9
10
2
2
18
15
3
2
18
20
4
3
27
NOTE 1- Number of fixture units is based on the assumption that each house consisting of 5 persons may have one
WC which will discharge into septic tank.
NOTE 2 – Probable number of fixture units are based on 70 percent fixture units discharging simultaneously.
TABLE 3
ESTIMATED PEAK DISCHARGE FOR RESIDENTIAL COLONIES (Clause 3.4.1.2)
No. OF USERS
(1)
NUMBER OF
HOUSEHOLDS
(2)
NUMBER OF FIXTURE
UNITS (3)
PROBABLE PEAK
DISCHARGE 1pm
(4)
50
10
20
108
100
20
40
216
150
30
60
324
200
40
80
432
300
60
120
648
NOTE 1- Probable peak discharge is based on 60 percent fixtures units discharging simultaneously.
NOTE 2 – Each household consisting of 5 persons may have 1 WC, 1bath and 1 wash basin/ kitchen sink.
232
TABLE 4
ESTIMATED PEAK DISCHARGE FOR HOSTELS AND BOARDING SCHOOL (Clause 3.4.1.2)
No. OF USERS
(1)
W.C
(2)
BATH
(3)
WASH
BASIN /
KITCHEN
SINK
(4)
NO OF
FIXTURE
UNITS
(5)
PROBABLE PEAK
DISCHARGE 1pm
(6)
50
6
6
6
12
76
100
12
12
12
24
130
150
19
19
19
38
205
200
25
25
25
50
270
300
37
37
37
74
400
NOTE – Probable peak discharge is based on 70 percent of fixture units discharging simultaneously.
3.4.2 Sedimentation
3.4.2.1 The surface area of the tank required will be 0.92 m2 for every 10 litres per minute of peak flow rate at a
temperature of 25°C.
3.4.2.2 A minimum depth of sedimentation shall be 250 to 300mm.
3.4.3 Sludge Digestion
3.4.3.1 Per capita suspended solids entering the tank may be taken as 70g/day.
3.4.3.2 The capacity required for sludge digestion is 0.033 m3 per capita at 25°C.
3.4.3.3 Volume of digested sludge is normally 0.00021 m3 per capita per day.
3.4.4 Detention Time
3.4.4.4 Aseptic tank designed on the basis of 3.4.1, 3.4.2 and 3.4.3 provides a detention period of 24 to 48 hours
based on an average daily flow of sewage.
3.4.5 Dimensions of Septic Tank
3.4.5.1 Septic tank shall have minimum width of 750mm, minimum depth of one metre below water level and a
minimum liquid capacity of 1000 litres.
3.4.5.2 For rectangular septic tanks, the length of the tank shall be 2 to 4 times the width. Suitable sizes of septic
tanks are given in Appendix A
3.4.5.3 For circular tanks the minimum diameter shall not be less than 1.35m and operating depth shall not be less
than 1.0m
4. SEPTIC TANK CONSTRUCTION
4.1. Floor – It is essential that the floor of the tank be water tight and of adequate strength to resist earth movement
and to support the weight of the tank walls and contents.
4.1.1 The floor may be of cement concrete of minimum M 15 grade (see IS : 456) and a minimum slope of 1 : 10 may
be provided towards the sludge outlet to facilitate desludging.
4.2 Walls – The walls should be of such thickness as to provide adequate strength and watertightness.
233
4.2.1 Walls built out of brick should not be less than 200 mm thick and should be plastered to a minimum thickness
of 12 mm inside and outside with cement mortar not weaker than 1 : 3; where they are built out of the stone
masonary. They should have a minimum thickness of 370 mm.
5. SLUDGE WITHDRAWAL
5.1. Half yearly or yearly desludging of septic tank is lesirable. Small domestic tanks, for economic reasons, may be
cleaned at least once in 2 years provided the tank is not overloaded due to use by more than the number for which it
is designed.
NOTE - Frequent desludging inhibits the anaerobic action in the tank. Normally, the tanks are cleaned when the sum
of the depth of the scum and the sludge is observed to exceed half the depth of the tank.
5.2. A portion of sludge not less than 25 mm in depth should be left behind in the tank bottom which acts as the
seeding material for the fresh deposits.
5.3. The digested sludge should be withdrawn through a dip pipe of not less than 150 mm dia under a hydrostatic
pressure of at least 450 mm. The sludge pipe shall deliver the sludge to the sump and be provided with a delivery
valve to draw the sludge as required. Portable pumps may also be used for desludging in which case there will be no
need for sludge pipe or sludge pump. Manual handling of sludge should be avoided.
5.3.1. When removal of the sludge is carried out the scum in the first tank should not be disturbed more than
necessary, this scum is needed to ensure efficient operation.
5.4. Sludge from septic tanks may be delivered into covered pits or into a suitable vehicle for removal from the site.
Spreading of sludge on the ground in the vicinity should not be allowed.
6. COMMISSIONING OF SEPTIC TANK
6.1. The sewage system should be complete and ready for operation before connection is made to the building.
6.2. The tank should be filled with water to its outlet level before the sewage is left into the tank. It should,
preferably, be seeded with small quantities of well digested sludge obtained from septic tanks or sludge digestion
tanks. In absence of digested sludge a small quantity of decaying organic matter, such as digested cow dung may be
introduced.
( Clause 3.4.5.2 )
SIZES OF SEPTIC
TANK
A - 1. Recommended sizes of septic tanks for 20 users are given in Table 5.
TABLE 5 RECOMMENDED SIZES OF SPECIFIC TANK FOR 20 USERS
NO. OF USERS
LENGTH
BREADTH
LIQUID DEPTH
( CLEANING INTERVAL OF )
1 YEAR
2 YEAR
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
m
m
m
m
5
1.5
0.75
1.0
1.05
234
10
2.0
0.90
1.0
1.40
15
2.0
0.90
1.3
2.00
20
2.3
1.10
1.3
1.80
NOTE 1 - The capacities are recommended on the assumption that discharges from only WC will be treated in the
septic tank.
NOTE 2 - A provision of 300 mm should be made for free board.
NOTE 3 - The sizes of septic tank are based on certain assumptions (see 3.4), while choosing the size of septic tank
exact calculations shall be made.
* Code of practice for installation of septic tank : Part 2 Secondary treatment and disposal of septic tank effluent (
second revision ).
A - 2. Recommended sizes of septic tanks for housing colonies (up to 300 persons) and for hostels and boarding
schools are given in Table 6 and 7 respectively.
TABLE 6 RECOMMENDED SIZES OF SPECIFIC TANK FOR RESIDENTIAL COLONIES
NO. OF USERS
LENGTH
BREADTH
LIQUID DEPTH
( CLEANING INTERVAL OF )
1 YEAR
2 YEAR
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
m
m
m
m
50
5.0
2.0
1.0
1.24
100
7.5
2.65
1.0
1.24
150
10.0
3.0
1.0
1.24
200
12.0
3.3
1.0
1.24
300
15.0
4.0
1.0
1.24
235
NOTE 1 - A provision of 300 mm should be made for free board.
NOTE 2 - The sizes of septic tank are based on certain assumptions (see 3.4), while choosing the size of septic tank,
exact calculations shall be made.
NOTE 3 - For population over 100, the tank may be divided into independent parallel chambers for ease of
maintenance and cleaning.
TABLE 7 RECOMMENDED SIZES OF SPECIFIC TANK FOR HOSTELS AND BOARDING SCHOOLS
NO. OF USERS
LENGTH L
BREADTH B
LIQUID DEPTH
( CLEANING INTERVAL OF )
Once in 1 Year
Once in 2 Years
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
m
m
m
m
50
5.0
1.6
1.3
1.4
100
5.7
2.1
1.4
1.7
150
7.7
2.4
1.4
1.7
200
8.9
2.7
1.4
1.7
300
10.7
3.3
1.4
1.7
NOTE 1 - A provision of 300 mm should be made for free board.
NOTE 2 - The sizes of septic tank are based on certain assumptions (see 3.4), while choosing the size of septic tank,
exact calculations shall be made.
NOTE 3 - For population over 100, the tank may be divided into independent parallel chamber for ease of
maintenance and cleaning.
236
237
238
239
240
241
SECONDARY TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL OF SEPTIC TANK EFFLUENT (Ref: IS : 2470 (Part 2) – 1985)
4. METHODS OF TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL OF EFFLUENT
4.1 The following methods of disposal are described in this Code:
a)
Soil absorption system,
b)
Up flow anaerobic filters
4.2 Depending on the position of the subsoil water level, soil and subsoil -conditions, the recommended method of
disposal of the effluent is given in Table I.
TABLE I RECOMMENDED METHOD OF DISPOSAL
FOR SEPTIC TANK
EFFLUENT
(Clauses 4.2, 6.0 and 7.0)
POSITION OF THE
SOIL AND SUBSOIL CONDITION
SUBSOIL WATER
LEVEL FROM
Porus Soil with Percolation Rate
Dense and clays soil
with percolation rate
exceeding 60 min
GROUND LEVEL
Not exceeding 30 min
Exceeding 30 min
but not exceed-
ing 60 min
Within 1.8 m
Dispersion trench
Dispersion trench
Biological filter partly
located partly or
located partly or
or fully above ground
fully above
fully above
level with under-drains
ground level in
ground level in
or up flow anaerobic
a mound
a mound
filter and the effluent
led into a surface drain
or used for gardening
Below 1.8 m
Seepage pit or
Dispersion trench
Subsurface biological
dispersion trench
filter with under drains or
up flow anaerobic filter
and the effluent led into a
drain or used for
gardening
242
NOTE - Where the above mentioned methods are not feasible and where the effluent has to be discharged
into open drain it should be disinfected.
5.2Construction of the Soil Absorption System – Two types of soil absorption system have been covered:
a)
Seepage pit, and
b)
Dispersion trench.
5.2.1 Seepage Pit - The seepage pit may be of any suitable shape with the least cross-sectional dimension of 0.90
m and not less than 1.0 m in depth below the invert level of the inlet pipe. The pit may be lined with stone, brick or
concrete blocks with dry open joints which should be backed with at least 75 mm of clean coarse aggregate ( see Fig.
2A). The lining above the inlet level should be finished with mortar. In the case of large dimensions, the top portion
may be narrowed to reduce the size of the RCC cover slabs. Where no lining is used, especially near trees, the entire
pit should be filled with loose stones. A masonry ring may be constructed at the top of the pit to prevent damage by
flooding of the pit by surface run-off (see Fig. 2B ). The inlet pipe may be taken down to a depth of 0.90 m from the
top as an anti-mosquito measure. Illustrations of typical constructions of seepage pit are given in Fig. 2
TABLE 2 ALLOWABLE RATE OF EFFLUENT APPLICATIONS TO
SOIL ABSORPTION SYSTEM
(Clause 5.1)
PERCOLATION RATE
MAXIMUM RATE OF
Min
EFFLUENT APPLICATION
1/m'/day
1 or less
204
2
143
3
118
4
102
5
90
10
65
15
52
30
37
45
33
60
26
NOTE 1- The absorption areafor a dispersion trench is the trench bottom area.
NOTE 2- The absorption area for seepage pits is the effective side wail area, effective depth being measured
from 150 mm below invert level of inlet pipe to the bottom of the pit ( see Fig. 2 ).
NOTE 3-If the percolation rate exceeds 30 minutes, the soil is unsuitable for soak ways. If the percolation
rate exceeds 60 minutes, the soil is unsuitable for any soil absorption system.
243
5.2.2 Dispersion Trench -Dispersion trenches shall be 0.5 to 1'0 m deep and 0'3 to 1.0 m wide excavated to a slight
gradient and shall be provided with 150 to 250 mn of washed gravel or crushed stones. Open jointed pipes placed inside
the trench shall be made of unglazed earthen-ware clay or concrete and shall have minimum internal diameter of 75
to 100 mm. Each dispersion trench should not be longer than 30 m and trenches should not be placed closer than 2.0
m.
6. BIOLOGICAL FILTERS
6.0 Biological filters are suitable for treatment of septic tank effluent where the soil is relatively impervious (see Table
1 ), water logged areas or where limited land area is available. In a biological filter, the effluent from septic tank is
brought into contact with a suitable medium, the surfaces of which become coated with an organic film. The film
assimilates and oxidizes much of the polluting matter through the agency of micro-organisms. The biological filter
requires ample ventilation and an efficient system of under drains leading to an outlet.
6.1 Construction - The depth of medium should be 1 400 mm but never less than 900 mm. The medium should be
retained in position by walls of adequate trench. The filter should have a concrete floor, laid to falls with a system of
under drains laid on it and consisting of fiend drains half channels laid upside down and open jointed or special tiles
discharging to the outlet.
6.3 Filter Media -- The filter sand and gravel shall conform to IS: 8419 (Part 1)-1977*.
6.5 Volume of Filter - It is essential that the volume of filter medium provided is sufficient to allow for sewage flow
which occurs with small installations, such variation being more pronounced it the smaller number of persons are
served. For populations of up to 10 persons the volume should be 1 m3 of medium per head, of resident population
for 10 and up to 50 persons, 0.8 m3 and for over 50 and up to 300 persons, 0.6 m3.
If pumping of the septic tank effluent forms part of scheme, recirculation of final effluent to dilute the septic
tank effluent may be introduced to reduce the volume of the filter.
6.6 Treatment of Filter Effluent -- The filter effluent is either discharged into surface drain or evenly distributed
over a grass plot from the system of channels. Where the effluent is likely to contaminate the watercourse, the
effluent should be adequately disinfected.
7. UPFLOW ANAEROBIC FILTER
7.0 Up flow type of filters (reverse filter) operating under submerged conditions is a method for disposal of septic tank
effluents in areas where dense soil condition (see Table 1), high water table and limited availability of open land are
factors to be considered for successful disposal of effluents by secondary treatment. The septic tank effluent is
introduced from the bottom and the microbial growth is retained on the stone - media making possible higher loading
rates and efficient digestion. The capacity of the unit is 0.04 to 0'05 m= per capita or 1/3 to 112 the liquid capacity of
the septic tank it serves. BOD removals of 70 percent can be expected and the effluent is clear and -free from odour
and-nuisance. The flow sheets of the filter system are shown in Fig. 5.
7.1 Types - Up flow anaerobic filters are of the following types:
a)
Single chambered rectangular type,
b)
Double chambered rectangular type, and
c)
Circular type.
7.2 Construction Features - In an up flow filter, the tank effluent enters at the bottom through a system of under
drains, flows upwards through a layer of coarse material generally 0.6 to 1.2 m deep and is discharged over a weir
244
or trough at the top. The driving head in the filter, that is, the difference between the water level and the filter may
be as low as 25 to 150 mm during normal functioning.
7.2.1 Single Chambered Rectangular Type - In this type (Fig. 6) an up flow filter with a rectangular chamber is
constructed to treat the effluent from a normal domestic septic tank. The chamber is packed with coarse material
and the size of the packing media should be 20 mm. The medium rests on a perforated concrete false bottom slab.
The effluent from septic tank enters the bottom of the filter chamber through a 150 mm pipe and is distributed
upward through the media from a perforated slab at the bottom.
The vertical inlet is fitted with a tee at the bottom, one branch of which leads to the filter and the other
branch is kept plugged while the filter functions. The plug can be removed to facilitate emptying into an adjoining
chamber and cleaning the filter where required. The effluent from the top of the bed is allowed to escape over a V-
notch. The sill level is kept 150 mm above the top of the medium.
7.2.2 Double Chambered Rectangular Type - The filter consists of two interconnected compartments (Fig. 7). The
first chamber is filled to a depth of 0.55 m with 20 mm coarse medium. The second chamber is filled to a depth of
0.45 m with 20 mm size coarse aggregate. The septic tank effluent falls through a perforated tray over the medium
in the first compartment and enters the second compartment directly from the bottom. The effluent passes up
through the medium in the second chamber and escapes over a V-notch placed 75 mm above the top of the medium.
By this arrangement, the time of travel of the effluent through the filter is lengthened. The two chambers are each
fitted at the bottom with a 75mm galvanized iron pipe leading to an adjacent chamber. A valve in these pipes allows
the filters to be partly desludged into the collecting chamber.
7.2.3 Circular Filter – A circular filter 0.9m in dia may also be constructed. Medium of aggregate of uniform size
20mm should be packed to rest on a perforated concrete slab. The effluent may be made to escape over the top of the
medium through equally placed notches along the periphery of the filter. The sill level is usually 100mm above the
top of the medium.
245
246
247
248
APPENDIX-XVI
(see clause 9.12)
PROVISION FOR DIFFERENTLY ABLED
1. Definitions
Ambulant Disabled People: Disabled who are able to walk but who may depend on prostheses (Artificial Limbs)
or those (Callipers), Sticks, crutches or walking aids.
Non-Ambulant Disabled People: Disabled people with impairments that confine them to wheelchair.
Wheel Chair: Chair used by disabled people for mobility.
i.
Size of small wheel chair: 750 x 1050 mm
ii.
Size of large wheel chair: 800 x 1500 mm
2. Scope
These Byelaws are applicable to public buildings and exclude domestic buildings.
Building which shall provide access to ambulant disable and Non-Ambulant disabled are listed below.
Distinction is made for buildings to be designed for the use of large wheel chairs and small wheel chair.
3. Building to be designed for Ambulant Disabled People Higher Secondary School, Conference Hall,
Dance Halls, Youth Centres, Youth Clubs, Sport Centres, Sport Pavilions, Boat Club Houses, Ice Rinks,
Bowling Centres, Swimming Pools, Police Stations, Law Courts, Courts Houses, Sport Stadiums,
Theatres, Concert Halls, Cinemas, Auditoria’s, Small Offices (the maximum plinth area 1400 sq.mt)
Snack Bars, Cafes and banqueting rooms (for capacity above 50 dinners).
Note:
i.
In sport stadiums provisions shall be made for non-ambulant spectators (small wheel chair)
ii) @ 1:1000 up to 10,000 spectators and @ 1:2000 for spectators above 10,000.
iii) In Theatres, Concert Halls, Cinemas and Auditoria provisions shall be made for non-ambulant spectators
(Small Wheel Chairs) @ 1/250 up to 1000 spectators and 1/500 for
spectators above 1000.
4. Building to be designed for Non-Ambulant Disabled People:
Schools for physically handicapped, cremation, buildings as mentioned in 3, Botanical Gardens, Religious
Buildings, Old People Clubs, Village Halls, Day Centres, Junior Training centres, Post Offices, Banks,
Dispensaries, Railway Stations, Shops, Super Markets, and Departmental Stores.
Notes: Large wheel chair criteria shall be applicable on ground floors of the following building, post offices, banks,
dispensaries, railway station, shops, supermarkets, and departmental stores
5. Building to be designed for Non-Ambulant People (using small wheel chairs) Public lavatories in Tourist
Sports, Clubs Motels, Professional and Scientific Institution, Museum, Art Galleries, Public Libraries,
Laboratories, Universities, Collage for further Education, Teachers Training Colleges, Technical
249
College, Exhibition Halls Dentist Surgeries, Administrative Department of the Hospitals, Service
Stations, Car Parking, Buildings Airports Terminals, Bus Terminals, Factories Employing Handicapped
for Sedentary Works, Large Offices, (with plinth area abode 1400 sq.mt.), Tax Offices, Passport Offices,
Pension Offices, and Labour Offices, Cafes, Banqueting Rooms and Snack Bars (For capacity above
100 dinners).
6. Buildings Requirements:
All Building requirements for building projects proposed under this category shall be conforming to
Annex D, Part 3 of NBC 2016
250
APPENDIX-XVII
(see clause 10(1))
CALCULATION FOR RAINWATER HARVESTING
RAIN WATER HARVESTING CALCULATION
DATE
SI
No.
Soil Type
Infiltration
rate cm/hr
1
High (Sandy soil)
1.25 - 2.54
2
Intermediate (Loam-clay-silt)
0.25 - 1.25
3
Low (clay-clay loam)
0.025 - 0.25
(Source:ASCE Manual of Engg. Practice No.28)
Rain water recharge pit calculation
Permeable factor=
m/hr
Diameter of the recharge pit =
1.5 m
Height of the recharge pit =
3 m
Area of percolation pit
a. Bottom (a) =
3.14 x (1.5/2) x (1.5/2) =
1.77 Sqm
b. Side wall (13)
3.14 x 1.5 x 3.0 =
14.13 Sqm
Total area of percolation = a + b
1.77+ 14.13 =
15.90 Sqm
Quantity of water percolation per hour
0.0125 x 15.90 =
Cum
Quantity of water percolation per day (c)
=
0.20 x 24 =
Cum
Storage capacity in recharge pit
Diameter of recharge pit =
1.5 m
Depth of storage
0.5 m
Storage capacity (d)
3.14 x (1.5/2)x (1.5/2) x 0.5 =
0.88 Cum
Total recharge per day per pit = c+ d =
0.88 Cum
Sump Tank capacity considered *
86 Cum
251
Sl.No
Area Type
Area
in
sqm
Normal rain
fall in mtr.
Year**
Runoff co-
efficient #
Total runoff
available in
cubic mtr/annum
Runoff at hourly
rainfall intensity of
40 mm/hour
1
Roof top
3.631
-
-
2
Roads
3.631
-
-
3
Paved area
3.631
-
-
4
Parks & Green
Belts
3.631
-
-
Total
Total recharge per
day per pit
No. of recharge pits
required.
Rounded off to
Nos
Notes
*
To be calculated as per 1 day's
requirement.
#
Runoff coefficient for various surfaces be taken from Table 10.1
Rain water available from roof top harvesting can be calculated as per Table 24 PART 9 Section 2 of NBC 2016 based
on the rain fall data. The capacity of the storage tank should be decided as per requirement in Chapter 15. Calculation
of storage tank dimension capacity can be referred from CPWD Rain water harvesting manual or any manual published
by competent Authority.
252
APPENDIX- XVIII
(see Table 11.2(4))
SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT (SWM) IN BUILDINGS
ZERO WASTE CITY:
To achieve the concept of ‘Zero Waste City’, the principles of 3-Rs (Reduce-Reuse-Recycle) have to be adopted by all
responsible citizens in their lifestyle. Some of the measures that can be adopted by the citizens to achieve this concept
are;
1. Reuse bags and containers.
2. Reuse bottles, coffee mugs, plates, cutlery, storage containers, etc.
3. Skip on individually wrapped items, specifically food in snack packs or single serving containers (prepacked
salads, sandwiches, dressing, yoghurts, etc.)
4. Avoid single use items (plastic cutlery, straws, plates, cups, etc.)
5. Pay bills online.
6. Go paperless in kitchen.
7. Use own reusable grocery bags and shop locally.
8. Drink loose leaf tea.
9. Cook your own food.
10. Don’t waste food.
11. Prepare your meal plan to avoid wastage.
12. Go vegetarian / vegan, if possible.
13. Grow your own vegetables.
14. Join a vegetable box scheme.
15. Use Silicone Mats instead of Parchment Paper or foil.
16. User menstrual cups / cotton pads.
17. Reduce buying non-essential stuff.
18. Buy reduced items available at discounted rate (before it is thrown away by the supermarket).
19. Use more durable cloths instead of fast fashion cloths which you tend to discard soon.
20. Don’t replace electronic items just because new model has arrived, unless it is essential.
21. Say no to trends (new trend in fashion / gadgets / games etc.)
22. Repair items before buying new ones.
23. Make your own furniture, home decorations from waste materials.
24. Dispose your waste properly and don’t litter.
Other than the above-mentioned conscious changes in the lifestyle, the Municipal Solid Waste (MSW) generated in
buildings (generators) have to be treated at source (Insitu Treatment) to the extent possible, depending upon the type
of waste generated and the type of generator.
253
Additionally, the following guiding principle for solid waste management should be followed.
Solid Waste Management Planning Facilities that generate waste should categorize their waste according to
composition, source, types of wastes produced, generation rates, or according to local regulatory requirements. Effective
planning and implementation of waste management strategies should include
Review of new waste sources during planning, siting, and design activities, including during equipment modifications
and process alterations, to identify expected waste generation, pollution prevention opportunities, and necessary
treatment, storage, and disposal infrastructure. collection of data and information about the process and waste streams
in existing facilities, including characterization of waste streams by type, quantities, and potential use/disposition.
establishment of priorities based on a risk analysis that takes into account the potential environmental, health and
safety (EHS) risks during the waste cycle and the availability of infrastructure to manage the waste in an
environmentally sound manner. identify opportunities for at source reduction, as well as reuse and recycling detail
procedures and operational controls for onsite storage. definition of options/procedures/operational controls for
treatment and final disposal
Substituting raw materials or inputs with less hazardous or toxic materials, or with those where processing generates
lower waste volumes. Applying manufacturing process that convert materials efficiently, providing higher product
output yields, including modification of design of the production process, operating conditions, and process controls.
Instituting good housekeeping and operating practices, including inventory control to reduce the amount of waste
resulting from materials that are out-of-date, off specification, contaminated, damaged, or excess to
building/equipment/plant needs. Instituting procurement measures that recognize opportunities to return usable
materials such as containers and which prevents the over ordering of materials. Minimizing hazardous waste generation
by implementing stringent waste segregation to prevent the commingling of non-hazardous and hazardous waste to be
managed
Evaluation of waste production processes and identification of potentially recyclable materials. Identification and
recycling of products that can be reintroduced into the manufacturing process or industrial activity at the site.
Investigation of external markets for recycling by other industrial processing operations located in the neighbourhood
or region of the facility (for example, waste exchange).
COMPONENTS OF SWM:
The various components of Solid Waste Management (SWM) System in buildings are as follows;
1. Categorisation of buildings generating Municipal Solid Waste
2. Categorisation of Solid Waste generated in buildings
3. Quantification of Solid Waste in buildings
4. Primary Segregation of Waste at Source
5. Collection of Waste from apartments / premises
6. Secondary Segregation at Treatment Yard in buildings
7. Treatment of Waste
8. Use of Treated Waste
9. Disposal of Untreated Waste
10. Reports & Registers to be maintained
254
The detailed activities involved in the above components of SWM System are as follows;
I. Categorisation of Buildings Generating Municipal Solid Waste:
The quantity of solid waste generated varies for different types of buildings, based on the use of the building. In case of
mixed-use buildings, the area of each of the following uses are considered separately for implementing SWM system in
the building.
For the purpose of implementing SWM system in the building, the buildings are categorised into;
1. Residential {including apartment buildings)
a)
High Income Group (HIG)
b)
Middle Income Group (MIG)
c)
Low Income Group (LIG) & Economic Weaker Section (EWS)
2. Non-Residential
a)
Mercantile (Wholesale & Retail)
b)
Business (Offices)
c)
Hotels (excluding restaurant & kitchen area)
d)
Educational
e)
Assembly
f)
Restaurants / Fast food outlets
g)
Hospitals
h) Markets (including supermarkets and hypermarkets)
i)
Industrial (including storage & hazardous)
Note: the type and quantity of waste generated in Industrial building depends upon the type of industry and
hence SWM system to be adopted in Industrial buildings has to be assessed on a case-to-case basis and hence
not specified in these byelaws.
II. CATEGORISATION OF SOLID WASTE:
The Solid waste generated in the Units of the PROJECT (including residential apartment buildings) are categorised as
follows and the same shall be managed as specified herein;
1. Organic Waste
a)
Wet waste
e.g. Raw vegetable, meat & fish waste, Leftover cooked or uncooked food, Eggshells, Minced wheat or other
flour, Rotten rice, wheat and other grains, Coffee Powder, pet poop / waste & litter etc.
Note: pet poop / waste litter should be put in the WC and the litter can be put along with wet waste if the litter
used is biodegradable.
255
b)
Dry waste
i.
Combustible (non-recyclable / non-reusable with low calorific value). This is further sub divided into;
(a) Dry waste from Wet waste
e.g. Fruit peels (Orange, Lemon, pomegranate, Watermelon, pineapple etc.), Sugarcane husk, etc.
(b) Other Combustible Organic Dry Wastes.
e.g. curry leaf plant stem / coconut husk / coconut shell / used tender coconut husk / Used Tea
Bags / Paper cups, plates & spoons / Pieces of Waste paper and cartons / Pieces of Rags and
ropes / pieces of waste cloth / face mask / hair, etc.
ii.
Reusable/Recyclable waste
e.g. Carton boxes (wooden, cardboards, etc.) / Rags & Ropes / Papers (including newspapers) etc.
2. Inorganic Waste
a)
Dry waste
i.
Combustible (non-recyclable / non-reusable) waste with low calorific value
e.g., Food wrapping boxes and plastic foils / Composite paper items (including takeaway food packing
boxes), Dry food packets (e.g., of bread, biscuits, ready to eat items, without food items) etc.,
ii.
Combustible (non-recyclable / non-reusable) waste with high calorific value
e.g., RDF / Rubber (including worn out tyres) / Thermocol / Broken Plastic Carton Boxes / Foam
items, etc.
iii.
Reusable/Recyclable waste
e.g. Plastic items (including milk covers, water bottles & other bottles, Broken Stationery like pen,
pencil, eraser etc.) / Glass items (including broken glasses) / Broken or unusable utensils / Tin items
(including aluminum wraps) / PoP / Electric wires etc.
b)
Sanitary waste
e.g. Ladies, Children and Adult Napkins
c)
Biomedical waste
e.g. Bandages / Needles or syringes / medicines etc.
d) E-waste
e.g. CFL and tube lights / Computer and accessories waste (including printer cartridges) / Other electronic
items.
e)
Hazardous waste
e.g. Paints, batteries, solvents, cleaning agents, pesticides, waste oil (of generator) etc.
256
3. Inert Waste
e.g. Soil, sand, broken stones, waste mortar, hardened cement, etc.
4. Garden waste
Garden waste (branches & roots and leaves & flowers)
For segregation of Solid waste into different categories at source and storage Solid Waste Management Model bye
laws 2019 shall be followed.
III. QUANTIFICATION OF SOLID WASTE:
The estimated quantities of waste generated from various types of buildings are as follows;
1. Residential Buildings (including apartment buildings):
a)
Assumption made for Solid waste generated for Residential buildings (as per NBC 2016, Part 9, Section 3,
Solid Waste Management)
Per capita Solid waste generated (kg/person/day)
HIG
MIG
LIG & EWS
0.45 Kg
0.40 Kg
0.35 Kg
b)
The diversity in occupancy is also considered for assessing the quantity of waste generated in apartment
buildings as follows;
HIG
MIG
LIG & EWS
80%
90%
100%
c)
The estimated quantity of various types of wastes generated in residential buildings is provided in
Annexure-XVIII-A;
2. Non-Residential Buildings:
The estimated quantity of various types of wastes generated in Non-Residential buildings (except for Industrial
buildings) is provided in Annexure-XVIII-B
3. Garden Waste:
Garden waste is estimated to be 3 Kgs / Sqm of garden / landscape area per year, out of which 10% is
considered as branches & roots and 90% considered as leaves and flowers.
Garden waste per day = Landscape area in Sqm x 3 kg per Sqm per year / 365.
257
NBC 2016Part 9 Plumbing services, section 5, the following municipal refuse generation rates are
recommended:
a)
Residential refuse : 0.3 to 0.6 kg/capita/day
b)
Commercial refuse : 0.1 to 0.2 kg/capita/day
c)
Street sweepings
: 0.05 to 0.2 kg/capita/ day
d)
Institutional refuse : 0.05 to 0.2 kg/capita/ day
Out of the total solid waste generated, 40 percent may be taken as organic waste and 60 percent as inorganic
waste approximately. Estimation of waste generation based above table and diversity in occupancy is provided
in Annexure-XVIII-A & B.
IV. PRIMARY SEGREGATION OF WASTE AT SOURCE:
The waste generated in the building have to be segregated by the occupants of the residential apartments / commercial
premises / other buildings and the waste generated in the common areas and yard of the building should be segregated
by the concerned staff of the Building Management, as follows;
1. The wet waste [II(1)(a)] [including the dry waste from the wet waste – II(1)(b)(i)(a)] shall be kept in the designated
bin (without plastic cover).
2. All types of dry wastes {II(1)(b) [excluding II(1)(b)(i)(a)]& II(2)(a)} shall be kept in the designated bin (without
plastic cover).
3. Sanitary waste [II(2)(b)] shall be wrapped in paper.
4. Biomedical waste [II(2)(c)] shall be kept in plastic cover.
5. E-waste [II(2)(d)] shall be kept in plastic cover or stored separately.
6. Hazardous waste [II(2)(e)] shall be kept in plastic cover or stored separately.
7. Inert waste [II(3)] shall be kept in plastic cover.
8. Garden waste [II(4)] shall be segregated into leaves & flowers and branches & roots and kept in separate sacks
/ gunny bags.
Note: Premises mentioned in this document refers to premises in non-residential buildings such as retail shops,
offices, restaurants, etc.
V. COLLECTION OF WASTE:
1. Collection of Wet Waste –
The waste collection staff shall collect the wet waste [including the dry waste from the wet waste – [II(1)(b)(i)(a)]
every day from the residential apartments / non-residential premises (at prefixed time, preferably in the
morning and in case of markets and food outlets, both morning and evening). The occupant of the apartment
/ premises shall put the wet waste (from the bin kept in the apartment / premises) into the waste trolley
brought by the waste collection staff.
258
2. Collection of Dry Waste –
The waste collection staff shall collect the dry waste twice a week (or as preferred by the occupants) from the
apartments / premises. The occupant of the apartment / premises shall put the dry waste (from the bin kept
in the apartment / premises) into the waste trolley brought by the waste collection staff.
3. Collection of Sanitary Waste –
The Occupant of the apartment / premises shall deliver the Sanitary waste (wrapped in paper) to the waste
collection staff daily along with the wet waste. The Sanitary waste shall be placed in the designated plastic bag
tied to the waste trolley.
4. Collection of Biomedical Waste –
The Occupant of the apartment / premises shall deliver the Biomedical waste (placed in plastic cover) to the
waste collection staff at the time of delivering the dry waste. The Biomedical waste shall be placed in the
designated plastic bag tied to the waste trolley.
5. Collection of e-Waste –
a)
The Occupant of the apartment / premises shall deliver the e-waste (placed in plastic cover) to the waste
collection staff at the time of delivering the dry waste. The e-waste shall be placed in the designated plastic
bag tied to the waste trolley.
b)
The Occupant shall deliver large size e-waste to the waste treatment yard of the building (to place it in the
designated area).
6. Collection of Hazardous Waste –
The Occupant of the apartment / premises shall deliver the hazardous waste (placed in plastic cover or in
any suitable form) to the waste treatment yard of the building (to place it in the designated area).
7. Collection of Inert Waste –
The Occupant of the apartment / premises shall deliver the Inert waste (placed in plastic cover) to the waste
collection staff at the time of delivering the wet waste. The Inert waste shall be placed in the designated plastic
bag tied to the waste trolley.
8. Collection of Garden Waste –
The Gardner shall deliver the segregated garden waste (branches / roots and leaves / flowers) to the waste
treatment yard every day in sacks / gunny bags.
259
For collection of waste from apartment / premises general Refuse chute system is a convenient and safe mode
of transportation and collection of domestic solid wastes from buildings exceeding 5 storeys from floors at
different heights.
Notes:
1. The wet waste shall not be wrapped in plastic or any other cover while putting in the waste trolley. No other waste
shall be mixed with wet waste.
2. Wastes shall not be kept outside the apartment / premises even if the occupant is not available during the collection
time, to avoid foul smell and littering in the common corridors of the building.
3. If the occupant cannot deliver the wastes to the waste collection staff at the designated time or has any additional
waste to be delivered, he shall deliver the waste to the waste treatment yard of the building (place it in the designated
area).
4. For the buildings where insitu treatment of wet waste, dry waste and sanitary waste is not done, the respective wastes
shall be disposed to the decentralised / centralised treatment yard or handed over to the collection agency authorised by
the local authority, after segregation.
VI. SECONDARY SEGREGATION AT TREATMENT YARD
The secondary segregation is done at the treatment yard provided in the project and in the decentralised and centralised
treatment yards of the local authority.
1. Wet Waste Segregation
a)
The wet waste collected shall be dumped in the segregation tank of the treatment yard and rechecked for
any inorganic material or other types of wastes. Any such material / wastes found in the wet waste shall
be removed, cleaned and placed in the respective category of waste.
b)
The dry waste from wet waste specified in [II(1)(b)(i)(a)] shall be removed from the wet waste and placed in
the designated place (for incineration), after cleaning & drying.
c)
The wet waste shall be put in bins for use as animal feed (to be delivered to the respective agencies, if
required) and the balance wet waste shall be stored in bins for treatment.
2. Dry Waste Segregation
a)
The Dry waste collected shall be dumped in the designated sorting area of the treatment yard to segregate
the waste into Combustible Dry Waste of low calorific value [II(1)(b)(i), II(2)(a)(i) and II(4)], Dry Waste of
high calorific value [II(2)(a)(ii)] and Reusable / Recyclable Dry Waste [specified in II(1)(b)(ii) and II(2)(a)(iii)].
b)
All the incinerable wastes [II(1)(b)(i), II(2)(a)(i) and II(4)] shall be put in sacks / gunny bags and stored
separately in the treatment yard for incineration.
c)
The Reusable / Recyclable Dry Waste shall be put in sacks / gunny bags separately, based on the type of
waste and stored in the treatment yard, to be disposed to the recyclers.
3. Other Waste Segregation
260
All other wastes collected shall be checked to ascertain that the wastes are segregated as per the categories
mentioned above and stored separately and handed over to the agencies authorised by the local authority.
The segregation by manual or machinery, dry waste segregation MRF facility and other waste by authorised
vendors as notified by KSPCB or Government should be followed.
VII. TREATMENT OF WASTE
The following wastes are treated in the Insitu facility (of generators) or in the decentralised treatment yard or in the
centralised treatment yard;
1. Wet Waste [II(1)(a)]
2. Dry Waste [II(1)(b)(i) & II(2)(a)(i)(ii)]
3. Sanitary waste [II(2)(b)]
4. Garden waste [II(4)]
The above wastes are treated in the following manner;
1. Wet Waste [II(1)(a)] –
a)
It is preferred that wet waste is treated Insitu for all types and sizes of buildings.
b)
Buildings having total construction area above 5000.00 Sqm shall compulsorily have Insitu facility of
treatment of wet Waste.
c)
The various types of suggested treatments for wet waste are provided in Appendix-XVIII-A
2. Combustible Dry Waste of low calorific value [II(1)(b)(i) & II(2)(a)(i)]
a)
Non-Recyclable & Non-Reusable Dry Waste of low calorific value shall be permitted to be incinerated as per
the guidelines specified by CPCB.
b)
Buildings having total construction area above 50000.00 Sqm shall compulsorily install such incinerators
in the project.
c)
The requirements / specification of incinerators are provided in Appendix-XVIII-B
3. Combustible Dry Waste of high calorific value [II(2)(a)(ii)]
a)
Non-Recyclable & Non-Reusable Dry Waste of high calorific value shall be used for Pyrolysis Plants or any
other Waste to Energy (WtE) plants installed in the Centralised Treatment Plant.
4. Sanitary Waste [II(2)(b)] –
a)
The Sanitary Waste shall be permitted to be incinerated as per the guidelines specified by CPCB.
b)
Buildings having total construction area above 50000.00 Sqm shall compulsorily install such incinerators
in the project.
The treatment of waste should be carried out as per Karnataka Solid Waste Management Model Bye laws 2019 or as
notified by the competent Authority.
VIII. USE OF TREATED WASTE
261
The treated wet waste (after each cycle) shall be dried and sieved to be used as Manure. The Manure (generated in the
Project and in the decentralised / centralised treatment yard) shall be used for the gardens / landscape areas and the
excess manure may be sold to prospective purchasers and shall comply with SWM model bye laws, 2019 and IS 16556
2016 manure quality generation.
VIII. DISPOSAL OF WASTE
The wastes that are not treated Insitu or in the decentralised / centralised yards of the local authority shall be disposed
off as follows;
1. Reusable / Recyclable Dry Waste
The Reusable / Recyclable Dry Waste [specified in I(1)(b)(ii) and I(2)(a)(iii)] shall be disposed off to vendors
approved by the local authority.
2. Biomedical Waste, E-Waste and Hazardous Waste
These waste which are stored separately ( insitu or in the decentralised / centralised treatment yard) shall be
disposed off to the collection centres of the local authority periodically (depending upon the quantity of waste
generated).
3. Inert Waste
The inert waste shall be dumped in authorised landfill sites by the authorised transporters.
Note: The plastic covers shall be cleaned and stored separately in the treatment yard. The apartment / premises owners
can reuse these covers for storing the wastes.
All waste disposal must adhere to the Karnataka Municipalities Solid Waste Management Model Bye-Laws, 2019.
REPORTS TO BE GENERATED / REGISTERS TO BE MAINTAINED
The formats of all the reports to be generated / Registers to be maintained by the generators are provided as Annexure
-XVIII-E.
ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT OF MSW FOR NEW BUILDINGS
1. The details of the new building shall be entered in the format provided as Annexure-XVIII-F1 (for residential
buildings) and Annexure-XVIII-F2 (for non-residential buildings) for assessing the quantity of MSW generated
in the building and for proposed management system of MSW.
a)
For Residential buildings (for each block, in case of multiple blocks in a project and for the residential
portion of the building in case of mixed-use building):
i.
The following general information of the Project to be entered in Table-1 of Annexure-XVIII-F1
●
Project Name
●
Address & Location of the project
●
Select Building category (HIG, MIG, LIG / EWS)
●
Diversity of Occupancy
ii.
The following details to be entered in Table-2 of Annexure-XVIII-F1
●
No. of dwelling units (for each type of dwelling units)
●
Landscape area provided in the project.
262
iii.
Based on the quantities of various types of wastes generated in the project as per Table-3 of
Annexure-XVIII-F1, propose the necessary treatments and disposal of wastes, as specified in
Appendix-XVIII-A, Appendix-XVIII-B and as per Clause VIII of this Appendix.
b)
For Non-Residential buildings (for each type of non-residential block, in case of multiple blocks in a
project and for the each type of non-residential portion of the building in case of mixed-use building):
i.
The following general information of the Project to be entered in Table-1 of Annexure-XVIII-F -
XVIII-F2
●
Project Name
●
Address & Location of the project
●
Building Use / Type of Building
●
Diversity of Occupancy
ii.
The following details to be entered in Table-2 of Annexure-XVIII-F2
●
Premises Area
●
Landscape area provided in the project.
iii.
Based on the quantities of various types of wastes generated in the project, as per Table-3 of
Annexure-XVIII-F2, propose the necessary treatments and disposal of wastes, as specified in
Appendix-XVIII-A , Appendix-XVIII-B and as per Clause VIII of this Appendix.
Quantity and characteristics of municipal solid waste - Dependable long-term data on quantity
and characteristics of Muncipal solid waste is essential for effective planning. The Local Authority
should chalk out a plan for quality and quantity check round the year, so that seasonal variations
are captured. This should be repeated once in 3 years. After the first year, data collection would
get streamlined and become easier for subsequent years.
263
From
wet
waste
(1.b.i.a)
Other
combust
ible
wastes
(1.b.i.b)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
=A+B+C+D
+E+F
+G+H+I+J
+K+L
N = B + C+ E
O
P
Q = N + O
1
HIG
54.00% 6.00%
8.50%
9.00%
4.50%
3.00%
6.00% 6.25% 0.75% 0.25% 0.13%
1.62%
100.00%
19.00%
2
MIG
62.00% 5.00%
7.00%
7.00%
4.25%
2.50%
4.75% 5.00% 0.40% 0.10% 0.01%
1.99%
100.00%
16.25%
3
LIG & EWS
66.00% 4.00%
6.50%
6.50%
4.00%
2.00%
4.50% 4.00% 0.35% 0.05% 0.01%
2.09%
100.00%
14.50%
1
Organic Waste
1.a
1.b
Dry waste
1.b.i.a Form wet waste - Fruit peels (Orange, Lemon, pomegranate, Watermelon, pineapple etc.), Sugarcane husk, etc.
1.b.i.b
1.b.ii Dry waste - ( reusable/ recyclable ) -Carton boxes (wooden, cardboards, etc.) / Rags & Ropes / Papers (including newspaper) etc.
2
Inorganic Waste
2.a
Dry waste
2.a.i
2.a.ii
2.a.iii
2.b Sanitary Waste - Ladies, Children and Adult Napkins
2.c
Biomedical waste - Bandages, Needles or syringes, Medicines, etc.
2.d E-Waste - CFL and tube lights, Computer and accessories waste (including printer cartridges), Other electronic items
2.e Hazardous Waste - Paints, Batteries, Solvents, Cleaning agents, Pesticides, waste oil (of Generator), etc
3
Inert Waste - Soil, Sand, Broken stones, waste mortar, hardened cement, etc
4
Garden Waste
Garden waste considered 3kg per Sqm per Year, inwhich 10% considered as branches/ roots and 90% considered as leaves.
Garden waste per day (Landscape area x 3kg per Sqm per year / 365)
yclable/ non-reusable) - Curry leaf plant stem/ coconut husk/ coconut shell/ used tender coconut husk/ Used tea bags/ Paper cups, plates & spoons/ Pieces of waste paper and cartons/ P
Wet Waste - Raw vegetable, Meat & Fish waste, Leftover cooked or uncooked food, Eggshells, Minced wheat or other flour, Rotten rice, wheat and other grains, Coffee
powder, pet poop/waste & litter, etc.
Total
Combust
ible Dry
Waste
including
garden
waste
ANNEXURE - VIIIA
(Combustible)
Dry Waste (1.b)
(Reusabl
e /
Recyclab
le)
(1.b.ii)
Dry Waste (2.a)
Reusabl
e /
Recycla
ble
waste
(2.a.iii)
Combustible
(non-
recyclable/no
n-reusable)
waste with
High calorific
Combustible
(non-
recyclable/no
n-reusable)
waste with
Low calorific
Branche
s /roots Leaves
Sl No
ESTIMATED QUANTITY OF VARIOUS TYPES OF WASTE GENERATED IN RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
Garden waste
considered 3kg
per Sqm per
Year, in which
10% considered
Combustible (non-recyclable/ non-reusable)(waste with low calorifc value) -Food wrapping boxes and plastic foils/ Composite paper items (including takeaway food packing
Reusable/ recyclable - Plastic items (Including milk covers, water bottles & other bottles, Broken stationary like pen, pencil, eraser etc)/ Glass items including broken glasses) /
Broken or unusable utensils / Tin items (including aluminum wraps) / POP/ Electric wires, etc.
Combustible (non-recyclable/ non-reusable)(waste with high calorific value) -RDF / Rubber (including worn out tyres) / Thermocol / Broken Plastic Carton Boxes / Foam items,
Total
Combust
ible Dry
Waste
Garden Waste (4)
Wet
Waste
(1.a)
Sanita
ry
Wast
e
(2.b)
Biome
dical
waste
(2.c)
E-
Waste
(2.d)
Type of Building
Organic Waste (1)
Inorganic Waste (2)
Inert
Waste
(3)
Total
Waste
Hazard
ous
Waste
(2.e)
264
From
wet
waste
(1.b.i.a)
Other
combust
ible
wastes
(1.b.i.b)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
=A+B+C+D
+E+F
+G+H+I+J
+K+L
N = B + C+ E
O
P
Q = N + O
1
Mercantile
(Wholesale &
Retail)
0.00%
0.00%
2
Business (Offices)
0.00%
0.00%
3
Hotels
(Excluding
restaurant &
kitchen area)
0.00%
0.00%
4
Educational
0.00%
0.00%
5
Assembly
0.00%
0.00%
6
Restaurants / Fast
food outlets
0.00%
0.00%
7
Hospitals
0.00%
0.00%
8
Markets (including
supermarkets and
hypermarkets)
0.00%
0.00%
9
Industrial (including
storage &
hazardous)
0.00%
0.00%
1
Organic Waste
1.a
Wet Waste - Raw vegetable, Meat & Fish waste, Leftover cooked or uncooked food, Eggshells, Minced wheat or other flour, Rotten rice, wheat and other grains, Coffee powder, pet poop/waste & litter, etc.
1.b
Dry waste
1.b.i.a Form wet waste - Fruit peels (Orange, Lemon, pomegranate, Watermelon, pineapple etc.), Sugarcane husk, etc.
1.b.i.b
1.b.ii Dry waste - ( reusable/ recyclable ) -Carton boxes (wooden, cardboards, etc.) / Rags & Ropes / Papers (including newspaper) etc.
2
Inorganic Waste
2.a
Dry waste
2.a.i
2.a.ii
2.a.iii
2.b
2.c
Biomedical waste - Bandages, Needles or syringes, Medicines, etc.
2.d
E-Waste - CFL and tube lights, Computer and accessories waste (including printer cartridges), Other electronic items
2.e
Hazardous Waste - Paints, Batteries, Solvents, Cleaning agents, Pesticides, waste oil (of Generator), etc
3
Inert Waste - Soil, Sand, Broken stones, waste mortar, hardened cement, etc
4
Garden Waste
Garden waste considered 3kg per Sqm per Year, inwhich 10% considered as branches/ roots and 90% considered as leaves.
Garden waste per day (Landscape area x 3kg per Sqm per year / 365)
Dry waste - Combustible (non-recyclable/ non-reusable) - Curry leaf plant stem/ coconut husk/ coconut shell/ used tender coconut husk/ Used tea bags/ Paper cups, plates & spoons/
Pieces of waste paper and cartons/ Pieces of Rags and ropes/ hair, etc.
Sanitary Waste - Ladies, Children and Adult Napkins
Total
Combust
ible Dry
Waste
including
garden
waste
ANNEXURE - VIIIB
(Combustible)
Dry Waste (1.b)
(Reusabl
e /
Recyclab
le)
(1.b.ii)
Dry Waste (2.a)
Reusabl
e /
Recycla
ble
waste
(2.a.iii)
Combustible
(non-
recyclable/n
on-reusable)
waste with
High
Combustibl
e (non-
recyclable/
non-
reusable)
waste with
Branche
s /roots Leaves
Sl No
ESTIMATED QUANTITY OF VARIOUS TYPES OF WASTE GENERATED IN NON-RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS (EXCEPT INDUSTRIAL BUILDING)
Garden waste
considered 3kg
per Sqm per
Year, inwhich
10% considered
as branches/
roots and 90%
considered as
leaves.
Garden waste
per day
(Landscape area
x 3kg per Sqm
per year / 365)
Combustible (non-recyclable/ non-reusable)(waste with low calorifc value) -Food wrapping boxes and plastic foils/ Composite paper items (including takeaway food packing
boxes), Dry food packets (e.g, of bread, biscuits, ready to eat items without food items), etc.
Reusable/ recyclable - Plastic items (Including milk covers, water bottles & other bottles, Broken stationary like pen, pencil, eraser etc)/ Glass items including broken glasses)
/ Broken or unusable utensils / Tin items (including aluminum wraps) / POP/ Electric wires, etc.
Combustible (non-recyclable/ non-reusable)(waste with high calorific value) -RDF / Rubber (including worn out tyres) / Thermocol / Broken Plastic Carton Boxes / Foam
items, etc.
Total
Combust
ible Dry
Waste
Garden Waste (4)
Wet
Waste
(1.a)
Sanita
ry
Wast
e
(2.b)
Biome
dical
waste
(2.c)
E-
Wast
e
(2.d)
Type of Building
Organic Waste (1)
Inorganic Waste (2)
Inert
Waste
(3)
Total
Waste
Hazard
ous
Waste
(2.e)
265
Appendix-XVIII-A
VARIOUS TYPES OF SUGGESTED TREATMENTS FOR WET WASTE
Option-1 (Using Bins for composting with larvae of Black Soldier Flies)
Wet Waste is treated with Larvae of Black Soldier Flies (BSF) in Bins of various sizes. The usual sizes of Bins
are 15 Kgs, 30 Kgs and 45 Kgs. For large generators, concrete structures of suitable sizes may constructed.
The procedure followed for the treatment and disposal of Wet Waste is as follows;
a)
The Wet Waste is properly segregated at source (Primary Segregation inside the premises /
apartments) and rechecked in the treatment yard segregation tank.
b)
The orange and lemon peels, banana leaves, stems of curry leaf plant, coconut husk etc. are
removed from the wet waste, washed and dried separately for incineration.
c)
The Wet Waste and the dried items of (b) above are weighed separately and entered in the register.
d) The Wet Waste is then Shredded for reducing the volume and for easy decomposition /
consumption by the Larvae. Shredding reduces the volume of waste by about 20 %.
e)
The Wet Waste has to be dumped in each pair of bins (the bins have to be numbered Bin A1 &
A2 / B1 & B2 …. etc.) – To be marked on the Bin) as follows;
Sl.
No.
Days
Quantity of
Waste in Bin
A1 / B1 / …
etc.
(Kgs)
Quantity of
Waste in Bin
A2 / B2 / …
etc.
(Kgs)
Remarks
15
Kgs
30
Kgs
45
Kgs
15
Kgs
30
Kgs
45
Kgs
1
Day 1 to
Day 15
12
24
36
0
0
0
3kgs, 6kgs and 9kgs of Wet Waste is
dumped in the additional bin for the bin
sizes of 15 kgs, 30 kgs and 45 kgs
respectively, for the waste in excess of
12kgs, 24kgs and 36kgs.s
2
Day 16 to
Day 30
15
30
45
0
0
0
3
Day 31 to
Day 45
3
6
9
12
24
36
266
4
Day 46 to
Day 60
0
0
0
15
30
45
50% of waste to be removed from Bin A1 on
55th& 60th day
5
Day 61 to
Day 75
12
24
36
3
6
9
6
Day 76 to
Day 90
15
30
45
0
0
0
50% of waste each to be removed from Bin
A2 on 85th & 90th day
7
Day 91 to
Day 105
3
6
9
12
24
36
8
Day 106 to
Day 120
0
0
0
15
30
45
50% of waste each to be removed from Bin
A1 on 115th & 120th day
9
Day 121 to
Day 135
12
24
36
3
6
9
10
Day 136 to
Day 150
15
30
45
0
0
0
50% of waste each to be removed from Bin
A2 on 145th& 150th day
The process to be repeated in the above sequence
Note: 10% of cocopeat by weight of the wet waste has to be spread on the wet waste dumped in the Bin.
1. The waste removed from the bin (25% to 50% removed each time) has to be weighed and recorded.
Thereafter, the removed waste has to be dried in drying trays (covered with tarpaulin, if required, to
avoid getting wet during rains) for five days. Ensure that all the larvae of BSF are dead. The waste in
the drying trays has to be stirred 3 times a day for faster drying.
2. The dried waste has to be sieved (using sieve) and the fine waste (manure) has to be weighed and
stored in gunny bags (after recording), to be used as manure.
3. The residue of sieved manure (with the dead Larvae) shall be further shredded in the Shredder and
sieved to get additional quantity of manure and the final residue shall be incinerated or used for
gardening (after recording the weight).
4. Excess manure may be sold to required persons.
Option-2 (Using Automatic / Semi-Automatic Bio-Converter)
a)
The wet waste has to be placed in the Bio-Converter and mixed with saw dust or dry manure (of
the previous day’s) to achieve reasonable dryness to the waste to be treated.
b)
The wet waste is processed for a period of 4 hours to 8 hours or as per the manufacturer’s
specification, till the manure of required consistency is achieved.
c)
The treated waste is removed from the Bio-Converter and dried in open air till the manure is fully
dry.
267
d) The waste from the Bio-Converter is sieved (using sieve) and the fine waste (manure) has to be
weighed and stored in gunny bags (after recording), to be used as manure.
e)
The residue of sieved manure (with the dead Larvae) shall be further shredded in the Shredder
and sieved to get additional quantity of manure and the final residue shall be incinerated or used
for gardening (after recording the weight).
f)
Excess manure may be sold to required persons.
Appendix-XVIII-B
REQUIREMENTS / SPECIFICATION OF INCINERATORS
Standards for incineration:
The Emission from incinerators /thermal technologies in Solid Waste treatment/disposal facility shall meet
the following standards, namely:
Parameter
Emission Standard
(1)
(2)
(3)
Particulates
50 mg/Nm³
Standard refers to half hourly average value
HCl
50 mg/Nm³
Standard refers to half hourly average value
SO₂
200 mg/Nm³
Standard refers to half hourly average value
CO
100 mg/Nm³
Standard refers to half hourly average value
50 mg/Nm³
Standard refers to daily average value
Total Organic Carbon
20 mg/Nm³
Standard refers to half hourly average value
HF
4 mg/Nm³
Standard refers to half hourly average value
NOx (NO and NO₂
expressed as NO₂)
400 mg/Nm³
Standard refers to half hourly average value
Total dioxins and furans
0.1 ng TEQ/Nm³
Standard refers to 6-8 hours sampling. Please refer
guidelines for 17 concerned congeners for toxic
equivalence values to arrive at total toxic equivalence.
Cd + Th + their
compounds
0.05 mg/Nm³
Standard refers to sampling time anywhere between
30 minutes and 8 hours.
Hg and its compounds
0.05 mg/Nm³
Standard refers to sampling time anywhere between
30 minutes and 8 hours.
Sb + As + Pb + Cr + Co
+ Cu + Mn + Ni + V +
their compounds
0.05 mg/Nm³
Standard refers to sampling time anywhere between
30 minutes and 8 hours.
Note: All values corrected to 11% oxygen on a dry basis.
Note:
1. Suitably designed pollution control devices shall be installed or retrofitted with the incinerator to
achieve the above emission limits.
2. Waste to be incinerated shall not be chemically treated with any chlorinated disinfectants.
3. Incineration of chlorinated plastics shall be phased out within two years.
4. If the concentration of toxic metals in incineration ash exceeds the limits specified in the Hazardous
Waste (Management, Handling and Trans boundary Movement) Rules, 2008, as amended from time
to time, the ash shall be sent to the hazardous waste treatment, storage and disposal facility.
5. Only low sulphur fuel like LDO, LSHS, Diesel, bio-mass, coal, LNG, CNG, RDF and bio-gas shall be
used as fuel in the incinerator.
6. The CO2 concentration in tail gas shall not be more than 7%.
268
7. All the facilities in twin chamber incinerators shall be designed to achieve a minimum temperature
of 950°C in secondary combustion chamber and with a gas residence time in secondary
combustion chamber not less than 2 (two) seconds.
8. Incineration plants shall be operated (combustion chambers) with such temperature, retention time
and turbulence, as to achieve total Organic Carbon (TOC) content in the slag and bottom ash less
than 3%, or the loss on ignition is less than 5% of the dry weight.
9. Odour from sites shall be managed as per guidelines of CPCB issued from time to time.
Ref: Solid waste management Rules, 2016 (MoEF&CC Notification dated 08th April 2016).
Operating Standards:
(Ref: CPCB website – Standards - Common HW Incinerators - Annexure 1)
1. All the facilities shall be designed to achieve a minimum temperature of 1100°C in secondary
combustion chamber and with a gas residence time in secondary combustion chamber not less than
2 (two) seconds.
2. The incineration facilities after initial operation of minimum one year, as per the guidelines and
standards, can submit a proposal for relaxation in temperature and retention time requirement if it
can be demonstrated that the flue gas standards and operation standards can be complied with at
lower temperatures and residence times. The State Pollution Control Board / Pollution Control
Committee, upon successful demonstration of compliance with flue gas standards by the facility, can
recommend the proposal made by the incineration facility for relaxation in temperature and residence
time, but in any case not less than 950oC and 1.5 seconds, for the consideration and approval of the
Central Board.
3. Incineration plants shall be operated (combustion chambers) with such temperature, retention time
and turbulence, so as to achieve Total Organic Carbon (TOC) content in the slag and bottom ashes
less than 3%, or their loss on ignition is less than 5% of the dry weight of the material.
4. Guidelines published by the Central Board from time to time for common incineration facilities shall
be referred for implementation.
5. All the project proposals submitted for establishment of the common incineration facilities shall be
examined and cleared by the Task Force constituted by the Central Board.
6. Notification of compliance: The operator of the incinerator shall undertake comprehensive
performance test. Within 90 days of completion of comprehensive performance test, the operator shall
issue a notification of compliance documenting compliance or non-compliance, as the case may be,
for public information / notice.
All norms of Incinerators and operation and maintenance standards should be followed time to time as
notified by the competent authority.
Processing of Domestic Hazardous Waste including Sanitary Waste.-The Domestic Hazardous Waste shall be
processed through TSDF (Treatment Storage Disposal Facility) authorised by the KSPCB, incineration and/or
any other suitable method determined by the KSPCB/CPCB. Sanitary Waste will be processed at the nearest
common biomedical treatment facility and/or incinerators in the Local Authority along with other Bio-medical
Waste generated within the Local Authority. If it is not processed through these methods, it shall be
transported to Sanitary Landfills.
269
270
TABLE - 1
DATE:
Project:
Address/Location:
Building Category:
(HIG / MIG / LIG / EWS)
Diversity of Occupancy *
TABLE - 2
DETAILS OF DWELLING UNITS
Type of Dwelling Units
No. of Dwelling Units
No. of
Persons
per
Unit
Total No.
of
Persons
Total No.
of
Persons
after
Diversity
1 Bedroom
4
0
0
2 Bedroom
5
0
0
3 Bedroom
6
0
0
4 Bedroom
7
0
0
TOTAL
0
0
0
ROUND OFF
* DIVERSITY OF OCCUPANCY
1 HIG (80% Occupancy) =
0.8
2 MIG (90% Occupancy) =
0.9
3 LIG & EWS (100% Occupancy)1.0
Per capita Solid Waste generated (kg/person/day) = 0.3 to 0.6 kg/capita/day (As per Part 9, Section 3, Solid Waste Management of NBC 2016)
1 HIG
(kg/capita/day)
0.45
2 MIG
(kg/capita/day)
0.40
3 LIG & EWS
(kg/capita/day)
0.35
Landscape area provided in the project (Sqm)
# Garden Waste
Garden waste considered 3kg per Sqm per Year, inwhich 10% considered as branches/ roots and 90% considered as leaves.
Garden waste per day (Landscape area x 3kg per Sqm per year / 365)
TABLE - 3
Others
Bins for
Composti
ng with
Larvae of
BSF
method /
Bio-
converter
s
ncinerato
Garde
n
Mulchi
ng ##
Deliver
ed to C
& D
waste
disposa
l yard
Delivere
d to
Ward
level
collectio
n centre
Recycli
ng
agency
1
Organic Waste
1.a Wet Waste
Raw vegetable, meat & fish waste,
Leftover cooked or uncooked food,
Eggshells, Minced wheat or other flour,
Rotten rice, wheat and other grains,
Coffee Powder, Pet poop/waste & litter,
etc.
0.00
Daily
0.00
1.b Dry Waste
1.b.
i
Combustible (non recylcable
/ non reusable)
1.b.
i.a From Wet waste
Fruit peels (Orange, Lemon,
pomegranate, Watermelon, pineapple
etc.), Sugarcane husk, etc.
0.00
Daily
0.00
1.b.
i.b Other combustible wastes
Curry leaf plant stem/ coconut husk/
coconut shell/ used tender coconut husk/
Used tea bags/ Paper cups, plates &
0.00
Daily
0.00
1.b.
ii Reusable/Recyclable
Carton boxes (wooden and cardboards,
etc) / Rags & Ropes / Papers (including
newspapers) etc.
0.00
Daily
0.00
2
Inorganic Waste
2.a Dry waste
2.a.
i
Combustible (non recyclable
/ non reusable) with low
calorific value
Food wrapping boxes and plastic foils/
Composite paper items (including
takeaway food packing boxes), Dry food
0.00
Daily
0.00
2.a.
ii
Combustible (non recyclable
/ non reusable) with high
calorific value
RDF / Rubber (including worn out tyres) /
Thermocol / Broken Plastic Carton Boxes /
Foam items, etc.
0.00
Daily
0.00
2.a.
iii Reusable / Recyclable waste
Plastic items (including milk covers, water
bottles & other bottles, Broken Stationery
like pen, pencil, eraser etc.) / Glass items
(including broken glasses) / Broken or
unusable utensils / Tin items (including
aluminium wraps) / POP / Electric wires,
etc
0.00
Weekly
0.00
2.b Sanitary Waste
Ladies, Children and Adult Napkins
0.00
Daily
0.00
2.c Biomedical waste
Bandages / Needles or syringes /
medicines, etc.
0.00
Fortnigh
tly
0.00
2.d E-Waste
CFL and tube lights / Computer and
accessories waste (including printer
cartridges) / Other electronic items
0.00
Fortnigh
tly
0.00
2.e Hazardous Waste
Paints, batteries, solvents, cleaning
agents, pesticides, waste oil (of
generator) etc.
0.00
Fortnigh
tly
0.00
3
Inert Waste
Soil, sand, broken stones, waste mortar,
hardened cement, etc
0.00
Weekly
0.00
4
Garden Waste #
a. Branches /roots (10% of total garden
waste)
0.001
0.00
Daily
0.00
b. Leaves (90% of total garden waste)
0.007
0.00
Daily
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
**
##
Quantity of waste = Total No. of persons after diversity x Waste per capita per day (for the building category) x % waste (for the building category as per
Annexure 1)
Only fresh leaves & flowers have to be used for garden mulching. Dry leaves and roots/branches to be used for incinerarion if available or to be sent to
MCC facility.
ANNEXURE XVIII - F1
SOLID WASTE ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT FOR RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
Assumptions made for Solid Waste generated for Residential Buildings:
It is proposed to treat some of the wastes generated in the Project site itself using Bins for composting with Larvae of Black Soldier Flies method (or Bio-
converters machines) and Incinerator and the remaining wastes shall be disposed to the various facilities of MCC as mentioned below.
Solid waste from Residential Buildings during operation phase are classified as follows for segregation and treatment:
MCC Facility
Garden Waste
Total Quantity of Waste Generated / Day (kg)
Sl. No
Type of Waste
Quantit
y of
Waste
(%)
(refer
Annexur
e 1)
Quantit
y of
Waste
(Kgs)**
Frequen
cy of
Treatme
nt /
Disposal
Type of Treatment
Insitu facility
271
TABLE - 1
DATE:
Project:
Address/Location:
Type of Building:
Diversity of Occupancy *
TABLE - 2
DETAILS OF PREMISES & OCCUPANTS
Type of premises use
Premises area
Total No.
of
Persons
Total No.
of
Persons
after
Diversity
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TOTAL
0
0
0
ROUND OFF
Per capita Solid Waste generated (kg/person/day) = 0.3 to 0.6 kg/capita/day (As per Part 9, Section 3, Solid Waste Management of NBC 2016)
1 HIG
(kg/capita/day)
0.45
2 MIG
(kg/capita/day)
0.40
3 LIG & EWS
(kg/capita/day)
0.35
Landscape area provided in the project (Sqm)
# Garden Waste
Garden waste considered 3kg per Sqm per Year, inwhich 10% considered as branches/ roots and 90% considered as leaves.
Garden waste per day (Landscape area x 3kg per Sqm per year / 365)
TABLE - 3
Others
Bins for
Composti
ng with
Larvae of
BSF
method /
Bio-
converter
s
ncinerato
Garde
n
Mulchi
ng ###
Deliver
ed to C
& D
waste
disposa
l yard
Delivere
d to
Ward
level
collectio
n centre
Recycli
ng
agency
1
Organic Waste
1.a Wet Waste
Raw vegetable, meat & fish waste,
Leftover cooked or uncooked food,
Eggshells, Minced wheat or other flour,
Rotten rice, wheat and other grains,
Coffee Powder, Pet poop/waste & litter,
etc.
0.00
Daily
0.00
1.b Dry Waste
1.b.
i
Combustible (non recylcable
/ non reusable)
1.b.
i.a From Wet waste
Fruit peels (Orange, Lemon,
pomegranate, Watermelon, pineapple
etc.), Sugarcane husk, etc.
0.00
Daily
0.00
1.b.
i.b Other combustible wastes
Curry leaf plant stem/ coconut husk/
coconut shell/ used tender coconut husk/
Used tea bags/ Paper cups, plates &
0.00
Daily
0.00
1.b.
ii Reusable/Recyclable
Carton boxes (wooden and cardboards,
etc) / Rags & Ropes / Papers (including
newspapers) etc.
0.00
Daily
0.00
2
Inorganic Waste
2.a Dry waste
2.a.
i
Combustible (non recyclable
/ non reusable) with low
calorific value
Food wrapping boxes and plastic foils/
Composite paper items (including
takeaway food packing boxes), Dry food
0.00
Daily
0.00
2.a.
ii
Combustible (non recyclable
/ non reusable) with high
calorific value
RDF / Rubber (including worn out tyres) /
Thermocol / Broken Plastic Carton Boxes /
Foam items, etc.
0.00
Daily
0.00
2.a.
iii Reusable / Recyclable waste
Plastic items (including milk covers, water
bottles & other bottles, Broken Stationery
like pen, pencil, eraser etc.) / Glass items
(including broken glasses) / Broken or
unusable utensils / Tin items (including
aluminium wraps) / POP / Electric wires,
etc
0.00
Weekly
0.00
2.b Sanitary Waste
Ladies, Children and Adult Napkins
0.00
Daily
0.00
2.c Biomedical waste
Bandages / Needles or syringes /
medicines, etc.
0.00
Fortnigh
tly
0.00
2.d E-Waste
CFL and tube lights / Computer and
accessories waste (including printer
0.00
Fortnigh
tly
0.00
2.e Hazardous Waste
Paints, batteries, solvents, cleaning
agents, pesticides, waste oil (of
generator) etc.
0.00
Fortnigh
tly
0.00
3
Inert Waste
Soil, sand, broken stones, waste mortar,
hardened cement, etc
0.00
Weekly
0.00
4
Garden Waste #
a. Branches /roots (10% of total garden
waste)
0.001
0.00
Daily
0.00
b. Leaves (90% of total garden waste)
0.007
0.00
Daily
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
**
###
Quantity of waste = Total No. of persons after diversity x Waste per capita per day (for the building category) x % waste (for the building
category as per Annexure 1)
Only fresh leaves & flowers have to be used for garden mulching. Dry leaves and roots/branches to be used for incinerarion if available or to be
sent to MCC facility.
ANNEXURE XVIII - F2
SOLID WASTE ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT FOR NON-RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
Assumptions made for Solid Waste generated for Residential Buildings:
It is proposed to treat some of the wastes generated in the Project site itself using Bins for composting with Larvae of Black Soldier Flies method (or Bio-
converters machines) and Incinerator and the remaining wastes shall be disposed to the various facilities of MCC as mentioned below.
Solid waste from Residential Buildings during operation phase are classified as follows for segregation and treatment:
MCC Facility
Garden Waste
Total Quantity of Waste Generated / Day (kg)
Sl. No
Type of Waste
Quantit
y of
Waste
(%)
(refer
Annexur
e 2)
Quantit
y of
Waste
(Kgs)**
Frequen
cy of
Treatme
nt /
Disposal
Type of Treatment
Insitu facility
272
APPENDIX-XIX
(see clause 15(3))
ACCREDITATION OF ENVIRONMENTAL AUDITORS (QUALIFIED BUILDING AUDITORS)
The Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEFCC), through qualified agencies
shall accredit the Qualified Building Environment Auditors (QBEAs). The Qualified Building Environment
Auditors could be a firm /organization or an individual expert, who fulfils the requirements. The Ministry will
implement this process of accreditation through Quality Council of India (QCI), National Productivity Council
or any other organization identified by the Government. The organizations like Indian Green Building Council,
Bureau of Energy Efficiency etc. can also be associated in the process of accreditation, training, and renewal.
The environmental consultants accredited by the QCI for building sector will be qualified as QBEAs. The
QBEAs will meet the following criteria. The accrediting agency can improvise on these criteria.
Qualifications of the Auditor:
a. Education: Architect (Degree or Diploma), Town Planners (Degree), Civil Engineer / Mechanical
Engineer (Degree or Diploma), PG in Environmental Science or any other qualification as per the
scheme of the accreditation.
b. Training: Mandatory training to be given by the accreditation body or their approved training providers.
This will be as per the scheme of the accreditation.
c. Experience: At least 3 years of work experience in the related field or building sector Environment
Impact Assessment consultants accredited by QCI or any other experience criteria as per the scheme
of the accreditation.
d. Infrastructure and equipment: As per the scheme of the accreditation
e. Renewal: The accreditation will be valid for 5 years and will be renewed as per the process developed
under the accreditation scheme.
Accountability/Complaint redressal mechanism: Any complaints regarding the quality of the work of QBEAs
shall be made to the accreditation body. The accreditation body shall evaluate the complaint and take
appropriate action including black listing or cancellation of the accreditation with wide public notice. This
will be in addition to the action at the level of local authority for penalty and blacklisting. The Ministry can
also take such action in case of specific complaint or feedback.
273
APPENDIX-XX
(see clause 15(7))
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING CELL AT THE LEVEL OF THE AUTHORITY
An Environmental Cell shall be setup at the Local Authority level to support compliance and
monitoring of environmental conditions in buildings. The Cell shall also provide assistance in environmental
planning and capacity building within their jurisdiction. The responsibility of this cell would be monitoring
the implementation of this notification and providing an oversight to the Third-Party Auditing process. The
cell will operate under the local authority.
Constitution of the cell:
The cell shall be chaired by the Commissioner of the Local Authority and, TPO shall be the Member
Secretary of the cell.
The cell will comprise of at least 3 dedicated experts in any of the following fields, for every three
years period:
a. Waste management (solid and liquid)
b. Water conservation and management
c. Resource efficiency including Building materials
d. Energy Efficiency and renewable energy
e. Environmental planning including air quality management.
f. Transport planning and management.
The Cell shall induct at least two outside experts as per the requirements and background of
dedicated experts for every three years period. The Cell shall also have Works committee chairman and two
members (one Ruling party Corporator and another Opposition party Corporator) from the Council of the
Authority.
Financial Support:
An additional fee may be charged along with processing fee for building License for integrating
environmental conditions and it’s monitoring. The local authority can fix and revise this additional fee from
time to time. The amount of this fee shall be deposited in a separate bank account and used for meeting the
requirement of salary / emoluments of experts and running the system of online application, verifications
and the Environmental Cell.
Functions of the Cell:
1.
The cell shall be responsible for assessing and appraising the environmental concerns of the area
under their jurisdiction where building activities are proposed. The Cell can evolve and propose
additional environmental conditions as per requirements. These conditions may be area specific and
shall be notified in advance from time to time. These additional conditions shall be approved following
a due consultation process. These environmental conditions will be integrated in building Licenses
by the sanctioning authority.
2.
Develop and maintain an online system for application and payment of fees. The Cell shall maintain
an online database of all applications received, projects approved, the compliance audit report,
274
random inspections made. The Cell shall maintain a portal for public disclosure of project details
including self-certification and compliance audit reports filed by the Qualified Building Environment
Auditors for public scrutiny of compliance of environmental conditions by the project.
3.
Monitoring the work of Environmental Audit process carried by the Qualified Building Auditors.
4.
The Cell shall review the applications; finalize the additional environmental conditions if required
within 15 days of the submission of the application to the local authority.
5.
The Cell shall adopt risk based random selection of projects for verifying on site for certification of
QBA, compliance of environmental conditions and yearly audit report.
6.
The Cell shall recommend to the local authority for financial penalty for non-compliance of
environmental conditions by the project proponent.
7.
The Cell shall recommend to the accrediting body and the local authority against any Qualified
Building Environment Auditor, if any lapse is found in their work.
APPENDIX- XXI
(see Table 14.3 (note i))
CATEGORIES OF MATERIALS OF STORAGE OF WAREHOUSE AS PER COMBUSTION RISK.
A. Non-combustible materials:
Articles (which are Non- Combustible, Non -Flammable, Non -Corrosive, Non -toxic, Non-
poisonous, Non-Explosive) such as Cement, brick, mortar, hardware items, metals in solid bar/metal
goods (excluding those having melting point below 1000 o C)
B. Combustible Materials in following 4 sub categories
Category
Material Specifications
Stacking
Height
Mediu
m
(in m)
High
(in
m)
Category
I
Articles
such
as
Carpets,
Non-
synthetic/synthetic
yarn
and
fabrics.
Mechanical and electrical goods (dominantly
metal
parts),
Glassware
and
crockery,
fiberboards, groceries, metal goods, Papers
other than those listed under categories
Moderate and High, Powdered and canned
foods, Plastic/glass bottles containing non-
flammable liquids, etc.
4
6.5
Category
II
Articles
such
as
Batteries,
Baled
cotton/synthetic fibers, Books, Baled cork,
Baled
waste
paper,
Cartons
containing
alcohols ( in cans/bottles), Cartons of canned
lacquers which dry by solvent evaporation,
Chipboard,
Cardboard
rolls
(horizontally
Stored),
Cereals/Grains/Foodstuff/
Flour/Sugar in sacks, Cellulose/Cellulose
pulp, Electrical goods other than those stated
in Category low, Flammable liquids in non-
combustible
containers,
Leather
goods,
Palletized liquor stocks, Plastics (non-foamed,
other than cellulose nitrate), Rolled pulp and
paper
and
asphalted
paper
(Horizontal
3
5.5
275
storage), Veneer sheets, Wooden patterns,
Metal/wooden furniture with plastic seats,
etc.
Category
III
Articles such as Bitumen/Wax coated paper,
Candles, Carbon black, Card board rolls
(vertically stored), Charcoal, Coal> cellulose
nitrate, Foamed plastic and foam rubber
products, Flammable liquids in combustible
containers, Linoleum products, Matches,
Plastics other than those stated in Category
Moderate,
Rolled pulp
and paper
and
asphalted paper (vertical storage), Rubber
goods including tyres and tubes, Sawn
timber, Ventilated wood stacks, Waxed and
asphalt coated papers and containers in
cartons, Wood wool, wooden pallets and flats
(idle), Ail materials having wrappings or pre-
formed containers of foamed plastics, etc.
2
4.5
Category
IV
Off cuts and random pieces of foamed plastic
or rubber rolls of sheets of foamed plastic or
foamed rubber, Foam mattress, Expanded
polystyrene packaging, Foam upholstery, etc.
1.25
3.5
Explanations:
# The deflector of the sprinkler fitted in the ceiling shall be at more than
1.5 m from the goods stored below. However, in case of jute storage,
no jute stock shall reach within 2 m of the deflectors of the sprinkler
heads.
# In case of storage in racks or shelves, if the height of storage is more
than
what is specified, intermediate sprinklers shall be provided for each
shelf/rack in addition to the ceiling sprinklers and overall design
density
and AMAO shall be maintained as per Table 5 of IS: 15105.
# The aisle width between the storage stacks shall not be less than 2.5
m and the maximum area of each storage stack shall not be more
than 15.0m2. If these parameters are exceeded, the design density
applicable shall be loaded by 2.5 L/min/m2.
# In case of mixed storage (both moderate and high hazard storage) in
buildings, the parameters will be governed by the most hazardous
occupancy
Goods stored not higher
than what is stated above
for the appropriate category
or not higher than the eaves
height of the roofs or within
1 m of a flat ceiling
Whichever is the lowest
shall
be
regarded
as
moderate hazard storage. If
the above conditions are not
met,
the
risk
shall
be
regarded as high hazard
storage
Notes:
1.
Any new use which increase the number of occupants to a figure comparable with other classes
of occupancy shall change the classification of the building to that of the new use (for example,
Warehouse used \ for office purposes).
2.
Ware house buildings shall not include any article which is highly combustible or explosive
materials or products which are liable to bum with extreme rapidity and or which may produce
poisonous fumes or explosions for storage, handling and which involve highly corrosive, toxic or noxious
alkalis, acids or other liquids or chemicals producing flame, fumes and explosive, poisonous, irritant or
corrosive gases; and for the storage, handling of any material producing explosive mixtures of dust
which result in the division of matter in to fine particles subject to spontaneous ignition as such
buildings fall in Hazardous Building Category.
276
FORMS
FORM-I
(see clause 3.10.2, 3.13, 3.16.10(1))
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED AND TO BE ATTACHED TO THE APPLICATION FORM FOR BUILDING
LICENCE AND OTHER COMMON DETAILS REQUIRED FOR ALL NOCS.
A. General Information to be provided (Common for Building Licence and other NOCs):
1. Particulars of Applicant:
a)
Name –
b)
Address –
c)
Contact details –
i. Phone No. (office) –
ii. Phone No. (mobile) –
d)
Identification proof (Aadhaar / Voter ID / Driving Licence / Passport) –
e)
Whether the Applicant is –
i. The owner of the plot -
ii. GPA holder
iii. Promoter, representing the Owner
2. Project Name & Address:
3. Particulars of land:
a)
Survey No. –
b)
Revenue Ward / Village No. –
c)
Taluk –
d)
District –
e)
PID no. (if available) –
f)
Boundary (Checkbandi) –
i. North –
ii. East –
iii. West –
iv. South –
g)
Land Use –
h) Total Extent of Plot –
i. As per Document (Sqm / Cents) –
ii. As per Revenue Records (Sqm / Cents)–
i)
Extent of Karaab land if any –
j)
Extent surrendered for road widening –
i. As per Document (Sqm / Cents) –
ii. As per Enjoyment (surveyed using ETS) (Sqm / Cents) –
k)
Net Extent considered –
i. For Development (as per document) –
ii. For Development (as per enjoyment) –
iii. For Development (for Statutory Approval) –
l)
Extent considered for FAR (for Statutory Approval) –
m) Market value of the plot (as per guideline value published under the Karnataka Stamp Act);
277
i. Value (in Rs./Sqm) –
ii. Reference No. (as per the published list) –
4. Particulars of Approach Road:
a)
No. of Roads abutting the plot (Road 1, Road 2, Road 3, Road 4) –
Note: Roads including lanes from which approaches may not be taken for the plot.
b)
No. of Roads from which approach to the plot is considered (from the total no. of roads abutting
the plot) –
c)
Details of roads abutting the plot –
Road 1 –
i. Road Name and limits –
Note: As specified by MCC and for areas outside MCC limits, as specified in the list
published under Section 4B of Karnataka Stamp Act.
ii. Road Code –
Note: As specified by MCC and for areas outside MCC limits, as specified in the list
published under Section 4B of Karnataka Stamp Act.
iii. Existing road width (m) –
Note: Average width and minimum width to be mentioned in case of varying width of
road.
iv. Proposed road width (m) –
Note: Proposed width as per Master Plan or as proposed by MUDA or as proposed by
MCC, to be mentioned.
Note: Similar details have to be provided for all roads abutting the plot.
d)
Details of exclusive means of access (as per Clause No.4.2 of the ZR), if applicable –
5. Particulars of Building:
a)
No, of Building Blocks –
Note: specify the following details for each block, in case of multiple blocks of buildings
b)
Type of Development proposed for Building Licence (New Construction / Reconstruction - Addition
– Alteration / Revised Licence:
c)
Type of Building (B1, B2, B3, B4, B5) –
d)
Use of Building (Residential / commercial / mixed use / other uses) –
e)
No. of Floors (Basement + Ground + upper floors) –
Note: Specify no. of basement floors, lower ground floor & upper ground floor and mezzanine floor
as applicable
f)
Floor wise details of occupancy / use [as per clause 2(21) of BBL]–
iii. Basement Floor –
Note: Separately to be provided in case of more no. of basement floors
iv. Ground Floor –
Note: Separately to be provided in case of Lower Ground Floor & Upper Ground Floor
v. Mezzanine Floor (if applicable in case of Commercial Buildings) –
278
vi. First Floor –
vii. Second Floor –
viii. Third Floor –
ix. Fourth Floor –
x. Fifth Floor –
Note: Separate Annexure to be provided in case of more no. of floors.
g)
For residential apartment buildings only -
Sl.
No.
Floor
No. of Apartments
I BHK
II BHK
III BHK
IV BHK
V BHK
Total
1
2
3
Total
h) Height of the Building –
i. Height considered (from road / from average level of the ground contiguous to the building) –
ii. Height of the Building (m) –
i)
Plot Coverage –
i. Permitted –
ii. Actual –
j)
Summary of Parking Facility (Detailed calculations provided in Table-1) –
Sl.
No.
Particulars
Parking provisions
Required
Provided
Within the Building
(Covered Parking)
In the Yard
Covered
Open
1.
4-Wheelers
2.
4-Wheeler Visitors
3.
2-Wheelers
4.
Autorickshaws
279
5.
Lorries
6.
Buses
k)
Summary of Power Supply (Detailed calculations provided in _____):
i. Total Power required - _____ KVA
ii. Source (MESCOM / GENERATOR / RENEWABLE ENERGY) –
iii. Transformer capacity - ____ KVA / Not Applicable
iv. Diesel Generator capacity - _____ KVA / Not Applicable
v. Power generated through renewable energy - ______ KVA
l)
Summary of Water Supply (Detailed calculations provided in _____):
i. Source (Open Well / Bore Well / MCC) –
ii. Total Freshwater requirement - ____ KLD
iii. Total Treated water requirement - _____ KLD
m) Summary of Water tanks (Detailed calculations provided in _____):
Sl No
Tank
Sump Capacity
(Litres)
OHT capacity
(Litres)
1
Fire Reserve (including water curtain)
2
Domestic
3
Treated water
n) Staircase details:
Sl.
No.
Staircase
Description
Staircase
Width (m)
No. of Steps (nos.)
Tread
Width
(m)
Riser
Height
(m)
Head
Room
Height
(m)
Handrail
Height
(m)
Flight 1
Flight 2
1.
2.
Note: Details of each staircase of the building have to be provided
o)
Lift Summary (Detailed calculations provided in _____):
280
Sl.
No.
Lift
Lift Well Size
Speed (MPS)
Capacity
(Persons/KG)
1
Passenger Lift 1
2
Passenger Lift 1
3
Passenger Lift 1
4
Service Lift 1
Service Lift 1
6. Details of Professionals on Record (PoR):
b. For drawings
c.
For supervision
d. For structural design
e.
For MEP
Note: Specify any other PoR appointed for the project, as per the Building Byelaws
B. General Documents to be Attached (Common for Building Licence and other NOCs)
1. Copy of the Title document such as Sale Deed, etc.;
2. Copy of the registered document of GPA / authorisation letter, if applicable;
3. Photo and other identity proof of the applicant;
4. RTC or Khata as on date of application;
5. Property Tax paid receipt
6. Joint development Agreement or MOU and affidavit of all the owners of plots amalgamated for approval
of plot;
7. Survey sketch issued by Revenue Department for NA conversion or any other purpose;
8. NA Conversion Order;
9. Structural Stability Certificate from the Structural Engineer
10. Google Location showing project boundaries & coordinates
11. Photographs of the site (minimum 4 nos., each from north, south, east and west) showing the natural
and built developments within the site and also the abutting roads;
12. Copy of the plot approval obtained
13. Project Costing – Table 3
14. Specification of the Building – Table 4
15. Any other documents specified by the Local Authority or notified by the Government;
C. General Drawings to be Attached(Common for Building Licence and other NOCs)
1. Key Plan
2. Site Plan
a)
As per Document
281
b)
As per enjoyment (surveyed using ETS)
c)
As per Drone Survey Map
d)
As per Revenue Records
e)
Superimposed sketch of all the above site plans and showing the boundaries of the final site plan
considered for statutory approval.
f)
Final Site Plan considered for statutory approval.
3. All Floor plans for Parking areas and other uses (Basement floors, Ground floors, upper floors and
terrace floor)
4. Sections of the Building
5. Elevations of the Building
D. General Checklists to be Attached(Common for Building Licence and other NOCs)
(manual checklist is not required since the checking is done online)
E. General Calculation Sheets to be Attached (for Building licence and other NOCs)
1. Table 1
AREA CALCULATION FORMAT FOR COMMERCIAL / RESIDENTIAL PROJECT
FLOOR AREA DETAILS IN sqm
FLOO
R
TOTAL
CONSTRUCTIO
N AREA
EXEMPTED AREA
COMMERCIAL
RESIDENTIAL
NET
FLOOR
AREA
STAIRCASE
/ LIFT
LOBBY
LANDSCAP
E
DUCTS/
CUTOU
T
PARKIN
G
SUB
TOTA
L
SHO
P
ARE
A
TOILE
T
AREA
TOTA
L
FLOO
R
AREA
CIVIC
AMINITE
S
TOTAL
TOTA
L
CAR PARKING CALCULATION
COMMERCIAL PARKING REQUIREMENTS
SHOPS AREA FOR PARKING CALCULATION
=
SQM
CARPARK REQUIREMENT FOR SHOP AREA (1 NO. FOR 50 SQM OF AREA)
=
NOS. (SAY --- NOS)
25% OF TWO WHEELER PARKING REQUIRED
=
NOS.(SAY -- NOS)
SL. NO.
AREA OF APARTMENT
NO. OF
APARTMENT
MULTIPLY FACTOR AS PER Z.R.
CAR PARKING
REQUIRED AS PER
Z.R.
1
<75
0.5
2
75 TO 175
1
3
175>
2
TOTAL
282
10 % VISITORS PARKING FOR RESIDENTIAL APARTMENTS
TOTAL PARKING REQUIRED
25% TWO WHEELER PARKING REQUIRED
TOTAL No.OF PARKING REQUIRED FOR RESIDENTIAL & COMMERCIAL
TOTAL No.OF PARKING PROVIDED
TOTAL No.2 WHEELER REQUIRED FOR RESIDENTIAL & COMMERCIAL
TOTAL No.OF 2 WHEELER PROVIDED
3. Table 3
PROJECT COST
APPROXIMATE COST OF CONSTRUCTION OF THE
PROPOSED RESIDENTIAL BUILDING “-----’ ON LAND SY.NO. --- AT ---- VILLAGE NO----,
MANGALURU TALUK, D.K. DIST.
Total Construction area
-
m2
Cost of Building
Ground Floor Construction area
-
m2
Cost @ Rs. -----/ m2
= Rs.
Upper Floors Construction area
-
m2
Cost @ Rs. ----/ m2
= Rs.
Total cost of building
= Rs
ROUNDED OFF TO Rs. -----------------------------------------ONLY
LAND COST PER CENT = --------PER CENT (S.L NO----- OF SUB REGISTRAR BOOK, MANGALURU CITY/ THALUK -
2018-19)
LAND COST FOR --- CENTS = Rs.
ROUNDED OFF TO Rs. ---------------------------------------- ONLY
TOTAL PROJECT COST = Rs. -
283
ROUNDED OFF TO Rs. ----------------------------------------- ONLY
4. Table 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF COMPONENTS OF BUILDING
The minimum specifications of the various components in different types of buildings shall be specified along
with the application for building licence, selected from the list mentioned herebelow or specified separately.
Sl.
No.
Component
of
Building
Standard Specifications
Specification for the
building
1.
Foundation
Masonry / RCC / Others
2.
Load
bearing
superstructure
Fully RCC / Fully Masonry / RCC columns and
Masonry infill / others
Roof
Tiles / RCC / Others
Main Door Frame
Teak wood / Jungle wood / Aluminum / UPVC
/ Steel / Concrete / Others
Inside Door Frame
Toilet Door Frame
Main Door Shutter
Inside Door Shutter
Toilet Door Shutter
Window Frame
Window Shutter
Flooring for common
areas*
Flooring
for specific
premises*
Flooring for common
toilets *
Flooring for toilets in
specific areas*
Wall
cladding
for
common toilets*
Wall
cladding
for
toilets
in
specific
premises*
Wall
cladding
for
kitchen
Wall cladding for other
areas (specify areas) *
Plumbing Fittings for
common toilets*
Sanitary
fittings
for
common toilets*
Plumbing Fittings for
toilets
in
specific
areas*
Sanitary
fittings
for
toilets
in
specific
areas*
Ceiling painting in Car
Parking areas
Ceiling
painting
in
Common areas
Ceiling
painting
in
Specific areas
wall painting in Car
Parking areas
284
wall
painting
in
Common areas
wall
painting
in
Specific areas
Yard Pavement works
Lift
Transformer
Generator
Water Source
Sewerage System
Fire Fighting System
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable,
details of NOC)
Green cover and tree
plantation
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable,
details to be annexed)
Rain water harvesting
system
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable,
details to be annexed)
Low
water
consumption
plumbing fixtures
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable,
details to be annexed)
Waste water treatment
and reuse
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable,
details to be annexed)
Reduction
of
Hardscape
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable,
details to be annexed)
Solar
water
heating
system
Provided (if provided, details to the annexed) /
Not provided (if not provided, details of
alternate hot water system provided and the
details of additional PV panels provided have to
be specified and annexed)
Solar
Photovoltaic
panels
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable,
details to be annexed)
Low
energy
consumption electrical
fixtures
Energy
efficiency
in
HVAC systems
Lighting of common
areas by LED devices
Organic
waste
management
Compliance
with
ECBC norms
Construction
&
demolition
waste
management
Additional
Specifications**
Specification has to be specified for the
respective component
Note:
1. In case of ‘others’, the specification has to be clearly mentioned.
2. If any of the items are not provided by the Promoter / Owner and the same has to be done by the purchaser
as per his choice, then it has to be mentioned specifically as ‘Purchaser Supply’.
3. In case of ceramic or vitrified or any other tiles used for flooring and dadoing, the minimum size of the tiles
have to be mentioned.
4. ‘*’ if specifications are different for different areas of the Premises or Common areas of the building, details
have to be specified separately.
285
5. ‘**’ in case of additional specifications for Common areas of the building or Premises, details have to be
specified separately.
6. If any changes have to be made in the specifications, the same has to be informed to the Local Authority
and RERA, before executing such changes and after fulfilling the conditions of RERA.
Specifications of the Building
1. Super Structure of the Building
a)
Foundation * (Masonry / RCC / Others)
b)
Load bearing superstructure * (Fully RCC / Fully Masonry / RCC columns and Masonry infill /
others)
c)
Roof * (Tiles / RCC / Others)
d)
Finishing of external surface * (Plastered surface / Granite or Tile cladding / Texture finish /
Glass / ACP or combination of any of the above) – In case of combination, specify the respective
combinations
2. Internal Finishes of the Building
a)
For Common Areas
i.
Main area Flooring * (Cement Mortar / Cement tiles with polishing / Ceramic tiles /
Vitrified tiles / Marble / Granite / Others)
ii.
Toilet Flooring * (Cement Mortar / Cement tiles with polishing / Ceramic tiles / Vitrified
tiles / Marble / Granite / Others)
iii.
Electrical switches (Type of switches – preferred brand name may be mentioned)
iv.
Electrical fixtures (lights / fans / exhaust fans / other fixtures)
v.
Plumbing fixtures (Type of fixtures – preferred brand name may be mentioned)
vi.
Sanitary fixtures (Type of fixtures – preferred brand name may be mentioned)
vii.
Painting (type of painting for ceiling and walls) / Purchaser’s Scope
viii.
Painting (type of painting for ceiling and walls) / Purchaser’s Scope
ix.
Railing for passages * (Glass / S.S / S.S & Glass / Wooden / Aluminium / M.S / Other)
x.
Railing for staircase * (Glass / S.S / S.S & Glass / Wooden / Aluminium / M.S / Other)
b)
For Premises
i.
Entrance Door Frame (Teak wood / Jungle wood / Aluminum / UPVC / Steel / Concrete
/ Others / Purchaser’s Scope)
ii.
Entrance Door Shutter (Teak wood / Jungle wood / Aluminum / UPVC / Steel / Concrete
/ Glass / Others / Purchaser’s Scope)
iii.
Internal Door Frame (including door to balcony) * (Teak wood / Jungle wood / Aluminum
/ UPVC / Steel / Concrete / Others / Purchaser’s Scope)
iv.
Internal Door Shutter (including door to balcony) * (Teak wood / Jungle wood /
Aluminum / UPVC / Steel / Concrete / Glass / Others / Purchaser’s Scope)
v.
Toilet Door Frame * (Teak wood / Jungle wood / Aluminum / UPVC / Steel / Concrete
/ Others / Purchaser’s Scope)
vi.
Internal Door Shutter * (Teak wood / Jungle wood / Aluminum / UPVC / Steel /
Concrete / Glass / Others / Purchaser’s Scope)
vii.
Main area Flooring * (Cement Mortar / Cement tiles with polishing / Ceramic tiles /
Vitrified tiles / Marble / Granite / Others / Purchaser’s Scope)
viii.
Balcony Flooring * (Cement Mortar / Cement tiles with polishing / Ceramic tiles /
Vitrified tiles / Marble / Granite / Others / Purchaser’s Scope)
ix.
Toilet Flooring * (Cement Mortar / Cement tiles with polishing / Ceramic tiles / Vitrified
tiles / Marble / Granite / Others / Purchaser’s Scope)
x.
Electrical switches (Type of switches – preferred brand name may be mentioned) /
Purchaser’s Scope
xi.
Electrical fixtures (lights / fans / exhaust fans / other fixtures) / Purchaser’s Scope
286
xii.
Plumbing fixtures (Type of fixtures – preferred brand name may be mentioned) /
Purchaser’s Scope
xiii.
Sanitary fixtures (Type of fixtures – preferred brand name may be mentioned) /
Purchaser’s Scope
xiv.
Railing for balconies * (Glass / S.S / S.S & Glass / Wooden / Aluminium / M.S / Other)
xv.
Painting (type of painting for ceiling and walls) / Purchaser’s Scope
xvi.
Kitchen platform (Granite / Kadaba / others / Purchaser’s Scope)
xvii.
Kitchen Sink (S.S / Granite / Others / Purchaser’s Scope)
xviii.
3. For vertical circulation
a)
Elevators (specify the nos. and capacity of each passenger elevator and service elevator)
b)
Escalators / Travellators (specify the nos. and the connecting floors)
4. Hot water system (Solar / Solar with Heat Pump / Heat Pump) – mention the capacity of solar hot
water panels / Heat pump
5. Hot water tank capacity
6. Water pumps (Gravity flow pumps / Hydro pneumatic pumps)
7. Water reducing plumbing fixtures
8. Sewerage System and disposal arrangement
i.
Sewer disposal system (City level UGD / Septic Tank / STP / STP and
ii.
Dual pipeline system for flushing / gardening / cooling towers (in case of STP)
9. Provisions for Alternate Energy usage
i.
Solar PV Panels (5% of the estimated / consumed power load)
10. Rainwater harvesting system
i.
For consumption of rainwater
ii.
For Ground water recharging
11. Firefighting system
i.
Automatic Sprinklers
12. Green building provisions
a)
Total extent of Open Spaces (other than the coverage area)
b)
Total extent of Green Cover / Landscape area (20% of the Open Space)
c)
Total no. of trees planted (@ 1 tree for every 80 Sqm of the net extent of plot, after deducting the
portion surrendered for road widening)
13. Other Amenities / Facilities
a)
Gym
b)
Swimming Pool
c)
Shuttle Badminton Court (indoor / outdoor)
d)
Tennis Court
e)
Basket Ball Court
f)
Squash Court
g)
Table Tennis (indoor)
h) Other Club house facilities (Board games room / Coffee shop / Saloon / Massage parlour / Spa
/ Creche / Medical centre)
i)
Children’s play area with equipment
j)
Senior Citizen’s Park with equipment
k)
Video Door Phone (with / without Intercom facility)
l)
Electric fixtures of lights and fans in the premises
m) Cable TV / DTH
n) Reticulated / City Gas connection to kitchen
o)
Centralised RO plant
p)
Telephone connection
287
FORM-II
(see clause 3.10.2, 3.17.2)
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED AND TO BE ATTACHED TO THE APPLICATION FOR NOCS FROM
DIFFERENT DEPARTMENTS (as specified by the concerned department), IN ADDITION TO THE
DETAILS REQUIRED FOR BUILDING LICENCE IN FORM-I (COMMON APPLICATION FORM)
IIa.
From Department of Fire and Emergency Services
(wherever required and as specified by the department)
IIb.
From Environment Monitoring Cell (see clause 15.1.2)
(till the time of approval of the Byelaws by the GOI and permission is granted to obtain EC from the
Environment Monitoring Cell of the Authority, EC has to be obtained from MoEF&CC and CFE &
CFO from KSPCB)
(wherever required and as specified by the department)
IIc.
From Airport Authority of India
(in cases where it is required as specified in the ZR and as specified by the department)
IId.
From Coastal Regulation Zone Authority
(wherever required and as specified by the department)
IIe.
From Indian Railways
(wherever required and as specified by the department)
IIf.
From Heritage conservation committee
(as specified by the government)
IIg.
From National Monuments Authority
(as specified by the government)
IIh.
From Urban Arts Commission
(as specified by the government)
After completion of the works at site as per the conditions of NOC, the applicant shall apply for clearance
certificate / certificate of approval of works from the departments which have issued NOCs, in Form II by
filling the relevant portions of the Form (only in cases where a condition for obtaining such clearance
certificate / certificate of approval of works, is mentioned in the NOC).
288
FORM-III
(see clause 3.10.3)
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED IN THE ENDORSEMENT ISSUED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY TO THE
APPLICANT REGARDING DISCREPANCY IN THE DOCUMENTS SUBMITTED
1. Name and address of the Applicant;
2. Details of the application for building licence;
3. Document having discrepancy;
4. Details of discrepancy; and
5. Details of rectification proposed, if any
FORM-IV
(see clause 3.10.4(2))
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED IN THE ENDORSEMENT ISSUED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY TO THE
APPLICANT REGARDING DISCREPANCY IN THE PLANS AND DETAILS SUBMITTED FOR
SANCTION OF BUILDING LICENCE
1. Name and address of the Applicant;
2. Details of the application for building licence;
3. Drawings having discrepancy (specify for each drawing separately);
4. Details of discrepancy in drawings (specify for each drawing separately);
5. Details of discrepancy in the conditions for obtaining NOCs from other departments; and
6. Details of rectification proposed, if any;
FORM-V
(see clause 3.10.6(1))
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED IN THE INTIMATION LETTER OF THE LOCAL AUTHORITY TO LICENSED
PROFESSIONAL FOR SITE INSPECTION AND SUBMISSION OF SITE INSPECTION REPORT FOR
APPROVAL OF SITE PLAN
1. Name and address of the Applicant;
2. Details of the application for building licence;
3. Name and address of the Professional on record for preparing drawing;
4. Details of the building site in which building licence is applied for;
5. Copies of the relevant documents;
6. Details of the site plan and other technical drawings & details submitted;
FORM-VI
(see clause 3.10.6 (2))
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED IN THE SITE INSPECTION REPORT
1. Name and the address of the Applicant;
2. Name and the address of the professional on record for drawings;
3. Name and the address of the licensed professional or designated officer;
289
4. Particulars of the Plot;
5. Date of inspection;
6. Noting of site inspection;
7. Acknowledgement of applicant and professional on record
8. Date of submission of report;
FORM-VII
(see clause 3.10.7)
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED IN THE ENDORSEMENT ISSUED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY TO THE
APPLICANT REGARDING DISCREPANCY IN THE SITE INSPECTION REPORT
1. Name and address of the Applicant;
2. Details of the application for building licence;
3. Name and address of the Professional on record for preparing drawing;
4. Name and address of the licensed professional who has submitted the inspection report;
5. Drawings having discrepancy (specify for each drawing separately);
6. Details of discrepancy in drawings (specify for each drawing separately);
7. Details of rectification proposed, if any;
FORM-VIII
(see clause 3.15.1, 15.1.1)
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED IN THE BUILDING LICENCE
1. Name and address of Local Authority with logo
2. Type of building licence
3. Building licence no. and date
4. . Plot approval details
5. Particulars of Plot
6. Name and address of Applicant
7. Name and address of Professionals on record for drawings
8. . Name and address of Professionals on record for supervision
9. Particulars of the building (floor area, construction area, parking details, etc.,)
10. . NOCs received
11. Various fees paid
12. Licence validity period
13. Other Terms and conditions of licence
14. Seal and signature of Commissioner
290
FORM-VIIIA
(see clause 3.16.4(3))
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED IN THE COMMENCEMENT CERTIFICATE
1. Name and address of Local Authority with logo
2. Type of building licence
3. Building licence no. and date
4. Name and address of Applicant
5. Name and address of Professionals on record for drawings
6. . Name and address of Professionals on record for supervision
7. Particulars of the building (floor area, construction area, parking details, etc.,)
8. . Reference of Site Inspection Report of licensed Professional
9. Initial Validity period of Licence
10. Other Terms and conditions of licence
11. Seal and signature of Commissioner
FORM-IX
(see clause 3.16.5 (1))
DETAILS TO BE DISPLAYED OUTSIDE THE CONSTRUCTION SITE.
1. Name and address of the Applicant;
2. Details of the building licence (extent of site, existing and proposed width of roads abutting the road
and name of roads as per the records of the Authority, no. of building blocks and for each block – no.
of floors, all-round setbacks, no. of basement floors, total floor area eligible and proposed –
permissible, premium and TDR, no. of 4-wheeler and 2-wheeler parking required and provided,
including visitors parking – within the building and outside the building, both covered and open)
3. Details of Professionals on Record to prepare the drawings;
4. Details of Professionals on Record to supervise the works;
5. Site plan
6. 3D view of the building (if proposed in any advertisement of the promoter)
FORM-X
(see clause 3.16.7(3&4), 3.16.9(1), 3.17.2(10&11))
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED IN THE SITE INSPECTION REPORT OF
LICENSED
PROFESSIONAL, STATING THE DEFECTS / DEVIATIONS IN WORKS EXECUTED AT SITE.
1. Name and address of the Applicant.
2. Name and address of the professional on record for supervision
291
3. Name and address of contractor executing work
4. Name and address of licensed professional
5. Name and address of the Authority
6. Particulars of the Plot
7. Noting of site inspection (stating the defects / deviations in works executed, from the
approved plans, specifying the related drawing)
8. Acknowledgement of applicant and professional on record
9. Date of inspection
10. Date of submission of report
FORM-XI
(see clause 3.16.7(5))
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED IN THE ENDORSEMENT ISSUED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY TO THE
APPLICANT TO RECTIFY THE DEFECTS IN WORKS EXECUTED.
1. Name and address of the Applicant;
2. Details of the application for building licence;
3. Name and address of the Professional on record for supervision;
4. Name and address of the licensed professional who has submitted the inspection report;
5. Works having defects / deviations from approved drawings (specify for each drawing separately);
6. Details of discrepancy in works executed (specify for each drawing separately);
7. Details of rectification proposed, if any;
FORM-XII
(see clause 3.16.7(9&11), 3.17.2(8), 3.17.2(10))
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED IN INSPECTION REPORT OF COMMISSIONER REGARDING OBJECTIONS
RAISED BY THE APPLICANT AGAINST THE INSPECTION REPORT OF
LICENSED
PROFESSIONAL OR DEPARTMENT ISSUING NOCs.
1. Name and address of the Applicant.
2. Name and address of the professional on record for supervision
3. Name and address of contractor executing work
4. Name and address of licensed professional
5. Name and address of the Authority
6. Name and address of the Department which issued NOC (if objection is raised against such
department)
7. Particulars of the Plot
8. Noting of site inspection (stating the changes to be made by the applicant in works executed, if
applicable, or certifying the works executed)
9. Acknowledgement of applicant, professional on record and designated officer of the department (if
applicable)
292
10. Date of inspection
11. Date of submission of report
FORM-XIII
(see clause 3.17.1(1), 3.18)
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED IN COMPLETION REPORT SUBMITTED BY THE LICENSED
PROFESSIONAL, SUPERVISING THE WORKS.
1. Name and address of Local Authority with logo
2. Type of building licence issued
3. Building licence no. and date
4. Plot approval details
5. Particulars of Plot
6. Name and address of Applicant
7. Name and address of Professionals on record for drawings
8. Name and address of Professionals on record for supervision
9. Particulars of the building (floor area, construction area, parking details, etc.,) as built in site
10. Details of certification by licensed professional
11. Signature of Professional on record for supervision
FORM-XIV
(see clause 3.18)
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED IN THE OCCUPATION CERTIFICATE.
1. Name and address of Local Authority with logo
2. Type of building licence issued
3. Building licence no. and date
4. Plot approval details
5. Particulars of Plot
6. Name and address of Applicant
7. Name and address of Professionals on record for drawings
8. Name and address of Professionals on record for supervision
9. Particulars of the building (floor area, construction area, parking details, etc.,)
293
10. Approvals received from other departments which issued NOCs
11. Details of completion certificate
12. Details of certification by licensed professional
13. Other Terms and conditions of occupation
14. Date and no. of occupation certificate
15. Seal and signature of Commissioner
FORM-XV
(see clause 3.17.1(1), 7.1.6)
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED IN THE CERTIFICATE OF STRUCTURAL SAFETY IN DESIGN (to be
provided by LICENSED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER)
1. Name and the address of the Applicant;
2. Particulars of the Plot;
3. Building license sanctioned date;
4. A statement, certifying that the structure of the building has been designed as per the relevant
standards satisfying the soil investigation report submitted by Licensed Professional and for the loads
expected on the building and that the building will be structurally safe if constructed accordingly.
FORM-XV A
(see clause 7.1.7.2)
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED IN THE CERTIFICATE OF STRUCTURAL SAFETY IN CONSTRUCTION (to
be provided by Licensed Professional)
1. Name and the address of the Applicant;
2. Particulars of the Building site;
3. Building license sanctioned date;
4. A statement, certifying that the building is structurally safe and the construction is in accordance
with the specified designs and drawings provided by SER
FORM-XVI
(see clause 7.1.8.2)
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED IN THE CERTIFICATE OF QUALITY CONTROL
1. Name and the address of the Applicant;
2. Particulars of the Plot;
3. Building licence sanctioned date;
294
4. Date of inspection;
5. Details of materials and other specifications inspected
6. written statement submitted by Building Quality Auditor (BQA) affirming that the building meets the
standard specification
FORM-XVII
(see Appendix IB)
FORMAT OF THE AFFIDAVIT / UNDERTAKING BY STAKEHOLDERS
AFFIDAVIT
(from Promoter)
We, M/s. ______________________, being represented by its _______________ Mr. ____________, S/o.
_____________aged ______ years, R/o. _____________________,[Aadhar No.____________________], being registered
as Promoter of the building/s under the regulations of building byelaws of Mangaluru City Corporation (MCC),
do hereby submit an undertaking Affidavit in favour of the Commissioner, Mangaluru City Corporation (MCC)
that;
1. We have applied for Building licence for the proposed construction of ___________________ consisting of
____________________comprised in _______________ situated at ___________, Mangaluru and MCC, vide
application No.________________.
2. We hereby declare and confirm that, we have studied the Building Byelaws, Zoning Regulations of Master
Plan and all other applicable laws related to the development of land and building.
3. We hereby authorise the Commissioner, MCC to enforce the terms and conditions of Building byelaws for
issuing the Building Licence and for the sanction of building plans. In case of any violations of the terms and
conditions of the sanctioned plan granted/permitted to us vide Building Licence No. __________________ dated
__________________, to initiate demolition proceedings in respect of the violated / deviated portion without any
intimation and if any such action is initiated by the commissioner, MCC for the violations committed by us,
we have no objection of whatsoever nature.
4. We hereby undertake to indemnify and keep harmless at all the time, MCC and its Commissioner / officers
/ employees against any litigation arising in future regarding the noncompliance of requirements under the
provisions of the Building byelaws, Zoning Regulations of Master Plan and all other Acts, Rules and
Regulations for the construction of the proposed buildings, as applicable and all other conditions laid down
while granting development permission and also towards the cost that will be incurred for the same by MCC
or its representatives.
5. We hereby further declare and confirm that in case the above information provided by us not to be true, we
shall be held personally responsible and be liable for punishment under the provisions of applicable Acts.
All the above is true.
295
DEPONENT
Solemnly affirmed and signed before me on this ______day of September 2023 at
___________
AFFIDAVIT
(From Professionals)
I,
Mr.
____________,
S/o.
_____________aged
______
years,
R/o.
_____________________,[Aadhar
No.____________________], being registered as Architect / Consulting Engineer under the regulations of building
byelaws of Mangaluru City Corporation (MCC), do hereby submit an undertaking Affidavit in favour of the
Commissioner, Mangaluru City Corporation (MCC) that;
1. I have been appointed as an Architect / a Consulting Engineer for the proposed construction of the building
on R.S._____________ at, __________Village of Mangaluru City Corporation and the Owner has applied for
Building
licence
for
the
proposed
construction
of
___________________
consisting
of
____________________comprised in _______________ situated at ___________, Mangaluru and MCC, vide
application No.________________.
2. We hereby declare and confirm that, we have studied the Building Byelaws, Zoning Regulations of Master
Plan and all other applicable laws related to the development of land and building.
3. We hereby authorise the Commissioner, MCC to enforce the terms and conditions of Building byelaws for
issuing the Building Licence and for the sanction of building plans. In case of any violations of the terms and
conditions of the sanctioned plan granted/permitted to us vide Building Licence No. __________________ dated
__________________, to initiate demolition proceedings in respect of the violated / deviated portion without any
intimation and if any such action is initiated by the commissioner, MCC for the violations committed by us,
we have no objection of whatsoever nature.
4. We hereby undertake to indemnify and keep harmless at all the time, MCC and its Commissioner / officers
/ employees against any litigation arising in future regarding the noncompliance of requirements under the
provisions of the Building byelaws, Zoning Regulations of Master Plan and all other Acts, Rules and
Regulations for the construction of the proposed buildings, as applicable and all other conditions laid down
while granting development permission and also towards the cost that will be incurred for the same by MCC
or its representatives.
5. We hereby further declare and confirm that in case the above information provided by us not to be true, we
shall be held personally responsible and be liable for punishment under the provisions of applicable Acts.
All the above is true.
DEPONENT
296
Solemnly affirmed and signed before me on this ______day of September 2023 at
___________
FORM-XVIII
DETAILS TO BE CONTAINED IN THE APPLICATION FOR REGISTRATION OF PROFESSIONAL (PoR for
Drawing & Supervision and licensed Professional
(as specified by the Authority)
FORM-XIX
FORMAT OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER / PROMOTER AND PROFESSIONAL ON RECORD (for
Drawing & Supervision)
(as specified by the Authority)
FORM-XX
FORMAT OF LETTER OF CONSENT FROM PROFESSIONAL ON RECORD (for Drawing & Supervision)
(as specified by the Authority)
FORM - XXI
SPECIFICATIONS OF COMPONENTS OF BUILDING
The minimum specifications of the various components in different types of buildings shall be
specified along with the application for building licence, selected from the list mentioned herebelow
or specified separately.
Sl.
No.
Component of Building
Standard Specifications
Specification
for
the
building
1.
Foundation
Masonry / RCC / Others
2.
Superstructure
Fully RCC / Fully Masonry / RCC columns and
Masonry infill / others
3.
Roof
Tiles / RCC / Others
4.
Main Door Frame
Teak wood / Jungle wood / Aluminium / UPVC /
Steel / Concrete / Others
5.
Inside Door Frame
6.
Toilet Door Frame
7.
Main Door Shutter
8.
Inside Door Shutter
9.
Toilet Door Shutter
10.
Window Frame
11.
Window Shutter
12.
Flooring for common
areas*
13.
Flooring
for
specific
premises*
14.
Flooring for common
toilets *
297
15.
Flooring for toilets in
specific areas*
16.
Wall
cladding
for
common toilets*
17.
Wall cladding for toilets
in specific premises*
18.
Wall cladding for kitchen
19.
Wall cladding for other
areas (specify areas) *
Plumbing Fittings for
common toilets*
Sanitary
fittings
for
common toilets*
Plumbing Fittings for
toilets in specific areas*
Sanitary
fittings
for
toilets in specific areas*
Ceiling painting in Car
Parking areas
Ceiling
painting
in
Common areas
Ceiling
painting
in
Specific areas
wall painting in Car
Parking areas
wall painting in Common
areas
wall painting in Specific
areas
Yard Pavement works
Lift
Transformer
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable, details to
be annexed)
Generator
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable, details to
be annexed)
Water Source
Sewerage System
Fire Fighting System
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable, details of
NOC)
Green cover and tree
plantation
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable, details to
be annexed)
Rainwater
harvesting
system
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable, details to
be annexed)
Low water consumption
plumbing fixtures
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable, details to
be annexed)
Wastewater
treatment
and reuse
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable, details to
be annexed)
Reduction of Hardscape
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable, details to
be annexed)
Solar
water
heating
system
Provided (if provided, details to the annexed / Not
provided (if not provided, details of alternate hot
water system provided and the details of additional
PV panels provided have to be specified and
annexed)
298
Solar Photovoltaic panels
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable, details to
be annexed)
Low energy consumption
electrical fixtures
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable, details to
be annexed)
Energy
efficiency
in
HVAC systems
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable, details to
be annexed)
Lighting
of
common
areas by LED devices
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable, details to
be annexed)
Solid waste management
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable, details to
be annexed)
Compliance with ECBC
norms
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable, details to
be annexed)
Construction
&
demolition
waste
management
Not Applicable / Applicable (if applicable, details to
be annexed)
Additional
Specifications**
Specification has to be specified for the respective
component
Note: 1. In case of ‘others’, the specification has to be clearly mentioned.
2. ‘*’ if specifications are different for different areas of the building, details have to be specified
separately.
3. ‘**’ in case of additional specifications for common areas of the building or specific premises,
details have to be specified separately.
( Ravichandra Naik, K.A.S )
Commissioner
Mangaluru City Corporation
ªÀÄÄzÀæPÀgÀÄ ºÁUÀÆ ¥ÀæPÁ±ÀPÀgÀÄ : ¸ÀAPÀ®£Á¢üPÁjUÀ¼ÀÄ, PÀ£ÁðlPÀ gÁdå¥ÀvÀæ, ¸ÀPÁðj «¨sÁVÃAiÀÄ ªÀÄÄzÀæuÁ®AiÀÄ, ªÉÄʸÀÆgÀÄ.
R.N.I. No. KARBIL/2001/47147 POSTAL REGN. No. RNP/KA/BGS/2202/2017-19
Licensed to post without prepayment WPP No. 297
VIJAY NELAMANGALA
MUNIDALAPPA
Digitally signed by VIJAY NELAMANGALA MUNIDALAPPA
DN: c=IN, o=E-PROCUREMENT CELL CEG,
2.5.4.20=588b7cb3fea32bf043f61231865669529a569e29a3f077a76878b32da
7621141, postalCode=560001, st=Karnataka,
serialNumber=f89f88df29205bfdf422120f4c1e04f3323d5c514a0b37a32da5a4
09b8c06019, cn=VIJAY NELAMANGALA MUNIDALAPPA
Date: 2025.03.18 17:58:42 +05'30'